JP7061554B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in Patent Document 1, information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, is notified to the player so that the winning combination determined is not missed. The gaming machine is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine having an AT function, since the gaming during AT (specific gaming state) is a gaming simply waiting for navigation, there is a problem that the gaming during AT becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying games in a specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (E.g., AT), and a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined gaming state, and in each game of the specific gaming state, game information (for example, for example). Numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (for example, the winning combination, the number of AT stocks, the number of remaining games of AT, etc.). A numerical calculation means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of calculating the above, and when a predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination in the specific gaming state, a notification effect capable of notifying predetermined information regarding a stop operation can be executed. When the means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means exceed the first threshold value, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state is changed (for example, exceeds 768 pt). And black BAR is invalidated, if it is less than 768pt, black BAR is invalidated by lottery, other invalid lottery is performed according to points, special zone stock lottery etc. is invalidated, etc.) Possible extension When the information changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means exceed the second threshold value, the information of the stop operation notified in the notification effect can be changed by the notification content changing means (for example). For example, the main control circuit 91) is further provided with an extension control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of executing a specific process relating to the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state in the specific gaming state. , The extension information changing means can execute an invalid lottery for determining whether or not to invalidate the specific process by the extension control means according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state changes according to the numerical information regarding the amount of gaming value that can be given in the specific gaming state, and thus the extension information is changed during the specific gaming state. The game will be diversified and the interest of the game will be improved. Since the numerical information is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated every game, and the game playability can be further diversified.

According to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the games in a specific game state.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the lighting timing of the state indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of the winning of the transition lottery to a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of each gaming state which the pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and the transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ when the transition lottery to the ART game state is performed with the probability that is uniquely determined. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the limit game number in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit processing of the specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the signal output timing to the external device in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the method of saving the number of times of navigation when the specific section of the number of times of navigation is executed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the production example in the case of managing the lip navigator and the bell navigator individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of setting change in the said pachislot machine. It is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process during MB operation in the ball ejection state. It is a figure which shows the summary of the ball ejection state and the game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_ SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified number of games is reached. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_SCZ lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which usually is advantageous_the end of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in "ART" in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART_ART mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_normal addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of MB operation_ART games. It is a figure which shows ART_history type lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_addition special zone lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_initial high accuracy lottery table. It is a figure which shows the ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the common | upper rank addition game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_last freeze lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_end advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 1. FIG. It is a figure for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section of the specification example 1 and the embodiment 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of an advantageous section which concerns on specification example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 2. FIG. As the third embodiment, it is a figure for demonstrating after the power is turned on when there is no setting change, and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of progress games which are usually advantageous and a privilege. It is a figure which shows the method of the history lottery during ART. It is a figure which shows another example of the history lottery in ART. It is a figure which shows the addition notification method in ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage in ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage in ART. It is a figure which shows the ending control during ART. It is a transition flow of the game state which concerns on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state of the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp which concerns on the modification of another embodiment in a list. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the privilege at the time of ART transition. It is a figure which shows the re-recognition of a state reset. It is a figure which shows the arbitrary reset of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the game number ceiling using an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the playability using an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the playability by the setting difference no bonus in a normal section. It is a figure which shows another example of the transition lottery method to an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table of the advantageous section used in the said alternative example. It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table of the advantageous section used in the said alternative example. It is a figure which shows the calculation method of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows another composition example of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows another example of the advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lighting timing of an advantageous section lamp. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter. It is a figure which shows the adjustment striking method of the number limiter. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a figure which shows the summary of the ball ejection state and the game state in a list. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a lottery type. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a navigation type. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation control of 3 choices. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation control of 3 choices. It is a figure which shows the flow of a game in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the outline of the history lottery. It is a figure which shows the outline of the history lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the control using an AT point. It is a figure which shows the management method of AT point. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_CZ lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_history lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_ceiling benefit lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_CZ type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone preparation_specialization zone start lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the lottery table which adds the number of games. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the lottery table which adds the number of games. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the lottery table which adds the number of games. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the lottery table which adds the number of games. It is a figure which shows the special zone_special zone end lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_initial AT mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_AT mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_icon type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table in AT_AT. It is a figure which shows the AT_history lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_final addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_scenario lottery table in AT. It is a figure which shows the CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table in AT. It is a figure which shows the common_specialized zone type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_lottery invalid lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common | lock occurrence lottery table at the time of stock. It is a figure for demonstrating AT point control. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a figure which shows the summary of the ball ejection state and the game state in a list. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a lottery type. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a navigation type. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the next game transition lottery table at the time of normal_bonus. It is a figure which shows the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the bonus lottery table in CZ_CZ. It is a figure which shows the next game transition lottery table at the time of CZ_bonus. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table at the time of CZ_CZ. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in BIG and CZ. It is a figure which shows the BIG_point addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table at the time of reaching BIG_S rank. It is a figure which shows the REG_ promotion lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect control at the end of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a bell. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a bell. It is a figure for demonstrating stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating lamp control. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection method of an illegal setting change. It is a figure for demonstrating the function of the MAX bet button.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, it is not limited to gaming machines that pay out gaming media, but is applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media such as gaming balls and grant benefits as electronic data such as points earned when predetermined granting conditions are met. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the function of increasing the replay probability higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT is operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined winning probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). To determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "loss". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31, described later, motor drive circuit described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R described later) control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. conduct.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the reel stop control means has determined an internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning, the combination of the symbols is the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line") using the above-mentioned specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible along the above).

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the valid line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the first stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. It will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is played by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment used for games (eg, reels, etc.). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member for fixing the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 62a has a display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. In the display window 4, a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed by the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is an effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a symbol string as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. A medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 4) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting a medal to play a game) are referred to as "insertion operation".

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). Further, the information display 14 has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Is provided with a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, the player is notified of the information of the necessary stop operation. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, "1" is displayed when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. , "2nd" is displayed when notifying the push order "2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3C in the middle)", and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. (To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later in FIG. 48.

As shown in FIG. 4 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. Information on the stop operation may be notified on the display unit 100 described above.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of the medal acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilting operation to start variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the range of the angle of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's pressing operation. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are liquid crystal displays and organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, the touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R that produce sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid out medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is displayed. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 4 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has a microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the intended use.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, the input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and the like. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol changing means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 has reached the number of medals to be paid out. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 is input with signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is operated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachi-slot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal payout or the replay, and is output at the time of the medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of the replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons, switches, and information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, information can be transmitted between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one-way communication.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal accepted by the medal slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 is pressed by the player. Further, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button is pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the effective line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, the MAX bet switch 11S, and the 1-bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 is pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, 107R for displaying the acceptance status thereof, and the number of medals and the advantageous stop operation are unique. Is connected to the information display 14 (instruction monitor) that notifies the user.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 5 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, an effect random value is extracted, and an effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by 9R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the lamp data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, in the sub-control board 72, an accessory relay board (not shown) is connected to the display unit 100, and the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. .. For example, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 with various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and is a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). The 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of playing state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the winning / non-operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the on RT gaming state flag as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the main control board 71, (1) when the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state, the game changes from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) a bell spilled eye is displayed before 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spillage is determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bell (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, the RT3 transition rip is a push order determined for each type of RT3 rip when the RT3 rip (F_RT3 rip_1st, F_RT3 rip_213, F_RT3 rip_231, F_RT3 rip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, the RT4 transition rip is a push order determined for each type of RT4 rip when the RT4 rip (F_RT4 rip_123, F_RT4 rip_132, F_RT4 rip_2nd, F_RT4 rip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on the winning / non-operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game status is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between a general gaming state and an ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART gaming state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The general game state is a game state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 game states. As shown in FIG. 7, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal game state is changed to the CZ, and the CZ is changed to the ART game state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state shifts to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the CZ will shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in the CZ, a lottery for transition to ART is performed, and (B) if the shift lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this. When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 6, since the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. not. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, ART preparation is in progress until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and during this ART preparation, the stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is notified.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 7, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out) during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, a lottery for shifting to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for shifting is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to CT. Further, the continuation period of the normal ART is managed, and (E) when the continuation period ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed by the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during normal ART and the difference number, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 37).

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) shift to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (G) If the lottery for shifting is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) has transitioned to the bonus state, the main control board 71 will change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 48.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol position "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", and "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected, and the reel 3L is assigned. A correspondence relationship is defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4 to 10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. In the symbol combination table, a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and a combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the privilege (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which the data of the combination of the corresponding symbols is stored and the "data (bits corresponding to the combination of the symbols in the 1-byte data) stored in the storage area". Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 11, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table shows the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 9, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, the combination names "R_RT transition eye A_01" to "R_RT transition eye B_02" are bell spilled eyes. When the bell spilled eye is displayed along the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

Further, the combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

Further, the combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the regame operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

The combination name "C_RT3 rip_01" is an RT3 transition rip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the regame operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

Further, the combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the regame operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

Further, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chililip D_01" are chililip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the symbol “upper chili 1” and the symbol “lower chili” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game is activated.

Of the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the corresponding one). This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye rips. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the 9th in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals will be paid out. In addition, among the 9th appearances in the BB, the combination of the symbols excluding the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" is 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. I may call it.

Further, the combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed in any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first medal is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 13 is an internal lottery table referenced in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 14 is an internal lottery table referenced in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random random values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities of the replays determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 gaming state, specific control (described later). (Flag conversion) is performed, but this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip AD" is not determined as an internal winning combination by itself. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to "F_reach eye lip A to D" is possible. (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is a state between flags, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 game state shown in FIG. 14, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
15 to 20 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 16 to 22 are shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 16 to 22, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles correspond to the combinations. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIGS. 21 and 22 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during the non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in push order" in FIG. 21 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the "push order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART gaming state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the combination means that the correct push order is that the first stop operation is for the reel 3L on the left, and the end "2nd" of the name of the combination is. The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 21, the combination “F_chililip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 15 of the chili lip (see FIG. 9). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 9) are shown in FIGS. 15 to 20. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown will be displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, the combination “F_chili lip” cannot display the triple chili lip (“C_ chili lip D_01” to “C_1 certain chili lip D_01”), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip (“C_ chili lip”) cannot be displayed. It can be seen that only "A_01", "C_chililip B_01", and "C_chililip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 9) is selected. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 15 to 9 of the replay (see FIG. 9) are shown. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 20 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

Further, the combinations "F_reach eye rip A" to "F_reach eye rip D" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye rip (reach eye rip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 9) is performed. 9), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation is carried out. In the embodiment, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the replays (see FIG. 9) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. Further, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the replay (see FIG. 9). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 9) is displayed. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the push order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the push order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 11). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 9) or a first roll (see FIGS. 11 and 12) is displayed.

Further, for the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the bells (see FIG. 11) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combination "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the cacti (see FIG. 12) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 12) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 12) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) is shown during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") is indicated. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 22, "◯" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chililip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chililip" in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. You may do it.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 21 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled stitch or the first roll displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and one of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for the winning role>
In the above, the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described. Next, a data table used when performing various lottery in a general gaming state or an ART gaming state will be described. However, in the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 23 (A), in the following, the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are called the role "BB", and the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are called the role "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_cactus 1" and "F_cactus 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong". "Chilli 1" and "F_strong chili 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

Further, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called the combination "triple chili lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called "replay" when the flag conversion lottery is not won. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called "replay" when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" is independently used as an internal winning role during the RT4 game state. Once determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 21, for the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is used. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special privilege is displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachi-slot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the winning combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given according to the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the opportunity to make the winning probability of the winning different (the opportunity to shift to the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of the given symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of appearance of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance of.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "three consecutive" to win the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination. It may be referred to as "converting to" chili lip "(or simply converting to" triple chili lip "), and when the roles" F_reach eye lip A "to" F_reach eye lip D "are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery is called converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 shifts from the normal gaming state of the general gaming state to the CZ of the general gaming state, and then shifts from the CZ of the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, thereby changing from the general gaming state (non-ART) to the ART gaming state. The transition to is made (see Figure 7). FIG. 24A is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal game state of the general game state to the CZ of the general game state.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state wins the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 7).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone for always winning an ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ that shifts from the normal game state is drawn from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ1 and CZ2 in the general game state to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of an ART lottery based on the rank by a battle effect.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ1, the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum) is continued, and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, up to 15 games) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, if a so-called rare role is determined as an internal winning role during the battle production, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 24C is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and each game performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and even in this case, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth games has elapsed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 25 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 25A is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 25B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of bonus, etc., and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is specified, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is specified. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "less than 30%" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is specified, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the values are extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and the internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 26 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 26 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case of the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26B defines information on lottery values for winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART gaming state, the CZ pull-back lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 27 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines information on the lottery value for the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "mode 6UP_freeze occurrence" is won, a freeze occurs, the ART lottery is won, and CT is given.

<CZ2 middle point lottery table>
FIG. 28 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information for the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the points increase, and when the points increase to 10, the ART lottery is always won. In addition, "point 2UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, in the situation where the current point is "2", if "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "Point 10UP_freeze occurrence" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
29 and 30 are CZ medium ART lottery tables used for CZ medium ART lottery, and FIG. 29 (A) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. 29 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 29 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ1 and CZ2 common latter half battle), and FIG. 29 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 29 (A) defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 29B defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current points. With reference to the CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) and the CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 29C defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, it is determined. It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 30D defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery during CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 usually has an ART and a CT as an ART gaming state (see FIG. 7), and the inside of the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the transition lottery to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages from level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye" are used during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state). When any one of "Rip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 31B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 normally performs a flag conversion lottery by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state during ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbol and the "reach eye lip" symbol (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and the design of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 32 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for a flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when the first stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 32 (A) is an ART medium flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 32 (B) is an ART medium flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. be. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 32 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 32B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), in each of the ART medium flag conversion lottery tables, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be imitated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, on the main side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, the probability denominator 256 can be drawn in two stages by performing the probability denominator 256, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can do a lottery to convert the flags you have.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 33 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 33 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 33 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33A defines information on the lottery value for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 27 or the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33B defines information on a lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. Normally, the ART medium-high probability lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium and high probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (role "F_Probability Chili Lip""F_1 Probability Chili Lip" wins the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip (role "F_Reach Eye Lip"). In "A" to "F_reach eye lip D", it can be seen that the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to "low probability" in the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning). In the above explanation, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation. As will be described later, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 35 is a CT lottery table during ART that is normally used for CT lottery during ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the ART middle CT lottery table, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the range of probability denominator 256 CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high-accuracy CT" as CT. The expectation of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone) differs between "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT", and "high accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 40).

<Normal ART middle lottery table>
FIG. 36 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 37. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During the CT, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is played eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played 7 times in the same set, and if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played once more, the CT will end, but the role "3 consecutive chili lip" If you win, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the role "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT will be reset. Therefore, if the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning role, the CT will be reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip", and Table 2 has a low probability of being converted into a "reach-eye lip". Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 41 described later.

As shown in FIG. 37 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 38 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 39 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip".

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 40 is a CT middle addition lottery table used for the addition lottery to add the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 40 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "Triple Chili Lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won in the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and it is easy to determine "10 games" in the same CT. When the number of times the role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "3 consecutive chili lip" is won in the same CT is "25 times or more". , It is easy to determine "50 games" as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promote to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won "17 times or more" during the same CT, it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won "25 times or more" during the same CT, the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be added is promoted to "50 games".

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added to each game is increased according to the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "Triple Chili Lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), it is an excessive profit for the player. It is possible to prevent it from being given, and it is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

<Additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT>
FIG. 41 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT, which is used for the lottery for adding the number of sets for which a new CT is given during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 41, when the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the executed CT is completed.

In addition, the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. The new CT given to the may be included or may not be included.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 42 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game is changed to the bonus state during the general game state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 42 (B) is the case where the game is changed to the bonus state during the normal ART. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game, and FIG. 42C is a figure which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) to 42 (C), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state shifts. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 42 (A), when the game transitions from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the end of the bonus state, you will be transferred to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 42 (B), when the normal ART is changed to the normal BB, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it shifts to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state, and if it does not win, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. do. In addition, during the bonus state of transition from normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 42 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the transition to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state of transition from normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 43 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Additional lottery table for the number of ART games during the bonus>
FIG. 44 is a bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games used for the ART lottery and the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the normal BB transitioned from the general gaming state wins the ART lottery). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 45 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before shifting to the bonus state. With reference to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 45, it can be seen that, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, there is a 50% probability of winning the CT at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 46, the flow of the exceptional game during the general game state will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 basically shifts from the normal gaming state to the CZ during the general gaming state, and wins the ART lottery in the CZ to aim for the ART gaming state. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 46, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. are doing. As shown in FIG. 21, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 gaming state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so that even during the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state during the general gaming state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" can be displayed. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, a flag conversion lottery is performed and this is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip", and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 47 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
In the pachislot machine, conventionally, the information of the stop operation (pushing order, etc.) is notified in the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is the benefit of the player ( In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the interests of the player, in order to affect the so-called payout). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the type of the reel that performs the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That means that "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means "C_BB2", which is a combination of symbols consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. not. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by the player just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by the sub-control board 72, and is notified of stop operation information under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), during the preparation for ART, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". In addition, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the roles "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". Further, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". Further, the "RT4 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, if the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the combination of the "replay" symbols is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (ball output), the sub is not notified on the instruction monitor on the main side. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), when the role "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the role "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". "White 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB1" of the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" informs the role "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, the winning combination and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if the other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus and the “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination” Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the role related to the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making it possible for the main side to grasp the timing of the bonus announcement is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after the number of games is exhausted, "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the winning combination related to the bonus, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the role related to the bonus and any of "Out of place", "F_Special role 1", "F_Special role 2", and "F_Special role 3" are decided as the internal winning role. I do.

As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the winning combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the winning combination related to the bonus is not carried over, the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100 is performed. It is decided and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed while the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to give a bonus notice. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notification. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can also be grasped by the main control board 71, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

[Operation description of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 65, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 by using the program will be described.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by controlling the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 49 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 and 14) according to the current gaming state, and draws a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" or "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently subjected to the states described later in FIG. 50. Perform game control processing (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 48. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 60 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated and controlled. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 61 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and replay operation. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later in FIG. 62 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 63 and 64 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 65 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later in FIG. 51 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When the game is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal middle start process described later in FIG. 52 (S34), and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ middle start time process (S36), which will be described later in FIG. 53, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later in FIG. 57, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If it is during CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CT-during start-time process (S40), which will be described later in FIG. 58, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the BB start time process described later in FIG. 59 (S42), and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 31 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT with reference to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 38). (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set. , The ART mid-flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 32) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT mid-flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 39) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty chili lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state was accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S58), and flags. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 probability chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 probability chili lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at the start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A) (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when the CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If the CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if the CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 25 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start process is terminated.

<Processing at the start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the CZ middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate process (S72) described later in FIGS. 54 and 55, and ends the CZ intermediate start process.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S74), which will be described later in FIGS. 54 and 55, and ends CZ intermediate start processing. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) in which the expectation of winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process described later in FIG. 56 (S75), and ends the CZ middle start process.

<Processing during CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). When the main CPU 31 is the first half portion (YES), the process is transferred to S82, and when it is not the first half portion (the second half portion) (NO), the process is transferred to S91 of FIG. 55.

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 31 performs a mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 27) (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 28) and performs a point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or point) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is successful (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S86), and ends CZ1 (CZ2) processing.

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 55, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game in the second half, ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points in the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and "3" is set in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 29 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends CZ1 (CZ2) processing. .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<Processing during CZ3>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 30 (D)) (S121), and has the ART lottery been won? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is successful (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the normal start-time processing during ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 31 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142) with reference to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 35), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. Set the CT (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 34) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148) with reference to the normal ART middle-addition lottery table (FIG. 36), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or if the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S151). If the value of the ART continuous game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 normally ends the start-time processing during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then the ART end time is displayed. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is terminated.

<Processing at the start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the extra lottery table during CT (FIG. 40) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the extra lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the winner has been won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination “triple chili lip” is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 51) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination "triple chili lip" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the CT middle start processing. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination “triple chili lip”, the (NO) main CPU 31 ends the CT middle start processing.

In S162, if the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT (FIG. 41) and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the process at the start of CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the number of CT games counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start of CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start of CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the process at the start during CT.

<Processing at the start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the BB middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 44), and performs the lottery for adding the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB middle start process.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB middle start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185) and ends the BB middle start process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each information based on the rotation cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If it is determined that the valid stop button has not been pressed, the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201 (NO).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 has a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This slip piece number determination process determines the number of slip pieces specified in the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the reel stop initial setting table based on the internal winning combination. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the slip piece number determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If it is determined that the pressed stop button has not been released, the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213 (NO). On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently processes the winning determination medal payout from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 49). The number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Processing at the end of the bonus is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 45), performs a CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25 (B)) (S231), and ends the BB check process.

Further, when the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 43) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 gaming state is in progress (S241). If the RT5 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the RT5 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243). If the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 game state flag is set to ON, the RT0 game state is changed to the RT2 game state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1. The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 migration rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 migration rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eye" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 migration rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 migration rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 has the number of CT sets. It is determined whether or not is 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a normal ART in the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART end-time processing will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the CZ failure time or the ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pull-back lottery (S282) with reference to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 26 (B)), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

When the draw-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pull-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25 (B)) (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end processing.

[Operation description of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data (S302). With reference to FIG. 48, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data “4”, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub side navigation data. do. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, when the navigation data is not acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to be navigated, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. ..

If it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub-side navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub-side navigation control process. For example, in the sub CPU 81, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip". (For example, navigation data that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward) is set, and the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of "replay" Set navigation data for displaying combinations (for example, navigation data indicating a push order other than forward push). As a result, even if the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been accepted. do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen of 201 is controlled.

On the other hand, if the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes it impossible to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and displays the first sub. It controls the display screen of the device 201.

<History management process>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires game results from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination). Whether or not a role is won) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition status of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 has various features such as, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of wins for each role, and the probability of winning. It is possible to manage various game histories.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 99. The same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
The control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay board 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 73, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 440.
Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal board 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 410 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio display 422 connected to the ratio display board 421, and a changeover switch 423. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and a bonus ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio display 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and the details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the magnitude of the profit given to the player, or in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used when confirming the set value that has been set. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 450 has a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460 and the door relay terminal plate 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and an auxiliary relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub-relay board 75 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 463 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, when replaying a game, and the like. It is a board for displaying the number of medals and the like on the information display 14. Further, the LED group 471 is connected to the game operation display board 470, and the LED group 471 is, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for performing a re-game, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display board 470. Turn on.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub-relay board 75. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has speakers 9L, 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 82 and a liquid crystal relay board 480 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 82 and the liquid crystal relay board 480 are housed in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 82 is a board for managing image (video), audio, optical, and communication data for directing. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. Since the configuration of the sub-control circuit mounted on the sub-control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. 5, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), the main control circuit is mainly composed of a microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. Further, the main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As described above in FIG. 69, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ratio display 422 that displays various ratios. FIG. 71 (A) shows an example of mounting the ratio display 422, and FIG. 71 (B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 71, the ratio display 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and as will be described later in FIG. 71 (B), the upper 2 digits indicate the type of the ratio to be displayed, and the lower 2 digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1 because it is used by an administrator (a clerk of a game store or the like) to confirm whether or not the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud on the ratio display 422 itself, it is preferable that the ratio display 422 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 71 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is also shown in FIG. 71 (A-2). As shown in FIG. 71 (A-3), it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 71 (A-3), 7 segments as the ratio display 422. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Normally, a seal is attached to the main control board case, but if the ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the main control board case, the seal may impair the visibility of the ratio indicator 422. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so that there is no such thing. Further, a caulking recording sticker is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking recording sticker is a sticker on which the person in charge of the caulking opening record, the date entry field, the serial number of the main control board, and the two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a sticker of the two-dimensional code used at the time of manufacturing may be attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the arrangement is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by the sticking member such as a sticker.
Further, the front door (upper door 62a or lower) may also be used depending on the caulking member or harness assembled to the main control board, other boards in the case of a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in an overlapping manner, or other members in the housing. It is preferable to design the door 62b) so that the visibility of the ratio display is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, and by doing so, the efficiency of the manager's confirmation work of the ratio display is improved.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the ratio display 422 shows the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and when displaying the continuous character ratio between the latest 6000 games. , "= R" is displayed in the upper two digits, and when displaying the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, "= b" is displayed in the upper two digits, and the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed. In this case, "Ar" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "Ab" is displayed in the upper two digits when the cumulative bonus ratio is displayed. Further, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED.

Here, the "specific section ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of games played in a game state advantageous to the player to the number of games played in all the game states (that is, the total number of games played). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state in addition to the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all the game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in the game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, the specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

In addition, the "continuous bonus ratio" is related to the first-class special bonus or the first-class special bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of payouts). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out while the continuous accessory actuating device is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of medals paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out while the continuous bonus actuating device according to the above is in operation, is counted, and the ratio of continuous bonuses is calculated by the following formula.
Percentage of consecutive characters = Number of payouts during the first specific game / Total number of payouts x 100

In addition, the "feature ratio" is the total number of medals paid out while any of the bonuses is in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of payouts). It refers to the ratio of occupancy. In addition, any of the characters is a type 1 special character, a character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a character continuous operation related to the type 2 special character. A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since the player is in an advantageous state during the ART gaming state and the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and medals paid out during operation of any of the accessories. The number of medals to be paid out during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of medals, is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Character ratio = Number of payouts during the second specified game / Total number of payouts x 100

Further, "cumulative" means the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the latest 6000 games" means the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of "cumulative", the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of "between the latest 6000 games", The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured so that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by power failure. Specifically, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power failure, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of recovery. As a result, data can be continuously accumulated from the time of installation even in the case of general operation in which the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened.

Further, the right of the replay accompanying the winning of the replay can be considered as the payout of the same number of medals as the medals used for the game, or can be considered as the payout of 0 medals. In the above-mentioned calculation of the ratio, the calculation result may differ between the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals and the calculation method B in which the right to replay is not considered to be the payout of medals. For example, in the calculation of the ratio to the total number of medals paid out (total number of payouts) in all game states, such as the ratio of continuous bonuses and the percentage of bonuses, the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals. Then, the total number of payouts will increase by the number of times the replay wins, and as a result, the ratio will decrease. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right of replay is not considered as the payout of medals, the winning of the replay does not affect the total number of payouts, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Since the difference between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of times the replay wins increases, it increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, in the ratio display 422, the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B may be displayed in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, if there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both at the same time.
Further, when displaying the continuous character ratio or the character ratio on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed in the same manner. good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content to be displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary, for example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and depending on the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 69). The various ratios may be switched manually, or the various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of the ratio display (when an error occurs))
Pachislot machines have rules in the industry so as not to increase gambling unnecessarily. For example, the ratio of the game state that is advantageous to the player to all the games does not become too high, and By paying out more than a predetermined number of medals not only during the advantageous gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, the base (so-called coin holding) at the normal time is lowered so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the normal gaming state. There are regulations such as not to go too far. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 make it possible to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the regulation value due to the continuous establishment of accidental bonuses, etc., from a statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display as the number of games increases is in line with the regulation. It converges in a way that approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 games, if a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that the fraudulent activity has been performed. In addition, when a value having a large deviation from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that a fraudulent act has been performed on that specific table, such as hanging an unauthorized board. In this way, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the manager can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or higher than the specified values set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is different depending on the case and the case where the value is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display 422 blinks the ratio when it is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights and displays the ratio when it is less than the specified value. As a result, the manager can grasp at a glance whether or not the various ratios satisfy the specified values.

In addition, if there is a ratio that is equal to or higher than the specified value, it may be notified to an external device (for example, a hall computer) to that effect (for example, a notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). good. Specifically, when the ratio of the calculated ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value, the main control board 71 notifies the external device to that effect via the external centralized terminal board 73. If the output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 are limited, the output pins currently used as error output are used to notify the external device (that is, error output). May be good.

It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is an immediate fraudulent act. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality with a strong suspicion of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, it is specified. An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, the abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud are, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, and a role that has not been won internally. There are cases such as a winning abnormality in which the symbol related to the above is displayed on the valid line, a case where a payout is detected at a timing when the payout cannot be originally made, and a case where the set value shows a value other than 6 steps. Abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, hopper empty where the medals of the hopper device 40 run out, detection of medal clogging at the payout exit of the hopper device 40, medal overflow that fills the medal auxiliary storage, and medals. A door caused by the hall clerk opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) for medal replenishment, etc. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected when an opening error or medal replenishment is performed.

By giving a predetermined notification to the external device when the ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value in this way, the administrator can perform various types without looking at the ratio display 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of the ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachi-slot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move greatly up and down. Therefore, the display modes of various ratios may be different until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of the calculated ratio. For example, the cumulative percentage is displayed in a different mode (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches "17,500", and after the total number of games reaches "17,500", it is displayed. While it is displayed in a normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a different mode until the total number of games reaches "6000", and the total number of games is displayed. After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if the various ratios are equal to or higher than the specified value. Even in this case, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachi-slot machine does not have a ratio display, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachi-slot machine in the installation example of the ratio display shown in FIG. 71 (A). Therefore, the display provided in the existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of medals stored (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachi-slot machine, a display unit (described later) that displays the type of ratio to be displayed on the display unit that displays the number of credits (credit lamp 145 described later) and displays the number of payouts. The display of the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

Although the special operation is optional, it is preferably an operation using a switch provided inside the housing 60. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the information display 14 including the instruction monitor in which the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation will be described.
As shown in FIG. 72, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, and the like. It is configured to include a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 informs the player that a medal can be inserted by lighting (or blinking (hereinafter omitted)), and the start lamp 142 lights up to play with the operation of the start lever 6. The replay lamp 143 informs the player that the medal can be automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game by turning on the replay lamp 143. Further, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals bet by turning on the lamp, and the credit lamp 145 turns on the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 (number of credits). Is reported to the player, and the payout number lamp 146 is turned on to notify the player of the number of medals paid out (the number of payouts) as a result of the game.

Further, the instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status display 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and is turned on in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, so that the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player. Further, the state display 147b is turned on to notify the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. ..
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is turned on when the gaming state favorable to the player continues for a long period of time. If the playing state that is advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that the gambling will be agitated. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the continuation period of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is terminated by this limit processing, and notifies the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may blink when the limit processing is about to be activated, and may be turned on when the limit processing is actually performed.
The details of the limit processing will be described later in FIGS. 79 and 80.

The insert lamps 141 to the limit lamps 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to inform the player of various information related to the game.

<Status indicator>
Next, the state display 147b provided in the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting timing pattern of the status display 147b.
In FIG. 73, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. It is an operation time, timing T5 is a third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is a time when all reels of the game are stopped, timing T7 is a time of the end of the game, and timing T8 is a start of the next game. It's time.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section (for example, the ART game state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game (timing T1) that wins the transition lottery to a specific section. Further, in the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the transition lottery to the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the transition lottery to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on during the first stop operation (timing T3) of the game, and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is turned on when all reels of the game won in the transition lottery to a specific section are stopped (timing T6). The 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game (timing T7) that wins the transition lottery to the specific section.

The lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 73 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status display 147b may be turned on during the game in which the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and the timing thereof may be set. Is optional.

By turning on the status indicator 147b during the game in which the lottery for transition to the specific section is won in this way, the player can grasp that the lottery for transition to the specific section has been won, so that the subsequent game can be performed. It is suitable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence or absence of the winning was announced only by turning on / off one lamp, the presence or absence of the winning can be immediately known, but the player feels that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk that the interest in other productions on the liquid crystal display device or the like will be lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery for transition to a specific section has been won is notified during the game without becoming monotonous by the method shown below.

(Ingenuity for status display 1)
72 (B) and 72 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72B has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i" that are turned on, blinked, and turned off, respectively, based on a pattern of turning on, blinking, and turning off the plurality of lamps. , Inform that you have won the transition lottery to a specific section.

As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, "a", "c", "d", "h", "i" are lit). If not, multiple lamps will light up in a pattern other than this particular pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to give a deeper notification than when one lamp simply lights up to notify the winning. For example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is memorized, the detection of the winning becomes faster. It is possible to realize such playability.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of winning of the transition lottery may be reported based on the number of lamps that are lit, instead of reporting based on the lighting pattern. For example, if the transition lottery is won, a specific number of lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and if the transition lottery is not won, a number other than the specific number among the plurality of lamps is lit. The lamp may be turned on. Further, for example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number or more (or a specific number or less) of the lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a plurality of lamps are lit. The number of lamps of less than a specific number (or more than a specific number) may be turned on.

Further, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery by using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for notifying the winning of the transition lottery is "all lamps are lit", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are lit according to (when all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery according to the progress of the game.

(Ingenuity for status display 2)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C) is similar to the status indicator 147b of FIG. 72 (B) in that each has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinked, and turned off, but the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (B) is shown in FIG. The state display 147b is different in that the plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the state display 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C) has a meaning as a whole. That is, in the state display 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the model name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the character name used as the motif of the pachi-slot machine 1 or the manufacturer, the shape of the character, and the like are used. Characters and shapes that you want to impress the player are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, the characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly memorized by the player, which leads to improvement of brand power.

Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the transition lottery has been won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery.

Note that some pachi-slot machines may have a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as specific sections, and may shift to any specific section based on the result of the shift lottery. For example, in a pachi-slot machine having an ART game state and a CZ, a pachi-slot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or the CZ based on the result of the transition lottery, or an ART game state and an initial game in which the initial number of games is 50 games. A pachi-slot machine or the like having an ART game state in which the number of games is 100 and shifting the game state to the ART game state of the initial number of games determined by the transition lottery can be considered.

Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-mentioned devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. You may let it. As an example, when the number of initial games is 50 games and the ART game state is won, the state indicator 147b is lit in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial number of games is 100 games and the ART game state is won. , The status indicator 147b may be lit with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

As a result, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern of the status display 147b. For the player, as the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

On the contrary, regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery, a plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning specific section, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning specific section from the lighting pattern. Depending on the skilled player, the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps may be memorized. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous for the player (for example, a long ART game state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not so advantageous for the player (for example, an ART game state that ends in one game) are defined. By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the winning specific section.

Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the lumbar panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a design that is generally introduced does not display the content of the lighting pattern, but is used for the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with many beginners such as low ball rental stores. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchasing store may be able to order the desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer base. This makes it possible to report or not report the content of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game store.

Since the design change of the waist panel 25 does not require a test by a testing institution and the burden of manufacturing and development costs is not large, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. Can be and is suitable. It should be noted that instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, it may be possible to switch between reporting and not reporting the content of the lighting pattern by a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaceable. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Ingenuity for status display 3)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of winning from being known by whether or not one lamp is lit, the status indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The position that is difficult to see may be, for example, an arbitrary place such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, or the back of the medal insertion slot 22. Further, the status indicator 147b is covered with an opaque cover so that the status indicator 147b can be visually recognized only from the hole (peephole) formed in the cover, thereby making the status indicator 147b difficult to see. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a parking lot use service ticket clip may be provided on the pachi-slot machine 1, and a status display 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Ingenuity for status display 4)
Also, if the status indicator 147b that informs the success or failure of the transition lottery to a specific section is in the same position, it will be immediately known if you look only at that location, so even if you switch the position of the status indicator 147b. good. As a specific method, it is conceivable to give at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of a plurality of places of the pachi-slot machine 1 a function of a status indicator 147b, and to make a different lamp for notifying the success or failure of the transition lottery every hour. Will be. As a result, for example, at a certain timing, the lamp at the upper right portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lamp at the lower left portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success or failure of the transition lottery only from the lighting pattern of the status display 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from playability)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 74, a device from the playability regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for transition to a specific section is won will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are provided as push order roles, and nine medals are paid out when the push order is correct (bell's). The combination of symbols is displayed), and 0 or 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect (the combination of bell spilled or 1st symbol is displayed). Then, in the ART gaming state, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order according to the push order combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART game state, by playing the game according to the notification, a number of medals (for example, 9 medals) exceeding the medals used for the game (for example, 3 medals) will be paid out.

As a device from the playability, first, a push order role is further provided in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 74, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), push order combinations such as "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _1st", "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _2nd", and "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination_3rd" are provided. For "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination 3rd", when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the first pattern is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the order of pressing is not correct. When the answer is correct, the combination of out-of-order symbols is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order combination does not have to increase the number of medals even when the push order is correct, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used for the game when the push order is correct is paid out. It suffices if the number of medals (fourth quantity) smaller than the number (third quantity) is paid out when the push order is incorrect, or no medals are paid out (that is, zero).

Further, as a device from the viewpoint of game playability, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all push order combinations ("F_3 choice 1-sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd" and "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") are determined as internal winning roles. The correct answer is given when the ART game state that notifies the correct push order when the answer is made, and when "F_3 choice 1 piece combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1 piece role_3rd" among the push order roles are determined as the internal winning combination. When the push order is notified and "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-card combination ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

Then, as a device from the game property, the state display 147b is turned on regardless of whether the game state is the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state. It should be noted that the lighting pattern of the state display 147b may be different depending on the ART gaming state and the single-card combination ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

With such a device, the state display 147b can notify that the current game state is the game state for notifying the push order, but the state display 147b alone is truly advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the player is in the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state.

The transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to a specific section, but the transition to the single-card combination ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous for the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games other than the ART game state are set as the one-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state. During this ART game state, a 3-choice 1-card combination ("F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination_3rd") and a 3-choice bell ("F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd") Regardless of which of the above is decided as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games before winning the lottery for transition to the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. In this one-card combination ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination (first game), the correct push order is notified, while the three-choice bell is the internal winning combination. In the game determined as a role (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, when all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state, the state display 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the transition lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status display 147b.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games other than the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the other games are set. , It is a state (normal) that is neither an ART game state nor a single-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games before winning the lottery for transition to the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is selected as the 1-card combination ART. The game state is set, and the other games are set to the normal game state. Specifically, since the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first game, the game state of this first game is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-card combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal game state and the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, even if only the game in which the three-choice one-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the one-card combination ART game state, the status indicator 147b has three choices. In a game in which one card combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the light is turned on regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won, so that the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to know that the transition lottery has been won by itself. Further, even if the single-card combination ART game state is used, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, if the single-card combination ART game state is always set as shown in FIG. 74 (B), There is a risk that the notification game state in which the notification of the push order is performed will continue for a long period of time, and the gambling of the game will be unnecessarily enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), by setting only the game in which the three-choice one-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination, the one-card combination ART game state is set as the notification game. The period of the state can be limited, and the gambling can be prevented from increasing unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, the basic game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that FIG. 75 shows only the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification, and omits the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of the bonus operation.

As shown in FIG. 75, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that notifies the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state during the general gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, the general game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 7).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
From the normal section to the specific section, the transition is made by winning the lottery for the transition to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the set values. "Information with no difference in set values" means a combination determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned combination), or in all set values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols with no setting difference).

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to a specific section is performed, and the combination with a setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed, and a combination of symbols having a setting difference is displayed. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed.

In addition, the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and complete probability that does not change at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not change at all" means a probability that does not change at least based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

By performing the transition lottery based on "information with no difference in the set value" with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be used for a specific section. The degree of expectation regarding migration can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transition lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for transition to a specific section is shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 77 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 77 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

As in the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the internal lottery table defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the winning combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference combination in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and a set unquestioned combination in which the lottery value is the same regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the combination "F_BB1", "F_maintenance lip A", etc. are setting difference combinations in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and the combination "F_sabo 1", "F_chili lip", "F_BB1 + F_reach eye lip". , Etc. are set unquestioned roles with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the set difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. It should be noted that not performing the transition lottery to a specific section includes not performing the transition lottery itself and also including performing the transition lottery but always being unwinning. In addition, the transition lottery to a specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting unquestioned role that performs the transition lottery and the setting unquestioned combination that does not perform the transition lottery are not required. It may be possible to provide a role.

Subsequently, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 77 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery for each set unquestioned combination determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transfer lottery to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and complete probability that does not change at all, the lottery value information specified in the transition lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. The value.

It should be noted that the "complete probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may further include the probability that is uniquely determined for "information with no difference in the set value". In recent pachislot machines, there may be a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, in any gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, when the setting is unquestioned, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

(How to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, when the transition lottery is performed with the probability uniquely determined in this way, the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the game state, so that the transition lottery is performed as in the CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state in which it is easy to shift to the ART game state, it is necessary to take some measures. Subsequently, an example of a method for realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

FIG. 78 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, it is decided to notify the correct push order of the push order combination with no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination during the CZ, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed at the time of the push order combination winning with no setting difference. It will be done based on the combination of displayed symbols. Specifically, as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 is performed. When the combination of the symbols on the reels is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is not performed.

Comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of the push order combination is the same, but since the correct push order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. On the contrary, since the correct pressing order is notified during CZ, it is easy to display the combination of symbols to which the transition lottery will be performed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance) that makes it easy to shift to the ART gaming state. Zone) can be realized.

Further, FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination (replay) related to the re-game can be changed by shifting the RT game state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the roles (replays) related to the re-game different in the RT game state, the ART game is performed between one RT game state and another RT game state. Transition to state The frequency with which lottery is performed can be different.

Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the combination “F_Chillilip” is a setting-unquestioned combination with no setting difference, and as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), this combination. When "F_Chillilip" is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), although there is no setting difference in the combination “F_chili lip”, the winning probability differs depending on the RT gaming state, and the winning probability differs depending on the RT gaming state, and the winning probability differs in the RT2 gaming state than in the RT1 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning role with a high probability.

Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of the transition lottery is higher than in the RT1 gaming state, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ is easy to shift to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as the CZ.

(Another example of how to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 78 (C) is a diagram showing another example of the method of realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 78 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (a continuous operation device for a special accessory of the second kind). The pachi-slot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) as a character to be drawn even during the MB, and the termination condition of the MB is (A). More than the specified number of medals have been paid out, (B) SB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination, Or, one of the three conditions of winning a prize) shall be satisfied. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB is completed, according to the satisfied end conditions. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of RB, it shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, it shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), if the MB ends (so-called punk) due to the establishment of SB, or if the RB is established before the specified number of medals are paid out, the transition to the ART gaming state occurs. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control during MB, it is possible to preferentially stop the combination of symbols for which medals are paid out even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination, so that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds the specified number. There may be a game in which there is a game and a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning role are the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state on the assumption that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), (1) when the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is the CZ. Then, (2) when the number of medals exceeding the specified number is paid out in the MB, or when the SB is established, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts between the RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and then (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at the high RT generated by the end of the RB. .. If the RB wins a prize in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB ends, without going through between the RB flags.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (functioning as a CZ) during a normal section and the winning probability of RB (which triggers a transition to an ART gaming state) during MB are common to all set values. However, the winning probability of SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in MB may be a common probability for all set values or a different probability depending on the set value. For example, when the winning probability of SB in MB is different depending on the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of SB, and the easier it is for MB to continue for a long time, so that the ART gaming state in CZ (MB) It is possible to raise the degree of expectation of transition to, and to increase the variation of ball ejection specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of RB, which triggers the transition to the ART gaming state, can be set arbitrarily depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but it is better to set the probability that the winning can be expected realistically for better game balance. Therefore, it is preferable that the specified number of sheets is as small as 10 to 30 sheets, and the RB is determined as an internal winning combination in the MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed on the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous when the transition lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery. Therefore, the improvement method of the main control board 71 is shown below.

FIG. 70B is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 70B, the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication by serial communication or the like. Since the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 70, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards, and for example, the first main control board 71a is subjected to internal lottery using the internal lottery table to perform the second main control. By performing the transition lottery using the transition lottery table on the substrate 71b, it is possible to sufficiently secure the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery, and it is possible to perform the lottery with abundant variations.

In FIG. 70B, the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to enable bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a is used. The configuration may be such that communication is possible only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the upstream and the second main control board 71b as the downstream. By using only one-way communication, it is possible to reduce the communication load as compared with the case of two-way communication.

Further, when the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed on different boards (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, the transition lottery may be performed first on one substrate and then the internal lottery on the other substrate, and conversely, the internal lottery may be performed first on one substrate and then the transition lottery is performed on the other substrate. It may be that. In this case, if the transition lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transition lottery, so that the transition lottery is performed in a form that is not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination, such a configuration may be used. As a result, even if the fraudulent act of illegally inputting the winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination does not affect the result of the transition lottery, the fraudulent act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result. Can be suppressed. Further, when the transition lottery is performed first, since the internal winning combination is irrelevant, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed only by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal lottery determined as a result of this internal lottery, or the internal lottery determined as a result of the internal lottery may be performed. The transition lottery may be performed without referring to the role. When the transition lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination, the transition lottery can be performed based on the setting unquestioned combination as described above, so that the lottery can be performed based on the information with no difference in the set value, and also internally. When the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

Further, FIG. 70C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since what is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM), in FIG. 70C, one main control board 71 like the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, by storing various tables used for the internal lottery in the first main ROM 32a and storing various tables used for the transition lottery in the second main ROM 32b, the storage means used for each lottery can be stored. Sufficient capacity can be secured, and lottery with a wide variety can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 75, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section occurs when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be used. .. Further, the end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section, and for example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. , The transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, then the guaranteed number of times It continues without ending the specific section until the navigation is performed, and shifts from the specific section to the normal section according to the guaranteed number of navigations (navigation guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flow of limit processing in a specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as CZ or ART game state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit gained by the player during the specific section will increase and the overall profit will be balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profit that the player gets during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to limit the duration of the advantageous state for the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process of limiting the duration of a specific section, which is advantageous for the player, to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count the number of limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 79, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuous games (number of limit games). For example, when the ART game state is continuous, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by 1 for each game. Further, for example, when the transition from the normal section to the CZ and then the transition to the ART gaming state, the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, so that the main control board 71 is a continuation game of the CZ. The sum of the number and the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

By the way, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachi-slot machine in which the RT gaming state is different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after the RT gaming state is changed, so that the waiting section may be inserted once. As a specific case, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a waiting section may be inserted when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and a bonus (feature) is given during the specific section. When activated, a waiting section may be inserted when returning to a specific section after the end of the bonus.

The main control board 71 may or may not count such a standby section as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 may count the games for the number of times "A1" to "An" in FIG. 79 (B) as the number of limit games, or may not count them as the number of limit games. good.

Further, the main control board 71 may have different counts as the number of limit games depending on the type of the standby section. For example, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the specific section sandwiched between the normal section and the specific section is not counted as the number of limit games, and the bonus (feature) is activated during the specific section. In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the end of the bonus may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a waiting section is provided to transition the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify at least to transition the RT gaming state during the waiting section, but the notification regarding the push order combination related to the increase or decrease of medals is not always required. You don't have to do it. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes changes the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify the push order role "push order bell" related to the increase or decrease of medals. When the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is controlled so that the RT game state is not changed, the push order combination "push order bell" related to the increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the waiting section.

Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the waiting section for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in an advantageous state for the player, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. The waiting section in which the notification of the order combination is not performed may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), if the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the bonus flag is set during the specific section. There may be a gap and a bonus state. The main control board 71 may or may not count the games between these flags and in the bonus state as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times "C1" to "Cn" in FIG. 79 (C) and the games for the number of times "D1" to "Dn" as the number of limit games. Also, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In this case, the main control board 71 may count the games between the flags as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, between the flags. The games in the middle may not be counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Further, both the game during the flag and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, both may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of medals as the number of limit games while the flags for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals are in an advantageous state for the player. The number of limit games may not be counted during the period between the flags that do not notify the push order combination related to the increase / decrease.

Further, the main control board 71 may be different in whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, it may be possible to win a push order role (that is, a role in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachi-slot machine, the player can obtain more profit by notifying the push order combination during the bonus state. Therefore, when the main control board 71 notifies the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is counted as the number of limit games, which is advantageous to the player during the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the above-mentioned counting method reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let me. That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the number of games, the number of navigations, etc. still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). ..

Then, at the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process for initializing the values of variables related to the generation of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is, or may be initialized to RT0, which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT game state for the ART game state, the RT game state ends when the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won without shifting to the RT game state by combining symbols such as bell spills and fall replays. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, the high RT state that is advantageous to the player continues. Therefore, as the latter specification, it is desirable to set the game state with a low replay probability. In particular, when the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and the RT game state is such that it will continue until the next bonus, the RT game state can be dropped by the limit processing to appropriately suppress the gambling. can.

When the limit processing is performed in this way, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status display 147b until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section ends. Then, the status display 147b is turned off. Further, when the main control board 71 ends the specific section by the limit process, the limit lamp 148 is turned on for a predetermined period thereafter. As for the predetermined period, when the limit processing is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game in which the limit processing is performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit processing is about to be activated, and notify the player that the limit processing is about to be activated.

Here, for example, when the games in the bonus state are also counted as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80B, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even in the bonus state to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 80C, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit processing during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and in the example shown in FIG. 80 (C), the limit is reached. The gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state ends, not at the timing when the number of games reaches a certain number of games.

Of course, when counting as the number of limit games during the waiting section of a specific section or between the flags of the bonus, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between the flags. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the waiting section or between the flags, and the timing of shifting from the waiting section to the specific section after the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, or the number of limit games is set. After reaching a certain number of games, limit processing may be performed at the timing of shifting from between flags to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is completed by the limit process, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to that effect to an external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachi-slot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.
When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 is an external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, in the bonus state). A predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to the external device (that is, the main control board 71 is in the bonus state during the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, a predetermined signal may be output to an external device at the end of the bonus state).

Further, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing is performed when the limit processing is performed more times than normally expected in one pachi-slot machine 1. , A signal (error signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed more times than expected may also be output to the external device. Specifically, the main control board 71 is specified to the outside when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, the number of times the limit process is performed) reaches a predetermined number of times within a specific period. Output a signal. As an example, when the limit processing is performed more times than expected between the time when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. This makes it possible for the hall side to grasp that, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times such as 10 times in a day.

(Navigation guarantee processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, the navigation guarantee process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flow of navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end condition of a specific section based on the number of games, if the number of times the winning combination to be notified (for example, push order bell, etc.) is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section is small, There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when shifting to a specific section, the minimum number of navigations is guaranteed, and the navigation is continued without ending the specific section until the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Here, in FIG. 81, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (C), the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It is assumed that there is. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, the end condition is satisfied), the notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), after that, the winning combination (for example, the push order bell) to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination in the 54th game, and the combination of the notification target is notified. When the main control board 71 is notified for the guaranteed number of times in connection with this notification, the main control board 71 ends the specific section. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

By the way, in the pachi-slot machine, as push order roles, a plurality of types of push order roles in which the number of medals to be paid out at the time of the correct push order is different are provided, and the main control board 71 is used for these push order roles during a specific section. May inform you of the correct push order. As multiple types of push order, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the push order, the number of medals does not increase (that is, the number of payouts is less than or equal to the number of inserts), or the increase of medals is extremely small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets). A push order combination (for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of 3 bets is 9) can be considered. It should be noted that, regardless of the push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the number of medals paid out is smaller than when the correct answer is given in the push order, or the number of medals paid out is 0 in common.

From the player's point of view, even if the medals do not increase or the increase is extremely small when the push order is answered correctly, the total number of medals to be acquired during the specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigations during a specific section. On the other hand, for the push order role, in which the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is affected, so the player is guaranteed the number of navigations during the specific section. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out at the correct answer in the push order is different, only the push order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer in the push order is larger than the number of inserted medals. The number of navigations may be guaranteed, and the number of navigations may not be guaranteed for the push order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer is less than or equal to the number of input pieces. In addition, among multiple types of push order combinations with different numbers of medals paid out when the push order is correct, only the push order combination with the largest number of payouts when the push order is correct is guaranteed the number of navigations, and other push order roles. As for, the number of navigations may not be guaranteed.

Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the number of navigations when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications to the unguaranteed push order combination, the specific section is ended on the condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 is in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, and if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, the specific section Is continued without ending, and then the specific section is terminated at the timing when the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) about the push order role that affects the total number of medals acquired in a specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. ..

Subsequently, a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state will be described. In FIGS. 81 (B) and 81 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example of transitioning to the bonus state once is shown.

Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that the player is given a certain profit when looking at the specific section as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. When the state has been changed to the bonus state even once, the specific section may be terminated by satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. Regardless of whether or not the system has transitioned to the bonus state, the specific section may be continued until the guaranteed number of notifications is given, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the guaranteed number of notifications are given. good.

Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times will be described. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player. Therefore, the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 81 (D). As shown, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be terminated even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), even if the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of games. The specific section may be continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

In addition, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, it is arbitrary whether or not the so-called additional lottery is performed in the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. That is, the main control board 71 may perform additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, but may not perform additional lottery even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the contrary, the main control board 71 may perform additional lottery during the period from when the termination condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Further, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, the normal screen is returned to the normal screen at the timing when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, and then. When the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order notification (navigation) may be performed on this normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status display 147b, but the sub control board 72 is the display screen in the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen during the normal section. After that, when the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 notifies the push order combination. , The push order is notified on the normal screen. Then, when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status display 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of each gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is roughly classified into a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Further, the waiting section is a state after winning the lottery for transition to a specific section and before shifting from the normal section to the specific section.

In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the winning combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is activated, depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won or whether or not the bonus is activated. Set to the probability that "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" that is not activated and the winning combination related to the bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, and "between the flags" that the bonus is not activated and determined as the internal winning combination. "Bonus state (no setting difference)" in which the bonus according to the bonus combination with no difference is operating, and "Bonus according to the bonus combination with the setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination" are operating. "Bonus state (with setting difference)" and the game state are included.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 is , The status display 147b is turned off, and when the combination related to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when any of the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these roles. Assuming that the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 draws a lottery for transition to a specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set value. On the other hand, in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the specific section. Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification at the time of winning the push order will be given.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 is the state display 147b. Turn on. The main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and during the specific section.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins the push order. It may or may not be notified of the order of pressing the correct answer of the time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits to the sub control board 72 without grouping the roles related to the notification. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually has the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of combination determined as is transmitted to the sub-control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the roles related to the notification and transmits the combination to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform additional lottery for the duration of the specific section. In the "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the standby section, the main control board 71 may and may perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. It may or may not be.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section, the main control board 71 is the state display 147b. Is lit, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 serves as a notification in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

In addition, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). In addition, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set value in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the specific section. While the lottery is performed, the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section is not performed in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the specific section.

In addition, the main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to a specific section only at the time of 3 bets, or a lottery for adding a duration of a specific section, and may not perform these lottery at the time of 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of the transition lottery result to an external device>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the flow when the result of the shift lottery to the specific section is output from the pachi-slot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

At the amusement store, external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer are installed together with the pachislot machine. For example, when the bonus state starts in the pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter and data is output. Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachi-slot machine, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, so that the main control board 71 is an event that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side (for example, in the RT state). The lottery result was estimated from the transition and the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific push order, and the signal was output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the transition lottery is delayed by several games from the timing of the actual winning, and the specific push order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is presumed that the winner has won the transition lottery even though the lottery has not been won, and as a result, an erroneous signal may be output.
In addition, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, when a bonus is subtracted during ART, a signal is also displayed when the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus is restored to the RT gaming state for ART after the bonus is exhausted. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the number of winnings and the number of digested sets of the accurate ART, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting the machine. Was occurring.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery to a specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so that the result of the transition lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output timing pattern to an external device. In FIG. 82, the timing T1 is the start time of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (for example, the ART game state), the period P1 is the period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is. This is the period between one game of the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, so that the main control board 71 can grasp that the transfer lottery has been won from the time of the timing T1. ..

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the transition lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). are doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of reel rotation of the game, and in the output pattern example C, the external device is used during the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transition lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device when all the reels of the game are stopped.

Further, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transition lottery to the external device in the game after the game won in the transition lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the time of inserting the medal for the next game of the game won in the transition lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 is selected for a transfer lottery to an external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games are subsequently played (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 82 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is displayed to the external device at an arbitrary timing after the transition lottery to the specific section is won. Can be output.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the lighting pattern example of the state display 147b shown in FIG. 73 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 82, it is possible to realize a novel fun that has never been seen before. Specifically, it may be possible to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won to the external device before the status display 147b is turned on, and conversely, the external device may be turned on after the status display 147b is turned on. A signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device, or a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device at the same time as the status indicator 147b is turned on. good.

For example, by outputting the signal to the external device before the status display 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status display 147b is turned on, so that the pachislot machine It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output slightly before the lighting of the status display 147b, so that the status display 147b is lit (notification in the pachi-slot machine 1). The timing can be matched with the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachi-slot machine 1), and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there is no free output pin in the 8-pin signal line that outputs a signal to an external device, when the output pin from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to an external device even when the transition lottery is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transition lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is set and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the transition lottery is won (so-called first hit), and two sets are output after the first set of 30 games is exhausted. It is possible to output an external signal at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting the signal in this way, the exact number of sets can be grasped. Further, the signal for the first hit and the signal for the continuation may be regarded as different signals, and the number of first hits and the number of continuations may be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. ..

In such a gaming machine that manages the number of sets, if the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART gaming state, a pachislot machine or a pachislot machine that restarts the game from the number of remaining games from the time when the bonus is won in the set after the bonus ends. , There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, if 25 games out of 30 games in one set of ART game state are consumed and the bonus state starts, the number of remaining games is 5 games after the bonus ends (remaining at the time of bonus winning). The ART game state is restarted from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted because one set is simply separated in the middle. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART game state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. The same signal output processing can be applied not only to the type of ART in which the predetermined number of games is set as one set, but also to the type of managing the number of ART sets based on the difference number of games and the number of navigations.

It should be noted that a pachi-slot machine having both a pattern of restarting the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern of starting a new set from the beginning after the end of the bonus can be considered. For example, if the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, one set is added as a remedy, and if the number of remaining games is more than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, the remaining after the bonus ends. Specifications such as restarting the game from the number of games can be considered.

In such a pachi-slot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output according to the presence or absence of the addition of ART at the time of winning the bonus. That is, when the addition of ART occurs at the time of winning the bonus, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is restarted after the end of the bonus, and when the addition of ART does not occur at the time of winning the bonus. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the end of the bonus. More specifically, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than a predetermined value, it assumes that an additional ART has occurred and outputs a signal when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the signal is not output when the ART is restarted after the bonus is completed, assuming that the ART has not been added.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value, the ART game state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. And output a signal to the outside. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART game state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the signal is output according to not only whether or not the ART is added at the time of winning the bonus but also whether or not the ART is added from the bonus winning to the start of the ART.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by 1 by one output, but when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter is according to the magnitude of the value. It may be a signal in which a plurality of values of are increased. For example, when a long ART consisting of 90 games per set is started, which is usually an ART of 30 games per set, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. ..
In addition, although it is usually an ART of 30 games per set, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter rises according to the average number of games up to the winning bonus. May be good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continuous games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. Outputs a signal according to. By doing so, even if the pachi-slot machine has a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the start, it becomes easy to determine after the fact how much profit has been obtained from the data counter or the like. The signal in which the value of the data counter rises by a plurality of values may be a signal in which a signal for raising the value by one is transmitted multiple times at intervals so that an external device can identify it, or a dedicated signal for raising the value by a plurality of values. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with an external device)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device will be described when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won. FIG. 83 shows an example of an effect in which a signal is output to an external device during a game in which a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and FIG. 84 shows an external game in a game after winning a lottery for transition to a specific section. An example of production when a signal is output to a device is shown.

(Production example 1)
In the effect example 1 shown in FIG. 83, in the game winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R prior to the start of reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward. The game is progressing by letting it. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is the timing at which the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the timing T2 is the timing at which the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started (that is, at the start of reel rotation). ), And the timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status display 147b at the timing of the lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the transition lottery has been won at the timing of the output pattern example B (when the reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

As shown in the timing T1, in the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the opposite direction. Further, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display that attention is paid to the data counter installed on the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1, and also displays a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top, so that the player sees the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. Further, in addition to guiding the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the display unit 100 also attracts the attention of the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

At timing T1 to timing T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to proceed with the countdown. After that, at the timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal to the data counter indicating that the transition lottery has been won. Upon receiving this signal, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" or the like.

As described above, in the production example 1, the line of sight is guided to the data counter by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and then a signal is output to the data counter. , Notifies that the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific section on the data counter that gathers the line of sight of the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect linked with not only the pachi-slot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter).

Further, in the production example 1, at the timing T3, the main control board 71 turns on the status display 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that the display unit 100 has won a specific section in accordance with the lighting timing of the status display 147b. As described above, in the effect example 1, various effects can be performed in conjunction with each other by performing the effect according to the lighting timing of the status display 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Can be done.

(Production example 2)
Subsequently, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and the specific section is started after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. In some cases, so-called precursory effects may be performed during this predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, as in the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. , Even in the game that wins the transition lottery, the result of the transition lottery can be output to the external device. Here, if the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device in the game that wins the transition lottery, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is being produced during the precursory effect. The effect result (that is, the success or failure of the transition lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game winning the transition lottery in the specific section. do. Then, as shown in the effect example A, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursory effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the precursory effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the precursory effect.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition lottery of a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b during the precursory effect is It is preferable that the result of the transition lottery is difficult to understand from the status display 147b, because if it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. The method of making the result of the transition lottery from the status display 147b difficult to understand is as described above.

Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the precursory effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the precursory effect is performed for 32 games in the effect example A, but the precursory effect is performed for 16 games in the effect example B, and after that, the winning of the specific section is confirmed. It is decided to perform a standby production later. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachi-slot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect of suggesting a set value. Further, even when the period of the precursory effect can be customized in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, in both the case where the effect example A is performed and the case where the effect example B is performed, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game winning the transition lottery in the specific section. The result of the transition lottery is output to the external device during the game.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 85, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachi-slot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easy to be performed in a specific section, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the timing to start a specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order role (notification target role) is higher than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal winning role. Then, when the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct push order is notified to the winning push order combination during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the push order during the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which navigation is not performed during a specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific section.

In particular, since the timing to start the specific section is the start time of the bonus state, once in the situation where the bonus state is never reached during the specific section, that is, the situation where navigation is easy to be performed during the specific section (bonus state). As a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during a specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of a bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing of starting the specific section to the start of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus, which is a non-setting unquestioned combination, is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, the bonus winning) during the normal section. Then, a transition lottery will be held. Then, when the main control board 71 is in a state of winning this transition lottery and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state and is the main control board. The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 has not won the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct push order even if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination, but serves as the combination related to the bonus which is an unquestioned combination during the normal section. A transition lottery may be performed according to the fact that the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed (that is, a bonus prize is won).

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform a transition lottery during the normal section regardless of the winning combination related to the bonus. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section based on information with no difference in set values during the normal section, and if the transition lottery is won, the transition right to the specific section is performed. Is given. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed thereafter, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transition right is granted, and the main control is performed. The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transition right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 push forward during the bonus state. Does not notify the correct push order even if is determined as an internal winning combination.

(Data example)
FIG. 85B is an example of a data configuration for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), during the bonus state, there is a higher probability than in the state other than the bonus state, the push order combination (“F_3 selection combination _1st”, “F_3 selection combination _2nd”, “F_3 selection combination_3rd”. ) Is determined as the internal winning combination. For this push order combination, for example, if the correct answer is given in the push order, a combination of symbols for which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, and if the answer is incorrect for the push order, a combination of symbols for which 5 medals are paid out is displayed. It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

According to such a data example, when notifying the push order of the correct answer to the push order during the bonus state, the player has 18 medals (= 9 x 2 times) during the bonus state. If the player does not notify the correct push order to the push order during the bonus state, the player can receive 10 cards (= 5 cards x 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to pay out or receive medals.

<Method of realizing precursors using a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, a method of realizing the precursory effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a transition lottery to a specific section is won, the status display 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the transition lottery has been won, so that the effect is performed over a plurality of games. Is not suitable for notifying the result of the transition lottery using. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the result is reported is used, and a precursory effect is produced during the first specific section. Is to be done.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to a specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 86, one method of realizing a precursor for the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations, a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section), are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, between three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example). A long ART that continues (for 53 games (3 + 50)) is provided, and a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART is performed during a normal section. FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. The main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART with a probability that does not fluctuate depending on the set value, based on the information (internal winning combination) that does not differ in the set value.

In this transition lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs a precursory effect of notifying whether or not the long ART is won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the short ART is won, a precursor effect is performed to notify that the long ART is not won during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. Along with performing a precursory effect to notify that, an effect unique to the long ART is performed after this precursory effect.

In addition, when the precursor effect is performed using the short ART, since both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 turns on the status display 147b. That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. Further, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period, which is the continuation period of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursory effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the long ART in the transition lottery, it signals to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the short ART is won or the long ART is won in the transition lottery.

In addition, as the end condition of the short ART and the long ART, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be set. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be of the same type or may be different types. The same type means, for example, when the number of games is used as the end condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the end condition of the long ART, and the different types are, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86 (C), an example of the effect in the case of performing the precursory game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of, for example, "explosion chance rush" in the display unit 100. This "explosion chance" effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be detonated during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 86, it is assumed that the duration of the short ART is 3 games.

If the sub-control board 72 has won the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if it has not won the long ART), the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If so, the effect of successfully exploding the bomb is executed in the "explosion chance" effect. It should be noted that the timing at which the bomb is successfully detonated when the long ART is won is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 1st or 2nd game, or the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 3rd game. You may succeed in exploding the bomb at the beginning of the fourth game.

Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode during the precursory effect. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (C), since the push order combination is won during the “explosion chance” effect, which is the precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are used as the push order role. On the other hand, the order of pushing the correct answer is notified. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the precursory effect, so that the player is given a sense of loss during the precursory effect that should enhance the interest of the game. There is no such thing as a hobby.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to a specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 87, another method of the precursor realization method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned precursor method 1, since the result of the transition lottery has already been determined at the start of the “explosion chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method described below is a method in which the result of the precursory effect can be determined during the precursory game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART gaming state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursory game related to the transition to the ART gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the transfer lottery to the CZ is performed during the normal section, and the transfer lottery to the ART is performed during the CZ. FIG. 87B is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. In the main control board 71, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed based on the combination of symbols. Specifically, when the combination of bell spilled eyes or the first piece of symbols is displayed on the main control board 71, the transition to the ART gaming state is not performed, and the combination of bell symbols is displayed. , ART game state transition lottery is performed. Then, by notifying the push order bell of the correct push order during the CZ, it is possible to easily shift to the ART gaming state during the CZ.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the CZ is won in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “explosion chance” effect shown in FIG. 87 (C) is produced. This "explosion chance" effect continues, for example, for three games, and if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the game shifts to the ART game state. You can get a lottery. Then, when the CZ ends without winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state, the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and shifts to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ. If the lottery is won, the effect of successfully exploding the bomb is executed in the "explosion chance" effect.

The main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting mode of the state display 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state display 147b in different modes depending on the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting the signal to the external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the CZ in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the ART gaming state in the transition lottery, the signal is sent to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when the CZ is won in the transition lottery and when the ART gaming state is won.

Further, the end conditions of the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of end conditions may be used, or the same type of end conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of the so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a combination of medals whose end condition of MB exceeds 14 medals, and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out. In the MB in which is displayed, in the state where the notification is performed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of the symbols to which 14 medals are paid out will be displayed is notified, and in the next game. , The combination of symbols for which 15 medals will be paid out will be displayed. By notifying the push order, 29 medals can be paid out, but in the state where the notification is not performed, 15 medals will be displayed. A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

In the above example, it is necessary to keep waiting until the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the push is performed in the game of starting the short ART and the next game. Since the order navigation occurs, it is not necessary to keep waiting until the push order role is decided as the internal winning role, and the game is not delayed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, even if you finish with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so you will get more medals than you can get by digesting the number of bell navigations in a normal game, and you can experience the profitable navigation consumption, so you can experience the long ART. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by not being able to connect to the game and suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<How to save the number of navigations>
In a so-called pachislot machine that manages the number of navigations, which uses the number of navigations performed during the specific section as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, if the roles to be navigated (the roles to be notified) are concentrated and won. Navigation is concentrated, and as a result, a specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the method of saving the number of navigations will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

When the number of navigations is used as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player even during the bonus state is notified. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that do not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

As shown in FIG. 88 (B), during the MB1 game state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols having different payout numbers according to the push order, “F_maintenance _1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance”. While "Rip_2nd + All Small Combinations" and "F_Maintenance Lip_3rd + All Small Combinations" are determined as internal winning combinations, only the combinations that display the same combination of symbols with the same number of payouts are displayed during the MB2 game state. Determined as the winning role. Then, during the MB1 game state, the number of payouts may differ depending on the push order. Therefore, when these combinations are determined as the internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the correct push order. Notify (pushing order in which 9-card combination is displayed).

By doing so, if the MB1 gaming state starts during the specific section, the game will be played while consuming the number of navigations, but if the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of navigations, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of navigations.

In the MB1 game state, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the push order is determined as an internal winning combination, while in the MB2 game state, the payout number is the same regardless of the push order. The method of realizing that only the winning combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 game state is set as the game state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 game state, only the winning combination related to the replay is individually drawn, and when all the small winning combinations are determined as the internal winning combination, the individual lottery is performed. The stop control is different depending on the type of replay that has been set. As a result, during the MB1 gaming state, it is possible to determine as the internal winning combination a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the pressing order. On the other hand, the MB2 game state is set to the game state dedicated to 2 bets, and the number of medals paid out is the same for all small wins at the time of 2 bets. As a result, during the MB2 game state, only the winning combination in which the combination of symbols having the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pushing order can be determined as the internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94, a method of individually managing the lip navigator and the bell navigator in the specific section will be described. In conventional pachislot machines, it is common to notify both the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state and the notification for increasing the number of medals during a specific section. By individually managing the above, it is possible to realize a new playability that has never existed before.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91, a game example 1 in which the Lip Navi and the Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, Lipnavi AT and Bernavi AT, as specific sections. In the Lipnavi AT, the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed, but the notification for increasing the medals is not performed. Further, in the Bernavi AT, at least a notification for increasing the number of medals is performed, and a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed as necessary.

FIG. 89A is a game flow in Game Example 1. As shown in FIG. 89 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with three types of RT gaming states, an RT0 gaming state to an RT3 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. .. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, the initialization process, the setting change, and the like. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. In addition, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and if it shifts according to the notification, it is treated as a Lipnavi AT, and if it shifts regardless of the notification. Is a game state that is treated as a normal game. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the Bernavi AT.

There is a possibility of shifting from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), the combination of the bell spilled symbols is the combination of the push order roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order in the game in which "" is determined as the internal winning combination. In a game in which the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as internal winning roles, when the correct answer is in the push order, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT1 gaming state, the winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321”, which are push order combinations, are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

Further, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combination “F_maintenance rip_123” to “F_maintenance rip_321”, which are the push order combinations, is used as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. The main control board 71 maintains the gaming state in the RT2 gaming state when the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, and the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed by the incorrect answer in the push order. In that case, the gaming state is changed from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”, which are push order combinations, is used as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the combination of the symbols of the replay is changed by the incorrect answer in the push order. If it is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols by the correct answer in the push order. While paying out 9 medals, the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state, and if a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed due to an incorrect push order, the number (or 0) is less than 9. While paying out the medals, the gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 90C, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT based on the internal winning combination. It should be noted that this transition lottery table indicates that the transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of the combination for which the transition lottery is to be performed is merely an example.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 90C, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 performs a transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT only when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed. Be sure to win the Bernavi AT.

In the illustrated example, the lottery for the transition to the Bernavi AT is determined by displaying the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip, that is, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is supposed to be performed on the condition that the correct answer is given in the push order in the played game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply contains the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". If it is decided as the winning combination, a lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT may be performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the combination "" during the other RT gaming states. F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 "are not determined as the internal winning combination, or during other RT gaming states, there is a lower probability than during the RT2 gaming state, and the roles" F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 " Is determined as an internal winning role. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly, the RT1 gaming state) during the RT2 gaming state. ) More frequently, the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT will be performed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 (main control board 71 and sub-control board 72), when neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won, the player is notified of the advantageous stop operation mode (correct answer pressing order). do not. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the Lipnavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Lipnavi AT is performed, and when the Bernavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Bernavi AT is performed.

Specifically, in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to. When either "F_RT3 transition lip_321" or the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified. On the other hand, even in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Even if it is done, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

Further, in the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. , Notify the correct push order. In addition, in the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". When either "Rip_321" or the combination "F_Maintenance Lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

By doing so, the Lipnavi AT can be treated as a specific section for notifying the RT2 game state in which the frequency of the transition to the Bernavi AT is high, and the medal can be awarded during the Bernavi AT. It can be treated as a specific section for notifying to increase. As described above, in Game Example 1, since the Lipnavi AT and the Bernavi AT have specific sections having different roles, the meaning of the notification differs depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest without the notification becoming monotonous.

Further, during the Lipnavi AT, the notification for increasing the number of medals is not performed, so that the increase in medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period of increase in medals is long, the profits that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to move to a specific section. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1, there is a specific section called the Lipnavi AT, which does not notify to increase the number of medals, in addition to the Bell Navi AT, which notifies to increase the number of medals. It is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store while realizing the playability that is easy to shift to.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transition lottery based on the information that does not differ in the set values. .. In this respect, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information that does not differ in the set values, but the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be different for each set value. The specific method is shown below.

In the above-mentioned game example 1, according to the fact that the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer is obtained when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. (According to the stop operation in the push order), the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be performed. Since the transition lottery is performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" have a probability of being an internal winning combination according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Must be determined as. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability during the RT2 gaming state regardless of the set value. As described above, even in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the main control In the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), the board 71 has a probability lower than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". Is determined as an internal winning role.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the transition lottery to a specific section is the same regardless of the set value, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are internal. Depending on the winning combination (more specifically, depending on the stop operation in the correct push order when determined as the internal winning combination), the winning combination has the same probability regardless of the set value. It is necessary to carry out a transition lottery. Therefore, when the main control board 71 performs the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321", which trigger the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT, are determined as internal winning roles with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each set value, but in this method, by giving a setting difference regarding the transition of the RT gaming state, the transition to the Bernavi AT is related. The degree of expectation is different for each set value.

Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value. As described above, during the RT2 game state, the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT game states, so that the RT2 game does not have a setting difference in the trigger of the transition lottery and the winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 89 (B), the probability (lottery value information) of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is determined. , By making it different for each set value, it is possible to provide a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the set value with a high probability of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is easy to shift to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, it is possible to show the characteristics of each set value regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Production example in Game Example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91, an production example in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the game when the effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (A), the first game is in the RT1 game state, and is a game that has not been won by either the Lipnavi AT or the Bernavi AT. In the first game, since neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT was won, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and both the number of Lipnavi and the number of Bellnavi remain 0. The number of rip navigators includes any of the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321", the roles "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition rip_321", and the role "F_maintenance rip_123". It is the number of times to notify the push order of the correct answer when it is decided as the winning combination, and the number of bell navigations is that any one of the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice_3rd" is decided as the internal winning combination. It is the number of times to notify the pressing order of the correct answer in the case.

Subsequently, in the second game, the lottery for transition to Lipnavi AT is won. Therefore, the status display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1, and the number of rip navigators is 5 times. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91 (a) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of lip navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and also displays that the "search challenge" effect is started. In addition, the "search challenge" production is a production to search for treasure performed during Lipnavi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of Lipnavi remains, it will be a success (Bernavi AT). Is.

Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from 5 to 4 in the third game. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91 (b) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the push order for shifting from the standby period (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure interval (RT2 gaming state). When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in (b) of FIG. 91 (B), the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. A display indicating that the item has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure is displayed.

Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the third game, the state display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the fourth game, any of the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and prompt the user to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from four to three. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91 (c) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained and the search among the treasures is continued.

Subsequently, in the fifth game, one of the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning role, but since it is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct push order. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 91 (B), the sub-control board 72 displays that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 91, since it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes. Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the display unit 100 has fallen from the treasure room (RT2 game state) to the standby time (RT1 game state).

Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game, the state display 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1. Further, in the sixth game, any one of the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby period (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure interval (RT2 gaming state) on the display unit 100. After that, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 is displayed to indicate that it has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure.

Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the seventh game, any of the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 91 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

Here, when any of the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the winning is won to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the Bell Navi AT has been won. Further, depending on the winning of the Bell Navi AT, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi, respectively. It should be noted that the number of times of rip-navigation at the time of winning the bell-navigation AT is 11 because one time remains as the number of times of rip-navigation when winning the bell-navigation AT.

After that, the game state becomes the bell navigation AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, as long as the number of rip navigations remains, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". The correct answer is pushed to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice_3rd" as long as the number of bell navigations remains. Notify the order.

(Game example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, a game example 2 in which the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during the specific section, and the number of notifications of both is managed individually. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. The lip navigator is a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, and the bell navigation is a notification for increasing the number of medals.

FIG. 92 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (A), the game example 2 has a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. It has (for example, the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state in the game example 1) and the rip low probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the game example 1) in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low.

In the game example 2, the main control board 71 performs a shift lottery to a specific section during the normal section, and when the shift lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. .. In Game Example 2, the lottery for shifting to a specific section may be performed by any method.

Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in Game Example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform notifications for maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state for the number of times indicated by the number of rip navigations, and receive medals for the number of times indicated by the number of bell navigations. Notify to increase. Then, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

Further, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the high rip state to the low rip state, and the combination of the promotion replay symbols is displayed. , The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. The combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of Game Example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay, and the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition. The combination of the symbols of the rip and the RT3 transition rip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

In addition, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition rip is displayed at the time of incorrect answer in the push order when the combinations "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, and the RT2 transition rip and RT3 The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is the correct answer when the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. Sometimes displayed. Therefore, the lip navigation in Game Example 2 is a combination of the symbols of the fall replay by notifying the correct push order when the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. When the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as internal winning combinations. It includes notifying the pressing order of the correct answer and prompting the display of the combination of symbols of the promotion replay.

If the combination "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the combination of the replay symbols is displayed and the RT game state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination "F_maintenance rip_123" to "F_maintenance rip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination during the high rip state, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the replay symbols (push). (Correct answer), while maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed (push order incorrect answer), the RT game state is changed from the high rip state to the low rip state. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 92 (B) is a diagram showing the characteristics of the specific section of Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), Game Example 2 has a plurality of states, that is, a normal ART and a special state in a specific section. Comparing the normal ART and the special state, the normal ART is a state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is faster than that in the special state. Further, in Game Example 2, the number of rip navigators and the number of bell navigators are added during a specific section. When comparing the normal ART and the special state, the amount of the number of bell navigators added is smaller than that of the normal ART during the special state. On the other hand, increase the amount of additional Lipnavi. That is, during the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the number of lip navigations is given priority over the number of bell navigations.

(How to realize a special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 93, a method of realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st", "F_3 choice bell A_2nd", "F_3 choice bell A_3rd", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_12t", "F_3 choice bell B_2nd", and "F_3 choice" are the targets of the bell navigation. Bell B_3rd ". In the following, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st" to "F_3 choice bell A_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3 choice bell A", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_1st" to "F_3 choice bell B_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3". Sometimes called "Choice Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 93 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the winning combination related to the bonus is not carried over as the internal winning combination, either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B". The combination of symbols displayed according to the order of pressing is different. Specifically, for both the combination "F_3 selection bell A" and the combination "F_3 selection bell B", when the push order is correct, the combination of the bell symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, and the push order is irregular. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell-spilled symbols is displayed, and a smaller number (or 0) of medals than 9 is paid out.

Therefore, in the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, when either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section when the bonus is not won, Bell navigation is performed for the number of times of bell navigation (notification of the correct push order). In other words, during a specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will be reduced regardless of whether the role "F_3 choice bell A" or the role "F_3 choice bell B" is decided as the internal winning role. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), during the flags, that is, in the state where the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of symbols is different, but the combination of symbols displayed in the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same regardless of the order of pressing. Specifically, for the role "F_3 choice bell B", a combination of bell symbols is displayed when the push order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed, and less than 9 (or 0) medals are paid out. On the other hand, for the role "F_3 choice bell A", the combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the order of pressing, and nine medals are paid out.

Therefore, when the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the push order between the flags. When the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of, the bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed as many times as the number of bell navigations. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations does not decrease, and the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination. The number of bell navigations will be reduced.

In this way, by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning role, the realization of a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations. can do. That is, in the case of the above example, by setting the specific section when the bonus is not won as a normal ART and setting the specific section between the flags as a special state, it is possible to realize a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed. can do.

(Additional example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, a method of adding the number of times of Lip Navi and the number of times of Bell Navi will be described. The additional lottery table of FIG. 94 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the additional amount of the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 adds the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations with reference to the additional lottery table shown in FIG. 94 (A). Note that FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the degree of expectation of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 94 (A).

With reference to FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B), it can be seen that the expected degree of addition of the number of bell navigations and the expected degree of addition of the number of lip navigations are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on cactus and weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is usually more likely to be added during ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during special conditions. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is smaller than that during normal ART, and conversely, the amount of addition of the number of lip navigations is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 94, the addition based on the strong cherry has the same addition expectation in the normal ART and in the special state.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, the rip-navigation and the bell-navigation are individually managed in a specific section, the rip-navigation is performed for the number of rip-navigation times, and the bell-navigation is performed for the number of bell-navigation times. As a result, even if either the role targeted for Lip Navi or the role targeted for Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as the internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. And since the other number of navigations is not consumed, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as specific sections, and the expected degree of addition differs depending on the current state. Specifically, during normal ART, where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is high, it is easy to add the number of bell navigations, and conversely, during the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is reduced. , Increase the amount of additional lip navigation. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest in a specific section is not impaired.

<How to select CZs with different end periods>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). Further, since the specific section includes the CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when the limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from the CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games in which the CZ continues. It will be shortened. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select the CZ to be executed from the CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, the CZ considered to be preferable for the player can be easily selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 95, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ "short-term battle" shown in FIG. 95 (A) is a CZ with an end period of 0 games, and the CZ "game" shown in FIG. 95 (B) is a CZ with an end period of 1 game. The CZ "stable" shown in FIG. 95 (C) is a CZ having an end period of 10 games, and the CZ "turbulence" shown in FIG. 95 (D) is a CZ having an end period of 10 games. The CZ "long-term battle" shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery for transition to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. This selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting a CZ. In FIG. 95, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 95 (A), the CZ “game” in FIG. 95 (B), and the CZ “stable” in FIG. 95 (C). In FIG. 95 (D), it refers to the CZ “disturbance”, and in FIG. 95 (E), it refers to the CZ “long-term battle”. This selection cursor, for example, switches the CZ to be selected with the passage of time.

The selection screen accepts the player's operation on the chance button (not shown), and the main control board 71 executes it assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is selected at the timing when the chance button is operated. Accepts the selection of CZ and then starts the selected CZ. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting the CZ "short-term battle", and then accepts the selection from the player, and then the CZ "short-term battle". "Battle" begins. The method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can also count the interval at which the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the board 71 can be specified.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period in the initial state, and then points to other CZs in the order of the shortest end period with the passage of time. .. For example, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ "short-term battle", CZ "game", CZ "stable", CZ "disturbance", and CZ "long-term battle" with the passage of time.

Here, when the limit process is performed as described above, the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of games in which the CZ continues, so that the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period is a game. It is considered to be preferable for the person. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by pointing to the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ is kind to the player. The selection method can be realized.

Further, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the start lever 6 is operated and the game is started (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed) without accepting the operation for the chance button on the selection screen, the player has not made a selection. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of the CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. It is automatically selected, and then the CZ "short-term battle" is started. This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

It should be noted that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the CZ for performing a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and the right to shift to the CZ is granted, and a plurality of types of CZs are granted. Accepts the selection of one CZ from among.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, reel control at the start of a specific section will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel stop control can display a combination of specific symbols such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start result") when starting a specific section. I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section when the lottery to shift to the specific section is won. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start result is displayed) while the transition right is granted, the game state is shifted to the specific section and the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (that is, the reel stop control). Different).

96 and 97 are diagrams showing an example of a rotation cylinder stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in steps S9 and S12 of FIG. 49 described above. This rotation cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to a specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the reel stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right, and uses the reel stop control information to obtain the reel 3L. Stop 3C and 3R.

The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right includes the rotation cylinder stop number, the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), 1st cylinder 1st stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data (left 1st stop table), 1st cylinder 1st stop Table change Information including the initial data selection value (change status, table number) and search order data table number.

"Determination data by pressing order" includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The "draw-in priority table number" is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). Further, the "drawing priority selection table number" is a number for selecting the pulling priority selection table (not shown).

The "table number selection data" is a value referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial stage of the line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, and when the change status is "2", if the line status is A line, it is changed to B line.

The first stop reel is the first reel for the first cylinder stop table change data, the first cylinder stop data table selection data, and the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value. That is, it is the data referred to when the left reel is 3L.

"Table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder" indicates whether to use or change the same stop table after the first stop on the left after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is the data which shows. If there is a value (value other than 0) in the table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder, select the change data search table based on the planned stop position, search the data, and perform the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table for.

The "first body stop data table selection data" is a number for selecting the first body stop data table (not shown) referred to when the first body is stopped.

The "first table change initial data selection value for the first cylinder stop" is data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder selected based on the table number. If the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, if it is "2", it is changed to B line if the line status is A line, and if it is "3", it is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of slip pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, different reel stop control information is used in the pachi-slot machine 1 depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (A), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is not won, the reel stop number "17" is used for the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st". In the reel stop control information of the above, and in the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (B), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is won, for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the reel stop number "31" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information is different depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won, so that the reel stop control is different when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 96A and 97C, different reel stop control information is used in the pachi-slot machine 1 depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (A), which is referred to when the transition right is not granted, the reel stop number "17" is assigned to the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 97 (C), which is referred to when the reel stop control information is specified and the transition right is granted, the rotation cylinder is for the same combination "F_3 choice bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information can be changed according to the presence or absence of the shift right, so that the reel stop control can be changed when the lottery for shift to a specific section is won.

Subsequently, FIG. 98 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal section to which the right to shift to a specific section is not granted, if the internal winning combination is "off", the combination of the "missing" symbols is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. When is a combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order, and the bell spilled eye or the first one is displayed when the push order is incorrect. The combination is displayed.

On the other hand, in the waiting section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is "off", if the push operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result. Is displayed, and if the push operation is inaccurate, a combination of "missing" symbols is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd", if the eye-pressing operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is displayed, and the eye-pressing operation is not possible. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, bell spills or the first pattern is displayed.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to make the reel stop control different depending on the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is set according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as shown.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control may be different depending on the type of the specific section of the transition destination. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 is given the right to shift to one specific section and the one specific section. The reel stop control may be different depending on the case where the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, depending on whether the right to transfer to one specific section is granted or the right to transfer to another specific section is granted. A reel stop initial setting table may be provided so that the reel stop control information used is different.

As a result, the reel stop control can be changed according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. Therefore, for example, when shifting to a specific section more advantageous for the player and when shifting to a specific section other than that. With, it is possible to make different combinations of symbols displayed at the start of a specific section. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, so that the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The fun of the game is improved.
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state and the RT gaming state, but the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

Here, in recent years, a pachi-slot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter, “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachi-slot machine having three reels of the above-mentioned reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as the first main reel and a reel provided in only one row to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. .. The reels having different stop controls depending on the result of the shift lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

When the stop control of the second main reel is different depending on the result of the shift lottery, the main control board 71 is the first main reel in response to the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the shift lottery to the specific section. Specifically, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed if the lottery is not won can be displayed. When the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the shift lottery to the specific section in this way, the main control board 71 then starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. good. Further, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
By separating the stop operation for the result of the transition lottery in the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery in this way, both sides can be enjoyed and the player can easily grasp the game.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, the control at the time of changing the setting will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set (at the time of setting change), the main control board 71 is a combination related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the waiting section that is winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag interval, the specific section, or the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. ..
The case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to the case of changing from setting 1 to setting 6 to a different setting value, and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1 is performed. It also includes the case of resetting the value (so-called resetting to the same setting).

On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all the gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the combination related to the carried-over bonus when the RAM is cleared during the period between the flags, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. The game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the shift lottery is cleared.

In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the game store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear a specific section while changing the set value, so that the game store side can be given various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 69), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 69). It can be carried out.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the configuration and control of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment in the same manner as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be omitted. Further, the "specific section" described in the second embodiment is referred to as an "advantageous section" in the third embodiment, and a gaming state in which so-called navigation and production modes are added is referred to as a "ball ejection state". In addition, when different terms are used with the same or similar elements as those described in the first to third embodiments, the terms used in the first to third embodiments are added in parentheses at the end of the terms. The features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments.

[Game flow of the pachi-slot machine of the third embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a process during the MB operation in the ball ejection state. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an outline of a ball ejection state and a game state in a list. The ball ejection state and mode shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are controlled by the main control board 71.

As shown in FIG. 100, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control board 71. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the light state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is suppressed from notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states. As shown in FIG. 101, the MB operates according to the winning of the MB in both the normal section and the advantageous section. In addition, in this embodiment, a short MB (abbreviated as "SMB") that always wins a prize in any pushing order at the time of winning and ends with 1G on the condition that more than one medal is paid out is basically a winning. There is a long MB (abbreviated as "LMB") that wins a prize after passing through a state between flags and ends by digesting a plurality of games on the condition that more than 81 medals are paid out. LMB has no setting difference in winning probability, and SMB has a setting difference in winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 controls the ball ejection state by performing various lottery processes, and the various lottery processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a normal process and a common process. Divided. The main control board 71 performs only the normal processing during the normal section and does not perform the common processing, and can perform both the normal processing and the common processing during the advantageous section.

The normal process is a process performed according to the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol combination. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the main control board 71 draws various lottery according to the determined internal winning combination. Performs processing and controls the ball ejection state. This normal process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when a combination having no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 102, while the LMB is operating, various normal processes are performed according to the internal winning combination, but while the SMB is operating, the normal processing based on the internal winning combination is not performed. This is because the LMB has no setting difference in the winning probability, so there is no setting difference in the probability of staying in the state where the LMB is operating, but the SMB stays in the state where the SMB is operating because there is a setting difference in the winning probability. There is a setting difference in the probability of doing. Since the normal process is a process performed without a setting difference, the setting difference appears at different points in time when the probabilities of staying in the state are different. Therefore, the main control board 71 does not perform the normal process while the SMB is operating.

Further, the common process is a process performed when the bonus is operated, and in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs various lottery processes when the MB is operated to control the ball ejection state. This common process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when the MB is operated. The operation time of the MB means the timing at which the MB (bonus) is activated when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (see S235 in FIG. 62 of the first embodiment). In addition, unlike the above-mentioned common process, the main control board 71 can execute various lottery processes by the common process both when the SMB is operating and when the LMB is operating.

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "normal" is an initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared after the end of the advantageous section described later, and this "normal" Move to the state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery, you will win the advantageous section. There are "normal winning" and "ART winning" in the advantageous section winning. In the case of "normal winning", the game shifts to "normal advantage", which will be described later, as a ball ejection state from the next game. On the other hand, in the case of "ART winning", it shifts to "ART precursor" which will be described later as a ball ejection state. The advantageous section transition lottery will be described later.

In the advantageous section, "normal advantage", "SCZ", "ART precursor", "MB_HCZ", "additional special zone", "ART", and "ending" can be executed as the main payout states. The advantageous section is a state in which a navigation (bell navigation) that can win a prize in the push order small winning combination (in this embodiment, "push order bell" or "batting order bell") of the maximum number of payouts can be generated, and according to the advantageous section. It cannot be terminated until the privilege is granted. In this embodiment, the privilege according to the advantageous section means the generation of bell navigation (winning of the push order bell) or the operation of the bonus (MB). In other words, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section may be terminated until at least one of the termination conditions such as the occurrence of bell navigation (winning of the push order bell) or the activation of the bonus (MB) is satisfied. Can not. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. Advantageous section end Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, the advantageous section may be continued. However, in the present embodiment, except when the MB is activated, the bell navigation is not generated even if the push order bell is hit, for example, until 100 G has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section (notification suppression). State, also called "waiting section"). That is, in this embodiment, as a general rule, the first bell navigation can be generated according to the winning of the push order bell on the condition that the predetermined number of games (100 G) has passed without the MB operating from the start of the advantageous section ( It becomes a state where bell navigation can be generated and a state where notification is allowed). As an exception, even before the predetermined number of games (100G) has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, if the MB is won, the bell navigation can be generated (notification allowable state). Regardless of the number of games, the winning of the push order bell may be managed by a flag, and the bell navigation non-occurrence state and the bell navigation generation possible state may be controlled according to the presence or absence of the flag and the number of flags. Further, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is set even before the end condition of the advantageous section (push order bell winning, bonus (MB) operation) is satisfied. It is forcibly terminated and limit processing such as shifting to a normal section (“normal” state) is executed. For example, when 1500G is reached from the start of the advantageous section in the ART state, the limit process is executed even if the number of remaining games in the ART remains. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with ART, and the section is shifted to the normal section.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the "normal advantage" shifts to the "normal win" by the advantageous section lottery in the "normal". In addition, "normal advantage" shifts to the case where a lottery result that continues in the lottery at the end of the advantageous section at the end of "ART" is obtained, and also when the remaining 0G is left in the "SCZ" described later due to non-winning of ART. do. In the "normal advantage", the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery described later are executed. When the SCZ lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "SCZ" described later, and when the ART lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "ART precursor" described later.

The "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the "ART" winning probability of the ART lottery is different, such as "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor". The type of the normal mode is initially determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery, which will be described later, when the advantageous section lottery results in the "normal win" in the "normal". In the normal mode in the "normal advantage", the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and basically the mode is promoted to the mode in which the winning probability of the ART lottery is high or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result.

Further, the "normal advantage" includes SCZ modes in which the winning probabilities of "SCZ" such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", and "high accuracy D" are different. .. The type of SCZ mode is initially "low accuracy" and is promoted / fallen or maintained by the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage". In the present embodiment, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage" includes the SCZ mode transition lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed when the MB is activated, and the progress during the "normal advantage". There is an SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated to when the specified number of games is reached, which is performed when the number of games reaches the specified number of games. Here, in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode basically falls or is maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of "SCZ" is low, and in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed when the MB is activated, it is basic. Therefore, the SCZ mode is promoted or maintained to a mode in which the winning probability of "SCZ" is high.

In addition, the SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games is executed when, for example, the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" reaches 20G, 40G, 80G, and is promoted or maintained in a mode with a high winning probability of "SCZ". Will be done. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high probability D), and the winning probability increases in the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery from the beginning. In addition, after the "Hamari Ceiling", which is the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), is set, the advantageous section end lottery (see FIG. 122), which will be described later, will be performed, which will trigger the transition from "normal advantage" to "normal". It is desirable that there is no such thing and that the "ART" winning is substantially confirmed. By taking such a remedy, it is possible to give benefits to the player who has reduced the number of medals by advancing the game for about 120 games without winning the push order bell or MB. Even if you are unfortunately unable to pull the push order bell or MB (winning) in the "normally advantageous" state, you will be able to proceed with the game with the expectation that you will reach the "Hamari Ceiling". It is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game. The number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" means the number of games elapsed from the transition from "normal" to "normal advantage" to the transition to "ART" or "normal". At this time, it may shift to "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" before shifting to "ART" or "normal", but the number of elapsed games in this "SCZ" and the number of elapsed games in "MB_HCZ" can be determined. It may or may not be included in the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage". If the number of elapsed games in "SCZ" and the number of elapsed games in "MB_HCZ" are not included, "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" will be used in "normal advantage" after "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" is completed. The number of elapsed games that had been counted before the transition may be taken over to count the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage", or the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" may be counted from the beginning. good.

Further, in the mode of "Hamari ceiling" (high accuracy D), only "ART" may be drawn, or only "SCZ" may be drawn. In addition, the probability of winning "ART" or "SCZ" is higher than that of each normal mode and SCZ mode, and when the "Hamari Ceiling" is reached, it becomes difficult to win "ART" or "SCZ". It is desirable to prevent it from occurring in order to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, even if you win the "SCZ" and fail in the "SCZ", you can return to the "Hamari Ceiling" mode (high accuracy D), and benefit more than the "ART" winning section, which is a medal increase section. It is desirable to guarantee. In addition, if you win the "SCZ" in the "Hamari Ceiling" mode (high accuracy D) where the benefits of "ART" or higher are confirmed, the number of games until the start of "ART", which is the medal increase section, is the result. However, if you win the "ART" via the "SCZ", the ART will start from the "Additional Special Zone" described later, so it will be consumed during the "SCZ" of about 5 games. Even if you consider the medals, the expected value of the medals that can be obtained is higher than when you win directly to "ART", so even though "ART" is confirmed, the medals are reduced by extra chance games. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the "normal advantage", the winning probability of the MB described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning the MB is high by the time it reaches 100G. Then, when the MB wins, the bell navigation can be generated, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed after the MB operation is completed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. In short, if you shift to "normal advantage" and exceed the predetermined number of games (100G), you will be in a state where bell navigation can be generated, but there is a possibility that you will win a prize in a game where MB is established by the time you reach 100G or after a state between flags. Since it will be high, the average number of staying games of "normal advantage" is about 25G. As will be described in detail later, the MB symbol combination is pulled in 1 (in all push orders, which) so that the player does not intentionally delay the winning of the MB and the ball output rate increases. It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and reel stop control so that the prize can be won even if the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are stopped at the timing.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the "SCZ" shifts to the SCZ winning by SCZ lottery in the "normal advantage". The "SCZ" is a chance zone (CZ) that is relatively easy to win the "ART" described later. The "SCZ" includes types such as "normal" and "legend" in which the winning probability of the ART lottery differs depending on the SCZ mode. For example, when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy A" and the type is "legend", the probability of winning ART is higher than when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy A" and the type is "normal". Basically, when the type is "Legend", the probability of winning ART is higher than when it is "Normal". The type of SCZ is determined by lottery regardless of the role. If the ART lottery is won during the "SCZ", the state shifts from the "SCZ" to the "additional specialization zone" described later. When the specified number of games (5G) of "SCZ" is completed without winning the ART lottery, the game shifts to "normal advantage". In "SCZ", the navigation of the winning push order bell is basically not performed. Further, the type of "SCZ" may be determined by referring to the internal winning combination of the unit game (game) won in the SCZ lottery. For example, when the "SCZ" is won with the winning of the "strong bell", the "legend" may be selected more easily than the case of winning with another role. Further, the type of "SCZ" may refer to the SCZ mode at the time of winning "SCZ", and "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", "high accuracy". The selection rate of "Legend" may be different for each SCZ mode such as "D" or a part thereof. In addition, in the above-mentioned "Hamari Ceiling" mode (high accuracy D), the player's willingness to play is increased by providing a privilege such as the confirmation of "Legend" and providing relief measures for the player who has reduced the number of medals. It may be a specification that suppresses the decrease. In addition, during "SCZ", ART lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination for 5 games, but at the time of loss, it is considered that the internal winning combination is in a non-winning state, so ART lottery is not performed. May be. Further, the ART lottery may be performed by referring to at least one of the internal winning combination and the stop result. When the ART lottery is performed based on the stop roll, the player can enjoy the roll on the reel, and when the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination, the control load of the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the "ART precursor" shifts by becoming an ART win by ART lottery in "normal" or "normal advantage". The "ART precursor" shifts to "ART" through the ART preparation state after the specified number of games has been exhausted. However, if the normal mode stays in "special" and shifts to "ART precursor" by winning ART, it shifts to "ART" via the "additional specialization zone" described later. In the "ART precursor", the rank-up lottery of the initial mode of various modes used during ART is executed from the start. As for the various modes used during ART, the higher the rank, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, if the rank can be increased in the rank-up lottery in the "ART precursor", immediately after the start of "ART". Various modes (initial modes) are advantageous modes for the player.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "MB_HCZ" is transferred by winning the LMB regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. In "MB_HCZ", the HCZ mode promotion lottery and the ART lottery regardless of the role are executed. In the HCZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player. When the operation of the LMB is completed by winning the ART lottery, the process shifts from "MB_HCZ" to "ART" through the state of the "additional specialization zone" described later. When the operation of the LMB is completed without winning the ART lottery, the "MB_HCZ" shifts to the original payout state (for example, "normal" or "normal advantage").

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “additional specialization zone” is a period in which ART is easily added, and the number of ART winning games in “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ” or the specified number of games in “ART precursor”. Migrate after the end. Although details will be omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of "additional specialization zones" are provided, and in the "additional specialization zone", an additional lottery for the number of ART games is executed according to the type of the additional specialization zone. The method of making a profit of the type of "additional specialization zone" is arbitrary. For example, a plurality of additional specialization zones having different average additions may be provided, and a plurality of additional specialization zones having different additional game characteristics may be provided. It may be provided. After the specified number of games in the "additional special zone" has been exhausted, if you win the end lottery, if there is stock in the extra special zone, it will be in the state of "addition special zone" as it is, and if there is no stock in the extra special zone, "ART" Move to.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “ART” is a so-called ART state, and shifts from the “additional specialization zone” or the “ART precursor”. "ART" has modes such as ART mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode, which have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery, and additional lottery and various mode transition lottery are executed. For "ART", for example, 100G is given as the initial number of games, and the number of games is added according to the result of the additional lottery. At the end of the number of games of "ART", an advantageous section lottery regardless of the winning combination is executed, and if the lottery result is "continuation", it shifts to "normal advantage", while if it is "finished", it shifts to "normal". do.

The ART mode has a plurality of modes such as "mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C", which have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART, and basically "mode 0". Is the most disadvantageous ART mode, and the additional lottery during ART is advantageous in the order of "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" ("mode C" is the most advantageous). During ART, the ART mode transition lottery is executed, and the ART mode shifts according to the result of this transition lottery. The transition to ART mode basically maintains the current ART mode or falls to an ART mode lower than the current ART mode (falls from "mode C" to "mode B", ". Fall from "mode B" to "mode A", or fall from "mode A" to "mode 0" (note that it may include two or more steps of fall). Then, when the ART mode falls to the lowest "mode 0", the additional lottery during the ART is suppressed. On the other hand, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0" ("mode A", "mode B", "mode C"), the additional lottery etc. is not suppressed and the additional lottery etc. is performed with a normal probability. Win a lot. In this embodiment, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0", the winnings are all the same for the additional lottery and the like, but the ease of falling to "mode 0" where the additional lottery and the like are suppressed is easy. Since each ART mode is different, the degree of advantage such as additional lottery during ART is different. The ART mode is maintained or falls in the transition lottery by the normal processing, but may be promoted by the transition lottery by the common processing at the time of MB operation.

In the present embodiment, in the ART mode "mode 0", the additional lottery during ART is suppressed, but the additional lottery during ART may be prohibited instead of being suppressed. In a normal pachislot machine, the addition during ART is performed with a so-called rare role as an opportunity, but a weak rare role and a strong rare role may be provided as a rare role that triggers the addition. Here, when the extra lottery or the like is prohibited, the extra lottery will not be performed even when the strong rare role is won, and the player is likely to feel dissatisfied. In this respect, by suppressing the additional lottery as in the present embodiment, the additional lottery can be performed at the time of winning the "strong bell" which is a strong rare role, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied.

In addition, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART such as "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy", respectively. Basically, "normal" is the most disadvantageous mode, and "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy" are advantageous in the order of additional lottery during ART ("" "Ultra high accuracy" is the most advantageous). Chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are managed individually. For example, in a certain game, each mode may be a different mode (chance A mode "high accuracy", chance B mode "super". High accuracy ", chance C mode" normal "), some modes may be common (chance A mode" high accuracy ", chance B mode" high accuracy ", chance C mode" normal "), all modes May be common (chance A mode "high accuracy", chance B mode "high accuracy", chance C mode "high accuracy"). During ART, a transition lottery is executed for each mode, and each mode shifts individually according to the result of this transition lottery.

In Chance A mode, Chance B mode, and Chance C mode, the triggers for addition during the managed ART are different. In the present embodiment, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the additional lottery based on the “SP rip A2” described later (see FIG. 134), and the chance C mode is the additional lottery based on the “SP rip A1” described later. It is a mode for managing (see FIG. 135), and the chance A mode is a mode for managing additional lottery based on other combinations (see FIG. 133). It should be noted that the present invention is characterized in that individual modes are managed for each additional trigger, and the additional triggers managed by each mode are not limited to those described above. As an example, a mode to manage the addition based on the internal winning combination, a mode to manage the addition when the cycle is reached, a mode to manage the addition when the bonus is activated, a mode to manage the addition during the bonus operation, and an addition during ART preparation. It is possible to manage individual modes for each additional trigger, such as a mode for managing the mode and a mode for managing the addition while waiting for the end of ART.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the ball ejection state may shift to the "ending" during "ART". As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the advantageous section is started, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains. Although the limit processing itself is performed when 1500 games are reached, since the pachislot machine 1 internally manages the number of remaining games, it is possible to grasp in advance whether or not to reach 1500 games in the future before reaching 1500 games. can. Therefore, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to the "ending" when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes a predetermined value or more. In the case of shifting to the "ending", since it is decided that the limit processing will be performed in the future, the main control board 71 does not perform all the lottery regarding the addition. It should be noted that the threshold value of the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that triggers the transition to the "ending" can be arbitrarily set. As an example, since the limit processing is performed when 1500 games are reached, the threshold value may be 1500 games, but in the present embodiment, when the limit processing is performed, the ending effect between 100 games is performed, so that the threshold value is 1400 games. It is supposed to be. Then, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches 1400 games, the ending effect of 100 games is performed after the 1400 games are digested, and the limit processing is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "MB" is a so-called bonus state, and can be generated according to a prize in either a normal section or an advantageous section except during LMB operation. In "MB", a normal mode transition lottery, an SCZ mode transition lottery, an ART mode transition lottery, a lottery for adding the number of games, and the like are executed.

[Game state controlled by the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a gaming state under the control of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming states include RT0 and RT1 having a relatively low replay winning probability, and RT2 and RT3 having a relatively high replay winning probability. RT0 is the initial state after the setting change or the game state after the end of LMB, and is the state of staying when the ball ejection state is "normal", and when the RT1 transition symbol or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, RT1 Move to. RT1 is a state of staying mainly when the ball ejection state is "normal", and when the RT2 transition lip is displayed, it shifts to RT2. RT2 is in the middle of the transition to RT3, and when the RT3 transition rip is displayed, it shifts to RT3. RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the ball ejection state corresponds to "ART" or "additional specialization zone", and shifts to RT1 via the display of the RT1 transition symbol or the RT1 transition lip.

The initial state after the setting change is always the "normal" state at RT0, while the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change is the gaming state (generally RT1) before the power is turned off. Until then, it will be in the "normal" state. In the initial state after the setting change, if the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state of RT0, it becomes a relatively advantageous advantageous section than in the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change. .. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions "0" to "20" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol position "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "Black BAR", "Red BAR", "Red 7", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Replay C", "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Bell C". And "Bell D" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected, and the reel 3L is assigned. A correspondence relationship is defined in which symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 104, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 104 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "black BAR", "red BAR", "red 7", "replay A", "replay B", "replay C", and "bell A" as described above. , "Bell B", "Bell C" and "Bell D".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "black BAR" symbol (symbol code 1), and similarly, each symbol of "red BAR" to "bell D" (symbol code 2 to 10). Also, "00000010" to "00001011" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. In the symbol combination table, a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and a combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the privilege (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

Here, in the present embodiment, when the number of medals provided for the unit game is "2" (at the time of 2BET), the left column of the 3x3 symbols displayed on the display window 4 Two lines are valid: the bottom line connecting the lower row, the lower row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right column, and the Oyama line connecting the lower row of the left column, the middle row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right column. When the number of medals used for the unit game is "3" (at the time of 3BET), it becomes a line, and among the 3x3 symbols displayed on the display window 4, the middle and middle of the left column. One line of the center line connecting the middle row of the row and the middle row of the right column is the effective line. It should be noted that only 2BET games are possible while the SMB is operating, and only 3BET games are possible while the LMB is operating and the MB is not operating.

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which the data of the combination of the corresponding symbols is stored and the "data (bits corresponding to the combination of the symbols in the 1-byte data) stored in the storage area". Data for specifying) ”is specified.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

Further, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table shows the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination.

With reference to FIG. 105, for example, the combination names "S_red CL rip_01" to "S red CL rip_18" are combinations of symbols related to "W-matched rip". More specifically, in the combination names "S_red CL rip_01" to "S_red CL rip_18", both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

In addition, in the combination of the symbols related to the combination name "S_red CL rip_01" among the "W-matched rips", both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are displayed side by side in a straight line. In other combinations of symbols, both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are not displayed side by side in a straight line. This is because the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" may not be stopped and displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation due to the arrangement of the symbols arranged on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the combination name. The combination of symbols other than "S_red CL lip_01" indicates the combination of symbols displayed instead when the so-called eye-pressing operation is not appropriate. This also applies to other combinations of symbols such as "Red BAR Lip".

Further, the combination names "S_red XU lip" to "S_red XD lip_06" are a combination of symbols related to "red BAR lip", and three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. It is a combination of. Further, the combination names "S_red 7CL lip_01" and "S_red 7CL lip_02" are combinations of symbols related to "W-matched lip", and both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are linear. It is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. Further, the combination names "S_red 7XU lip_01" to "S_red 7XD lip_04" are combinations of symbols related to "red 7 lip", and three symbols "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

With reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the combination names "S_common lip 1_01" to "S_common lip 3_04" are combinations of symbols related to "red BAR fanning", and the symbol "red BAR" is linear. Although two can be displayed side by side, three are a combination of symbols that are not lined up. Similarly, the combination names "S_common lip 4_01" to "S_common lip 6_03" are a combination of symbols related to "red 7 fanning", and two symbols "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. Three are a combination of symbols that are not lined up.

That is, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed side by side in a straight line is called "red BAR lip", and two symbols "red BAR" are displayed side by side in a straight line. The combination of symbols that can be obtained but not lined up is called "red BAR fanning". Similarly, a combination of symbols in which three symbols "Red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line is called "Red 7 Lip", and two symbols "Red 7" can be displayed in a straight line, but 3 The combination of patterns that are not lined up is called "Red 7 Fan". Further, a combination of symbols in which both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line is called a "W-aligned lip".

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 109 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of RT0 to RT3, MB inside, and MB (operating).

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random random values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 109, it can be seen that the types of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination are different in each game state. By the way, in RT0 to RT3 or inside the MB, the push order bell ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No.34)" to "F_4 choice bell 4B (No.41)") has an internal winning probability of about 1/4. Determined as a role.

In addition, SMB is a bonus combination with a setting difference, and can be determined as a single winning combination of "SMB (No. 48)". On the other hand, LMB is a bonus combination with no setting difference, and can be determined as a duplicate winning combination of "LMB + F_fanning lip B (No. 49)" or "LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)". Here, although FIG. 109 shows only the internal lottery table for setting 1, SMBs having a setting difference between RT0 and RT3 are determined and set as internal winning combinations with a probability of about 1/18 in setting 1. In 6, it is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15. Further, when SMB and LMB are added, the MB (“SMB (No. 48)” to “LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)”) in RT0 to RT3 has a probability of about 1/17 of the internal winning in setting 1. It is determined as a combination, and in setting 6, it is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15.

In addition, "SMB" is only a single win, and the symbol combination corresponding to "SMB" is pulled in 1 (in all pressing orders, at any timing, the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R can be used for other purposes. The symbol arrangement and reel stop control are designed so that the prize can be won as long as it is not hindered. not. In the established game, "LMB" is internally won in duplicate with the replay, and the replay is given priority over "LMB", so when "LMB" is established, there is always a gap between the flags. It shifts to the inside of MB which is the state. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "LMB" is also drawn in 1, a prize is always won unless a small winning combination or a replaying combination that wins preferentially over the bonus is established at the same time in the inter-flag state. By adopting such a role configuration, the player intentionally avoids winning the MB by pushing, and delays the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, thereby increasing the arrival rate to the "Hamari ceiling". It is possible to prevent the strategy and prevent unexpected damage to the hall side.

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109, the lottery values of "F_RT1 middle lip 1 (No. 1)" to "F_common lip (No. 24)" between inside the MB and during the MB (operation) are omitted. However, in the inside of the MB and in the MB, the lottery value according to the RT state at that time is specified. Further, during the MB, the lottery values of "F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_1 card combination (No. 47)" are omitted, but during the operation of the MB, regardless of the internal lottery process. Win all small roles ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No.34)" to "F_1 card combination (No.47)").

As described above, in the MB, the winning probability of the current RT state (that is, the lottery value shown in FIG. 109) is inherited and the lottery is performed for the replay combination, while the lottery for the small combination is not performed. , All small roles can be determined as internal winning roles. As shown in FIG. 102, the LMB inherits the internal RT state that shifts due to the internal winning of the LMB combination (No. 49, 50 in FIG. 109) during the LMB operation, and the SMB takes over the SMB combination (No. 49 in FIG. 109). The RT state of any of RT0 to RT3, which is the RT state in the game internally won in .48), will be inherited during the SMB operation. As shown in FIG. 103, the transition to RT0 (low RT) is performed after the operation of the LMB is completed, but the SBM does not perform the transition of the RT state in any of the cases of internal winning, operation start and operation end. By not shifting from high RT to low RT triggered by SMB with a small number of acquisitions and a high winning probability, it is easy to maintain high RT and the rate of increase in ball output by "ART" is not reduced. ..

Further, the method for determining the internal winning combination in MB is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, in the MB, refer to the internal lottery table according to the current RT state (that is, the internal lottery table for the MB is not specified), and all the above-mentioned winning numbers (“F_4 choice bell 1A (No. 34)). ) ”To“ F_1 card combination (No. 47) ”), so that it can be determined whether or not it is a win based on the specified lottery value, and then all the small combinations (“F_1 choice bell) 1A (No. 34) ”to“ F_1 card combination (No. 47) ”) may be further determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, the data capacity related to the internal lottery table can be reduced.

Further, as a method for determining the internal winning combination in the MB, all the small winning combinations (“F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_1 sheet” without performing the lottery using the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109. The combination (No. 47) ”) may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the data capacity and the processing load can be further reduced.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 110 to 111 are tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

FIG. 110 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the symbol displayed as stopped in the normal state (that is, the game state of the main control board 71 is other than the inside of the MB and the MB (operation) (see FIG. 102)). It is a figure which shows. When the internal winning combination is determined, the main control board 71 has reels 3L, 3C, 3R so that the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 110 is displayed based on the determined internal winning combination and the order (pushing order) of the stop operation. To control.

For example, when "F_normal lip B (No. 14)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is the operation for the left reel 3L (left middle right or left and right middle) of "left 1st". When the stop operation is performed in the push order, the combination of symbols related to "replay" (see the content column of FIG. 106) is displayed, and the first stop operation is the operation for the reel 3C in the middle (middle left / right or middle right / left). When the stop operation is performed in the push order of a certain "middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning" is displayed, and the first stop operation is the operation for the right reel 3L (right left middle or right middle left). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red 7 reel" is displayed.

In addition, when "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed and " When the stop operation is performed in the push order of "Middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the push order of "Right 1st", it is related to "Red 7 Fan". The combination of symbols is displayed. Similarly, when "F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR fanning" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Right 1st", it becomes "Red 7 rip". The combination of the relevant symbols is displayed.

As described above, during ART, the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A2" is managed by the chance B mode, and the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A1" is managed by the chance C mode. The additional lottery based on the "SP rip A2" is performed when "F_SP rip A2 (No. 21)" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the main control of the pachi-slot machine 1 is performed. The board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 notify (instruct) the pressing order of the "middle 1st" and display the combination of the symbols related to the "red BAR lip". Similarly, the additional lottery based on the "SP Lip A1" is performed when "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the pachislot machine 1 The main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the above notify (instruct) the pressing order of the "right 1st" and display the combination of the symbols related to the "red 7 lip".

On the other hand, if there is an instruction for a symbol to be aimed at and the symbols are always aligned, the playability becomes monotonous. Therefore, when "F_normal lip B (No. 14)" is determined as the internal winning combination, Or, when the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A1" or the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A2" is not won, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 have a predetermined probability of " The push order in which the combination of the symbols related to "Red BAR fanning" and "Red 7 fanning" is displayed is notified (instructed), and the symbols are aligned. When the symbols are not aligned, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 notify (instruct) the pressing order of the "left 1st" and relate to "replay". Display the combination of symbols.

Also, when "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)" are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and "left 1st". When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the symbols are aligned. The combination (“red BAR fanning”, “red 7 fanning”) is not displayed, but the combination of symbols with the same pattern (“red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, “W matching lip”) is displayed. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the addition lottery is won during ART, the addition may be notified after being temporarily held instead of immediately notifying the addition, and "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)" may be notified. ) ”To“ F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24) ”are used when the addition is notified later. For example, when the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 notify the addition of 50 games held, the internal winning combination is "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)" to ". When "F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)" is determined, the push order in which the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed is notified (instructed), and the addition of 100 games held is notified. , The combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" is displayed. When notifying (instructing) the push order and notifying the addition of 150 games held, the combination of symbols related to "W Matching Lip" is displayed. Notify (instruct) the pressing order to be performed.

The combinations of symbols that can be displayed when other combinations are determined as internal winning combinations in normal times are as shown in FIG. 110, and the winning combinations and stops during the inside of the MB or during the MB (operation). The correspondence with the combination of the displayed symbols is as shown in FIG. 111.

[Flow of games during non-ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112, the flow of the game during non-ART (“normal” or “normal advantage”) will be described. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 basically has the playability of playing a game from non-ART to ART. As shown in FIG. 112 (A) and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the transition route from non-ART to ART is an ART direct hit route that directly transitions from non-ART to ART, and a non-ART to SCZ route. There is a route via SCZ that shifts to ART and a route via MB_HCZ that shifts from non-ART to ART via MB_HCZ. In the following, the flow between the ART direct hit route and the route via SCZ will be described.

FIG. 112B is a diagram showing the flow of the game of the ART direct hit route. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an advantageous section transition lottery during the “normal” (normal section), and shifts from the “normal” to the advantageous section when the transition lottery is won. do. In this advantageous section transition lottery, the main control board 71 also draws the type of the advantageous section of the migration destination. For example, when ART is determined as the migration destination, the main control board 71 directly shifts from "normal" to the ART of the advantageous section. Transition.

On the other hand, when the normal advantage is determined as the transition destination in the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition from "normal" to the normal advantage of the advantageous section is performed. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery during a normal advantage, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal advantage to the ART. In the present embodiment, when the ART is determined as the transition destination in the advantageous section transition lottery performed during the "normal", or when the ART lottery performed during the normal advantageous is won, the non-ART directly to the ART. Transition (ART direct hit route).

The ART lottery that is normally advantageous is performed based on the normal mode. This normal mode has a plurality of modes such as "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor", and the winning probability of the ART lottery is different for each mode. Specifically, the winning probability of ART lottery is highest in "super heaven", next highest in "heaven" and "special", next highest in "heaven preparation", and "low probability" in the normal mode. The lowest. The "next precursor" is a normal mode in which it is confirmed that the ART lottery will be won. The normal mode during the normal advantage can be arbitrarily shifted. For example, the main control board 71 performs a normal mode shift lottery according to the winning combination during the normal advantage, and shifts the normal mode according to the lottery result. be able to.

Further, comparing the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode with the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal", the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal" Is slightly higher than the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode "preparation for heaven". Therefore, in the present embodiment, depending on the normal mode, the winning probability of the ART lottery in the advantageous section may be lower than the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery during the “normal” (for example,). Normal mode "Low probability" "Preparation for heaven").

As described above, when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120 games (Hamari ceiling), the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D). Here, during the normal advantage after the ceiling, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery during the normal advantage based on the SCZ mode "high accuracy D" regardless of the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 115 described later, the ART lottery based on the SCZ mode “high accuracy D” has a higher winning probability than the normal mode “super heaven”.

FIG. 112 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game of the route via SCZ. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 usually performs the SCZ lottery during the advantage, and when the SCZ lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the SCZ. Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery during the SCZ, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART. In this way, when the SCZ lottery normally performed during the advantage is won and then the ART lottery performed during the SCZ is won, the non-ART shifts to the ART via the SCZ (route via SCZ). On the other hand, when the SCZ is completed without winning the ART lottery performed during the SCZ, the shift from the SCZ is usually advantageous. The SCZ ends when the specified number of games (5G) has elapsed without winning the ART lottery.

The SCZ lottery in the normal advantage and the ART lottery in the SCZ are performed based on the SCZ mode. This SCZ mode has a plurality of modes such as "low probability", "high probability A", "high probability B", "high probability C", and "high probability D", and the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery, respectively. The winning probability is different. Specifically, the winning probabilities of SCZ lottery and ART lottery are highest in "high accuracy D", next in "high accuracy C", and next in "high accuracy B" in SCZ mode. "High probability A" is the next highest, and "Low probability" is the lowest. These SCZ modes can be arbitrarily shifted, but in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a shift lottery of the SCZ mode according to the number of elapsed games in the normal advantage and the winning combination in the normal advantage. , The SCZ mode is shifted according to the lottery result.

[Various data tables used for ART direct hit routes]
Next, the configurations of various data tables used in the ART direct hit route will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

<Normal_advantageous section transition lottery table>
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the "normal" state (normal section). As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance, fanning""Rip","strongbell","fixedrole", and "LMB" are specified, and the lottery values of "non-winning", "normal advantage", "specific role", and "LMB" indicating the lottery result for each reference item are specified. It is stipulated. As the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 109, the "batting order bell" corresponds to "F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_4 selection bell 4B (No. 41)", and the "common bell, 1 sheet" is , "F_common bell A (No. 45) to F_ common bell B (No. 46)", "F_1 card combination (No. 47)", and "common lip, chance lip, weak chance" is " Corresponds to "F_common lip (No. 25)", "F_chance lip (No.26)", and "F_weak chance role (No.44)", and "medium chance, fanning lip" is "F_medium chance role". (No. 43) ”,“ F_Furning Lip A (No.31) ”to“ F_Faning Lip B (No.32) ”, and“ Strong Bell ”is“ F_Strong Bell (No.42) ”. The "fixed role" corresponds to "F_black BAR lip (No.37)", "F_red BAR lip (No.28)", "F_red7 lip A (No.29)" to "F_red". It corresponds to "7 rip B (No. 30)", and "LMB" corresponds to "LMB + F_fanning rip B (No. 49)" to "LMB + F_XD rip (No. 50)". In addition, the "specific combination" as a lottery result is a trigger for a specific process as a "determined combination". Further, in other lottery tables, "batting order rip", "SP rip A1", "SP rip A2", "SP rip B1", and "SP rip B2" may be used as reference items, but "batting order rip". Corresponds to "F_RT1 middle lip 1 (No. 1)" to "F_maintenance lip 5 (No. 19)", and "SP lip A1" corresponds to "F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)". "SP rip A2" corresponds to "F_SP rip A2 (No. 21)", "SP rip B1" corresponds to "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)", and "SP rip B2" corresponds to "SP rip B2". It corresponds to "F_SP rip B2 (No. 23)" and "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)".

According to the advantageous section transition lottery using such a normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, if, for example, a "batting order bell" is won in the "normal" state, there is a 1/256 probability that the "normal advantageous" lottery result will be obtained. Obtained, and based on the lottery result, it becomes a "normally advantageous" state from the next game. In addition, for example, if a "medium chance" or a "fanning lip" is won, a lottery result of "normal advantage" is obtained with a probability of 248/256, and based on the lottery result, a state of "normal advantage" is obtained from the next game. In addition, a lottery result of "ART" may be obtained with a probability of 8/256, and in this case, the state of "ART precursor" is set from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such "ART" is about 3.2% at the time of winning "Medium chance, fanning lip" and about 12.5% at the time of winning of "Strong bell", and it is winning in the "advantageous section". It is kept lower than the probability of doing.

<Normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table>
Next, the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 114. Normal_advantageous section initial normal mode The lottery table uses the normal mode of the first game as an advantageous section in the first game (unit game) immediately after shifting to the "advantageous section" by winning the advantageous section transition lottery from "normal". It is a table referred to when it is determined by the initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance" , "Further Lip", "Strong Bell", "Definite Role", "LMB" are specified, and as the type of normal mode that shows the lottery result for each reference item, "Low accuracy", "Preparation for heaven", "Heaven", The lottery values for "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor" are specified.

According to the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using such a normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, for example, when the "batting order bell" is won in the first game of "normal advantage", there is a probability of "low" of 248/256. A "probable" lottery result is obtained, and in the first game, a "low probable" normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, in the case of winning the "batting order bell", a lottery result of "preparation for heaven" is obtained with a probability of 6/256, and in this case, in the first game of "normal advantage", based on the lottery result, " It becomes the normal mode of "preparation for heaven". After the first game of "normal advantage", the normal mode may be promoted according to the lottery result of the normal mode transition lottery. The normal mode is promoted in the order of "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor" (including promotion of two or more stages), and is basically promoted. The winning probability of "ART" (see Fig. 115) is getting higher, but in the case of "special" which can be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of "ART" is "super heaven". It is not always higher than the case (see FIG. 115). Also, the winning probability of "ART" when the normal mode is "low probability" or "preparation for heaven" in the "normal advantage" state is lower than the winning probability of "ART" in the "normal" state. (See FIGS. 113 and 115). As a result, immediately after the transition from "normal" to "normal advantage", it tends to be more difficult to win "ART" than in the "normal" state. This will be described in detail with reference to the usual advantage_ART lottery table described below.

<Normal advantage_ART lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the normally advantageous_ART lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_ART lottery table is for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor") and SCZ mode "high accuracy D". It is a table provided and referred to when deciding the transition to "ART"("ARTwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, the normal advantage_ART lottery table corresponding to each mode has "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", and "weak chance" as reference items. "Chance Lip", "Medium Chance", and "Strong Bell" are specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified for each reference item.

According to the ART lottery using such a normal advantage_ART lottery table, in the "normal advantage" state, for example, in the "low probability" normal mode, if the "weak chance" is won, 1/256. The lottery result of the "ART" winning is obtained with a probability, and then the state shifts to the "ART" state via the "ART precursor".

Here, when the normal mode is "low probability" or "preparation for heaven", the probability of winning "ART" is the probability of winning "ART" ("low probability" or "heaven" when the winning probability of the internal winning combination is also taken into consideration. Preparation ") = 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81%. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 113, the probability of winning the "ART" by the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal" time is the same as the winning probability of the internal winning combination, and the probability of winning the "ART" (normal time) = 2. It will be about 5%. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "ART" is lower in the initial normal mode (mainly "low accuracy" or "preparation for heaven") after shifting to the "normal advantage" than in the "normal" state. It is suppressed, and it is more difficult to shift to "ART" immediately after shifting to "normal advantage" than in the "normal" state. As a result, even in the "normal" state, the expectation that the game may shift to the "ART" without going through the "normal advantage" is raised, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off, it cannot be said that the situation is the most disadvantageous, so let's stop the game when the lamp is turned off. It is possible to motivate the player who thinks that the game is to be continued. In addition, in amusement parks other than immediately after the store opens, a vacant platform will be selected from the situation where the predecessor has been left with the game stopped. Even if the above-mentioned measures are taken, there is a tendency for more units to be left unattended with the advantageous section lamp turned off, and the situation where the advantageous section lamp is turned off is the relatively most disadvantageous situation for that model. Once that is confirmed, the player may hesitate to start the game, thinking that it may not be necessary to start the game from the most unfavorable situation. It can be said that a player has a very high motivation to play when he / she goes to the game hall to see the model, but if such a player's motivation is reduced, the utilization rate will decrease. As mentioned above, by setting the specification that the situation where the advantageous section lamp is off is not necessarily the most disadvantageous situation in the game state of the model, it cannot be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation for the time being, and the game is played by this. It is also possible to expect the effect of suppressing the decrease in the operating rate by making the player feel the desire to go.

[Various data tables used for routes via SCZ]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in the route via SCZ will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified game is reached>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a lottery table for shifting to the SCZ mode when the normal advantage_specified game is reached will be described. Normal advantage_When the specified game is reached The SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each number of normally advantageous elapsed games ("20G elapsed", "40G elapsed", "80G elapsed"), and is currently (before transition). ) Is a table referred to when determining the destination SCZ mode from the SCZ mode. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the transition destination) is defined for each current SCZ mode in the lottery table for shifting to the SCZ mode when the normal advantage_specified game is reached.

According to the SCZ mode transition lottery using the SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified game is reached, in the SCZ mode transition lottery when the specified game is reached, the larger the number of games passed during the normal advantage, the more the number of games passed during the normal advantage. It is easy to shift to a higher SCZ mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), and then "high accuracy D" until the transition to ART. Never migrate from. This transition to "high accuracy D" is performed without performing a transition lottery, and the main control board 71 shifts the SCZ mode to "high accuracy D" when the number of elapsed games in the normal advantage reaches 120 G. ..

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table>
Next, the normally advantageous_SCZ mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”). It is a table referred to when determining the SCZ mode of the migration destination based on the internal winning combination for each mode. In the normal advantage _SCZ mode transition lottery table corresponding to each mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "chance lip", ""Mediumchance" and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the migration destination) is defined for each reference item.

According to the SCZ mode transition lottery using such a normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table, the SCZ mode shifts based on the internal winning combination during the normal advantage. In the example shown in FIG. 117, in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination, the SCZ mode only falls or is maintained, and is not promoted. In this respect, the SCZ mode may be promoted even in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination.

<Normal advantage_SCZ lottery table>
Next, the normally advantageous_SCZ lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The normally advantageous_SCZ lottery table is a table referred to when determining the transition to "SCZ"("SCZwinning") based on the SCZ mode in each game during the normal advantage. As shown in the figure, the normal advantage_SCZ lottery table has the current SCZ modes (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D” as reference items. ") Is specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified for each reference item.

According to the SCZ lottery using such a normal advantage_SCZ lottery table, in the "normal advantage" state, for example, in the SCZ mode of "high accuracy A", there is a probability of 24/256 that the "SCZ" win. The lottery result is obtained, and then the state shifts to the "SCZ" state. In the example shown in FIG. 118, in the SCZ lottery that is usually advantageous, the transition to "SCZ" is determined by a uniform lottery regardless of the internal winning combination, but the lottery is not limited to this, and the lottery is uniform. You may change or, in addition to the uniform lottery, perform the SCZ lottery based on the internal winning combination and the SCZ mode. Further, when the lottery result of "SCZ" is obtained in the SCZ lottery, the type of "SCZ" ("normal", "legend") may be determined by lottery. The lottery result of the type of "SCZ" may be different depending on the internal winning combination when the lottery result of the "SCZ" winning is obtained. For example, when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the "legend" may be easily determined, or the "legend" may be determined without fail.

<SCZ_ART lottery table>
Next, the SCZ_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The SCZ_ART lottery table is provided for each type of "SCZ" and SCZ mode type ("low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", "high accuracy D"). It is a table that is referred to when deciding the transition to "ART"("ARTwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ_ART lottery table, the type of SCZ (“normal”, “legend”) and the type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”) are used as reference items. , "High accuracy C", "High accuracy D"), Internal winning role ("Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium""Chance" and "strong bell") are specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified for each reference item.

According to the ART lottery using such an SCZ_ART lottery table, for example, in the "normal" "SCZ", when the SCZ mode is "high probability D", if the "medium chance" is won, 128/256 The lottery result of the "ART" winning is obtained with the probability of, and then the state shifts to the "ART" state via the "additional specialization zone".

<SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ>
Next, the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ is a table that is referred to when determining the SCZ mode of the migration destination for each current SCZ mode when "SCZ" ends without winning the transition to "ART". be. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the transition destination) is defined for each current SCZ mode.

According to the SCZ mode lottery using the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, for example, when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the SCZ mode is maintained as "high accuracy D".

<Normal advantage_advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the usually advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table will be described. Normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special"), and is "normal advantage". It is a table referred to when deciding the end of the advantageous section based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is "next precursor", there is no advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to "next precursor" in order not to end the advantageous section. Further, as described above, since the advantageous section is not terminated even when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the main control board 71 is advantageous regardless of the type of the normal mode when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D". Do not draw the end of the section. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak""Chance","ChanceLip","MediumChance", and "Strong Bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

According to the advantageous section end lottery using such a normal advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table, after reaching, for example, 100 G from the start of the advantageous section, in a "normally advantageous" state, for example, a "low probability" normal mode. In the case of, if the batting order bell is won, a lottery result of the end of the advantageous section can be obtained with a high probability of 252/256, and from the next game, the state of the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section to the "normal" of the normal section. It shifts to the state of. On the other hand, for example, even when the "batting order bell" is won in the "low accuracy" normal mode, the lottery result of continuing the advantageous section may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being terminated. It should be noted that the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section may be made after the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained. In addition, after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, by providing a transition waiting state for a predetermined number of games before the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section, the advantageous section can be continued or continued by winning in the predetermined number of games. / And It may be possible to perform continuous production over a plurality of games such as winning ART and ending an advantageous section due to defeat, which can enhance the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the continuous production and the defeat is confirmed during the continuous production, which reduces the interest. In addition, the continuous production is configured so that the basic conclusion can be reached with the number of games one or more shorter than the predetermined number of games waiting for transition, so that the pattern will be revived in the next game in which the defeat production as the basic conclusion occurs. You may do it. If the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of the third stop of the game in which the defeat confirmation effect has occurred, for example, there is no possibility that the advantageous section will be continued or the ART will be won in the revival effect, so that the motivation to continue the game of the next game is reduced. Therefore, it is a consideration to avoid such a situation. As a specific example, there is a case where the predetermined number of games is 5 games, and the content up to the conclusion of the continuous production excluding 1 game for the revival production is composed of a maximum of 4 games, and the revival production is performed in 1 game. By turning off the advantageous section lamp after the player confirms that the revival effect does not occur, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered in the middle. When the limiter (limit processing) is activated, the transition waiting state cannot be set until the transition from the "normal advantage" to the "normal" of the normal section. Therefore, immediately before the limiter is activated, the above-mentioned advantageous section is used. It is advisable to suppress the occurrence of continuous production related to continuation and prevent the situation where the continuous production is terminated by the limiter.

[Flow of games during ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 122, the flow of the game during "ART" (more specifically, the flow of the game regarding the addition during ART) will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 adds the number of games to extend the number of games that can continue "ART" and specializes in granting the right of "addition special zone". Two types of additions, zone stock addition and zone addition, are performed during "ART". Here, as described above, during "ART", the addition is controlled based on a plurality of modes such as ART mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode. Hereinafter, the relationship between the mode in "ART" and the addition will be described.

FIG. 122 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the ART mode and the addition. As described above, the ART mode includes a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage, such as "mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C", such as additional lottery during ART. The initial state of the ART mode at the time of transition to "ART" is basically "mode A", but when the transition to "ART" is triggered by the "determined role", "mode B" or "mode C" May start from. More specifically, when the mode shifts to "ART" triggered by "fixed role 1", the ART mode starts from "mode B", and when the mode shifts to "ART" triggered by "fixed role 2", the ART mode starts from "mode B". The mode starts from "mode C". The "fixed combination 1" corresponds to "F_red BAR lip (No. 28)", "F_red 7 lip A (No. 29)", and "F_red 7 lip B (No. 30)". , "Definite role 2" corresponds to "F_black BAR lip (No. 37)".

As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the ART mode has different additional expectations, and basically, "mode 0" has almost no additional expectation, and "mode A", "mode B", and "mode B" Mode C "is added with a predetermined probability. As described above, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0", the expected degree of addition is the same, but the ease of falling to "mode 0" is different in each ART mode. , The degree of advantage regarding addition in "ART" is different in "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C". Of course, by making the probability of winning the extra lottery in "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" different, the degree of advantage regarding the addition in "ART" may be different, and also. The degree of advantage regarding the addition may be different from both the probability of winning the addition lottery and the ease of falling to "mode 0". At this time, the ART mode, which is less likely to fall to "mode 0", may have a higher probability of winning an additional lottery (for example, "mode C" has the highest probability of winning an additional lottery). The ease of falling up to mode 0 "and the probability of winning an additional lottery may be mixed and adjusted. As an example, the probability of winning an additional lottery or the like in "mode A", which is most likely to fall into "mode 0", may be higher than the probability of winning an additional lottery or the like in "mode B". By doing so, when the ART mode falls to just before "mode 0", it becomes easier to add.

Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery during "ART", and shifts to the ART mode according to the result of the transition lottery. The ART mode transition lottery is performed by a lottery (normal process) based on the internal winning combination, and also by a common process when the MB is activated. In the present embodiment, in the transition lottery based on the normal process, the ART mode is basically maintained or dropped, but in the transition lottery based on the common process, the ART mode is basically maintained or promoted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ART mode may be promoted even in the transition lottery based on the normal processing, and the ART mode may be able to fall in the transition lottery based on the common processing.

Subsequently, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the chance mode and the addition. As described above, the present embodiment has a plurality of modes, a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode, in which the triggers for the addition to be managed are different. Specifically, the chance B mode manages the addition based on the "SP lip A2", and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the "SP lip A1". In "SP Lip A2", the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed in which three symbols "Red 7" are displayed side by side by performing the stop operation in the pressing order of "Right 1st". , "SP Lip A1" displays the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" in which three symbols "Red BAR" are displayed side by side by performing the stop operation in the pressing order of "Medium 1st". Therefore, it can be said that the chance B mode manages the addition based on the red 7 matching, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the red BAR matching. Further, the chance A mode manages the addition based on the winning combination other than "SP rip A1" and "SP rip A2".

In addition, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART such as "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy", respectively. There is a mode of. The main control board 71 performs an individual mode transition lottery for each of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode during "ART", and shifts the mode of each chance mode according to the result of the transition lottery. .. Therefore, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are managed individually during "ART". For example, in a certain game, each mode may be a different mode, or some modes are common. Sometimes it's all modes in common.

Subsequently, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the last freeze, which is a special addition in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 draws a lottery as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the number of remaining games of "ART" is subtracted from 1 to 0. When this lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value (= 1500-the number of games in the advantageous section digested) to the number of remaining games in the ART until the limit of the advantageous section is reached, and performs a predetermined freeze process. .. As an example, if the lottery of the last freeze is won when the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 times, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of ART. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a predetermined process at the end of ART. In addition, when the lottery of the last freeze is won, it is confirmed that the limit process is performed, so that the main control board 71 shifts the ball ejection state to the "ending", and then does not perform any additional lottery.

Further, the timing of drawing the last freeze may be any timing of the final game of "ART", for example, it may be at the start of the game of the final game of "ART", or the final game of "ART". It may be during the first stop operation to the third stop operation of. The stop operation may be when the stop switch 7S is turned on or when the stop switch 7S is turned off.

[Various data tables used during ART]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used for additional lottery in "ART" will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

FIGS. 123 to 128 shown below are data tables used for control related to the ART mode. Specifically, FIGS. 123 and 124 are data tables used for the ART mode transition lottery, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are data tables used for the additional lottery of the number of games based on the ART mode. 127 and 128 are data tables used for additional lottery of stock in specialized zones based on ART mode.

Further, FIGS. 129 to 135 are data tables used for control related to the chance mode. Specifically, FIG. 129 is a data table used for drawing chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) at the time of transition to “ART”, and FIGS. 130 to 132 are respective data tables. It is a data table used for the transition lottery of the chance mode, and FIGS. 133 to 135 are the data tables used for the additional lottery of the number of games based on each chance mode.

Further, FIG. 136 is a data table used for the additional lottery when the number of games of 100 games or more is added, and FIG. 137 is a data table used for the lottery for whether or not to generate the last freeze.

<ART_ART mode transition lottery table>
First, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The ART_ART mode transition lottery table is a table referred to when determining the transition destination of the ART mode based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) and is provided as a reference item. , "Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" are specified, and lottery results for each reference item. The lottery value corresponding to (the ART mode of the migration destination) is defined.

According to the ART mode transition lottery using such an ART_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery (normal processing) based on the internal winning combination during "ART". The ART mode is shifted based on the lottery result. For example, if the current ART mode is "mode B" and the "batting order bell" is won, a lottery result of transition (falling) to "mode A" is obtained with a probability of 12/256, and the ART mode is "mode". It shifts from "B" to "mode A".

<MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table>
Next, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table is a table used in the common process at the time of MB operation and referred to when determining the transition destination of the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table is a lottery result (transition destination) for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”). The lottery value corresponding to the ART mode) is specified.

According to the ART mode transition lottery using the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery (common process) when the MB is operated during "ART", and this lottery is performed. The ART mode is changed based on the result. For example, when the current ART mode is "mode 0", a lottery result of transition (promotion) to "mode A" is obtained with a probability of 63/256, and the ART mode is changed from "mode 0" to "mode A". And migrate.

<ART_normal extra lottery table>
Next, the ART_normal addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 125. The ART_normal additional lottery table is used in the additional lottery based on the ART mode performed during "ART", and determines the number of additional games (that is, the number of games for extending the period during which "ART" can be continued) based on the internal winning combination. It is a table that is referred to when doing so. As shown in the figure, the ART_normal addition lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”), and is provided as a reference item. , "Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" are specified, and lottery results for each reference item. The lottery value corresponding to (the number of additional games) is specified.

According to such an additional lottery using the ART_normal additional lottery table, the main control board 71 performs a lottery of the number of additional games based on the internal winning combination and the ART mode during "ART", and based on the lottery result. And extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. For example, if the current ART mode is "mode A" and the "medium chance" is won, a lottery result of "30G" is obtained as the number of additional games with a probability of 28/256, and the period during which "ART" can be continued. Will be extended by 30 games.

Here, referring to ART_normal addition lottery table, in the present embodiment, "100A", "100B", and "100C" may be determined as the lottery result of the number of addition games. These "100A" to "100C" are lottery results in which the number of additional games of at least 100 games or more is determined, and when "100A" to "100C" are determined, the main control board 71 is subsequently subjected to. The number of games to be actually added is drawn by referring to the common_upper game number lottery table shown in FIG. 136, which will be described later.

Comparing the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART mode "mode 0" and the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART modes "mode A" to "mode C", in the ART mode "mode 0", It can be seen that the additional lottery during ART is suppressed. Specifically, in the state where the ART mode is "mode 0", the addition is performed only when the "strong bell", which is a strong rare role, is won, and the addition is not performed when the other roles are won.

When the number of additional games for extending the period during which "ART" can be continued (the number of remaining games) is determined, the main control board 71 updates the value of a predetermined counter managed by itself (that is, adds it to the number of remaining games). (Add the number of games) to extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. At this time, the sub-control board 72 may notify the player of the number of added games when the main control board 71 determines the number of added games, and the main control board 71 determines the number of added games. It is also possible to temporarily hold the number of additional games added and notify the player of the number of games held at a predetermined opportunity thereafter. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 is a counter (notified counter) for counting the period (number of notified games) notified to the player as a counter for counting the period (number of remaining games) in which "ART" can be continued. ), And a counter (unannounced counter) that counts the unannounced period (the number of unannounced games) to the player. The value of the counter that counts the period during which "ART" managed on the main (main control board 71) side can be continued is the value of the notified counter managed on the sub (sub control board 72) side and the non-notified counter. Matches the sum with the value.

Here, the fact that the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games as an "trigger" to notify the number of additional games is not limited to the game in which the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games. This includes notifying after a predetermined number of games from the game. That is, in pachislot, the determined number of additional games may be notified by the result of continuous production performed over a plurality of games, and the main control board 71 may notify the number of additional games as a result of such continuous production. The decision may be included in notifying the number of additional games as an "opportunity".

In addition, the "predetermined opportunity" for notifying the number of additional games temporarily held can be arbitrarily set. For example, the apparent number of remaining games (notified counter) has become less than or equal to the predetermined value. It may be the case, and even though the so-called rare role (in the case of this embodiment, for example, "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong bell", etc.) is determined as the internal winning role. , It may be a case where the additional lottery is not won, or it may be after a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games, and the main control board 71 may have the number of additional games. It may be after a predetermined time has passed since the determination was made.

In the following, the notification of the number of additional games by the sub-control board 72 triggered by the determination of the number of additional games by the main control board 71 may be referred to as "immediate notification", and the main control board 71 may be referred to as "immediate notification". The temporary holding of the determined number of additional games by the sub-control board 72 may be referred to as "hidden" in the following. Further, in the present embodiment, the additional lottery is performed with various conditions as an opportunity, but the immediate notification of the number of additional games and the hiding are the results of the additional lottery using the ART_normal additional lottery table. Not only that, the lottery result of other additional lottery can be applied in the same manner.

<MB operation_ART game number additional lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table will be described. The MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table is a table used in common processing at the time of MB operation and referred to when determining the number of additional games based on the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the current ART mode type (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) is specified as a reference item in the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table. The lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of additional games) is defined for each reference item.

According to the additional lottery using the MB operation_ART game number additional lottery table, the main control board 71 draws the number of additional games based on the ART mode during "ART", and based on the lottery result. Extend the duration of "ART". Specifically, in the state where the ART mode is "mode 0", the main control board 71 does not determine the number of additional games in the common processing when the MB is operated ("0G" is always determined), and "mode 0". In a state other than "," 50G "is determined as the number of additional games with a probability of, for example, 12/256 in the common processing when the MB is operated, and the period during which" ART "can be continued is extended by 50 games.

<ART_History type lottery table>
Next, the ART_history type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The ART_history type lottery table is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to transfer with high history based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_history type lottery table has "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", and "medium" as reference items. "Chance" and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

According to the transition lottery to the history high accuracy using such an ART_history type lottery table, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the history high accuracy during "ART" based on the internal winning combination. If you win the lottery, set the history high accuracy state for 5 games. During the history high accuracy state between these five games, a stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is performed with reference to the ART_addition special zone lottery table described later in FIG. 128, and if the stock lottery is won, " One stock of "Additional Special Zone" will be given. For example, if a "medium chance" is won, a lottery result of winning with a high probability of history is obtained with a probability of 32/256, and the subsequent 5 games are in a high probability of history state.

<ART_Additional special zone lottery table>
Next, the ART_addition special zone lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 128. The ART_additional special zone lottery table is a table referred to when deciding whether or not to grant the stock of the "additional specialization zone" based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_addition special zone lottery table has "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", and "chance lip" as reference items. , "Medium chance" and "Strong bell" are specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, Gase 1, Gase 2, winning) is specified for each reference item. The lottery result "non-winning, Gase 1, Gase 2" means that the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone" is not winning, but in the case of the lottery result "Gase 1, Gase 2", the sub ( On the sub-control board 72) side, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that is non-winning but arouses the winning) is executed.

The main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the "additional special zone" by referring to the ART_addition special zone lottery table only during the history high accuracy in the "ART", and if it wins this lottery, it "adds". The type of "specialized zone" is determined by lottery, and the state shifts from "ART" to "additional specialized zone". According to the stock lottery of the "addition special zone" using the ART_addition special zone lottery table, for example, if you win the "medium chance" while the history is high, there is a 128/256 chance of "addition specialization". The lottery result of winning is obtained in the stock lottery of "Zone".

Here, comparing the ART_history type lottery table shown in FIG. 127 and the ART_addition special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128, both tables are the lottery results when the "batting order bell" and "common bell" are won. It can be seen that only "non-winning" is determined. Similarly, when winning "Common Lip, Fake Lip", "Weak Chance", "Chance Lip", "Medium Chance", and "Strong Bell", both tables may be determined with a predetermined probability. I understand. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the winning combination that can be transferred to the history high accuracy is won, the stock lottery of the "addition special zone" will be won with a predetermined probability. In other words, in this embodiment, rare roles ("common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong bell") are played twice during the five games in "ART". If you win, you may win the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone". In this embodiment, it is possible to control the addition of "ART" based on the game result between 5 games without having the history data (for example, the history of the winning combination between 5 games). The points will be described later.

In addition, comparing both tables, in the ART_history type lottery table, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the history high accuracy differs depending on the type of the winning rare role, whereas in the ART_addition special zone lottery table, the probability is different. , It can be seen that the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is won with a uniform probability (for example, 50%) regardless of the type of the winning rare role. As a result, in the present embodiment, if the history can be transferred with high accuracy, the stock of the "additional special zone" can be expected regardless of the type of the rare role (even when the so-called weak rare role is won). become.

It should be noted that the lottery for shifting to the history high accuracy with reference to the ART_history type lottery table is performed in a state other than "mode 0" in the ART mode, and is not performed in a state in which the ART mode is "mode 0". Therefore, the history does not shift with high accuracy during "mode 0". Since the stock lottery of the "addition special zone" referring to the ART_addition special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128 is performed only during the high accuracy of the history, the ART mode "mode 0" has a low expectation of addition. You can see that.

<ART_Initial high-accuracy lottery table>
Next, the ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table is a table referred to when the initial states of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are determined at the start of "ART". As shown in the figure, the ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table defines the opportunity to shift to "ART" as a reference item, and the lottery result (ALL normal, chance A, chance B, chance A + B, chance) for each reference item. The lottery value corresponding to C, chance A + C, chance B + C, ALL high accuracy) is defined.

As described above, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode have a plurality of modes of "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy". The lottery result determined by the lottery with reference to the ART_initial high accuracy lottery table indicates the type of chance mode in which "high accuracy" is set as the initial state at the start of "ART". For example, when the main control board 71 determines "chance A" as a lottery result, the chance A mode "high accuracy", the chance B mode "normal", and the chance C mode "normal" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART". If "Chance B + C" is decided as the lottery result, chance A mode "normal", chance B mode "high accuracy", chance C mode "high accuracy" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART". If "ALL normal" is determined as the lottery result, chance A mode "normal", chance B mode "normal", and chance C mode "normal" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART".

Further, the transition trigger to "ART" provided as a reference item can be arbitrarily set, but in this embodiment, the following transition trigger is used as an example. For example, when the main control board 71 shifts to "ART" via "SCZ" of "Legend", a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity B", and "F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29) ”,“ F_Red 7 Lip B (No.30) ”in the case of shifting to“ ART ”, a lottery is performed using the reference item of“ Trigger C ”and“ F_Red BAR Lip (No.30) ”. If you move to "ART" with the winning of ".28)", a lottery will be performed using the reference item of "Opportunity D", and "ART" will be triggered by the winning of "F_Black BAR Lip (No.37)". In the case of shifting to "ART", a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity E", and in the case of shifting to "ART" triggered by other conditions, a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity A".

According to the lottery using such ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table, if "trigger C (" F_red 7 lip A "" F_red 7 lip B ")" is used as an opportunity to shift to "ART", chance B If the initial state of the mode is always "high accuracy" and the transition to "ART" is triggered by "trigger D (" F_red BAR lip ")", the initial state of chance C mode is always "high accuracy". become. Here, as described above, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red BAR alignment. Therefore, in the case of shifting to "ART" triggered by Red 7 ("F_Red 7 Lip A" and "F_Red 7 Lip B"), the initial state of "ART" was given preferential treatment based on the Red 7 set. When the state is changed and the red BAR (“F_red BAR lip”) is used as an opportunity to shift to the “ART”, the initial state of the “ART” is in a state where the addition based on the red BAR alignment is given preferential treatment.

<ART_Chance mode transition lottery table>
Next, the ART_chance mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. The ART_chance mode transition lottery table is referred to in the chance mode transition lottery, FIG. 130 is a table referred to in the chance A mode transition lottery, and FIG. 131 is a table referred to in the chance B mode transition lottery. FIG. 132 is a table referred to in the chance C mode transition lottery. ART_Chance mode transition lottery table has the type of chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", "ultra high accuracy". ), And the reference items are "Batting Order Bell", "Common Bell, 1 Sheet", "Common Lip, Fake Lip", "Weak Chance", "Chance Lip", "Medium Chance", and "Strong Bell". The lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (destination mode) is specified for each reference item.

According to the transition lottery using such an ART_chance mode transition lottery table, when the main control board 71 wins the "chance lip" in the state where the chance A mode is "normal" during "ART", 32 / With a probability of 256, a lottery result of transition to "highly accurate preparation" is obtained, and chance A mode shifts from "normal" to "highly accurate preparation". As described above, the main control board 71 manages the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode individually. That is, when the main control board 71 determines the internal winning combination, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are individually transferred to each other based on the internal winning combination.

<Additional lottery table for ART_Chance mode>
Next, the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The additional lottery table for ART_chance mode is referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance mode, FIG. 133 is the table referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance A mode, and FIG. 134 is the additional lottery based on the chance B mode. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 135 is a table to be referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance C mode. The additional lottery table for ART_chance mode includes the types of chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", "ultra high accuracy". "), And as reference items," batting order bell "," common bell, 1 sheet "," batting order lip "," SP lip A1 "," SP lip A2 "," SP lip B1 "," SP lip "B2", "weak chance, common rip", "chance rip", "medium chance, fake rip", "strong bell" are specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of additional games) is specified for each reference item. To.

According to the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode, the main control board 71 is set to the internal winning combination and the chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) during "ART". Based on this, the number of additional games will be drawn, and based on the lottery result, the period during which "ART" can be continued will be extended. In the unit game during "ART", the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery based on the chance A mode, an additional lottery based on the chance B mode, and an additional lottery based on the chance C mode, respectively. However, as you can see by comparing the figures, the winning combination that may win the extra lottery is different for each chance mode, so the addition based on the chance A mode, the addition based on the chance B mode, and the chance C mode. There is no overlap with the addition based on.

In the present embodiment, the additional lottery based on the ART mode is performed during "ART", but the additional lottery based on the ART mode and the additional lottery based on the chance mode may overlap. For example, when the "strong bell" is won, "30G" is determined as the number of additional games based on the ART mode (see FIG. 125), and "50G" is determined as the number of additional games based on the chance A mode. (See FIG. 133), "80G (= 30 + 50)" will be added in the game.

Here, referring to the ART_addition lottery table for chance B mode shown in FIG. 134, the number of additional games may be determined at the time of winning the "SP Lip A2" in the additional lottery based on the chance B mode. .. As described above in FIG. 110, when the "SP Lip A2" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed and the "middle 1st" is pressed. When the stop operation is performed in order, the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR fanning" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed. Will be done. Aligning specific symbols that are normally difficult to align when the addition is performed can improve the interest of the game because the addition and the alignment of the symbols are related. When the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is won at the time of winning the "SP Lip A2" (that is, when a lottery result other than "0G" is determined), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 are As the first stop operation, it is preferable to stop the right reel 3R and perform an effect of encouraging the aim of the symbol "Red 7" (as a result, the combination of the symbols related to the "Red 7 lip" is displayed). On the other hand, when the "SP Lip A2" is won and the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is not won (that is, when "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect of urging the left reel 3L to be stopped as the first stop operation (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed), and the middle reel 3C is stopped as the first stop operation, and the symbol is displayed. It is also possible to perform an effect that encourages the aim of "red BAR" (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning" is displayed).

The same applies to the chance C mode, and when the additional lottery based on the chance C mode is won at the time of winning the "SP Lip A1" (that is, when other than "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and (Or) The sub-control board 72 stops the reel 3C inside as the first stop operation, and also has an effect of encouraging the aim of the symbol "red BAR" (as a result, the combination of the symbols related to the "red BAR lip" is displayed). When "SP Lip A2" is won and the additional lottery based on the chance C mode is not won (that is, when "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect of urging the left reel 3L to be stopped as the first stop operation (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed), and the right reel 3R is stopped as the first stop operation, and the symbol is displayed. You may also perform an effect that encourages you to aim for "Red 7" (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 reel" is displayed).

<Common_Top-ranked game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a common_upper game number lottery table will be described. The common_upper game number lottery table is a table that is referred to when any of "100A", "100B", and "100C" is determined as a lottery result in the additional lottery in "ART". In the common_top additional game number lottery table, "100A", "100B", and "100C" are defined as reference items, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of additional games) is defined for each reference item.

When the main control board 71 determines any of "100A", "100B", and "100C" in the additional lottery based on the ART mode and the additional lottery based on the chance mode performed during "ART", the number of common_upper additional games is determined. Refer to the lottery table and draw the number of additional games. For example, when "100A" is determined by an additional lottery based on the ART mode, the main control board 71 determines "100G" as the number of additional games with a probability of 246/256, and as the number of additional games with a probability of 8/256. "200G" is decided, and "300G" is decided as the number of additional games with a probability of 2/256.

<ART_Last Freeze Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_last freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 137. The ART_last freeze lottery table is a table referred to at the end of "ART" when deciding whether or not to perform the last freeze regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_last freeze lottery table defines a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning).

When the value of the counter for counting the number of remaining games of "ART" managed by the main control board 71 becomes 0, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the ART_last freeze lottery table, and when the lottery is won, " The value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached is added to the number of remaining games of "ART", and a predetermined freeze process is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the common_end advantageous section end lottery table shown in FIG. 138 below.

<Common_End of advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the common_end advantageous section end lottery table will be described. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is, for example, a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section at the end of "ART" regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table.

According to the end-time advantageous section end lottery using such a common_end-time advantageous section end lottery table, for example, at the end when the number of games of "ART" is exhausted, 243/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. The lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a probability, and the state shifts to the "normal" state of the normal section from the next game. On the other hand, for example, at the end when the number of games of "ART" is exhausted, a lottery result of continuation of an advantageous section may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by shifting from the "ART" to the "normally advantageous" state without ending the advantageous section. In this embodiment, in the ART (AT) related processing, a common table is adopted for all the settings 1 to 6. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling due to an extremely high difference in ART (AT) settings, and to reduce the data capacity required for ART (AT) lottery in the main control board 71. Can be done.

[About the flow of advantageous sections]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 146. FIGS. 139 to 141 illustrate the specification example 1 in which the bell navigation is generated from the beginning of the advantageous section, and in the specification example 1, the flow of the advantageous section is shown for three patterns in which the batting order bell combination and the winning order of the MB are different. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment of the third embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the first embodiment, the bell navigation is suppressed (the bell navigation is not generated) immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 143 is a diagram for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section between Specification Example 1 and Example 1, and shows the effect of Example 1 shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second specification, and FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment of the third embodiment. Is. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining, as the third embodiment of the third embodiment, after the power is turned on when the setting is not changed and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed. The specification example is a specification exemplified for explaining the effect of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technique, and when adopted, the effect according to each specification is exhibited. It is a specification that can be appropriately adopted as a means of solving a problem depending on the playability intended by the planner. In the following description, "MB" corresponds to both "SMB" and "LMB" shown in FIG. 109, so these are collectively referred to as "MB", but "SMB" having a high winning probability is mainly used. Assuming, the state between flags is not shown.

<End condition of advantageous section>
The end conditions of the advantageous section in Specification Example 1 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 and Example 1 shown in FIG. 142 are as follows.
Condition 1: Occurrence of push order notification by winning the batting order bell at least once Condition 2: At least one prize or operation of MB (Because it operates by winning, it may be judged based on either)
Condition 3: A predetermined end condition is satisfied on the premise that at least one of condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. When the predetermined end condition in this condition 3 is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated. There is no difference between 1 and Example 1.
In addition, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section (20 games or more have elapsed), or the end lottery of each game advantageous section is performed from the start of the advantageous section, and the end lottery is performed before the above-mentioned condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. Even if the end flag is set and the advantageous section is terminated by assuming that the condition 3 is satisfied in the game that satisfies the condition 1 by the occurrence of the bell navigation or the game that satisfies the condition 2 by the MB operation. good. Further, a transition waiting state for a predetermined number of games of at least one game may be provided between the satisfaction of the condition 3 and the end of the advantageous section. Although it is described as MB for convenience of explanation, the operation of a predetermined bonus other than MB may be an end condition. In addition, as a modification, in a model without a bonus, or a model with only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for only one game as a bonus, navigation occurs due to the establishment of a batting order bell without setting condition 2. There is no problem even if only is set as a prerequisite for the end of the advantageous section.

<Specification example 1>
Specification example 1 is characterized in that the bell navigation is confirmed from the start of the advantageous section to the first hit of the batting order bell. In this specification, after the batting order bell is hit in the advantageous section, the bell navigation (push order notification) is performed as soon as possible, the bell navigation is confirmed immediately after the start of the advantageous section, and if the batting order bell is hit, the first bell navigation is performed accordingly. Will be generated, and then the advantageous section will be terminated according to the result of the lottery. The purpose of this specification is to shift the advantageous section to the endable state as soon as possible when the "ART", which is the ART state in which the number of medals increases uniformly, is not won. For example, when a player wins an advantageous section of "normal advantage", the number of games that is excessively long is notified as an advantageous section even though the result is ART non-winning, and the game is difficult for the player to stop the game. When forced to continue, a player who feels that he / she has been shown an extremely long fanning that he / she may not have hit in the end may significantly reduce his / her interest in the gaming machine, and appropriately suppresses such a case. It is a specification that can be done.
As a flow until the end of the advantageous section, the three patterns of FIGS. 139 to 141 will be described below in the order of the drawings.
First, FIG. 139 shows a case where the batting order bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, since the batting order bell is acquired by the player by the navigation, the "payout by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143 occurs. The winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and although there is a setting difference in the winning probability of MB, it is about 1/15 to 1/17, so this pattern that the batting order bell wins before MB is The frequency of occurrence is high. In addition, it may happen that you win the MB before the end of the advantageous section after hitting the batting order bell and the push order navigation occurs more than once, but the winning number of MB and the number of acquisitions during MB operation are pushed. It is not affected by the occurrence of forward navigation, and does not affect the "payout by bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. As will be described together, the MBs of this specification example and the embodiment have the same specifications, and the specifications are such that 9 sheets can be paid out if the correct answer is the push position and 8 sheets can be paid out if the correct answer is the push position. In order to secure the minimum skill intervention, there is a case where 8 cards are won, but for example, 9 cards can be obtained by stopping the red BAR symbol on at least one reel. The specifications are such that even beginners can play games with peace of mind as they can easily win prizes.

Next, FIG. 140 shows a pattern in the case where the MB is won before the batting order bell in the specification example 1 and then the advantageous section is completed without hitting the batting order bell. As described above, this pattern does not cause the "payout by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143, but since the MB has a lower winning probability than the batting order bell, the figure is shown in the figure. It occurs less frequently than the pattern shown in 139. In addition, when only the winning probability is considered, if the MB winning probability is set to a higher probability than the batting order bell, it is considered that the frequency of occurrence of bell navigation can be suppressed, but even if the number of payouts by the MB is small, it will be issued. In the ball test, there is a possibility of nonconformity in the item of the character ratio (nonconformity reason due to the ratio of the bonus payout to the total payout being too high), and the solution of increasing the MB winning probability than the batting order bell is adopted. In that case, the degree of freedom in batting design is extremely low.

Next, FIG. 141 is a pattern in which the batting order bell wins before the MB in the specification example 1 and the bell navigation occurs, but the MB wins before the end of the advantageous section thereafter. In this case, as a result, the end condition of the advantageous section can be satisfied by satisfying the above condition 2 by winning and operating the MB, so that the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section is suppressed. , I want to increase the acquisition of balls in ART (sometimes referred to as this AT) by that amount and increase the interest of the game by getting enough balls in "ART" which is the "hit" that the player has been waiting for. From the point of view of the ball ejection design concept, it can be said that the specification that allows the batting order bell navigation to occur immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an unfavorable direction. This event can be suppressed by the method of immediately ending the advantageous section when the first bell navigation occurs, but since the batting order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, immediately after the advantageous section lamp lights up. In about 4 games on average, when the bell navigation occurs once and the advantageous section ends, a state of "normal advantage" is set and it is directed whether or not to win ART for an appropriate number of games. Since it is difficult to entertain with the game, if this method is adopted, the degree of freedom in ball ejection design and production design will be significantly narrowed.

<Example 1>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
First condition: From the start of the advantageous section until 100 G has passed, even if the batting order bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated.
Second condition: The winning probability of MB is set to about 1/17, which is relatively high (see FIG. 109).
Third condition: After the MB operation is completed, the advantageous section is terminated according to the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, from the start of the advantageous section until it reaches 100G, even if the batting order bell is hit, the advantageous section cannot be ended (bell navigation non-occurrence state), but the probability of winning the MB is relatively high, so 100G. It is easy to win the MB by then, and then the end lottery of the advantageous section is performed for each game (unit game) as the end possible state of the advantageous section (bell navigation generation possible state), and the MB is activated by winning the end of the advantageous section. After the end, the advantageous section will end. According to the first embodiment, the player suppresses the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normal advantageous" state of the advantageous section, and increases the acquisition of the ball ejection in the ART (sometimes referred to as this AT) by that amount. From the ball-out design concept of wanting to get enough balls to get enough balls in the long-awaited "hit" and enhance the interest of the game, as shown in Fig. 139 and Fig. 141, the batting order Bell Navi is "normally advantageous". It is possible to suppress an unfavorable event in which a bell is won by the occurrence and a ball is obtained. In addition, since the acquisition of medals by MB operation is not affected by navigation, by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in "normal advantage", the base value between "normal" and "normal advantage" in the normal section (input). The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of medals) can be suppressed to a value close to the approximate value, and the amount of balls to be paid out can be distributed to "ART".

In such a flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, the occurrence of push order navigation in the advantageous section can be appropriately suppressed, and the degree of freedom in ball ejection design can be increased. Specifically, it is possible to allocate the amount of balls shown by the white arrows to the balls such as "ART" without increasing the number of balls to be played in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the ball.

In the explanation so far, the MB has been illustrated and described as an "SMB" that always wins a prize in the established game. On the other hand, in "LMB", winning is hindered by replay in the established game, and a bonus flag-to-flag state (carrying over) occurs. Here, in the state between the flags of the bonus, the specification may be such that the push order navigation is generated, or the specification may not be generated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of bell navigation in the above-mentioned "normally advantageous" state, it is effective to have a specification that does not generate push order navigation. In addition, based on the fact that the LMB was won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 109, the winning probability is 146/65536) during the advantageous section, the winning was won for "ART". In the case of making the game proceed, the game progresses in the flow of "ART" while the flag state, LMB winning, LMB operation, and the flag state is also a game state that the player can equate with the ART winning state. It is desirable to have specifications that generate. In the case of Example 1, there is only one type of carry-over bonus, but in the case of a model equipped with multiple types of carry-over bonuses such as LMB1 and LMB2, push order navigation is performed according to the type of bonus being carried over. May be generated or not generated so that the player can guess the type of bonus depending on the presence or absence of navigation, and in the batting order bell winning game being carried over, the specification is to always generate navigation. Alternatively, it may be processed uniformly as a specification that does not occur at all, and the bonus type may be narrowed down by the stop roll (so-called reach) of the main reel because it is difficult to narrow down the bonus type depending on the presence or absence of navigation.

<Specification example 2>
Next, the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As shown in the figure, in Specification Example 2, when the ART finishes after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 G), the advantageous section also ends and the initialization process is performed. As a result, after the ART is completed, the next game will shift to the normal section (non-advantageous section). According to the flow at the end of such an advantageous section, it is possible to play the game while expecting to get a certain amount of balls during ART, but in exchange for that, it shifts to the normal section after the end of ART. Since it is confirmed that the game will end, the player tends to end the game at the end of the ART. That is, if the specifications are such that the advantageous section ends at the end of the ART, not only the interest of the game cannot be enhanced, but also the operating rate of the game machine is likely to decrease.

<Example 2>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART finishes after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 G), the above-mentioned end-time advantageous section end lottery is performed. When the result of the end-time advantageous section end lottery is "end", as in the case of the specification example 2, after the ART ends, the game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section) from the next game.

On the other hand, if "continue" is won as a result of the end-time advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, the normal mode is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to the "normal" of the normal section, and the advantageous section "normal" is determined. Shift to "usually advantageous". At this time, in the "normally advantageous" state, since the predetermined number of games (100G) is basically exceeded from the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game, and thus the advantageous section end lottery is performed. If you win, it will shift to the "normal" state of the normal section through the initialization process of the advantageous section.

Also, in the "normal advantage" state, if the rank of the normal mode is promoted and becomes higher (for example, in the case of "super heaven" or "next precursor"), it becomes easier to win the ART lottery, and then the ART win. , "ART precursor" and so on, and will shift to ART again.

According to the flow at the end of the advantageous section of the second embodiment, the expectation that the advantageous section may continue and shift to the ART even after the end of the ART is raised, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. This can contribute to increasing the operating rate of gaming machines.

<Example 3>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, for example, the mode displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening the store may be different.

For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened without changing the settings, as shown in (a) of the figure, a general display according to the "normal" state is displayed. The aspect is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, in general, the gaming state is RT1.

On the other hand, in the initial state after the setting is changed (for example, the setting is changed from the setting 1 to the same setting again after the setting change work is performed) before the store opens, (b) in the figure. ), In order to suggest that it is in RT0, which is different from RT1 which generally stays as a game state at the time of opening, the display unit 100 has a display mode such as "early rising is Sanbun no Toku stage". Is displayed in. That is, in the initial state at the time of opening after the setting change, the gaming state is RT0, and it is suggested in the display unit 100 that this RT0 is in the "normal" state.

When the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), the advantage is provided in any of the first to third patterns as shown below. ..
(First pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: It is easy to win the ART because there are balls in the push order navigation twice or more.
In the case of winning the advantageous section in other RTs: It is easy to win the CZ with one push order navigation without any balls.
(Second pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: The winning of ART is confirmed.
If you win an advantageous section at another RT: You can win either AR or CZ.
(Third pattern)
In the case of winning an advantageous section at RT0: Of ART and CZ, the ratio of winning ART is relatively high. In addition, "relatively high" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 100% and the ratio of winning CZ is 0%.
In the case of winning an advantageous section in another RT: Of ART and CZ, the ratio of winning in ART is relatively low. In addition, "relatively low" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 0% and the ratio of winning CZ is 100%.

According to such an initial state of the third embodiment, it is possible to determine a state in which an advantage can be expected even in a "normal" state depending on the display mode at the time of opening, and when the player selects a gaming machine in the morning. It can be effectively used as a guide.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned specifications have a demerit that the setting change is easy for the amusement park side. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the set value has changed from the previous day by re-setting to the same setting, but if the number of installed units is large, the work of changing the setting of all units is enormous. It takes effort. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the same screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) may be displayed after the power is turned on, provided that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous power failure. In this case, the predetermined time is generally set to about 2 hours or 4 hours after a midnight power failure so that the suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) is not displayed due to a temporary power failure during business hours. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

Then, when the player performs an operation of turning on the mobile terminal interlocking function on the gaming machine so that the user can actively use the service provided by the manufacturer such as the mobile terminal interlocking function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). Only the specification may be used to display an advantageous screen at the time of opening as shown in FIG. 146 (a). Further, on the customer waiting screen in which the player has not inserted any medals, a common customer waiting screen (demo screen) may be displayed so that it cannot be determined whether or not the setting has been changed. .. By doing this, it will be possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing a medal and actually inserting the medal, so the motivation to sit down with the player and borrow the medal and from the time of opening the store Can motivate customers to visit the store. However, in a store where the number of players at the time of opening is extremely small, there may be a player who tries to monopolize the advantageous RT0 by walking across a plurality of medals with a borrowed medal. As a countermeasure for such a player, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) can be displayed by the game hall staff in the hall menu. A store that does not want to be determined may be provided with a function that enables a setting that displays a normal screen as shown in FIG. 146 (b) even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the fluctuation control means, the internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the state control means, and the advantageous state notification. It functions as a means, a mode control means, and an RT control means. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub-control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification means. These functions will be described in the following appendix, and the corresponding ones in the embodiment are written in parentheses at the end.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may have, for example, a function as described below.

For example, in the case of winning (continuing) by the end lottery at the end of the advantageous section at the end of ART, a state of the guaranteed section in which the stay in the "normally advantageous" advantageous section is guaranteed for a predetermined number of games may be provided. .. If a guaranteed section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ends in one game or two games even though the lottery for ending the advantageous section at the end is won, and even if the advantageous section is continued, the game is played. It is possible to suppress a person's feeling of stress.

As the guarantee section, a fixed period such as 20 games may be given. When the period is fixed, the load due to the lottery process by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game playability becomes clear. On the other hand, the number of games to be granted as the guaranteed section may be determined by lottery based on the conditions regarding the continuation and termination of the guaranteed section. The grant of the guarantee section itself may also be decided. Further, the number of games in the guaranteed section may be collectively determined together with the continuation of winning by the lottery for the end of the advantageous section at the end. In such a case, the data required for the lottery process can be reduced. When the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by a lottery separate from the lottery for the end of the advantageous section at the end, various game characteristics can be realized.

Further, the guarantee section may be continued until a predetermined number of times (for example, bell or replay, MB, etc.) wins or wins a predetermined number of times without managing the number of games.

The lottery for the end of the advantageous section in the "normal advantage" may not be performed until the end of the guaranteed section, or may be performed during the guaranteed section. If you win (end) in the advantageous section end lottery in the guaranteed section, the winning result is stored as a flag, for example, and you go to the normal section ("normal") at the end of the guaranteed section or in the next game at the end. You may make the transition.

It may be suggested or notified that the guarantee section is in progress or that the end condition of the guarantee section is satisfied. In such a case, it becomes easy to understand that it is an opportunity after the end of ART, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. For example, the display unit 100 may be clearly notified by displaying "chance state continuation confirmed remaining 20 games" or the like, or an effect of displaying a stage or the like suggesting that ART is easy to win may be performed. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to execute the production in the production mode dedicated to the guaranteed section by means of the production execution means such as video, sound, and lamp.

Regarding the possibility of the guarantee section, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage in the decision regarding the guarantee section may be different based on the set value. For example, when the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by lottery, setting 1 is set to 20 games on average, setting 6 is set to 50 games on average, and the higher the setting, the more ART is pulled back (ART is It may be a specification in which it is easy to win the ART again immediately after the end. In such a case, the player can surely detect the end of the advantageous section by confirming that the state display 147b is turned off, and can surely grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART. Furthermore, the player can estimate the set value according to the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART, and even if the number of balls to be played after the end of ART is reduced, the expected feeling of guessing the set value and pulling back. By playing the game while holding the game, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

[Another control peculiar to pachislot]
Subsequently, another control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

<Relationship between the number of elapsed games and benefits during normal advantage>
First, with reference to FIG. 147, the relationship between the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" and the privilege will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the end condition in the above-mentioned Example 1 is adopted. Specifically, as the first condition, the condition that "until 100 G has passed from the start of the advantageous section, even if the batting order bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated" is adopted. Of course, in the following description, the termination condition in the above-mentioned specification example 1 may be adopted.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game property of playing a game from "normal (normal section)" to "ART (advantageous section)", and the main control board 71 is in "normal". We are doing a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. If you win "ART" in this transition lottery, you can directly transition from "normal" to "ART", but in many cases, "ART" via "normal" to "normal advantage (advantageous section)". Move to. As shown in FIG. 102, the notification content (pushing order instruction) is restricted during "normal advantage" as compared with during "ART", and for example, notification for shifting to high RT (RT3) or maintaining high RT is performed. This is a disadvantageous state as compared with "ART", and in the case of this embodiment, it is designed as a section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1. Therefore, even if it is possible to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, if it shifts to "normal advantage" instead of "ART", the medal will only be consumed as a result and the benefit will be small. There is a risk that the willingness to play will decrease.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 grants a predetermined privilege to the player according to the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control board 71 grants the first privilege (privilege 1) to "40G" when the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" reaches "20G". When it reaches, the second privilege (privilege 2) is given, and when it reaches "80G", the third privilege (privilege 3) is given. The first privilege, the second privilege, and the third privilege are the transition (promotion) of the SCZ mode, and the larger the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage", the easier the transition to the higher SCZ mode (Fig.). See 116).

As mentioned above, although there is a difference in settings, MB wins with a probability of about 1/15 to 1/17, so it is realistic that the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" reaches "20G" and "40G". It is possible, and it can rarely reach "80G". However, the privilege given at this time is the promotion lottery of the SCZ mode, and if the SCZ mode is promoted, it is only easy to shift to the "ART" chance zone called "SCZ", and immediately "ART". It does not mean that it will move to. Therefore, even if the privilege of promotion of SCZ mode is given according to the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage", the player is not given an excessive privilege, and the gambling can be enhanced unnecessarily. not. On the other hand, for the player, as the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage" increases, it becomes easier to shift to a state of playability different from the "normal advantage" of "SCZ", so that the playability changes in various ways. This will improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches "120G", the main control board 71 grants a fourth privilege (privilege 4). This fourth privilege is "Hamari Ceiling", and the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated mode "High accuracy", and the SCZ mode does not fall until it shifts to "ART". In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage" reaches "120G", the subsequent transition to "ART" is confirmed. Here, the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and even if the first condition in the above-described first embodiment is adopted, neither the batting order bell nor the MB is won, and "normally advantageous". It is extremely rare that 120 games have passed. In addition, if 120 games have passed for "normal advantage", a predetermined amount of medals may have been consumed during "normal advantage", so "ART" is confirmed in such an extremely rare case. Even if the "Hamari Ceiling" is used, the player will not be given excessive benefits.

Since "normal advantage" is an advantageous section, the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" is included in the count of the number of games for which limit processing is performed. Therefore, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying in the "normal advantage" for a long period of time, the advantageous section ("ART") for notifying the player of the advantageous stop operation mode continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unreasonably increased.

It should be noted that the main control board 71 may be limited to those that can be given some kind of privilege when the "normal advantage" continues for a predetermined period of time, and that the longer the stay is, the larger the privilege is given. not.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a stop control means and a state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of the predetermined push order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify the player of the predetermined push order. In order to notify the order, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as operation mode notification means.

Further, since the main control board 71 counts the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" and grants a privilege (promotion of SCZ mode) to the player according to the number of elapsed games, the main control board 71. Functions as a counting means and a privilege granting means.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter for managing the number of remaining games of "ART", and basically, when the number of remaining games becomes 0, "ART" is terminated, but during a series of advantageous sections. When the number of games played in (for example, the sum of the number of elapsed games in "ART" and the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage") reaches 1500 times, the advantageous section regardless of the number of remaining games in "ART". The main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to perform the limit process for terminating the above.

<Pseudo history lottery>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, a pseudo history lottery in "ART" will be described. Note that FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an outline of a pseudo history lottery in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an outline of another example of the pseudo history lottery.

In a conventional pachislot machine, historical data related to past games may be retained, and various lottery may be performed based on the historical data. In such a conventional pachislot machine, various lottery was performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, which has a sufficient capacity, so this was not a problem. It must be done on the main control board 71) side, and if the history data is held on the main side where the capacity is limited, or if various lottery is performed based on the history data, the data capacity and processing load will increase. It will increase. On the other hand, since a variety of playability can be realized by drawing lots in consideration of the history of past games, the interest is improved, and from the player's point of view, rare roles etc. are continuously won. In some cases, the so-called feeling of loss is not felt, so the game can be played with peace of mind.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo history lottery is realized by performing the controls shown in FIGS. 148 and 149. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo history lottery is realized by combining the control by the main control board 71 and the control by the sub control board 72.

Here, FIG. 148 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery specification of a pseudo history lottery, and shows a control example by the main control board 71. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the history high accuracy during "ART", and when the transition lottery is won, the history high accuracy shifts between five games. .. Then, the main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the "additional specialization zone" during the history high accuracy between the five games, and when the winning is won, a privilege (stock of the "additional specialization zone") is given and is not. When 5 games have passed with the winning, the history high accuracy ends. As a result, in the present embodiment, the privilege can be given when the rare role is continuously won in a short period (between 5 games).

Subsequently, FIG. 148 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo history lottery effect. The sub-control board 72 displays a history display window and a history icon in a predetermined display area of the display unit 100 in order to give the illusion that the player is referring to the past history. The history display window is a display area for displaying the history of past games, and is composed of, for example, five display areas corresponding to five games (note that the history display window is a predetermined effect information (described later). The history icon) may be a display area displayed corresponding to a predetermined number of games, and is not necessarily limited to the window frame area. By setting the window frame area, a predetermined effect information is displayed. Even if it is not, it is preferable in that the player can identify the area where the predetermined effect information is displayed, but the history display area is considered in consideration of the overlap with other effects. It is also possible to display only the predetermined production information when the rare role is won or won, without providing a window frame or the like to clearly indicate that the role is.). Each of the five display areas is provided corresponding to each of the five games from this game to the previous game. For example, the leftmost display area (window) is the previous game. The game history is displayed, the second display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game two games before, and the third display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game three games before. The fourth display area (window) from the left displays the history of games before four games, and the rightmost display area (window) displays the history of games five games before (note that). In detail, from the start operation of this game to the third stop operation, the history of the previous game is displayed in the leftmost display area, and the third stop operation of this game to the start operation of the next game are displayed. Until this is done, the history of this game is displayed in the leftmost display area (the same applies to other display areas).

Then, the sub-control board 72 has a rare role (“common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”) that can win a lottery for transition to high history. When determined as an internal winning combination, predetermined effect information (history icon) is displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window. As shown in FIG. 148 (B), the history icon has a “red icon” and a “green icon”, and the sub-control board 72 has a “red icon” when the transition to high accuracy is drawn. "Or" green icon "is displayed with a predetermined probability, and if the lottery for transition to high history is not won, the" green icon "is always displayed. As a result, the "red icon" will not be displayed in the case of non-winning in the lottery for transition to history high accuracy, so the "red icon" has a role of notifying that the history is highly accurate. It will be.

The sub-control board 72 may display the history icon on the condition that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and on the condition that the combination of symbols corresponding to the rare combination is displayed. The history icon may be displayed. Here, since the combination of symbols according to the rare combination is not displayed unless the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 states that "the rare combination has been determined as the internal winning combination. Correspondingly, it can be said that the history icon is displayed. This point is the same for another example of the pseudo history lottery shown in FIG. 149.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 has a corresponding display on the display window when the "batting order bell" and "common bell, 1 sheet" that do not win the transition lottery to the history high accuracy are determined as the internal winning combination. Neither the "red icon" nor the "green icon" is displayed in the area. As a result, the winning history of the rare role between the five games is displayed in the display window for five games using the "red icon" and the "green icon". The position of the display area for displaying the history icon slides according to the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (B), the "red icon" displayed in the leftmost display area slides to the right display area at the end of the next game. As a result, the history icon disappears from the display window 5 games after the rare role is won, so that the history icon is displayed in the display window during the history high accuracy.

After that, when the rare combination is determined again as the internal winning combination during the history high accuracy, the sub-control board 72 displays the history icon in the corresponding display area of the display window. The type of history icon to be displayed at this time may be determined based on the transition lottery of the history high accuracy based on the rare role won this time, and the "addition special zone" in the history high accuracy. It may be performed based on the result of the stock lottery, or it may be performed in consideration of both. As a result, if a rare role is won while the history is high, at least two history icons will be displayed in the display window for five games.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is performed internally based only on the result of the game of the rare role in the history high accuracy, and the past history is referred to. Although not, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect such as causing a plurality of history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself to emit light. From the player's point of view, the display window that displays the past history and the history icon that shows the past history emit light, which makes it feel as if the history lottery was performed, which improves the interest of the game. On the other hand, as the control on the main side, the main control board 71 only needs to be able to grasp that the history is highly accurate only when a specific condition is satisfied, and the history for 5 games as in the conventional case. Since it is not necessary to update and retain the data every game, the data capacity and processing load do not increase.

Although the case where the display of the history icon is updated every time one game progresses is illustrated here, the update condition of the display of the history icon is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. As an example, the sub-control board 72 may update the display of the history icon every time the internal winning combination corresponding to the history icon is established, and the history may be updated every time the internal winning combination other than the replay combination is established. The icon display may be updated. By updating the display of the history icon every time a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in this way, it is possible to continue the state in which the pseudo history lottery effect is performed for a predetermined period without setting a fixed number of games. can. In addition, the sub-control board 72 has a fixed end condition of history high accuracy, such as ending when the loss (internal winning combination non-winning) is determined 5 times as the internal winning combination, and ending when the batting order combination is established 5 times. It may be associated with conditions other than the number of games. It should be noted that the batting order combination is established 5 times may mean that the batting order combination is determined 5 times as the internal winning combination, and when the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the batting order is stopped in the correct push order. As a result of the operation, the combination of symbols advantageous to the player may be stopped and displayed. On the contrary, the sub-control board 72 is stopped when the batting order is not established five times, that is, the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination, but the batting order is stopped in the wrong push order. When the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is stopped and displayed, the history high accuracy may be terminated. In this case, the display rule and update timing of the history icon may be appropriately determined so that a plurality of icons are not displayed in one history display window. For example, when the history high accuracy is terminated after 5 losses, the update rule may be such that the history icon is advanced by one each time the loss or rare role is won.

The sub-control board 72 may change the mode of the effect using the display window and the history icon according to the result of the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone”. For example, when the stock lottery in the "addition special zone" is won, an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery is performed in at least one of the display window or the history icon (for example, a large light is emitted around the display window). , When the stock lottery in the "addition special zone" is not won, an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery is performed in at least one of the display window or the history icon (for example, a small light emission is performed around the display window). It may be that.

Subsequently, FIG. 148 (C) is an effect example 2 in a pseudo history lottery. FIG. 148 (B) shows an example of the production when the rare role is won again during the history high accuracy, but in FIG. 148 (C), the transition lottery with the history high accuracy is won at the time of the first rare role win. After that, an example of the production when the rare role is won again within 5 games is shown. In this case, since the history is not highly accurate at the time of the second rare role winning, the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is not performed on the main side, but the sub-control board 72 is the rare role winning during the history high accuracy. As with the time, multiple history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself are made to emit light. By doing so, even if the history is not highly accurate internally, it can be made to feel as if the history lottery was performed.

Since there are less restrictions on the sub side than on the main side, the sub control board 72 can perform the same effect in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy by any method. As an example, by holding the history data, the sub-control board 72 may perform the same effect in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy, and the history icon may be displayed in the display window. Based on the information that a plurality of images are displayed, the same effect may be performed in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 148, as a pseudo history lottery, a case where a rare role is won a plurality of times (twice) during a predetermined number of games (5 games) has been described as an example. In addition to such a history lottery, a history lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is "consecutively" won is also included. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 149, a pseudo history lottery method when a predetermined combination is continuously won will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 149 describes a method of granting a predetermined privilege when the bell is won four times in a row.

FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B) are diagrams showing an example of an internal lottery specification of a pseudo history lottery, and show a control example by the main control board 71. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the main control board 71 has "non-high accuracy", "history high accuracy A", "history high accuracy B", and "history high accuracy C" as the history high accuracy states. .. As shown in FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B), when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in "non-high accuracy", the main control board 71 ends the state of high history accuracy in one game "history height". Move to "Probability A". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during this "history high accuracy A" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high accuracy state to "history high accuracy B". , If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy A", "History High Accuracy A" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is changed to "Non-High Accuracy".

Further, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during the "history high accuracy B" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high accuracy state to the "history high accuracy C". If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy B", "History High Accuracy B" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is changed to "Non-High Accuracy". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy C" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 grants a privilege such as extending the period during which "ART" can be continued. However, if the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy C", "History High Accuracy C" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is changed to "Non-High Accuracy". When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy C", the main control board 71 may maintain the history high accuracy state as "History High Accuracy C", and also. It may be possible to shift to "non-high accuracy".

Subsequently, FIG. 149 (C) is an example of an effect in a pseudo history lottery when the bells are continuously won. When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 displays a "bell icon" suggesting the winning or winning of the bell in the corresponding display area of the display window, and conversely, the bell serves as the internal winning combination. If not determined, the "bell icon" will not be displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window.

Then, when four "bell icons" are continuously displayed on the display window, the sub-control board 72 has an effect such as causing a plurality of "bell icons" displayed in the display window and the display window itself to emit light. I do. This makes it feel as if the privilege was given based on the continuous winning of the bell without having the historical data on the main side.

In the example shown in FIG. 149, when the bell is won, the history high accuracy state is always promoted by one, and when the history high accuracy state is the highest state (“history high accuracy C”), it becomes a bell. If you win, you will always be given a privilege, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 71 may promote one state with a high probability of history at the time of winning the bell with a predetermined probability. Further, for example, the main control board 71 may be able to promote a state with high probability of history to a plurality of stages at a time at the time of winning a bell (for example, one promotion with a probability of 95% and two promotion with a probability of 5%). Etc.). Further, in these cases, the probabilities may be different for each state of the current high probability of history. Further, the main control board 71 may grant a privilege with a predetermined probability when the bell is hit when the state with high history accuracy is the highest state.

Up to this point, the case of performing a pseudo history lottery by combining the processing of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 has been described, but in order to further reduce the processing load of the main control board 71, the main control It is also possible to perform a pseudo history lottery effect only by the effect display controlled by the sub-control board 72 without having the history high accuracy state on the board 71.

In this case, the main control board 71 may determine the granting of the privilege based on the winning of the predetermined combination, and may not have the history high accuracy state equivalent to 5 games. The sub-control board 72 displays a first history icon corresponding to the case where a predetermined combination is won. After that, if the privilege is given by the main control board 71 according to the internal winning combination within 5 games, the sub control board 72 displays the second history icon in the display area corresponding to the game, and the second history icon is displayed. The first and second history icons and the history display window may be used to refer to the history and perform an effect as if the hit was made. By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the processing of the main control board 71 while giving the player the impression that the history lottery has been performed.

It should be noted that the internal winning combination in the display game of the first history icon and the second history icon may be the same combination or different combinations. For example, the first history icon display game may be a cherry role, which is one of the rare roles, and the second history icon display game may be a watermelon role, which is another rare role.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the sub-control board 72 has five display areas provided corresponding to each of the five games from the current game to the game three times before when the pseudo history lottery is performed. Since the display window is displayed on the display unit 100, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a display window.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the history high accuracy performed by the rare role winning in "ART", the history high accuracy is started, and 5 games are played during this history high accuracy. Then, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to end the history high accuracy. Then, if the main control board 71 wins a rare role while the history is high, it is possible to give the privilege of granting stock of the "additional specialization zone", so that the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means.

Then, the sub-control board 72 has a rare combination among a plurality of display areas of the display window displayed on the display unit 100 in response to the fact that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination during "ART". When a history icon is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game determined as the winning combination, and the main control board 71 grants a privilege in connection with the rare winning combination in which the history is highly accurate (that is, the history icon is displayed in the display window). The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as effect execution means in order to perform an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery in at least one of the display window or the history icon (when two or more are displayed).

<Additional notification during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150, the addition notification (addition effect) in "ART" will be described. In pachislot, it is common to perform an extra lottery at the opportunity of a rare role such as watermelon or cherry that players such as watermelons and cherries can easily pay attention to during ART (AT), and to notify the extra lottery when the extra lottery is won. However, if the addition is not performed frequently even though the role of rare is won, the player will be discouraged and the interest of the game will be reduced. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown below, it is intended to increase the frequency of additional notification at the time of winning a rare role that is easy for the player to pay attention to. In the following, the rare role means a role that can be won in the additional lottery during ART. For example, in the case of the additional lottery based on the ART mode, "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", and "strong". "Bell" corresponds (see FIG. 125).

FIG. 150 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of additional notification by the sub-control board 72. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games, the sub-control board 72 may immediately notify the addition or may be hidden. As shown in FIG. 150 (A), in a state where the number of additional games is hidden, the sub-control board 72 is, for example, a hidden additional game in the case of non-winning in the additional lottery performed by the main control board 71 thereafter. Notify the number of games instead. On the other hand, even if the number of additional games is hidden, if the main control board 71 subsequently wins the additional lottery, the sub-control board 72 may use, for example, an additional game for the hidden portion. While holding the number, the number of additional games determined as a result of the additional lottery is notified. As a result, in a state where the number of additional games is hidden, the additional notification is performed regardless of the result of the additional lottery, so that the frequency of the additional notification can be increased.

Here, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery (see FIG. 125) based on the normal processing at the time of winning the rare role, and also displays the combination of symbols according to the MB when the MB is operating (that is, the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed. The additional lottery (see FIG. 126) is performed based on the common process (when the operation is performed), but the sub-control board 72 basically immediately notifies the number of additional games when the additional lottery during the MB operation is won. Keep unreported (hidden) without any notice. Then, the sub-control board 72 subsequently notifies the number of additional games at the time of MB operation that has been hidden at the time of the additional lottery triggered by the winning of the rare role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the additional notification is performed at the time of winning the rare role that the player can easily pay attention to. On the other hand, although the additional notification is not performed when the MB is activated, the player only feels that the additional lottery itself is not performed when the MB is activated, and the frequency of the additional notification when the MB is activated is high or low. Not that it does not cause the player's disappointment.

Subsequently, FIG. 150 (B) is a diagram showing a control example 1 when the sub-control board 72 performs additional notification. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "50G" in the additional lottery when the MB is operated. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notifying, at this point, the sub-control board 72 adds "50G" as the number of games for the latent portion.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery to determine the number of additional games of "10G". At this point, the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, but since it wins the additional lottery triggered by the rare role, the sub-control board 72 holds it. While maintaining "50G", the number of additional games of "10G" decided this time is notified. Therefore, the player is informed that 10 games have been added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 still maintains the number of games for the latent amount, the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount at this point.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of subsequently winning the rare role, the main control board 71 performed an additional lottery, but did not win the additional lottery. At this point, since the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games in the range of "50G" held. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery within the range of the number of games held as the number of games for the latent portion. With reference to FIG. 125, for example, in an additional lottery triggered by a "weak chance", "10G", "20G", and "30G" may be determined as the number of additional games, and the number of hidden games may be determined. The "50G" held as is never determined. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies any of "10G", "20G", and "30G". Further, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the "strong bell", the number of additional games may be determined as "30G", "50G", "100A (100G or more)", but the number of games for the latent amount. It holds only "50G" which is held as. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies either "30G" or "50G", and does not notify "100G or more", which exceeds the number of games held for the latent amount. The sub-control board 72 may be notified within the range of the number of games for the latent amount, and it is necessary to notify the maximum number of games among the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery. However, it is possible to appropriately notify a part or all of the game within the range of the number of games for the latent amount.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery from the range of the number of games held as the number of games for the latent portion. "50G" is determined as the number of games with a certain number, and the number of additional games of "50G" is notified. As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games were added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for the latent portion, the number of games for the latent portion held by the sub-control board 72 is "0G" at this point.

Subsequently, FIG. 150 (C) is a diagram showing a control example 2 when the sub-control board 72 performs additional notification. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games for the latent portion instead in the case of non-winning in the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare combination. In the control example 2 shown in (C), when the sub-control board 72 wins the extra lottery at the time of winning the rare role, the sub-control board 72 notifies by adding the number of additional games for the latent amount to the number of additional games won.

Specifically, in the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "50G" in the additional lottery when the MB is operated. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notifying, at this point, the sub-control board 72 adds "50G" as the number of games for the latent portion.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (C), as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery to determine the number of additional games of "10G". At this point, the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, so that the sub-control board 72 notifies the "10G" won in the extra lottery by adding the number of additional games for the latent amount. do. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 holds the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery as the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of hidden games. Notify within the range of the sum with the number of additional games. In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), the sum of the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of additional games held as the number of hidden games is "60G", but the trigger for the additional lottery. It is assumed that there is "50G" instead of "60G" as the number of games that may be added by the role of rare. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games of "50G". As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games were added even though only 10 games were added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for the latent portion, the number of games for the latent portion held by the sub-control board 72 is "10G" at this point.

In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), as a result of winning the rare role thereafter, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery, but since the additional lottery was not won, the sub control board 72 , Notifies the number of additional games of "10G" held. As a result, the number of games for the latent portion held by the sub-control board 72 becomes "0G".

In addition, the sub-control board 72 may notify the number of additional games for the latent amount that is always held in the case where the additional lottery based on the rare role is not won in the state where the number of additional games is held. Often, the number of additional games held by the latent amount may be notified with a predetermined probability.

<Additional notification and setting suggestion during ART>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 increases the frequency of additional notification at the time of winning the rare role by turning the number of additional games for the latent portion at the time of winning the rare role, and is notified at once. The number of additional games is increasing. According to the control using such latency, it is possible to control the setting suggestion as follows.

In recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery (normal processing) related to ART (AT) based on an internal winning combination or the like with a common probability regardless of a set value. As a result, the fluctuation of the profit balance is suppressed, and the game can be played with peace of mind, but there is a problem that the setting estimation factor is reduced. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a new setting guessing element is realized by hiding the lottery result using the common process while eliminating the setting difference from the lottery based on the normal process related to ART (AT). There is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the rare role is determined as the internal winning role in order to completely eliminate the setting difference from the additional lottery based on the normal processing triggered by the rare role. Both the probability of winning and the extra lottery at the time of winning the rare role are performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination is about 1/60 common to all settings, and is determined by the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare combination. The expected degree of the number of additional games that can be played is about "10G" for all settings.

In the additional lottery based on the common processing at the time of SMB operation, the lottery probability itself of the additional lottery is common to all settings, but the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination is set differently. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination is set to about 1/18 in setting 1 and about 1/15 in setting 6, and when the SMB is operating. The expected degree of the number of additional games that can be determined in the additional lottery is about "5G" for all settings.

In such a case, for example, if 180 games are played, the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination three times regardless of the set value, and it can be expected that "30G" will be added with the rare role as an opportunity. On the other hand, regarding SMB, in setting 1, SMB operates 10 times, and an additional "50G" can be expected triggered by SMB operation, and in setting 6, SMB operates 12 times, triggered by SMB operation. You can expect an additional "60G".

At this time, as described above, the sub-control board 72 hides the additional amount at the time of MB operation and turns it into the additional notification at the time of winning the rare role, so that the total number of additional games of "80G" is notified at setting 1. In setting 6, the total number of additional games of "90G" is notified. By hiding the additional amount when the MB is activated, the player feels that the additional amount is not performed when the MB is activated, so the setting difference is completely eliminated from the lottery related to ART (AT) based on normal processing. However, it is possible to provide a setting guessing element to the player.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols according to the MB, and when the MB is operated, the number of additional games of "ART" is determined, and the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination. , In order to determine the number of additional games of "ART", the main control board 71 functions as a first addition determining means and a second addition determining means. At this time, when the number of additional games is determined, the main control board 71 extends the period during which "ART" can be continued by the determined number of additional games, so that the main control board 71 functions as an additional control means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 holds the number of extra games by the extra lottery at the time of MB operation without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as an extra latent means. Then, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, and does not notify the player when the extra lottery at the time of winning the rare role is not won. The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as notification means in order to notify the number of additional games held as they are instead.

<Direction stage during ART>
Subsequently, the production stage in "ART" will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. First, with reference to FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B), a control example different from that of FIG. 150 regarding notification of the number of hidden additional games in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games by matching the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)" are determined as internal winning combinations, the symbols displayed according to the pressing order. If the combination is different and the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols with the same symbols ("red BAR lip", "red 7 lip", "W matching lip") is displayed. To. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when there is a number of hidden additional games, a combination of symbols such as "red BAR lip", "red 7 lip", and "W-matched lip" is displayed to notify the number of hidden additional games. .. Specifically, when there is no hidden additional game number or when the hidden additional game number is not notified, the push order of "left 1st" is notified and the combination of symbols related to "replay" is notified. Prompt to display. In this case, the push order is notified by at least the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100, but the main control board 71 may also be notified via the notification lamp 147a together with the sub control board 72. ..

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games for 50 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip", and adds 50 games. An additional notification effect is performed to indicate that the above has been performed. Similarly, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games for 100 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to the "red BAR lip", and adds 100 games. When an additional notification effect is performed to indicate that the above is performed and the number of hidden additional games is notified for 150 games, the push order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to the "W-matched lip" is notified. An additional notification effect indicating that 150 games have been added is performed.

Subsequently, FIG. 151 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of additional games of the latent portion held by the sub-control board 72 without notification and the push order notified by the sub-control board 72. In addition, in FIG. 151, in addition to "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)", "F_SP rip A1 (No. 20)" and "F_SP rip A2 (No. 21)". ) ”Is also illustrated. Here, "F_SP rip A1 (No. 20)" and "F_SP rip A2 (No. 21)" are roles used in the additional lottery based on the chance C mode and the chance B mode, as shown in FIG. 151. In addition, since it may be used for notifying the number of additional games for the latent amount, it will be described together.

First, "F_SP rip A1 (No. 20)" can display "red BAR rip" used for "100G notification" as a combination of symbols having the same symbols. Therefore, when the number of hidden additional games is "0 to 49G" and "50 to 99G", the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of "left 1st" and the symbol related to "replay". The display of the combination is urged, or the effect of urging the aim of the symbol "Red 7" is performed together with the pressing order of "Right 1st", and the display of the combination of the symbols related to "Red 7 fanning" is urged. In addition, when the number of hidden additional games is "100 to 149G" or "150G or more", the sub-control board 72 is an effect that encourages the aim of the symbol "red BAR" together with the pressing order of "middle 1st". Is performed to encourage the display of the combination of symbols related to the "red BAR lip", and an additional notification effect indicating that 100 games have been added is performed.

The same applies to "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" to "F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)", and the sub-control board 72 is held as unreported as shown in FIG. 151 (B). A predetermined push order and a symbol to be aimed at are notified according to the number of additional games for the latent amount, and an additional notification effect indicating that the predetermined number of games has been added is performed. For example, at the time of winning "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)", the sub-control board 72 is "left 1st" when the number of hidden additional games is "0 to 49G" and "50 to 99G". Notifies the push order of, prompts the display of the combination of symbols related to "replay", and when the number of hidden additional games is "100 to 149G", the symbol "1st" is pushed together with the push order. A production that encourages aiming at "Red BAR" is performed, a display of a combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" is performed, and an additional notification effect indicating that 100 games have been added is performed, and the game is hidden. When the number of additional games is "150G or more", a production is performed to encourage the aim of the symbol "Red BAR" along with the pressing order of "Right 1st", and the display of the combination of symbols related to the "W-matched lip" is urged. At the same time, an additional notification effect indicating that 150 games have been added is performed. In this embodiment, since the symbol "red 7" is arranged next to the symbol "red BAR" on all reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the combination of symbols related to the "W-aligned lip" is displayed. In the case of urging, it is sufficient to perform an effect urging the aim of the design "red BAR".

In this way, the sub-control board 72 associates the number of additional games to be notified for each combination of symbols with which the symbols are aligned, and the number of hidden additional games can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination. When the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols is greater than or equal to the number of additional games associated with the combination of symbols, the number of additional games associated with the combination of symbols is notified while the push order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols is notified. Notify the addition. As a result, the number of additional games notified by one additional effect can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the sub-control board 72 is always used when the number of hidden additional games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Notification for the additional effect may be performed, or notification for the additional effect may be performed with a predetermined probability.

In addition, there is also a role that can stop and display a plurality of combinations of symbols associated with the number of additional games to be notified, and hide more than any of the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of the plurality of symbols. There may be a large number of additional games. As an example, "F_SP rip B1 (No. 20)" can stop and display a "red BAR rip" associated with "100G" and a "W-aligned rip" associated with "150G". Therefore, when "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 20)" is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of hidden additional games is "150G or more". In this case, the sub-control board 72 may perform any notification, and for example, the type of notification may be determined according to the effect stage shown below.

Next, the production stage during "ART" will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of production stages as the production stages during "ART", and the sub-control board 72 performs an additional notification effect according to the effect stage in which the player is staying. The production stage is a kind of production state, and is determined according to the game state. As the effect stage, for example, in addition to the background and the scene (scene), the type of the displayed character or the operation of the character, or a combination thereof can be used. Here, the sub-control board 72 uses, for example, various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to addition in "ART" as a game state for determining the effect stage. In addition to the mode, the number of additional games hidden is also taken into consideration.

FIG. 151 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the correspondence between the number of hidden additional games and the production stage. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (C), as the effect stage in "ART", for example, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "stage C" are included. For example, "Stage A" is a basic production stage, and "Stage B" is a production that makes it relatively easy for the player to aim at the symbol "Red 7" and encourage the display of "Red 7 Lip". It's a stage. In addition, "Stage C" is a production stage in which it is relatively easy to direct the player to aim at the symbol "Red BAR" and encourage the display of "Red BAR Lip", and "Stage D" is the production stage in which the symbol "Red BAR" is displayed. This is a production stage where it is relatively easy to perform a production that encourages the player to display "W-matched rip".

The sub-control board 72 determines the production stage according to the number of hidden additional games, and (a part of) the number of additional games hidden by the additional notification effect corresponding to the determined production stage to the player. To notify. For example, in the sub-control board 72, the larger the number of hidden additional games, the easier it is to determine "stage D" as the production stage, and the smaller the number of hidden additional games, the more "stage A" is used as the production stage. Easy to decide. For the player, when he / she moves to a higher-level production stage, he / she can have expectations for the subsequent games, and the interest is improved. In addition, since the number of additional games hidden is large, it is possible to realize various production controls such as performing a more lively production on the upper production stage.

In addition, if the production stage is determined only from the number of additional games that are hidden, even if it is a higher production stage, only the notification of the latent amount is performed, and from the viewpoint of a skilled player who understands the specifications. , The interest is lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 determines the production stage from the various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition during "ART" and the number of hidden additional games. do. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the notification is the addition of the latent amount or the notification of the addition as a result of the addition lottery based on various modes, so that the player's interest in the addition notification effect is reduced. Never. In particular, in the present embodiment, the chance B mode manages the addition based on the "red 7 rip (red 7 matching)", and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the "red BAR rip (red BAR matching)". In addition, since the notification of the addition of the latent amount is also performed based on the "Red 7 rip" and the "Red BAR rip", the chance B mode and the chance C mode and the number of hidden additional games are added. By deciding the production stage, it is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the trigger of the additional notification, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the additional notification production.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an effect stage during “ART” in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 152 (A), the types of production stages in "ART" in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 has five production stages, "ART stage 1", "ART stage 2", "ART stage 3", "ART stage 4", and "ART stage 5", as production stages in "ART". In detail, as a production stage during "ART", there is a production stage called "ending stage", but this "ending stage" is a dedicated production stage corresponding to the ball ejection state "ending". Therefore, it is omitted in the description of FIG. 152 because the migration is performed according to the dedicated migration conditions.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), "ART stage 1" is a basic production stage in "ART", and "ART stage 2" has a chance A mode of "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy"). "," Ultra-high accuracy "), or a production stage that suggests that the number of hidden additional games is" small "(0 to 49G). In "ART stage 3", the chance B mode is "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra-high accuracy"), or the number of hidden additional games is "medium" (50 to 99G). It is a production stage that suggests that there is, and in "ART stage 4", the chance C mode is "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra-high accuracy"), or the number of additional games hidden is "". It is a production stage that suggests that it is "large" (100 to 149G). Further, in "ART stage 5", a plurality of modes of chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra-high accuracy"), or hidden. This is a production stage that suggests that the number of additional games is "extra large" (150G or more).

By doing so, the frequency at which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional effect differs between the five production stages, and in the "ART stage 1", the frequency at which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional effect is the lowest. Corresponding to a stage, "ART stage 2" corresponds to an effect stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect, and "ART stage 3" corresponds to an effect stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect. The "ART stage 4" corresponds to the next lowest production stage, the "ART stage 4" corresponds to the production stage where the sub-control board 72 performs the additional production, and the "ART stage 5" corresponds to the sub-control board 72. Corresponds to the production stage with the highest frequency of performing.

FIG. 152 (B) is a sub_effect stage shift lottery table referred to when the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage. A sub_ production stage transition lottery table is provided for each current production stage (in FIG. 152 (B), the sub_ production stage transition lottery is referred to when the current production stage is "ART stage 1". Only the table is shown, and the table referred to when staying at other production stages is omitted).

In the sub_ production stage transition lottery table, as reference items, "Chance C + Chance B high accuracy or higher", "Chance C high accuracy or higher", "Chance B high accuracy or higher", "Chance A high accuracy or higher", "Hidden" "Extra large", "Latent large", "Hidden", and "Latent small" are defined, and the lottery value for the lottery result (the production stage of the transition destination) is defined for each reference item. According to such a sub_ production stage transition lottery table, for example, in the case of "chance C high accuracy or higher", the production stage is maintained as "ART1 stage" with a probability of 16384/32768, and 16384/32768. There is a probability that the production stage will shift from "ART1 stage" to "ART4 stage".

The reference item "chance C + chance B high accuracy or higher" means that the chance C mode and chance B mode are "high accuracy" or higher, and "chance C high accuracy or higher" means chance C. It means that the mode is "high accuracy" or higher, "chance B high accuracy or higher" means that the chance B mode is "high accuracy" or higher, and "chance A high accuracy or higher" means. It means that the chance A mode is "high accuracy" or higher. Further, "hidden extra large" means that the number of hidden additional games is "extra large" (150 G or more), and "hidden large" means that the number of hidden additional games is "large" (). It means that it is 100 to 149G), "in hiding" means that the number of additional games that are hidden is "medium" (50 to 99G), and "small latent" means that it is hidden. It means that the number of additional games is "small" (0 to 49G).

These conditions specified by the reference item may be satisfied in duplicate. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 searches for the conditions specified by the reference items according to the search order shown in FIG. 152 (C), and uses the first satisfied condition as the reference item to perform a shift lottery for the effect stage. In this way, by determining the production stage from the various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition during "ART" and the number of hidden additional games, the notification of the additional addition of the latent amount is notified. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether it is an additional notification as a result of an additional lottery based on various modes.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means and a stop control means. ..

Further, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "ART" when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and extends the period during which "ART" can be continued by the determined number of additional games. Functions as an addition determination means and an addition control means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 can hold the number of additional games without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Then, since the sub-control board 72 notifies the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as notification means. ..

Further, the sub-control board 72 can determine one production stage from a plurality of production stages according to the number of hidden additional games (the number of unreported additional games), and the number of hidden additional games. The sub-control board 72 functions as an effect stage determining means because it is possible to execute an additional notification effect that promotes pattern alignment according to the effect stage.

<Ending control during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 153, the ending control during "ART" will be described. In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (At the stage when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 shifts the ball ejection state to the "ending". On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state of the sub-side to the "ending" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" with the condition as an opportunity. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section includes "ART", "normally advantageous", etc., the advantageous section and "ART" do not completely match, but the advantageous section and "ART" are used in the control shown below. Since the difference from "" is irrelevant, it will be described below assuming that the advantageous section and "ART" are in exactly the same gaming state.

First, FIG. 153 (A) shows the relationship between the main side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and the sub side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side in relation to the advantageous section. It is a figure which shows. The main control board 71 counts the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (number of digested games) using the first counter, and the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the second counter (number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 counts the number of games (the number of digested games) that have passed during the advantageous section using the third counter, and the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fourth counter (the number of games that have been digested). The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period (number of games remaining) during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The period of unreported to the person (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added and the number of unreported games is subtracted by the number of notified games.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are counted individually in order to individually count the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are held unreported. It does not match the value of, and also does not match the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

As shown in FIG. 153 (B), the main control board 71 performs transition control to the “ending” based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, for example, the number of games. As a result of the addition, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to the "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 "ends (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games) of the sub-side effect state according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section. END) ”. Here, FIG. 153 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the “ending” transition control on the sub side, and FIG. 153 (D) is referred to when the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending”. Sub_ending transition lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 153 (D), the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value. Information on the lottery value for the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

As shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D), the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. .. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage as the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Only when the game shifts to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unreported games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability. The transition control of the effect stage during the above-mentioned "ART" in FIGS. 151 and 152 is similarly performed even when the transition to the "ending stage" is not performed even though the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. This can be applied, and the sub-control board 72 shifts to an effect stage in which the frequency of performing the additional notification effect is relatively high with a high probability when the number of additional games held without being notified is large. For the player, the entertainment is improved when the additional notification effect is performed. Therefore, by controlling the production mode according to the notification status of the number of remaining games, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, during the stay of the "ending stage", even if a bonus such as LMB is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future, so it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage". Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), a predetermined number of games is applied to a bonus required for digestion, such as LMB, and the bonus is activated. During the operation of the bonus, the first counter reaches "1500", the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage as the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It may be possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 will be placed on the sub-control board 72. It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for the end of the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the notification such as the push order is not performed (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. Further, in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the instruction function has ended and the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game, an automatic re-insertion operation by operating a re-game, or a start operation) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the squeeze prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process so as not to interfere with the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals won during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus, a predetermined time at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and the sub-control board 72 may display information on the advantageous section, a display for preventing entanglement, and the like during the freeze at the end of the bonus. By suppressing the occurrence of multiple delays in the game due to freeze, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of the limiter to be activated. It can be arbitrarily decided whether to apply the process or not, considering the flow of the effect.

<Variable limiter>
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the advantageous section is started. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (number of digested games) satisfies a predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. You may perform limit processing to end.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set due to the "normal advantage" period or the bonus during "ART" (for example). , 1480G, which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit), the "ART" of this set may end. In such a case, the "ART" of the next set cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and the limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which has a good delimiter, although it is before the upper limit is reached. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachi-slot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. It is also possible to execute the limit process on the assumption that a predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end and end the advantageous section. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500G. By allowing the limit processing to have a certain range of execution timings in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. In addition, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus activation and additional specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed not only based on the number of games but also based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (number limiter, payout number limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) of the limit processing activation counter (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation count counter, etc.). When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the next set is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set. It can be adopted that it is predicted that the game will be done (in pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, the payout number limiter, or the navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, becomes the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined termination condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Or, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). Specific state termination means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold has not been reached.
In addition, as the specific state termination means, both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process are described collectively. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, the advantageous section is terminated when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that it functions as a specific state start means and a specific state end means.

Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of digested games in the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and the number of notified games among the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Or, in order to count the number of unreported games), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 function as counting means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section and manages it as the number of notified games, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 may be used. It functions as a means for notifying the remaining period. Then, since the sub-control board 72 holds the remaining number of games for the unreported portion of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as a remaining period hiding means. Then, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the number of unreported games held as unreported as the number of additional games, and also notifies according to the number of notified additional games. In order to update the number of completed games and the number of unreported games, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as additional notification means. Since the sub-control board 72 determines one effect stage from the plurality of effect stages, the sub-control board 72 functions as an effect stage determination means.

<Last freeze during ART>
Next, the last freeze performed by the main control board 71 at the end of "ART" will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 draws whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the number of remaining games of "ART" is subtracted from 1 to 0. When this lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value (= 1500-the number of games in the advantageous section digested) to the number of remaining games in the ART until the limit of the advantageous section is reached, and performs a predetermined freeze process. .. As an example, if the lottery of the last freeze is won when the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 times, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of ART. Since the limit processing is performed when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, for example, the game during the "normal advantage" is performed 50 times, then the game shifts to the "ART", and the game is performed during the "ART". If the last freeze lottery is won after playing 100 games, the number of games digested during the advantageous section will be 150 times (= 50 + 100), and 1300 will be added to the remaining number of games in ART. In addition, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery of the last freeze, it is sufficient to allow the continuation of "ART" until the limit processing is performed, and the value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached for the number of remaining games of ART is set. It is not always necessary to perform the addition process of adding. For example, the main control board 71 may allow the continuation of "ART" until the limit processing is performed by prohibiting the end of the advantageous section other than the limit processing, and for example, the main control board 71 may. , Regardless of the number of games in the advantageous section that has been digested so far, by adding a value (9999) that exceeds the limiter to the number of remaining games of ART, it is allowed to continue "ART" until the limit processing is performed. May be good.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is an example in a case where the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times or a case where the execution timing of the limit process is widened. When the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as is reached, the advantageous section is terminated, so that the game functions as a specific state start means and a specific state end means.

Further, since the main control board 71 counts numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section), the main control board 71 functions as a counting means. Then, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the last freeze when the number of remaining games of "ART" becomes 0, and if it is determined to perform the last freeze, the limit is limited to the number of remaining games of "ART". While adding the number of games until the process is performed, if it is determined not to perform the last freeze, the "ART" is terminated. Therefore, the main control board 71 has the end process determination means and the end process execution means. Functions as.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
Further, as a modification of the third embodiment, for example, the flow of the gaming state as shown in FIG. 154 may be used, and the ball ejection state as shown in FIG. 100 may be applied to such a gaming state. ..

Further, the third embodiment has been described assuming that the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) corresponds to the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section (normal section), but is shown in FIG. 155, for example. As such, a waiting section related to a bonus (BB or the like with no setting difference) may be set as a section in the middle of transitioning from a non-advantageous section (normal section) to an advantageous section.

The waiting section means a section in which the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is not turned on until the winning of the bonus, even if the advantageous section is won when the bonus is won without a setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to the winning, the advantageous section lamp is not lit and the waiting section is set, and when the bonus is won, the advantageous section lamp is lit and the advantageous section progresses.

For such a waiting section, for example, the waiting section flag is set by winning "BB1 + watermelon", and the waiting section progresses until the winning of BB1, while the waiting section flag is not set by winning "BB1 + cherry", and the winning section is not set. It is also possible to determine whether or not to set the waiting section for each flag so that the advantageous section is started without going through the waiting section on the condition of. However, it is desirable not to distinguish whether the standby section is set or not with the same flag. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the waiting section, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off as the waiting section during the carry-over of the bonus even if the winning of the bonus is won and the advantageous section is won at the same time.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 163, another control example peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 different from the pachi-slot machine 1 described above will be described.

<Additional control during advantageous section>
First, the addition control in the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. Depending on the pachislot machine, a role (hereinafter referred to as a specific role) that makes it easy to give a privilege to a player when it is determined as an internal winning role, such as a so-called fixed role or a premier role, may be provided. Normally, such a specific role (fixed role or premier role) has a lower probability of being determined as an internal winning role than other roles, while the probability of granting benefits to the player is higher for other roles. The granting of benefits is given preferentially, such as being relatively high (for example, 100%) or the benefits granted are greater than the benefits granted at other occasions.

By the way, in the case of a pachislot machine that performs limit processing for a game in an advantageous section as described above, if a specific role that is given preferential treatment to grant a privilege is determined as an internal winning role immediately before the limit processing is performed. However, even if a large privilege is given according to the specific role, the limit processing is applied, so that the large privilege given by the specific role is wasted, and there is a possibility that the motivation for playing is impaired. On the other hand, if the privilege is given without limitation during the game state that is advantageous to the player such as the advantageous section (ART), the player's gambling spirit will be unreasonably enhanced, and the gambling will be felt too high. There is also the problem of being shunned by some players.

In this regard, as shown below, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, while balancing gambling by limit processing, additional control is executed in an advantageous section that does not impair the motivation for playing. Although the details will be described later, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 limits the granting of benefits according to the timing when the specific combination wins. Here, in a normal pachislot machine, a combination of unique symbols is displayed at the time of winning a specific role so that the player can grasp the winning of the specific role. Therefore, it is displayed for the player. The winning of a specific role can be known from the combination of symbols. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a large privilege is given based on a specific combination, the main control board 71 performs stop control so that a combination of unique symbols is displayed, and grants the privilege based on the specific combination. When limiting, stop control is performed so that a combination of general-purpose symbols that can be displayed in other combinations is displayed. From the player's point of view, it is not possible to know that a specific role has been won, so even if the granting of benefits is restricted, there is no sense of loss.

First, with reference to FIG. 156 (A), the combination of the combination and the symbol used for explaining the additional control of the advantageous section will be described. In the following, the addition control in the advantageous section will be described with reference to the combination of symbols described in the first embodiment. In the explanation of the additional control in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. Three types of roles are used. The winning probability of each specific combination is omitted because it is not related to this control.

"F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", and "F_3 consecutive chili lip" have different combinations of symbols to be stopped and displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation, and when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a unique symbol is used. The combination of symbols is displayed along the valid line, and when the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode, the general-purpose symbol combination is displayed along the valid line.

Specifically, the main control board 71 displays the combination of symbols related to "single chili lip" along the effective line when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st" when "F_single chili lip" is won. , When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the valid line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st" at the time of winning the "F_double chili lip", the main control board 71 displays the combination of the symbols related to the "double chili lip" along the effective line and ". When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the valid line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st" when the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is won, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the symbols related to the "triple chili lip" along the effective line and ". When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the valid line.

As described in the first embodiment, in the combination of the symbols related to the "single chili lip", the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols related to "double chili lip" is a combination of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed on two reels, and the combination of symbols related to "triple chili lip" is on all reels. It is a combination of symbols on which the Chilean symbol is displayed. However, in the first embodiment, "single chili lip", "double chili lip", and "triple chili lip" are not combinations of symbols peculiar to a certain role, but in the following description, "single chili lip". Is a combination of symbols unique to "F_single chili lip", "double chili lip" is a combination of symbols unique to "F_double chili lip", and "triple chili lip" is unique to "F_triple chili lip". It shall be a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, the symbol related to "replay" displayed when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st" in "single chili lip", "double chili lip", and "triple chili lip". The combination of symbols is a general-purpose combination of symbols, for example, a combination of symbols displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation at the time of "F_replay" winning. The mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols peculiar to the specific combination is arbitrary and is not limited to the pressing order. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156 (A), the mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of unique symbols is common to all the specific combinations, but the mode is not limited to this, and each is stopped separately. It may be an mode of operation, or it may be a mode of another stop operation only for a part of the specific combination.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 156 (B), the outline of the additional lottery when each specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination will be described. In this control, the granting of benefits is restricted when a specific role is won, but in the following, in order to simplify the explanation, the granting of benefits will be described as an example of not granting benefits. Of course, limiting the granting of benefits is not limited to invalidating it, but also includes lowering the probability of granting benefits when limiting it than when not limiting it. Here, lowering the probability includes setting the probability to 0%.

As shown in FIG. 156 (B), the additional lottery based on the specific combination differs depending on whether the section is valid or invalid. Here, the valid section is a section in which the additional lottery based on the specific combination is performed, and the invalid section is the section in which the additional lottery based on the specific combination is not performed. In the case of the effective section, the main control board 71 gives a "small privilege" when "F_single chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and "inside" when "F_2 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. "Bonus" is given, and when "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is decided as an internal winning role, "big bonus" is given. In addition, "small privilege", "medium privilege", and "big privilege" in this explanation are for comparison, and "medium privilege" is larger than "small privilege" and more than "big privilege". It means small, and does not mean that "small benefits" are absolutely small benefits. In addition, the type of privilege to be granted is arbitrary, and it depends on the management method of the duration of the advantageous section. As an example, when the duration is managed by the number of games, the number of additional games for extending the duration and the right (stock) of the additional special zone where it is easy to acquire the number of additional games are equivalent.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 156 (C), an outline of the push order navigation in the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. In addition, in FIG. 156 (C), only the time when "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is won will be described, but the same applies to "F_single chili lip" and "F_2 consecutive chili lip". As shown in the figure, when the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the effective section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are set to "left 1st" via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the push order of "" and the symbol to be aimed at. When the player performs the stop operation according to this notification, the combination of the symbols related to the "triple chili lip" is displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, when the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the invalid section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are, for example, "middle 1st" via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed on the effective line. It should be noted that whether or not the privilege is given is determined regardless of the push order of notification. Therefore, the notification in this case is performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100 and not by the main control board 71. May be good.

During the valid section, a "big privilege" is given according to the fact that "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is decided as an internal winning combination, so the player can combine the symbols related to the displayed "3 consecutive chili lip". It is possible to grasp that the "big privilege" has been granted, and to enjoy the privilege. On the other hand, no privilege is given during the invalid section, but since the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed, the player has decided that "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is the internal winning role. It is not possible to grasp that, and it does not spoil the interest.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of a method of setting an effective section and an invalid section of the additional lottery based on a specific combination will be described. FIG. 157 (D) is a diagram showing a first method of setting an effective section and an invalid section. In this first method, based on the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed (in other words, the period elapsed from the start of the advantageous section), the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination To set. Since the size of the privilege given to each specific combination is different as described above, in this first method, the period set as the valid section or the invalid section is different for each specific combination.

As an example, the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which a "big privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "1000G" (in other words, after the advantageous section starts, "500G". (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and the section after that is set as an invalid section (note that during the normal section, it is set as a valid section regardless of the type of specific combination). In addition, the "F_2 consecutive chili lip" to which the "middle privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "800G" (in other words, after the advantageous section starts, "700G". (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and after that is set as an invalid section. In addition, "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "600G" (in other words, "900G" after the advantageous section starts. (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and after that is set as an invalid section. Of course, the setting method shown in FIG. 157 (D) is only an example, and an effective section and an invalid section can be set according to the size of the privilege to be given.

When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section (from the start of the advantageous section until the specified number of games elapses), the main control board 71 may grant the privilege corresponding to the specific combination. On the other hand, if a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the invalid section (after the specified number of games has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section), no privilege is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 combine the symbols unique to the specific combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. The mode of the stop operation required to display the stop is notified (the push order of "left 1st" and the symbol to be aimed at are notified), and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have a specific combination inside during the invalid section. When the winning combination is determined, the mode of the stop operation necessary for stopping and displaying the combination of general-purpose symbols is notified via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 (notifying the pressing order of "middle 1st"). do.

In this control, the granting of benefits is restricted when a specific role is won, but as described above, limiting the granting of benefits is more advantageous than when limiting is not performed. Includes lowering the probability of granting. Here, the control processing of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 when the probability of granting the privilege is lowered will be described. The following description also applies to the case where the valid section and the invalid section are set as shown in FIGS. 157 (E) and 157 (F) described later. Further, in the following description, the invalid section will be re-read as "reduction section" and described. The reduction section refers to a section in which the probability of granting a privilege at the time of winning a specific combination is reduced.

The main control board 71 has a first probability (may include 100%) when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section (from the start of the advantageous section until the specified number of games elapses). While it is decided to grant the privilege corresponding to the specific combination, if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the reduction section (after the specified number of games has passed since the advantageous section started), the first It is determined that the privilege corresponding to the specific combination is given with a second probability (which may include 0%) lower than the probability of. Then, when it is determined that the main control board 71 grants the privilege in response to the determination of the specific combination as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. The mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified (notification of the push order of "left 1st" and the symbol to be aimed at), and the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Nevertheless, if the main control board 71 decides not to give the privilege, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 stop and display the general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for this (notify the pressing order of "middle 1st"). The second probability of granting the privilege during the reduction section may be varied, for example, during the period elapsed from the start of the advantageous section (in other words, the remaining period until the limit processing is performed). The longer it is, the lower the second probability may be, and the larger the specific role to be granted, the lower the second probability may be.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 157 (E), a second method of setting an effective section and an invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. In this second method, the special section in the advantageous section is regarded as an invalid section, and the other sections are regarded as valid sections. The special section means, for example, a state in which a plurality of stocks of an additional special zone are owned. Depending on the pachislot, if you win the premier role during the normal section, it will shift to the advantageous section (ART) and the advantageous section (ART) will start with multiple stocks of the additional special zone from the beginning. be. If the premier role is further won in such a state, an excessive profit will be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 157 (E), in the second method, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in such a state, the granting of the privilege is restricted. Specifically, the main control board 71 can grant a privilege corresponding to the specific combination when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section (that is, other than the special section). If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the invalid section (that is, during the special section), no privilege is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is given), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the notification lamp 147a and the display. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the specific combination during the invalid section. Is determined as an internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is not given), in order to stop and display a general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the required stop operation.

The special section can be set arbitrarily, and as described above, the stock of the additional special zone may be possessed by a predetermined number or more, and the advantageous section (ART) can be continued. An additional amount for extending the period (for example, the number of additional games) may be possessed in a predetermined amount or more without being notified. Further, during the special section, the player may be allowed to stay in a dedicated production stage so that the player can know that the special section is in progress.

Further, in FIG. 157 (E), the range of the special section is common to each of the plurality of specific combinations having different privilege sizes, but they may be different. For example, "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which "big privilege" is given is a special section in which the stock of the additional special zone is possessed by the first predetermined number or more, and "F_2" to which "medium privilege" is given. "Ren Chiri Lip" is a special section where the stock of the special zone for addition is more than the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number or more is possessed, and "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given is added. A special section may be a state in which the stock of the special zone is possessed by a third predetermined number or more, which is larger than the second predetermined number.

Subsequently, FIG. 157 (F) is a diagram showing a third method of setting an effective section and an invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination. In this third method, an effective section and an invalid section are set in combination with the first method and the second method. That is, in the third method, regardless of the type of the specific combination, the special section in the advantageous section is set as an invalid section, and the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which the "big privilege" is given is advantageous other than the special section. Of the sections, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "1000G" (in other words, from the start of the advantageous section until "500G" elapses), it is regarded as a valid section, and after that, it is invalid. Set as an interval. Similarly, for the "F_2 consecutive chili lip" to which the "middle privilege" is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "800G" (in other words). And, from the start of the advantageous section until the lapse of "700G") is set as the valid section, and after that is set as the invalid section. In addition, for "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "600G" (in other words, in other words). (From the start of the advantageous section to the elapse of "900G") is set as the valid section, and the subsequent sections are set as the invalid section.

Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can grant the privilege corresponding to the specific combination, while during the invalid section. If a specific role is decided as an internal winning role, no privilege will be given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is given), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the notification lamp 147a and the display. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the specific combination during the invalid section. Is determined as an internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is not given), in order to stop and display a general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the required stop operation.

In this way, the advantageous section is divided into an effective section in which the privilege based on the specific combination can be granted and an invalid section (reduction section) in which the grant of the privilege is restricted, and the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed is different in each. By notifying the player, the profit given to the player does not become excessive, and not only the appropriate balance of gambling can be achieved, but also the player does not feel a loss. It does not impair the player's willingness to play.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. Functions as a stop control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, the advantageous section ends when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that the process functions as a state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 can be given a privilege related to an advantageous section with a predetermined probability when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the main control board 71 is determined by the specific combination as the internal winning combination. It functions as a probability changing means because it changes the probability that the privilege can be given according to the state (effective section or reduction section) at the time of being granted. Further, if the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition during the advantageous section, the state satisfying the condition can be set as a special section (special state), so that the main control board 71 can be used as a state control means. Function.

Further, at the time of winning a specific combination, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of a predetermined push order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify the player. The main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means in order to notify the predetermined pressing order.

<Granting benefits at the time of ART transition>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 158, the privilege grant at the time of ART transition in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. First, the transition flow of the gaming state in this control will be described with reference to FIG. 158 (A). As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into "normal advantageous" and "ART" ball ejection states. The normal section is a non-notification state in which the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 do not notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section is the main control board 71 and / or the sub. The control board 72 is in a notification state capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation. Further, "normal advantage" and "ART" are "ART" rather than "normal advantage", although the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation. Is in a state where the frequency (probability) of notifying the mode of the stop operation is higher. This point is the same as the relationship between "normal advantage" and "ART" in the third embodiment (see FIG. 102). In this control, the normal section and the "normal advantage" are sections in which the payout rate does not exceed 1, and the "ART" is the normal section and the section in which the payout rate is higher than the "normal advantage" (for example, the payout rate). Is a section exceeding 1).

As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section. This transition condition is arbitrary, for example, it may be a winning of a transition lottery, it may be a lapse of a predetermined number of games, and a specific winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination. It may also be that a specific combination of symbols is displayed along the valid line. In this control, the transition from the normal section of (1) to "normal advantage" is performed with a relatively high probability, for example, it is assumed that the transition is performed with a probability of about 1/30.

Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift from (2) "normal advantage" to "ART". This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, but in this control, the transition from "normal advantage" to "ART" in (2) is performed with a lower probability than the transition from the normal section to "normal advantage". For example, it is assumed that the transition is made with a probability of about 1/100. Further, the main control board 71 may be changed from "normal advantage" to "ART" as a ceiling when a predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) have elapsed while being "normally advantageous".

Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) “ART” to the normal section. This transition condition is that "ART" ends, for example, when the period during which "ART" can be continued reaches the end threshold, or when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold. When the limit processing is performed, the main control board 71 ends "ART" and shifts the game state to the normal section.

As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 may shift the gaming state from (4) "normal advantage" to the normal section. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, and the transition probability is also arbitrary. For example, it may be about the same as the transition probability from the normal section of (1) to "normal advantage", may be higher than the transition probability of (1), and may be higher than the transition probability of (1). It may be a probability between the transition probability and the transition probability from "normal advantage" to "ART" in (2), or may be similar to the transition probability in (2), and ( The probability may be lower than the transition probability of 2). In the example shown in the figure, as in the case of the transition probability of (2), it is assumed that the transition from the "normal advantage" to the normal section has a probability of, for example, about 1/100.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a transition flow of the gaming state, the transition to the advantageous section of the first stage (“normal advantage”) is frequently performed, so that the transition of the gaming state is performed frequently. Since the playability is diversified, it becomes an element to continue playing even during non-ART. On the other hand, since the transition to the second stage advantageous section (“ART”) has a lower probability than the transition probability to the first stage advantageous section, it becomes difficult to transfer to the second stage advantageous section. There is. In this control, the main control board 71 depends on the length of the period elapsed without shifting to the second stage advantageous section (“ART”) in the first stage advantageous section (“normal advantage”). Benefits will be given at the time of transition to "ART". Specifically, the main control board 71 is set at the start of the initial number of "ART" games (that is, the larger the number of games that have passed while remaining "normally advantageous" without shifting to "ART". A large number of games will be given as a period during which "ART" can be continued).

Here, FIG. 158 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a privilege given at the time of transition to “ART” in this control. As shown in the figure, when shifting from "normal advantage" to "ART", the main control board 71 becomes "ART" when the number of games elapsed while remaining "normal advantage" is "0 to 99G". "50G" is given as the initial number of games, and "100G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART" when the number of games is "100-199G", and the number of games is "200-299G". In some cases, "200G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART", and when the number of games is "300 to 399G", "300G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART". When the number is "400 to 499G", "500G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART", and when the number of the same games is "500G", "1000G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART". Is given. When 500 games of "normal advantage" have elapsed and then 1000 games of "ART" have elapsed, the advantageous section will continue for 1500 games, and the limit processing will be applied. Therefore, the initial game of "ART" given when the number of games is "500G" is the same as the number of remaining games until the limit processing regarding the advantageous section is performed.

According to such control, the duration of "ART" is determined according to the period from "normal advantage" to the transition to "ART", and the longer the period, the longer the duration of "ART". .. As a result, even if the "normal advantage" continues for a long time, not only the medal is consumed, but also the expectation that the "ART" will continue for a long period of time can be expected. , It is possible to suppress the reduction of the motivation to play. On the other hand, also in this control, since the main control board 71 performs the limit processing of the advantageous section, the "ART" does not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily increased. ..

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition (first start condition) in the normal section, the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the "normal advantage", and the transition condition (second start condition) in the "normal advantage". When the condition is satisfied, the game state is transferred from "normal advantage" to "ART", and when the transition condition (end condition) is satisfied in "normal advantage", the game state is transferred from "normal advantage" to the normal section. The control board 71 functions as a first state control means, a second state control means, and a third state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 grants a larger number of games as the initial number of games of "ART" as the number of games passed while remaining "normally advantageous" without shifting to "ART" is increased, so that the period determination means Functions as.

<Re-recognition of state reset>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 159, the re-recognition of the state reset in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 initializes (reset) all the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, what kind of advantageous section has passed in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section? There is a risk that the subsequent game will become monotonous because it is not possible to grasp. Therefore, in this control, the main control board 71 bypasses the initialization of the information by the reset through the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the reset (the result), and recognizes it again after the reset.

FIG. 159 (A) is a diagram showing the concept of this control (reset re-recognition). In this control, a specific state is associated with the combination of symbols displayed when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (rolls) in advance. Then, as shown in the figure, the main control board 71 reads out the associated specific state from the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped after returning from the initialization of the information by the reset, and the specific state is read. Recognize that is after reset.

Subsequently, FIG. 159 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of this control (reset re-recognition). In the example shown in the figure, when the combination of predetermined symbols "replay downward to the right" is stopped and displayed, the main control board 71 ends the predetermined gaming state and shifts to another gaming state, and the predetermined gaming state is entered. At the end of the gaming state, all information related to the predetermined gaming state shall be initialized (reset). Then, the state of the end of the predetermined gaming state is associated with the "decreasing to the right of the replay" which is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

As shown in the figure, when the combination of the symbols "replay downward to the right" is displayed, the main control board 71 ends a predetermined gaming state and resets various information. Here, until the next game is started, the combination of the symbols "replay downward to the right" remains displayed, and the reset control by the main control board 71 is performed in an extremely short time, so that the information is initialized by the reset. Even after returning from, the combination of the symbols "replay downward-sloping" remains displayed, and the main control board 71 can read the symbol combination "replay downward-sloping". Therefore, in this control, the main control board 71 is associated with the combination of the symbols in advance from the combination of the symbols of "replay downward-sloping" read after the return from the initialization of the information by the reset. The state "end of predetermined gaming state" is read, and it is re-recognized that it is the end of the predetermined gaming state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 159 (C) and 159 (D), the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 using this control will be described. FIG. 159 (C) is an example of a transition flow of a gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section, and (2) the gaming state from the “normal advantage” to the “ART”. Can be transferred, (3) the gaming state can be transferred from "ART" to the normal section, and (4) the gaming state can be transferred from "normal advantage" to the normal section. It should be noted that the respective transition conditions and transition probabilities will be omitted from the description except for those related to the playability using this control.

With reference to the figure, when the game state is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from "ART" to the normal section as in (3) and "" as in (4). There is a case of shifting from "normal advantage" to the normal section. When this control is used, a combination of specific symbols (end result) is displayed for either one of the transition condition from "ART" to the normal section or the transition condition from "normal advantage" to the normal section. It is set to the condition that it is, and it is associated with the combination of the specific symbols that it is the end of the corresponding gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 159, the end condition of "ART" is used to display a specific combination of symbols, and it is the end of "ART" for a specific combination of symbols. Make a correspondence.

By doing so, even if the information about the advantageous section is reset when the gaming state is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section, it is possible to grasp what kind of advantageous section the transition was made to the normal section. Can be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), since "normal advantage" ends regardless of the combination of symbols associated with a specific state, the "normal advantage" advantageous section is changed to the normal section. In the case of migration, the main control board 71 does not re-recognize that it is in a specific state from the combination of the displayed symbols after returning from the reset. On the other hand, since "ART" ends when a combination of symbols associated with a specific state is displayed, the main control board 71 returns from the reset when shifting from the advantageous section of "ART" to the normal section. After that, it is possible to re-recognize that it is the end of "ART" from the combination of the displayed symbols.

That is, in order to initialize the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of "normally advantageous" and "ART", what kind of advantageous section ("normally advantageous" or "normally advantageous" or It is not possible to know if "ART") has ended. On the other hand, according to this control, although the information about the advantageous section is initialized at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of "normal advantage" and "ART", at the end of "ART", "at the end of ART". In order to re-recognize "being", it is possible to grasp what kind of advantageous section ("normally advantageous" or "ART") has ended after the end of the advantageous section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a stop control means.

Further, the main control board 71 terminates "ART" and performs reset control at the end of "ART" in response to the stop display of the combination of specific symbols. Then, after returning from the reset control, the main control board 71 re-recognizes "it is the end of ART" from the combination of the specific symbols displayed, so that the main control board 71 is the state control means. It functions as a termination means and an initialization means.

<Arbitrary reset of advantageous section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 160, the arbitrary reset control of the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine that has a normal section and an advantageous section and has an advantageous section of "ART" and a state other than ART (for example, "normal advantageous"), the advantageous section ends at the end of "ART" and shifts to the normal section. It is conceivable to do. However, since it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section during the normal section, it cannot be expected to be pulled back after the end of "ART" (= after the end of the advantageous section), and the timing when "ART" ends. It becomes easy to stop the game, and there is a risk that the operation of the game machine will decrease.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, it is possible to shift to "normal advantage" without ending the advantageous section after the end of "ART" (see FIG. 138), but there is a limit to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, if "ART" ends immediately before the limit and is maintained in the advantageous section after that, even if it is possible to return to "ART" immediately after the end of "ART", the limit processing is performed. The "ART" pulled back by the above will end immediately.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the player can arbitrarily reset the advantageous section. Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when the player performs a reset operation. The method in which the main control board 71 accepts the reset operation is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can accept the reset operation by the player in connection with the operation of an arbitrary operation unit or the like. Further, the timing at which the player can reset the advantageous section may be any timing during the advantageous section, but in the following description, the player performs the reset operation of the advantageous section at the end of "ART". It shall be possible.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 determines whether or not a reset operation has been accepted from the player at the end of "ART". When the reset operation is accepted, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from "ART" to the normal section. On the other hand, when the reset operation is not accepted, the main control board 71 continues the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from "ART" to "normal advantage" in the advantageous section.

Subsequently, FIG. 160 (B) is an example of a transition flow of the gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. Further, the description of each transition condition and transition probability will be omitted except for those related to the playability using this control.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the advantageous section “ART”. In addition, since this control is characterized in that it is possible to shift to "normal advantage" without ending the advantageous section after the end of "ART", in the figure, the normal section is directly shifted to "ART". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition from the normal section to the “ART” via the “normal advantage” may be used.

Further, when the "ART" is completed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from "ART" to the normal section when (2) the reset operation is received from the player, and (3) resets from the player. If the operation is not accepted, the gaming state is changed from "ART" to "normal advantage" in the advantageous section. The correspondence between the reception of the reset operation by the main control board 71 and the reset operation by the player is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may accept the reset operation when the player intentionally performs the operation, and the main control board 71 accepts the reset operation when the player does not perform any operation. It may be that.

Further, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (4) "normal advantage" to "ART", and can shift the gaming state from (5) "normal advantage" to the normal section. .. As shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to "ART" is higher in "normal advantage" than in the normal section. In other words, the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in the normal section and the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in "normal advantage". Then, the latter is a higher probability.

According to this control, the chance zone for pulling back the "ART" ("normal advantage") can be set after the end of the "ART", and the decrease in the operation after the end of the "ART" can be suppressed. .. Further, when the end of "ART" is close to the limit of the advantageous section, the player can clear the advantageous section by his / her own will and reset the period until the limit. As a result, for the player, it is possible to select whether or not to perform the reset operation after considering the merits and demerits, so that the selection after "ART" is completed should be strategic. It is possible to widen the range of playability.

The "normal advantage" after the end of "ART" is to be continued for a maximum of 100 games, and if the transition to "ART" cannot be achieved within these 100 games, the main control board 71 is advantageous. It may be possible to end the section and shift the game state to the normal section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The main control board 71 performs limit processing when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold value, and can receive a reset operation from the player at the end of "ART", so that the main control board 71 can receive a reset operation. The 71 functions as an operation receiving means.

Further, when the transition condition to "ART" is satisfied, the main control board 71 shifts the game state to "ART", and if the reset operation is accepted, the game state is changed to the normal section after the end of "ART". If the reset operation is not accepted, the game state shifts to "normal advantage" after the end of "ART", so that the main control board 71 functions as a state control means.

<Number of games using advantageous sections Ceiling>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 161, a game number ceiling using an advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 161 (A) is an example of a transition flow of a gaming state when this control is preferably used. In this control, the main control board 71 manages the RT state and the state related to the notification. The RT state is a state in which the type of "replay" related to the operation of the replay and the probability that "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination are different. In the following explanation, "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination. It has a "low RT" with a low probability and a "high RT" with a high probability that "replay" is determined as an internal winning combination. Further, the state related to the notification is a state in which the probability of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation is different, and in the following description, the normal section and the advantageous section are provided. In the normal section, the mode of the stop operation is basically not notified to the player, and in the advantageous section, the mode of the stop operation can be notified to the player, but as will be described later. The number of games The mode of the stop operation is not notified until the ceiling is reached.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 changes from "low RT" to "low RT" when the combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" described later in (1) "low RT" is displayed along the effective line. Shift the RT state to "high RT". Further, when the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition (arbitrary first condition) in (2) "high RT", the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "high RT" to "low RT". The predetermined conditions that trigger the transition from "high RT" to "low RT" are arbitrary. For example, the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, or the bonus is activated. , The activation of the bonus is finished, and so on.

Further, when (3) a specific condition (arbitrary second condition) is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to notification from the normal section to the advantageous section. Since the specific conditions that trigger the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section are not related to this control, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to notification from the advantageous section to the normal section when the combination of the symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line in (4) the advantageous section. Further, the main control board 71 also performs limit processing even when the number of times of digestion reaches 1500 times in the advantageous section, and shifts the state related to notification from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In this way, in this control, when the combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "low RT" to "high RT" and at the same time. , The state related to notification is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. As will be described later, in this control, the RT state in the advantageous section is set to "low RT", and the RT state in the normal section is set to "high RT". Therefore, when comparing the advantageous section (“low RT”) and the normal section (“high RT”), the normal section is in a more advantageous state.

Subsequently, FIG. 161 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the combination configuration used in this control and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination. In this control, there is a "choice number rip" ("F_choice number rip_01" to "F_choice number rip_ ??") as a combination to be notified in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the "choice number rip" is a combination (replay) in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed differs depending on the mode of the stop operation, and the stop operation is performed in a manner in which the correct answer is given for each "choice number rip". The combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the valid line, and when the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the valid line. Is displayed.

During the advantageous section (“low RT”), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) is determined to have the “selection number lip” as the internal winning combination because the notification is not performed until the game number ceiling is reached. However, while not notifying the mode of the stop operation, after reaching the game number ceiling, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) sets the mode of the stop operation to be the correct answer for each "selection number lip". Notify. As a result, after reaching the game number ceiling, the combination of symbols related to "7-match replay" is displayed along the valid line at the time of winning the "choice number rip", and the normal section ("high RT") is entered. It will be. Even if the notification is not performed, the player may accidentally perform the stop operation in a manner that gives the correct answer, and even in this case, the combination of the symbols related to the "7-match replay" is along the effective line. Is displayed, and the normal section (“high RT”) is entered. In order to avoid such a case, it is preferable to increase the number of choices of the "choice number lip" as much as possible. For example, when the number of choices is set only by the push order of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the maximum number of choices is 6, but by adding the push order and different symbols to be aimed at, the number of choices can be increased to 6 or more. Can be increased.

Subsequently, FIG. 161 (C) is a diagram showing an outline of the flow of the game in this control. As shown in the figure, in this control, the advantageous section is set to "low RT", and the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) in this advantageous section ("low RT") reaches the game number ceiling. No notification is given until. After that, when the game number ceiling is reached during the advantageous section (“low RT”), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) lifts the ban on notification, and then the “choice number lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the mode of the stop operation that is the correct answer is notified for each "selection number rip". As a result, the combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line, and as a result, the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) shifts the gaming state to the normal section ("high RT"). do. After that, for example, the game will be played with "high RT" until the bonus is won. That is, according to this control, if the predetermined number of games elapses without winning the bonus in the "low RT" (advantageous section) state, the game becomes the ceiling state, and then the game until the bonus is won is "high RT". It can be done in the state of (normal section).

The number of games on the ceiling can be appropriately set according to the period (number of games) in which notification is not performed during the advantageous section. Therefore, the main control board 71 may determine and set a period during which notification is not performed by lottery at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. As a result, the period during which notification is not performed during the advantageous section changes each time, and as a result, the number of games until reaching the ceiling also changes. Further, in the explanation shown in FIG. 161, the number of games ceiling is taken as an example as the ceiling, but the method of realizing the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, the ceiling is realized according to the number of times that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It may be that. Specifically, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) does not notify until the number of times the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number of times, and reaches the predetermined number of times. It may be notified later.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, when the combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "low RT" to "high RT" and is normal from the advantageous section. The state related to notification is transferred to the section. Further, since the main control board 71 shifts the state related to the notification from the normal section to the advantageous section when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 has the RT state control means, the state end means, and the state end means. Functions as a state start means.

In addition, the main control board 71 counts the number of games that have passed during the advantageous section, and when the number of games that have passed reaches the number of times corresponding to the number of games ceiling, "7 sets are aligned" at the time of winning the "selection number rip". The main control board 71 functions as a counting means and a notifying means in order to notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the "replay". Further, since the main control board 71 can determine the number of times according to the number of games ceiling (that is, the period during which the notification is not performed during the advantageous section) at the start of the advantageous section, the main control board 71 is a predetermined value setting means. Functions as.

<Playability using advantageous sections>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 162, a method of realizing a new playability using the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine having a normal section and an advantageous section, it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section during the normal section, but it is possible to perform lottery with various probabilities during the advantageous section. Therefore, "normal advantage" and "ART" are provided as advantageous sections to enable the transition from "normal advantage" to "ART", and the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section "ART" and the "normal advantage". By making the probability of transition from "ART" different from that of "ART", a plurality of states having different transition probabilities to "ART" are realized (for example, "normal" of the third embodiment and "normal" are usually advantageous. Normal mode "low probability""heaven" etc.).

By the way, since there is an upper limit (limit) in the advantageous section, if the transition from "normal advantage" is the main transition route as the transition route to "ART", the limit processing is performed. The period of "ART" in which only the amount of games in the "normal advantage" (advantageous section) can be played is impaired. Therefore, in this control, the transition from the normal section to "ART" is set as the main transition route to "ART", and even when the limit processing is performed, the period of "ART" that can be played is set. Prevent it from being wasted.

FIG. 162 (A) is an example of a transition flow of a gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. Further, the description of each transition condition and transition probability will be omitted except for those related to the playability using this control.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section, and (2) "ART" from the normal section to the advantageous section. The game state can be transferred to. Further, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section to the normal section, and (4) "ART" of the advantageous section from the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section. The game state can be transferred to. Here, as shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to "ART" is higher in the normal section than in the "normal advantage". In other words, the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in the normal section and the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in "normal advantage". Then, the former has a higher probability.

By controlling the gaming state in this way, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the degree of expectation of transition from "normal advantage" to "ART" is low during non-ART. The game will be played aiming at the normal section where the is high. In other words, during non-ART, it has the playability of how to get out of the advantageous section (“normal advantage”) and shift to the normal section. Then, since the transition to the "ART" is performed directly from the normal section, according to this control, the playable "ART" period is not wasted even when the limit processing is performed. ..

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 performs limit processing when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold value, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S. In order to control the progress, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to "normal advantage" when the first condition is satisfied in the normal section, and shifts the gaming state to "ART" when the second condition is satisfied in the normal section. When the third condition is satisfied in "normal advantage", the game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the fourth condition is satisfied in "normal advantage", the game state is shifted to "ART". Since the main control board 71 is more likely to shift to the "ART" from the normal section than from the "normal advantage", the main control board 71 functions as a state control means.

<Playability using bonus roles with no setting difference during the normal section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 163, the control using the bonus combination with no setting difference in the normal section of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine having an advantageous section, various benefits can be given by using the bonus combination as an opportunity. For example, when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section and then the bonus is activated, the main control is performed. The board 71 can be given a privilege when the bonus is activated (common processing). Benefits associated with bonus operation during this advantageous section can be given to multiple bonus roles in common, and even if the bonus role has a different probability of being determined as an internal winning role, it is a bonus. Benefits can be granted when the is activated. The common process is performed when the bonus is activated during the advantageous section, but the bonus is not activated unless the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the common processing is "the bonus combination is the internal winning combination." It can be said that it is a process that is performed when it is determined as.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, the main control board 71 can give the privilege (normal processing). The benefits associated with the bonus winnings during this normal section can be given individually for each of the multiple bonus winning combinations, but can be given for bonus winning combinations with different probabilities of being determined as internal winning combinations. However, it can be performed only when the bonus role with no setting difference is won.

In this control, the playability as shown below is realized by using the difference between the normal process and the common process. First, with reference to FIG. 163 (A), the configuration of the bonus combination that can be suitably used in this control will be described. In this control as shown in the figure, BB1 and BB2 are provided as bonuses, and these bonuses can be overlapped with other combinations and determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in this control, the role of "F_BB1" in which BB1 wins alone, the role of "F_BB2" in which BB2 wins alone, and the role of "F_BB2 + special role" in which BB2 wins in duplicate with the special role. It has the role of. Then, for "F_BB1", the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is set so that there is no setting difference, and for "F_BB1", the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is set so as to have a setting difference, and "F_BB2 +" is set. For "special role", set so that there is no difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination.

In such a bonus combination configuration, even if any of "F_BB1", "F_BB2", and "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section (when the bonus is activated thereafter). , The main control board 71 performs common processing. As a result, during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 grants a common privilege regardless of the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

On the other hand, during the normal section, the main control board 71 can perform a unique process (normal process) according to the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the main control board 71 can perform, for example, , When "F_BB1" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, processing specific to "F_BB1" (normal processing) is performed, and "F_BB2 + special winning combination" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section. Then, the processing (normal processing) peculiar to "F_BB2 + special role" is performed. On the other hand, even if "F_BB2" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, no processing is performed because "F_BB2" is a bonus combination with a setting difference. As a result, during the normal section, the main control board 71 grants a unique privilege according to the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

In this control, the playability peculiar to this control is realized by providing a difference between the common privilege by the common processing in such an advantageous section and the unique privilege by the normal processing (unique processing) in the normal section. do. As an example, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the probability that "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a lower probability than other bonus combinations, while "F_BB2 + special combination" in the normal section. Make the unique benefits based on "role" larger than the common benefits based on common processing during the advantageous section. More specifically, "F_BB2 + special role" is a so-called premium bonus role (for example, winning at about 1/16384 common to settings 1 to 6), and when it is decided as an internal winning role during the normal section. , Gives a very big privilege according to the premier role. On the other hand, if it is decided as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section, a privilege common to other bonus combinations will be given.

By doing so, according to this control, it is possible to set a period during which the premium benefit can be received during the normal section, and conversely, a period during which the premium benefit cannot be received during the advantageous section. can do. In a pachi-slot machine having a normal section and an advantageous section, the status indicator 147b lights up during the advantageous section to notify that the player is staying in the advantageous section. For the player, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the player is in the advantageous section from the lighting state of the status indicator 147b, so that the operation of the game is reduced when the player is not in the advantageous section (during the normal section). There is a possibility that it will end up. In this regard, according to this control, a premium privilege can be received when the player is not in the advantageous section, so even if it is found that the state indicator 147b is in the normal section from the lighting state, the game can be operated. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In this control, if "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section, only a small privilege based on the common processing is given, so that the player may feel a loss. Therefore, in the main control board 71, a combination of symbols that is basically common is effective in the case where "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination and the case where "F_BB2 + special winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed along with. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), when the stop operation is performed in the "first operation mode", the main control board 71 is the case where "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination. Even if there is, stop control is performed so that the combination of common symbols is displayed along the effective line even when "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the "second operation mode", the main control board 71 has "F_BB2 + special combination" even when "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination. A combination of symbols different from the case determined as an internal winning combination (for example, a combination of lost symbols when winning "F_BB2", a combination of symbols corresponding to "special combination" when winning "F_BB2 + special combination") is effective. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed along the line.

At this time, in the "first operation mode" in which the combination of common symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is such that a small combination (not the pull-in 1) that is missed other than the "special combination" is missed. It is preferable that there is no timing (so-called "small winning combination recovery method"). More preferably, in the "second operation mode" in which the combination of individual symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is the timing at which a small winning combination other than the "special combination" is missed. Further, more preferably, the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the "special role" is displayed along the valid line is the number of medals corresponding to the small combination other than the "special combination". Less than the number of medals paid out when the combination of is displayed along the valid line.

By doing so, as long as the game is played in the "first operation mode (small winning combination recovery method)", is "F_BB2" determined as the internal winning combination from the combination of the displayed symbols? Since it is not possible to determine whether "F_BB2 + special combination" has been determined as the internal winning combination, no loss is felt. The example shown in FIG. 163 has a combination of "F_BB2" and "F_BB2 + special combination", but is not limited to this. That is, in this control, it is sufficient that the bonus combination (BB2) is common, but the type of combination that is duplicated with the bonus combination is different.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. Functions as a stop control means.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous section, the main control board 71 executes a common process of granting a common privilege regardless of the type of the determined bonus combination, and in the normal section, " When "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, it functions as a common processing means and an individual processing means in order to give a premium privilege.

[Modification example]
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 173.

<Another control regarding the transition lottery of advantageous sections>
First, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167, a modified example of the transition lottery of the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 164 (A) shows the probability of winning a lottery for transition to an advantageous section (probability of transition to advantageous section (= P (X))) for each gaming state in the normal section. The reference item "when the accessory is not activated" in FIG. 164 is a state in which the accessory (first-class special accessory, etc.) is not operating. In addition, "general middle when the accessory is not activated (hereinafter," general middle ")" is a state in which the accessory is not operating and the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, "inside inside when the accessory is not activated (hereinafter," inside inside ")" means that the accessory is not operating and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination (between the flags). Is. In addition, "BB general middle when the accessory is not activated (hereinafter," BB general middle ")" is a state in which the bonus state is in effect but the accessory is not operating. Further, the reference item "when the accessory is activated" is a state in which the accessory is operating. Further, "in operation of RB when the accessory is operating (hereinafter," RB is in operation ")" is a state in which the first-class special accessory (RB) among the accessories is operating. Further, "the CB is operating when the accessory is operating (hereinafter," CB is operating ")" is a state in which the second type special accessory (CB) is operating among the accessories.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, but it is necessary to ensure that the probability of transition to an advantageous section is uniform. Therefore, this transition lottery cannot be performed except for "general middle" when the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination (excluding replay) fluctuates depending on the gaming state. The principle pattern in FIG. 164 (A) shows a pattern in which the advantageous section transition probability fluctuates depending on the gaming state. In such a principle pattern, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for transition to an advantageous section only in "general middle", and cannot perform it in other cases. ..

Here, since it is only necessary to guarantee that the probability of transition to the advantageous section is uniform, if the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination is the same as "general middle", the uniform guarantee is provided. Since it is made, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for transition to an exceptionally advantageous section.

As an example, the exception pattern 1 in the figure is a lottery value used for an internal lottery related to a small winning combination (a winning combination with a payout) and a replay in which the winning probability does not change even if the RT state changes (hereinafter, “advantageous section lottery target combination”). However, the case where "general middle", "internal middle", and "BB general middle" are common (in other words, the winning probability of the winning combination of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common) is shown. In the case of this exception pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), as shown in FIG. can.

Further, the exception pattern 2 in the figure shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is the same as that of "RB in operation", "general middle", "internal middle", and "BB general middle". In the case of this exception pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), as shown in FIG. It can be performed.

Further, the exception pattern 3 in the figure shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common to "CB operating", "general medium", "internal medium", "BB general medium", and "RB operating". In the case of this exception pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 has the same advantages as "internal", "BB in general", "RB in operation", and "CB in operation" as in "general". A lottery for transition to a section can be performed.

It should be noted that "internal", "RB in operation", "BB in general", and "CB in operation" are provided according to the specifications of the pachislot machine, and may not be partially provided depending on the specifications of the pachislot machine. As an example, BB (continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory) and RB (first-class special accessory) are not installed, and CB (second-class special accessory) is installed (MB (second-class special accessory). A pachislot machine (which may include a continuous differential device related to the accessory), or a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section during "BB general" or "RB operation" although it is equipped with BB or RB. Instead, in the pachislot machine, the main control board 71 is divided into "general middle" and "internal middle" as shown in the exception pattern 4 of FIG. 164 (B). It is possible to perform a lottery for transition to an advantageous section when "CB is in operation".

In addition, the main control board 71 draws a lottery to shift to an advantageous section based on not only a combination with no setting difference (setting difference combination) but also a combination with a setting difference (setting difference combination) in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination. You may do it. Further, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section with the same probability regardless of the set value, or may perform the lottery with different probabilities depending on the set value.

Here, in FIG. 165, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed based on both a set unquestioned combination and a set difference combination, and a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. This is an example of a lottery table for transition to an advantageous section, which is preferably used in some cases.

As a general rule, the main control board 71 performs a lottery to shift to an advantageous section only in the "general middle" of "when the accessory is not operating". As an exception, even in a state other than "general middle", it can be guaranteed that the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is uniform only when the same configuration as "general middle" is used, and the advantage section is entered. You can do a transition lottery. For example, in the example of the figure, the internal winning probabilities of "Replay 1", "Cherry", "Watermelon 1", "Watermelon 2", "Pushing order bell 1" to "Pushing order bell 6" are "BB general" and "RB in operation". If it is the same as "general middle", the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be performed as in "general middle". In addition, if the specifications are such that the re-game is not won during the bonus state such as "BB general" and "RB is in operation", the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section at the time of re-game winning of "general" is not performed (lottery processing). Uniformity can be guaranteed if the lottery value is set to "0" even if it is excluded from the target of itself or the lottery process is performed.

In the figure, "Replay 1" is a replaying role in which the winning probability does not change even if the RT state changes, and "Replay 2" is a replaying role in which the winning probability changes when the RT state changes. As shown in (Note 1), if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed based on "Replay 2", the probability of transition to the advantageous section differs depending on the RT state, and uniformness cannot be ensured. 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section even when the "replay 2" is won. On the other hand, since the "replay 1" can be guaranteed to be uniform, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery to shift to an advantageous section when the "replay 1" is won. Even if the replays have different winning probabilities in the RT state or the like, the main control board 71 may perform a lottery to shift to the advantageous section only during the replay probability non-variable state (RT0) in which the RT state is inactive. good.

Further, in the figure, "cherry" may be determined alone as an internal winning combination, or may even be determined as an internal winning combination together with "cherry (No. 3)" and BB1 "BB1 + cherry (No. 11)". ) ". In this case, since both of the reference lottery are "cherries", as shown in (Note 2), the main control board 71 uses the lottery value of the transition lottery linked to the "cherries" to enter the advantageous section. Perform a transition lottery.

On the other hand, regarding watermelon, the reference lottery is different between "watermelon 1" and "watermelon 2" between "watermelon 1 (No. 4)" and "BB2 + watermelon 2 (No. 12)". Therefore, as shown in (Note 3), the main control board 71 can perform a shift lottery to an advantageous section by using different lottery values in each.

In addition, the bonus combination, such as "RB (No. 13)", which is determined independently as the internal winning combination, is the internal winning combination in "internal middle", "BB general middle", "RB operating", and "CB operating". The probability of being determined as "general medium" fluctuates. Therefore, as shown in (Note 4), the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section even when the "RB" determined as the internal winning combination is won by itself.

Subsequently, FIG. 166 is preferably used when a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed based on both a setting unquestioned combination and a setting difference combination, and a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed with different probabilities depending on the set value. This is an example of a lottery table for transition to an advantageous section.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section with a different probability depending on a set value. It should be noted that the method of providing a setting difference in the transition lottery to the advantageous section is arbitrary, and for example, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be different in all the set values as in "Replay 1". Further, it may be common to some set values such as "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". Further, even for a combination having a different probability of being determined as an internal winning combination such as “cherry”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section may be performed with a different probability depending on the set value. Further, as in "Watermelon 2", the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be common in all the set values. In addition, in "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6", the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section in "push order bell 1" to the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section in "push order bell 6". However, the winning probability may be different depending on the type of "push order bell".

Subsequently, FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a method of calculating the accessory ratio in the present modification. FIG. 167 (A) is a method of calculating the accessory ratio in a model having no instruction function (AT) for notifying (instructing) the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the case of such a model, the main control board 71 is paid out to the total number of medals (= X + Y) paid out in all the gaming states while any of the accessories is operating (during the bonus operation). The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the bonus ratio.

Further, FIG. 167 (B) is a first calculation method of the accessory ratio in the model having the instruction function, and FIG. 167 (C) is a second calculation method of the accessory ratio in the model having the instruction function. be. If the player has an instruction function, the medals paid out to the player are (X) medals paid out during the bonus operation, (Y) medals paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation, and (Z) bonus. It can be divided into medals that are paid out when the instruction function does not work.

As shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the first calculation method, the main control board 71 is paid out during the bonus operation with respect to the total number of medals (= X + Y + Z) paid out in all the gaming states. The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the bonus ratio. Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the second calculation method, the main control board 71 pays out the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (= X + Y + Z) during the bonus operation. The ratio of the sum (= X + Y) of the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation is calculated as the bonus ratio.

In the model having the instruction function, the accessory ratio may be calculated by using the first calculation method, or the accessory ratio may be calculated by using the second calculation method. In addition, by using the second calculation method, it becomes easier to detect not only the goto that illegally activates the bonus but also the goto that illegally activates the instruction function, and the security can be improved. can. It should be noted that the first calculation method and the second calculation method may be automatically switched and confirmed manually or with the passage of time.

Further, the method of calculating the bonus ratio may be different depending on the method of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section. For example, when the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the advantageous section with the same probability regardless of the set value as shown in FIG. 165, the bonus ratio is calculated by the first calculation method. , May be displayed on the ratio display 422. Further, for example, when the main control board 71 performs the lottery for transition to the advantageous section with different probabilities according to the set value as shown in FIG. May be calculated and both may be displayed on the ratio display 422.

If there are too many items to be displayed on the ratio display 422, the calculation load on the main (main control board 71) side will increase. Therefore, when displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the second calculation method, It is also possible not to display the specific section ratio (advantageous section ratio (= value indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section among the total number of games)).

Further, the method of calculating (Y) the medal to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the operation of the bonus is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 may add the number of medals actually paid out to the payout number counter for calculation so as not to deviate from the actual number of payouts. In this case, if the batting order (pushing order) is missed as a result of a stop operation different from the instruction (navigation), the value of the counter for the number of payouts is maintained or the value is changed by processing +0. do not. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may calculate the medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function, assuming that the medals corresponding to the batting order are paid out when the instruction (navigation) is given. good. In this case, the main control board 71 may update the value of the payout counter for the number of medals according to the batting order when the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination. This makes it possible to grasp the behavior of the gaming machine that is not affected by the accidental operation error of the player.

Further, the medal for calculating the number of payouts in (Y) may be a medal paid out while the instruction function is operating, or a medal paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function. You may. Here, in pachislot, during ART (during the operation of the instruction function), a winning combination (for example, a push order bell (batting order bell)) in which the result of the game (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) differs depending on the mode of the stop operation is internally won. When the winning combination is determined, the player is notified of an advantageous stopping operation mode, while a winning combination (for example, a so-called rare role such as a watermelon or a cherry) having a different game result regardless of the stopping operation mode is inside. Since it is not necessary to notify the player when the winning combination is determined, the mode of the stop operation is not notified to the player.

When the number of payouts (Y) is calculated from the former (medals paid out while the instruction function is operating), the main control board 71 is paid out during ART (during the operation of the instruction function) regardless of the presence or absence of notification. The number of medals to be paid out in (Y) is calculated using all the medals that have been played (for example, medals paid out in connection with the rare role). On the other hand, when the number of payouts in (Y) is calculated from the latter (medals paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function), the main control board 71 is during ART (operation of the instruction function) as a result of the notification. Only the medals paid out in (middle) are used to calculate the number of medals paid out in (Y), and the medals paid out without notification are used in the calculation of the number of medals paid out in (Z).
Further, in the latter case, the main control board 71 may perform the following control.

As described above, during the operation of the instruction function, when a combination in which a combination of different symbols is displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation is determined as the internal winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. do. As a role to be notified by such an instruction function, for example, a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed when the batting order is correct, and a specific symbol combination (bell spilled eye) is displayed when the batting order is incorrect. Is displayed (pushing order bell (batting order bell)), but depending on the pachislot, a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation (pull-in 1). (Common bell) may be provided. Such a "common bell" does not need to notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, but is the winning combination when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed is the "push order bell"? Since it is possible to know whether or not it is a "common bell" from the presence or absence of notification, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 can be used even when the "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also possible to notify the push order in a dramatic manner.

Here, the notification of the push order at the time of winning the "common bell" is a directing one and does not affect the result of the game (the number of medals to be paid out). Therefore, when calculating the number of medals paid out in (Y) from the latter, it is not necessary to include the number of medals paid out by the "common bell" in the number of medals paid out in (Y), but the main control board 71 uses the "common bell". The number of medals paid out in (Y) may or may not be included in the number of medals paid out.

When the number of medals paid out by the "common bell" is included in the number of medals paid out in (Y), a counter that counts the number of medals paid out when the instruction function is activated (the notification lamp 147a is lit) is uniformly added. Since the processing can be performed uniformly, the program capacity on the main (main control board 71) side can be reduced.

It should be noted that the notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the "common bell" can be performed by the main control board 71 using the notification lamp 147a, but can also be performed by the sub control board 72 using the display unit 100. It can also be performed on both the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Here, if only the sub-control board 72 notifies the push order when the "common bell" is won and the main control board 71 does not, it is assumed that the instruction function is not activated and the "common bell" is used for paying out. The number of medals awarded may not be included in the number of payouts in (Y).

Further, when the accessory ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 60%) close to a predetermined value (70%), the main control board 71 is instructed at the time of winning the role of attraction 1 such as "common bell". If the activation of the function (lighting of the notification lamp 147a) is reduced or the activation is prevented, and the accessory ratio is less than a predetermined threshold value (for example, less than 60%), the attraction 1 is performed. The frequency of activation of the instruction function may be changed according to the ratio of the accessory, such as allowing the activation of the instruction function at the time of winning the role of.

<Another configuration example of advantageous section>
In the examples and specification examples so far, the concept that the advantageous section is only one advantageous section is premised, and by devising a state in which the batting order combination instruction (navigation) is likely to occur and a state in which it is difficult to occur. I have explained the invention that enhances the interest of the game while increasing the degree of whiteness of the batting order design. From here, by further subdividing the concept of advantageous sections, we will organize the game characteristics and
It is also possible to increase the efficiency of development. Hereinafter, as an example, as shown in FIG. 168, a proposal is described in which, among the advantageous sections, the section in which the number of balls is less likely to increase is defined as the “directing section”, and the section in which the number of balls is generally likely to increase is defined as the “increased section”. ..

First, as a premise, each section is defined as follows.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition rate to the production section or increase section is set at 1 rate.
Production section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition ratio to other production sections or increase sections is the same as in the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function). (Contents of) are different sections. Included in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the "normal advantage" in the above description may be defined as the effect section as in the present proposal.
Increased section: This is the section where the number of game medals increases (the payout rate does not always exceed 1), and unlike the normal section and the production section, it is instructed for each state of the increased section predetermined in the increased section. A section where processing related to functions can be performed freely. Included in the advantageous section.
On the premise of this definition, it is preferable that the advantageous section lamp is turned on when the production section or the increasing section is won and the ball ejection rate exceeds 1, and is turned off when the ball is initialized. .. By doing so, the situation that the number of medals does not increase even though the advantageous section lamp is lit does not occur, so that at least the number of medals increases, and the gaming machine has specifications that are easy for the player to understand.
Further, when the increase section is terminated, the fairness among the players can be ensured by initializing the parameters related to the performance related to the instruction function and shifting to the normal section. Then, as in the case of winning in the advantageous section continuous lottery at the end of the above-mentioned "ART", in the game state where the player shifts to the production section after the increase section and expects the "ART" consecutive villa, the number of balls is reduced. Even so, the specifications may be made in consideration of keeping the advantageous section lamp lit so that the player does not stop the game in a state where there is a possibility that "hits" will continue.

The fact that the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same and the transition destination (contents of processing related to the instruction function) is different refers to the following game specifications as an example.
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in normal section Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100
Transition destination distribution production section (CZ) 75% increase section (ART) 25%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (CZ) approx. 1/133 Increase section (ART) approx. 1/400
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in the effect section (CZ) Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the transition ratio is the same.
Transition destination distribution production section (upper CZ) 10% increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) Approx. 1/1000 Increase section (ART) Approx. 1/111
In this way, by changing the distribution of the transition destination, the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery refers to the same value, and among the advantageous sections, it is possible to shift to an increasing section where medals increase, such as "ART". Like "normal advantage" and "SCZ", although the increase in medals cannot be expected so much, it is possible to widen the distribution of whether to make it a chance state of ART winning, and the overall processing flow is simplified. At the same time, it is possible to create various transition variations of the gaming state.
If the production section is too long, the player will be forced to play the game excessively without expecting an increase in medals, which may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, for example, the number of games should be 16 or less, or 32. A certain number of games may be set as an upper limit, such as a game. In addition, the number of games that function as an index that does not excessively restrain the player, such as when the number of medals consumed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of times the batting order bell is established reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8 times). A parameter other than the above may be referred to as an end condition of the effect section.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination with no setting difference, but in this modification, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the determination of the internal winning combination with the setting difference. Is supposed to be done. Even in this case, there is no setting difference in the lottery table related to the advantageous section. By referring to the lottery table common to all settings, the difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate are based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination. To make a difference. As a result, it is possible to create a difference in the payout rate and a difference in the ART occurrence rate without increasing the capacity of the lottery table itself related to the advantageous section.

If the "directing section" is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous section lamp because the advantageous section, the directing section, and the bonus operation can be expected to increase the game medals. You can enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section ramp without digesting work while the bonus is operating. In this case, in the case of temporarily shifting to the production section (CZ or the like) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp shall be turned off when the bonus ends. When shifting to an increasing section (ART, etc.) after the bonus, it is advisable to keep the advantageous section lamp lit as it is.
During the so-called ART preparation to shift RT to high RT, it is definitely confirmed that the right to shift to ART, which is very advantageous for the player, has already been granted, although the ball output rate does not necessarily exceed 1. By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is inadvertently stopped while the ART right is left.

In addition to the internal winning combination, lottery and determination related to the advantageous section may be performed based on the display appearance (also referred to as symbol combination, winning result, result display) on the effective line of the main reel. For example, there is an internal winning combination A that can win either a 3-card combination or a 1-card combination depending on the timing of pressing. In this case, if the three-card combination wins, the advantageous section-related lottery is not performed, or if the one-card combination wins, the lottery related to the advantageous section is performed under more disadvantageous conditions than when the one-card combination wins. By recommending a method of avoiding the winning of the three-card winning by intentionally pushing the player as a condition that is more advantageous than the case where the three-card winning is won, the base at normal times is For the player who chooses a low hitting method, the specification can be such that ART is easy to win.
With such specifications, you can enjoy a long game with a game that is hard to win ART instead of pushing the role of 3 cards in normal time and not reducing the number of medals so much, or push the role of 1 card in normal time. Then, instead of the speed at which the medals decrease is fast, the player can freely choose whether to enjoy the game for a short time, such as being easy to win the ART, and the range of the game can be expanded.
In addition, the above is just an example, and it is not limited to the one that requires a small number of payouts such as one-card role, but the RT transition roll (small role spilled eye or fall replay) that shifts to RT with a low degree of advantage by pushing. ) May be displayed, or the lottery related to the advantageous section may be performed under better conditions than when the advantageous display result is derived.
To summarize this idea, when a predetermined internal winning combination with a different display result is determined depending on the stop operation mode, it is most advantageous in terms of the benefits of winning judgment for granting game value (medals), RT transition, or bonus operation. The content of the lottery of the advantageous section-related lottery is more advantageous than the case where the most advantageous display result is derived for the benefit of the payment judgment. When it comes to what is done in, it can be expressed.

By overlapping and determining the internal winning combination so that the number of medals is substantially reduced while some bonuses are in operation, the increase in the number of cards per game during ART is increased to about 3 by the amount that the bonus is reduced. There is no method, and during the bonus operation, only the pure increase is established and the net increase is 0, so the bonus is used in the game machine type test to offset the speed of increase during ART and adapt it. Specifications are also possible. In addition, as a lottery related to the advantageous section inside the bonus, the normal section, the production section, and the advantageous section also stay at the RT inside the bonus, and by increasing the small winning probability, the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win can be contained. Various specifications may be adopted according to the modified example to provide a gaming machine having an appropriate ball ejection speed, which is highly desired by players and playgrounds.
In addition, since some players feel that the gambling speed is high when the ball ejection speed is high, the number of limiter games should be shortened from 1500 games to 1200 games to appropriately suppress the gambling and prevent so-called immersiveness. Consideration may be given from the viewpoint.
Further, regarding the number of games that is a condition for activating the limiter, the count may be started from the start of the advantageous section including the effect section or the count may be started from the start of the increase section. In addition, in the game of the day, the difference other than the advantageous section is activated, such as activating the limiter when 3000 medals increase from the starting point of the difference number at the time when the most negative point is seen from the customer side. With reference to the situation such as the number of medals, the gambling may be suppressed by a limiter according to factors other than the number of games.

Further, as an example in which the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same and the transition destination (contents of the process related to the instruction function) is different, the game specification shown in FIG. 169 may be used.

Specifically, FIG. 169 (A) shows an example of a transition lottery table used for a transition lottery to an advantageous section. As shown in the figure, the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result for each reference item (internal winning combination). Here, as a result of the lottery, the processing to be performed at the time of winning (winning processing) is specified. As shown in FIG. 169 (B), this winning treatment differs depending on the state of stay when the winning treatment is determined. For example, even when "winning treatment 1" is determined, the winning treatment is determined. When the staying state is the "normal section", the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the effect section A, and when the staying state is the "effect section A", the main control board 71 is used. The control board 71 shifts from the effect section A to the effect section B. By doing so, it is possible to realize control in which the migration ratio (winning probability) is the same and the migration destination (contents of the processing related to the instruction function) is different, and as a result, the uniformity of the advantageous section transition probability is guaranteed. It is possible to realize fair playability and reduce the data capacity.

The main control board 71 may be freely added and drawn by referring to a table or the like predetermined in the “increase section”. For example, it is possible to set a plurality of states (additional low accuracy, high accuracy, ultra-high accuracy, specialized zone) in the "increase section" and perform an additional lottery according to the current state.

<Another example of lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 170, the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) in the pachi-slot machine 1 having the “directing section” and the “increasing section” as the advantageous section, particularly the “increasing section” is shifted. The relationship between the notification effect for notifying that the decision to be made has been made and the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 having the "effect section" and the "increasing section", the main control board 71 can turn on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section", not at the timing of shifting to the advantageous section. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the sub-control board 72 can execute an effect (precursor effect) as to whether or not it is possible to shift to the “increase section” during the “effect section”. As shown below, in this control, when it is determined to shift to the "increasing section", the sub-control board 72 performs a precursor effect during the "effect section" and, as a result of the precursor effect, "increase section". The main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp when the notification effect for notifying that the decision to shift to the "effect section" has been made is performed and then the shift from the "effect section" to the "increase section" is performed. In other words, in this control, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp after the notification of the precursory result by the sub control board 72.

First, FIG. 170 (A) is a first pattern showing the relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of notifying the result of the precursor (timing of the notification effect). In the figure, it is determined that the main control board 71 shifts to the “increasing section” after shifting to the “directing section” in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section performed during the normal section. By this decision, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the timing of the transition to the "increasing section" to the "directing section" of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section lamp has not yet been lit. In order to use the inside of the "effect section" as a precursor to the "increase section", the sub-control board 72 performs a precursor effect to fuel the transition to the "increase section" during the "effect section" via the display unit 100. After that, just before the end of the precursor, the sub-control board 72 executes a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the "increasing section" via the display unit 100. In the case of the example shown in the figure, since it is determined to shift to the "increased section" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the sub-control board 72 shifts to the "increased section" in the notification effect. Notify that the decision to migrate has been made. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the "effect section" to the "increasing section", but at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section", the advantageous section lamp is turned on.

Subsequently, FIG. 170B is a second pattern showing the relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of the notification effect. In the figure, in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, it is determined that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section without shifting to the “increasing section” after shifting to the “directing section”. .. By this determination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the "effect section" of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section lamp is not yet lit. The main control board 71 also performs a transition lottery during the "effect section", and in the example shown in the figure, as a result of the transition lottery during the "effect section", the transition to the "increase section" is determined. Similar to FIG. 170 (A), the sub-control board 72 performs a precursory effect that encourages the transition to the “increased section” during the “effect section” via the display unit 100. After that, just before the end of the precursor, the sub-control board 72 executes a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the "increasing section" via the display unit 100. In the case of the example shown in the figure, although the transition to the "increase section" is not determined in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the "increase" is performed in the transition lottery performed during the subsequent "directing section". Since it has been decided to shift to the "section", the sub-control board 72 notifies that the decision to shift to the "increasing section" has been made in the notification effect. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the "effect section" to the "increasing section", but at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section", the advantageous section lamp is turned on.

By setting the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp after the notification effect in this way, according to this control, the player moves to the "increasing section" when the precursor effect or the notification effect is executed in the "effect section". There is no way to know whether or not the transition is successful, and you will not lose interest in the production.

Subsequently, FIG. 170 (C) is another example of the lottery result (winning process) of the transition lottery to the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, when the main control board 71 determines "winning process 1" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the "directing section" and the "directing section". After 15 games have passed, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started. Further, when the main control board 71 determines the "winning process 2" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the "directing section", and 15 games have elapsed in the "directing section". Later, the game will shift to ART (“increase section”) where the initial number of games is 50 games.

By doing so, the length of the "directing section (precursor)" depending on whether the transition to the "increased section (ART)" is won or not in the transition lottery during the normal section. Can be the same. For the player, since it is not possible to predict the subsequent development during the "directing section (precursor)", the game will be played without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs the push order navigation when the push order role is won, that is, the push order navigation which has the profit of increasing the number of balls due to the occurrence of the navigation, for the "directing section" among the advantageous sections. It may be possible to terminate without generating it. Because the "directing section" is a section where the advantageous section lamp does not light up, the player does not feel that there is no benefit even though it lights up, and there is no risk of discouraging the player. be. Further, the main control board 71 may allow a slight increase in the number of balls to be ejected or a decrease in the consumption of medals by notifying the pushing order in the game in which the pushing order is won in the "directing section". , It is desirable that the notification frequency of the push order in the game in which the push order is won is relatively low as compared with the "increase section", and the number of balls is not increased so much. This is because if the increase in the number of medals in the "directing section" is increased, it may lead to a relative decrease in the payout to be paid out in the "increasing section" in order to adjust the balance of the payouts.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control board 71 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control unit.

Further, the main control board 71 can determine the transition of the gaming state, and at least sets the gaming state in the normal section and the advantageous section having the “directing section” and the “increasing section” which are more advantageous than the normal section. Since it can be controlled, the main control board 71 functions as a transition determination means and a state control means.

Further, when the gaming state becomes the "increasing section", the main control board 71 lights the advantageous section lamp that can notify that the gaming state is the "increasing section". Therefore, the main control board 71 and the advantageous section lamp are used. Functions as a notification means.

Further, the sub-control board 72 can control the effect via the display unit 100 and execute a notification effect (specific effect) to notify that the game state has been determined to shift to the “increased section”. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect control unit and a notification effect execution means.

Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to perform the stop operation advantageous to the player. In order to notify the mode, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)>
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. So far, as the limiter of the advantageous section, the limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of the limiter of the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. not. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 171 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), which is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number are the values seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts from the time when the number of medals is the lowest so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something to make.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased after the start of the advantageous section. This means that the number of medals has decreased, for example, during preparation for ART or in a precursory state. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number limiter is 2400, but this is just an example, and a smaller value or a larger value is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the condition for activating the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) is that the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter. Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B <the difference in the number of sheets limiter C (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. If the number limiter is activated when the bonus is subtracted more than the expected value, or when the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, and the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals will be paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry too much about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of game limiters. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for a specification in which the net increase in the number of games per game is relatively low, such as 0.1 to 1, but the number of games continues for a long time, such a specification can suppress the frequency of activation of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. As a result, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the rate at which the advantageous section ends due to the end conditions of the advantageous section other than the limiter (such as the number of ART games and the stock of the number of sets becomes zero) rather than the rate at which the limiter is reached. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of the event that the right to digest the advantageous section is erased by the activation of the limiter as a high ball ejection design.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using the display unit 100 when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may be different in the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is confirmed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a dedicated effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, the sub-control board 72 is preferable for the player (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) when the limiter which is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter which is easy to activate due to the specifications. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, in the sub-control board 72, when the activation of the number limiter becomes rich, the ending effect 1 is performed, and when the activation of the game number limiter becomes rich, the ending effect 2 is performed. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs, the ending effect 3 (may be an effect having a branch to the ending effect 1 or 2) is performed. In order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to provide an end suggestion period (ending) for the end of the advantageous section before the limiter is activated. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number limiter becomes rich" means, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets for which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). It is when the number is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum with the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / slope value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly larger than the threshold number (for example, the number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated or the number of games concerned). (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games elapsed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the type of the limiter (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to motivate the game to expect a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of the type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of a model in which the number of games limiter is mainly activated and the number limiter is not activated so much in the case of the original payout specifications, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is being performed or the game is played. The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

If the conditions for activating the number limiter and the conditions for activating the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is advisable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the conditions for activating the number limiter and the conditions for activating the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, it is assumed that only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71). In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the limiter of the type performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, and may be able to detect the end of the advantageous section by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the limiter by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated while the bonus is operating (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game that may activate the number limiter)
For example, in a three-card game where the number of remaining cards until the number limiter is activated is six, the push order bell in which nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer is won, and the correct push order is notified. If the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated from the start of the game, assuming that the number limiter is activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pushing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that was started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is scheduled to be activated). The effect of the effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter will not be activated.

(Production when the activated limiter is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining cards until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order bell is won and the correct push order is notified. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the push order is missed without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the game number limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).
In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order bell is won, and any timing of the transition (first stop operation to all) in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed. At any time after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed while the reels are stopped), switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated, or temporarily switch to the effect that does not correspond to the suggestion of either limiter activation. It is preferable to perform a process of returning the limiter to avoid a contradiction between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, the delay of the end effect and the extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls related to the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus end of the production timing according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying until the time or immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

<Control method of the number limiter>
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number increases to reach the number limiter.

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of the medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of all the bells that answered correctly in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game, the difference from the starting point exceeded "+2400", but the number limiter was already activated and the advantageous section (ART) was completed. It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be applied to the gaming machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be won and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

Further, the starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF determination, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be done.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either at the same value as the latest lowest point or at a smaller value. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased even after that, the starting point in the number limiter is "-9", which is the absolute difference number at the end of the 8th game after the start of the advantageous section.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (the time when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, at the time of winning the replay, the number of sheets to be input is 0 and the number of sheets to be paid out is 0, and the number counter is updated. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of input sheets at the time of winning the replay and update the number counter with the number of input sheets being 3 in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the operation to start the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be actually increased or decreased. It becomes easy to divert it to the number display for directing.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display unit 100 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player cannot grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number of sheets limiter is activated, and if the remaining number of sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, the remaining 999. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, the production stage such as the background may be different depending on the number range until the number limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal and can display it on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

<Adjustment method of number limiter>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 173 (C), the adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter is also conceivable. For example, if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals will be paid out, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification that the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be " If the number of medals is "+6" and the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing the wrong answer at the time of winning the push order, the number counter is set to "-3". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the wrong answer is given twice in the push order and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus as ART just before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment striking method starts from the M game, and the adjustment striking method is performed up to the X game, which is a BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the batting method (different from the batting order navigation) that can obtain the maximum profit for the player by performing an effect of suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the batting order notification. You may urge (stop operation). It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

In addition, if there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high probability of winning (15 cards with a bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until reaching is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, the fun of the game is enhanced by making the game playable so that the ball ejection rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of the game being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when playing as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, when a push order bell in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 notifies the player of the correct push order, and the player's operation mode and winning a prize. Regardless of the result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

<Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method>
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated striking method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.
(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example that suppresses the above-mentioned striking method, the bonus may be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus that only a small winning combination is paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed in the lottery of the advantageous section at the time of the bonus operation or during the bonus operation instead of increasing the medals, and the player does not perform the advantageous processing but the player at the game store. As long as you play a normal game, the reel control will hinder the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference number from the time of bonus operation to the end of bonus does not become a positive value, so the value of the number counter does not increase due to bonus operation, and the complicated hit as described above The player does not have to do the law.

<Playability with specifications that allow adjustment striking methods>
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(Removing small roles during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can perform the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, intentionally reduce the number of bonuses obtained, end the bonus, and after the bonus, use the above-mentioned striking method. It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the number of winnings with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order roles are only replays or roles with less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and three cards are hung. The number of push order bells is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing this, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the capture method is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1 or 2 cards) when the stop operation is different from that of the push order navigation system.)
There is a specification that one sheet will be paid out or dropped if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and may be confusing when playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring navigation, the negative value when ignoring navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored once more according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

In addition, it is not always necessary to pay out one sheet at a high frequency or it is missed, and it is possible to exert a certain effect even if it is generally stabilized. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the 1-card winning rate is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards. If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce the number of cards, you may choose the middle first stop. Also, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, if you stop in the order of "1 ・ 3 ・ 2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can select the reduction method by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).
(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored for navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may have different modes such as BGM, video, and lamp depending on the situation in which the navigation is followed and the situation in which the navigation is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.
(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) immediately after the lever is turned on, after the reel rotation starts, or a period for disabling the temporary operation acceptance of the stop button. As a result, it is possible to alert the player and prevent a case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended. In addition, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also call attention to audio and video.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)>
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 initializes the payout number counter at the start of the advantageous section or the increase section, and updates the payout number counter every time a payout occurs due to the winning of a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value regarding the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay wins is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payout. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)>
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the navigation count is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed to the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the medal is maintained or the medal is decreased during the advantageous section in the normal section. There is a navigation to suppress compared to the inside. The former navigation is, for example, in the case of a mode of stopping operation of the correct answer in the 3BET game (for example, at the time of the correct answer in the push order), the correct answer is given at the time of winning the role in which more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out. It refers to notifying the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three cards in the case of a correct stop operation mode in a 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) because of its role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing role can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were established after the start of the advantageous section (ART) by chance. If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player is not dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation count counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, to generate a navigation to be counted. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value regarding the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

<Another example of the limiter period>
Further, in the above description, an example of using a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, the medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may excessively incite gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period for the latest predetermined number of games (for example, the latest 6000 games) is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to terminate the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In addition, in the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (the number of AT games, the number of AT stocks, the number of possible differences, etc.) and the payout rate are referred to and special. When there is a risk that the limiter will be activated, the main control board 71 reduces the possibility of activating the special limiter, such as reducing the occurrence rate of addition before reaching the specified value, or when the special limiter is activated. It may be controlled so that the right of the increase interval (ART) to be erased is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of the pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a gaming machine that can be played using the gaming value,
The right to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a shortened time state) (pachislot). It may be the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc. in the pachinko machine, or it may be the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when the right is granted (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is an AT stock number in the pachislot machine, etc., or pachinko). It may be a continuation of the probable change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine provided with a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, the time when the power is turned on after a power failure for a predetermined time or longer is set as the start of the day (starting point), and a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the starting point. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

<Penalty for navigation mistakes>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed while waiting for the transition to high RT, such as during preparation for ART, the transition to high RT is avoided and the preparation for ART is postponed to prepare for ART. You can get a lot of extra lottery. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of the penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 220. The same configuration and control as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modifications will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples can be similarly applied. The feature 1 can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below.

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below is an AT machine. Generally, so-called ART machines and AT machines are known as pachi-slot machines having a notification state for notifying (navigating) a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player. The ART machine generally involves a transition of the RT state between the non-notification state and the notification state. For example, the game in the non-notification state is basically performed in the low RT state where the winning probability of the replay is low. , During the notification state, along with the navigation of the notification target role such as the push order bell (batting order bell), the navigation for shifting to the high RT state where the winning probability of the replay is high and the navigation for maintaining the high RT state are performed. On the other hand, in AT machines, it is common that the RT state is not changed between the non-notification state and the notification state. For example, during the flag-to-flag state (flag-to-flag RT) in which the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination. By continuing to avoid winning the bonus, the RT between flags is maintained in both the non-notification state and the notification state, and by switching the presence / absence of notification during the RT between flags, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched. ..

Here, the specifications of the flag-to-flag RT in the AT machine are various, but in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-217777, the 2BET game is performed by playing the 3BET game in the flag-to-flag state in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is carried over. A specification that keeps the state between flags while avoiding winning a special bonus is disclosed. The bonus dedicated to 2BET means a bonus that is determined as an internal winning combination only in the game played in 2BET and can be won only in the game played in 2BET. For example, the bonus dedicated to 2BET in the game played in 2BET. If the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination and then the 3BET game is played with the bonus carried over, the bonus will not be won during the 3BET game. Similarly, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched while playing the 3BET game during the flag-to-flag state in which the bonus (BB1 or BB2) dedicated to 2BET is carried over. By doing so, we have realized an AT machine. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is not limited to the AT machine, but can be similarly applied to the ART machine, and the flag carrying over the bonus dedicated to 2BET as the specification of the AT machine. It is not limited to what is done during the interim state, but can be applied to other specifications.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
First, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178.

[Design layout table]
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 174 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol position "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

[Design code table]
Further, as shown in FIG. 174, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 174 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "black BAR", "red BAR", "purple 7", "replay A", "replay B", "replay C", "replay D", and "bell". , "Blank top" and "Blank bottom", and 1 byte of data is assigned to each.

[Internal lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 175, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. When the 3BET bonus is not operating, the "3BET time, general" column is referred to, while the 3BET bonus is inside, the "3BET time, inside" column is referred to, and when the 3BET bonus is operating, "3BET time, BB". The column is referred to, the "2BET at the time, general" column is referred to while the 2BET bonus is not operating, and the "2BET at the time, inside" column is referred to during the 2BET bonus internal. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game progresses by playing the game of 3BET during the inside of the bonus dedicated to 2BET (state between flags), so basically, the internal lottery corresponding to the inside of 3BET. The table is referenced and no other internal lottery table is used.

In FIG. 175, when the combination indicated by "No. 1 (F_normal lip 1)" to "No. 45 (F_BB3)" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is described in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the same figure. Derivation of various combinations of symbols is permitted (winning is permitted). The contents of the symbol combinations described in the "corresponding symbol combinations" column are shown in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 176 and 177. Further, in FIG. 178, when each combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols actually winning among the combinations of symbols permitted to win a prize (correspondence between the internal winning combination and the display combination). ) Is shown.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The symbol combination table prescribes a combination of a plurality of symbols. In addition, in FIG. 176 and FIG. 177, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective line is the center line.

In FIGS. 176 and 177, the combination of the symbols corresponding to "BB1" to "BB3" is the combination of the symbols related to the operation of the bonus, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to "RP01" to "RP19" is the replay. It is a combination of symbols related to operation. Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to "NM01" to "NM34" is a combination of symbols related to the payout of medals.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (beating order), the display combination (combination of the symbols actually won), and the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 178 shows the correspondence in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the correspondence in other states is omitted. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the replay combination is a push order combination (three-choice combination) in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the first stop operation is different. , Pushing order small combination ("F_Batting order 1 bell A" to "F_Batting order 6 special B") is a 6-choice push order with different combinations of symbols displayed according to the 1st stop operation and the 2nd stop operation. It is a batting order (6 choices).

Further, in the figure, "TL lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_TL lip (RP01)", and the symbol "replay (design" replay A "to" replay D "" is along the top line (TL). It is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. The "middle rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_middle rip (RP03)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "replay" can be displayed side by side along the center line (middle). .. Further, the "XU bell lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_XU bell lip (RP19)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "bells" can be displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU). .. In the following, the "XD lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_XD lip (RP02)", and the symbol "replay" can be displayed side by side along the crossdown line (XD). Refers to a combination.

Further, in the figure, "purple 7 rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_purple 7TL rip (RP10)" to "C_purple 7XU rip (RP12)", and is 5 from the center line to the cross down line. It is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "purple 7" can be displayed side by side along any of the lines of the book. Further, "purple 7 fake" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_purple 7 fake 1 (RP13)" to "C_purple 7 fake 3 (RP15)", and can be used in any of the center line and the cross down line. Is also a combination of symbols in which three symbols "purple 7" are not displayed side by side.

Further, in the figure, "red BAR rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_red BARXD rip (RP06)" to "C_red BARXU rip (RP08)", and is any of the center line and the cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols that can display three symbols "red BAR" side by side along the crab. Further, "red BAR fake" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_red BAR fake 1 (RP16)" to "C_red BAR fake 3 (RP18)", and can be used in any of the center line and the cross down line. Is also a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" are not displayed side by side.

Further, in the figure, "W-matched lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_W-matched lip 1 (RP05)" and "C_W-matched 2 (RP09)", and is any one of the center line to the cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" are displayed side by side along one line, and three symbols "purple 7" can be displayed side by side along other lines from the center line to the cross-down line. Further, the "black BAR lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_black BAR lip (RP04)", and is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "black BAR" can be displayed side by side along the center line. Is.

Further, in the figure, the "lower bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_BL bell (NM30)", and three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the bottom line (lower row). It is a combination of. The "middle bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_CL bell (NM31)", and is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the center line (middle row). be. Further, the "upper bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_TL bell (NM32)", and is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the top line (upper row). be.

Further, in the figure, "irregular 1" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_irregular bell 1 (NM27)", and "irregular 2" is the combination name "C_irregular bell 2 (NM28)". It is a combination of the symbols concerned, and the "irregular 3" is a combination of the symbols related to the combination name "C_irregular bell 3 (NM29)".

Further, in the figure, "chance" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_chance 1 (NM33)" and "C_chance 2 (NM34)", and "1 sheet" is the combination name "C_L1st Miss 1". (NM01) ”to“ C_R2nd Miss 6 (NM26) ”is a combination of symbols. Further, "1 sheet (1/2)" or "1 sheet (1/4)" is inappropriate because the combination of "1 sheet" symbols is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. In some cases, it means "off". In addition, "off" is a combination of symbols in which none of the combinations specified in FIGS. 176 and 177 is displayed.

As shown in the figure, when "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)" are determined as internal winning combinations, the order of stop operations is left 1st (left). A special combination of symbols is displayed when it is middle right or left and right middle), but when the order of the stop operation is middle 1st (middle left and right or middle right left) or right 1st (right left middle or right middle left) If, the combination of "TL Lip" symbols is displayed. As will be described in detail later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, control may be performed to invalidate the deterministic combination. When the determinant combination is invalidated, the main control circuit 91 (and the sub control circuit 101) notifies the pressing order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", thereby combining the symbols of "TL lip". If you are prompted to display and do not invalidate the fixed combination, no push order is notified (by notifying the push order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle"), and a special combination of symbols is used. Enable display.

Regarding "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)", in this embodiment, when the order of the stop operation is the left 1st, a special combination of symbols is used. Is displayed and the order of the stop operation is the middle 1st or the right 1st, the combination of the symbols of "TL Lip" is displayed, but the order of the stop operation in which the special combination of symbols is displayed , The order of the stop operations in which the combination of the symbols of "TL Lip" is displayed may be different for each role.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and among the combinations of symbols related to the replay (RP), "XD". When a combination of symbols (RP01, RP03 to RP19) other than "Rip (RP02)" is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF. That is, among the combinations of symbols related to replay, "XD rip" functions as a combination of symbols that keeps the special mode ON, and among the combinations of symbols related to replay, combinations of symbols other than "XD rip" are It functions as a combination of symbols that updates the special mode to OFF.

Here, as shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination (No. 1 to No. 13) related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, "XD lip" is displayed. There is no such thing, and combinations of symbols other than "XD Lip" are always displayed. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special mode is ON and the combination related to the replay (No. 1 to No. 13) is determined as the internal winning combination, the special mode is always updated to OFF. Will be done.

In this respect, the main control circuit 91 may stop control the "XD rip" so that it can be displayed for some of the combinations related to the replay, and when it is in a partial pressing order. May be stopped and controlled so that "XD rip" can be displayed, and when a part of the winning combination related to the replay is determined as an internal winning combination, it is a part of the push order. In addition, the stop control may be performed so that the "XD lip" can be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may be stopped and controlled so that the "XD lip" can be displayed when it is in a specific gaming state. As a specific gaming state, for example, states having different RT states may be used. In the case of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played in the flag-to-flag RT (3BET game in the inside of the 2BET-dedicated bonus), but in the case of non-flag-to-flag RT (what is the flag-to-flag RT)? (In the case of different RT states), in other words, in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is not carried over, the main control circuit 91 may stop control so that the "XD lip" can be displayed. Even in this case, the main control circuit 91 may stop control so that "XD rip" can be displayed for some (or all) of the combinations related to the replay in different RT states. Further, for some (or all) combinations, only "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as to be displayable, and combinations of symbols other than "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as not to be displayed. Further, the main control circuit 91 can display "XD rip" for some (or all) of the combinations related to the replay in different RT states when the push order is partial. The stop control may be performed, and when the push order is different, the stop control may be performed so that a combination of symbols other than the "XD lip" can be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may be different depending on the number of BETs whether or not the stop control is performed so that the "XD lip" can be displayed. In the case of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a 3BET game is assumed, but in the case of a 2BET game, the main control circuit 91 may stop and control so that "XD lip" can be displayed. Alternatively, the stop control may be performed so that only the "XD lip" is displayed. Even in this case, the main control circuit 91 is stopped so that "XD rip" can be displayed (or only "XD rip" is displayed) for some of the combinations related to the replay of the 2BET game. It may be controlled, or it may be stopped and controlled so that "XD rip" can be displayed when a part of the 2BET game is pushed in order. It is also a 2BET game and the role related to the replay. When some of the winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations and some of the push orders are in order, "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as to be displayable.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may make a difference whether or not the stop control is performed so that the "XD lip" can be displayed in consideration of the gaming state (RT state) and the number of BETs. As an example, when the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific BET number, the main control circuit 91 is stopped and controlled so that "XD rip" can be displayed, and in other cases, it is stopped and controlled. The "XD lip" may be stopped and controlled so that it cannot be displayed. Even in this case, when the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific number of BETs, the main control circuit 91 is a part of the winning combination related to the replay. The stop control may be performed so that "XD rip" can be displayed (or only "XD rip" is displayed), and when the game state is a specific game state (RT state) and the number of BETs is a specific number. It may be possible to stop and control the "XD rip" so that it can be displayed when it is in a partial push order, and when it is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific number of BETs. If a part of the winning combination related to the replay is determined as an internal winning combination and the pushing order is a part, the "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as to be displayable.

[Game flow of the pachi-slot machine of the fourth embodiment]
Subsequently, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an outline of the ball ejection state and the gaming state in a list. The ball ejection state and the mode shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 are controlled by the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91).

As shown in FIG. 179, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control circuit 91, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control circuit 91. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the light state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is suppressed from notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 controls the ball ejection state by performing various processes, and the various processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a lottery process (lottery process) and a lottery process. It is divided into processing that does not depend on (other processing).

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. "Normal" is the initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and after the end of the advantageous section, all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared, and the state shifts to this "normal" state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery, you will win the advantageous section. There are "normal winning" and "AT precursor winning" in the advantageous section winning. In the case of "normal winning", the next game shifts to "normal advantage" as the payout state, and in the case of "AT precursor win", the payout state shifts to "AT precursor". In addition, in "normal", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, it becomes "AT winning" and the payout state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

The advantageous section is the main ball ejection state, "normal advantage" "CZ precursor" "AT precursor" "CZ" "special zone preparation" "special zone" "AT" "AT middle CZ" "special AT" "ending" Is feasible. In the advantageous section, a navigation (bell navigation) that displays the combination of symbols of the maximum number of payouts can be generated at the time of winning the push order small combination (in this embodiment, "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6 special B"). The main control circuit 91 performs bell navigation in the "specialized zone", "AT", "special AT", and "ending" in the advantageous section, and performs "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "AT precursor", and "CZ". In "AT Naka CZ", bell navigation is not performed, and in "specialized zone preparation", bell navigation is performed according to the lottery result. The above-mentioned limiter is provided in the advantageous section, and when the limiter reaches, for example, 1500G after the advantageous section is started, the limit processing by the game number limiter is executed, and the difference number after the advantageous section is started is, for example, 2400. When it reaches, the limit processing by the number limiter is executed. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with the AT, and the section is shifted to the normal section.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "normal advantage" shifts to the "normal win" by the advantageous section lottery in the "normal". Further, the "normal advantage" also shifts to the case where the remaining 0G is left in the "CZ" due to the AT non-winning. In the "normal advantage", the AT lottery and the CZ lottery are executed. When the CZ lottery is won, the state shifts from the "normal advantage" to the "CZ" state, and when the "AT precursor win" is reached, the state shifts from the "normal advantage" to the "AT precursor" state. In addition, in the "normal advantage", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, it becomes "AT winning" and the payout state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

Further, the "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the winning probability of the AT lottery is different, such as "low accuracy", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", and "special". In the case of "normal winning" due to the advantageous section lottery in "normal", the initial value of the normal mode is determined by the initial normal mode lottery. During the "normal advantage", the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and the mode transition is controlled according to the lottery result.

Further, the "normal advantage" includes a CZ mode in which the winning probabilities of "CZ" such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", and "high accuracy B" are different. The type of CZ mode is initially "low accuracy" and is promoted / fallen or maintained by the CZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage". In this embodiment, the CZ mode is controlled according to the CZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage", and is performed when the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage" reaches the specified number of games. It may be controlled by ceiling control.

Further, in "normal advantage", lottery processing such as history lottery and ceiling benefit lottery, and other processing such as ceiling control are performed. The history lottery is a process of determining whether or not a lottery target combination grants a privilege according to the number of times the winning combination is determined between predetermined games, and details will be described later in FIGS. 186 and 187. Further, the ceiling benefit lottery and the ceiling control are processes performed when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches the specified number of games, which will be described in detail later in FIG. 185.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "CZ precursor" shifts to the CZ winning by the CZ lottery in the "normal advantage". The "CZ precursor" ends when the number of precursor games between 1 and 32 games has elapsed, and the game shifts to the "CZ" state. In addition, during "CZ precursor", AT lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and when winning, the state shifts from "CZ precursor" to "AT precursor" or "specialized zone preparation", and will be described later. When the final winning combination is determined as the winning combination, the ball ejection state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “CZ” shifts by playing games for the number of precursor games in the “CZ precursor”. "CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) that is relatively easy to win "AT" and continues for 5 games. There are two types of "CZ", "normal" and "special", which have different winning probabilities for AT lottery. Basically, the AT winning probability is higher when the type is "special" than when it is "normal". If you win the AT lottery during "CZ", after the specified number of games (5G) of "CZ" has elapsed, the state shifts from "CZ" to the state of "specialized zone preparation", and "CZ" without winning the AT lottery. When the specified number of games (5G) of "" has elapsed, the state shifts to the "normally advantageous" state. The "CZ" will continue until the specified number of games (5G) has elapsed, even if the AT lottery is won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery may be won a plurality of times during the "CZ", and in this case, a plurality of AT stocks (more specifically, special zone stocks) are given. However, in "CZ", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, the payout state becomes "specialized zone preparation" from the next game regardless of the number of remaining games in the CZ.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “AT precursor” shifts to the AT precursor winning by AT lottery in “normal” or “normal advantage”. The "AT precursor" ends when the number of precursor games between 1 and 32 games has elapsed, and the state shifts to the "specialized zone preparation" state. During the "AT precursor", the special zone type promotion lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and if the winning combination is won, the special zone type is changed to a higher type.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when the "specialized zone preparation" becomes an AT win by AT lottery in "normal", "normal advantage", and "CZ", the number of precursor games in "AT precursor" is equal to the number of precursor games. When a game is played, or when the number of AT games becomes 0 while the AT stock is 1 or more in "AT", the transition is made. In the "specialized zone preparation", the special zone start lottery at the time of winning the normal rip ("F_normal rip 1" "F_normal rip 2") or the special rip ("F_special rip 1" "F_special rip 2"). Is executed, and if it wins, it shifts from the "specialized zone preparation" to the "specialized zone" state. In addition, in the "specialized zone preparation", the lottery for adding the number of games is executed according to the winning combination, and if the winning is won, the winning result is added to the result of the lottery for adding the number of games performed in the special zone. ..

In addition, in "specialized zone preparation", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants AT stock when the number of times "off" is determined as an internal winning combination in "specialized zone preparation" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), and also " When the number of continuous games of "specialized zone preparation" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), the highest type (specialized zone 4) is determined as the type of specialized zone. In this embodiment, the number of games that determine the duration of AT is determined by the special zone, and when the number of AT games becomes 0 and there is AT stock, the special zone is used. The transition is made again, and the number of AT games for the stock is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, the stock of the AT and the stock of the special zone are the same. In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery performed in various states is won, the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given, and when the AT (specialized zone stock lottery) performed in various states is won, AT ( Special zone) stock is granted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "specialized zone" shifts when it is started by the special zone start lottery in the "specialized zone preparation". In the "specialized zone", the lottery for adding the number of games and the lottery for ending the special zone are executed, and the number of games determined in the lottery for adding the number of games before the end of the special zone end lottery is the number of AT games. Is added as. In addition, the "specialized zone" includes a plurality of specialized zones such as "specialized zone 1", "specialized zone 2", "specialized zone 3", and "specialized zone 4", which have different expectations for adding the number of games. .. As for the expected degree of addition of the number of games, "specialized zone 4" is the highest, "specialized zone 3" is the next highest, "specialized zone 2" is the next highest, and "specialized zone 1" is the lowest. The type of special zone is basically determined at the time of winning the stock of AT (specialized zone), and may be promoted according to the winning combination in "preparation for special zone".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "AT" shifts to the "specialized zone" when it is terminated by the special zone end lottery. The duration of "AT" is managed by the number of games, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0 with no AT (specialized zone) stock (more specifically, the final addition lottery is not won). If) exits and shifts to "normal". In "AT", the CZ lottery during AT is executed, and when the lottery is won, the state shifts from "AT" to "CZ during AT". Further, in "AT", a special zone stock lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, the stock of the special zone is given.

Here, "AT" has an AT mode in which the expectation of stocking in specialized zones such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C" is different. The AT mode is set by the initial AT mode lottery executed at the start of "AT" (at the time of transition from "specialized zone" to "AT"), and then executed during "AT". AT mode transition The transition is made by lottery.

Further, in "AT", lottery processing such as history lottery and final addition lottery, and other processing such as ceiling control are performed. The history lottery is a process of determining whether or not a lottery target combination grants a privilege according to the number of times the winning combination is determined between predetermined games, and details will be described later in FIGS. 186 and 187. The final additional lottery is a lottery process performed when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 when there is no AT stock. If the lottery is won, the AT (specialized zone) stock is 3 or more. As a result of being given 5 pieces, the ball ejection state shifts to "specialized zone preparation". On the other hand, in the case of non-winning in the final additional lottery, the advantageous section ends with the end of AT, and the payout state shifts to "normal". Further, in the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of AT (specialized zone) when the number of times that "off" is determined as the internal winning combination in "AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling). Further, when the number of continuous games of "AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), the ball ejection state shifts from "AT" to "AT in CZ".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “AT in-AT” shifts to the AT-in-CZ winning in the “AT”. "AT Naka CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) where the stock of the special zone is relatively easy to win, and continues for any period of 5, 10, or 15 games. In "AT in CZ", the special zone stock lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, the stock of the special zone is given. In addition, even if the special zone stock lottery is won, the "AT middle CZ" will continue until the specified number of games (5, 10, 15 G) has elapsed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special zone stock lottery may be won a plurality of times during "AT in CZ", and in this case, a plurality of special zone stocks are given.

Further, in "AT in CZ", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of the special zone when the number of times "off" is determined as the internal winning combination in the "AT middle CZ" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "special AT" shifts when the black BAR wins when the fixed combination is valid. The black BAR means "F_black BAR lip". In the present embodiment, the deterministic combination is controlled to be valid / invalid according to the ball ejection state when the deterministic combination is determined as the winning combination. As shown in FIG. 180, in the ball ejection state "normal", "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "AT precursor", and "CZ", the definite combination is effective, and the ball ejection state "special zone", "special AT", and "special AT". In "Ending", the fixed role is invalid. In addition, in the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "AT in CZ", the fixed combination is conditional and effective, but this point will be described later.

In the present embodiment, "F_black BAR rip", "F_W matching rip", "F_red BAR rip", and "F_purple 7 rip" are provided as determinants. If the determinant is valid, the corresponding privilege is granted, and if the determinant is invalid, the corresponding privilege is not granted. In addition, the fixed combination is associated with a combination of unique symbols and a combination of general-purpose symbols (TL rip) that is commonly used with other replay combinations. If the fixed combination is invalid, the combination is associated with each other. , The combination of general-purpose symbols is displayed As a result of notifying the push order, the combination of general-purpose symbols is displayed. On the other hand, when the deterministic combination is valid, the push order in which the unique combination of symbols is displayed is notified (or no push order is notified), and as a result, "black" is selected when "F_black BAR lip" is won. The combination of the "BAR rip" symbols can be displayed, and the combination of the "W-matched rip" symbols can be displayed when the "F_W-matched rip" is won, and the "red BAR rip" symbol can be displayed when the "F_red BAR rip" is won. The combination of "F_purple 7 rip" can be displayed, and the combination of the symbols of "purple 7 rip" can be displayed at the time of winning "F_purple 7 rip".

When the deterministic combination is valid and the "F_black BAR lip" is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state to the "special AT". In the "special AT", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of the special zone when the number of times that "off" is determined as the internal winning combination in the "special AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "ending" shifts when the ending transition condition is satisfied. The ending transition condition is arbitrary. For example, when it is determined that the limiter of the advantageous section (game number limiter or number limiter) is reached from the number of remaining games of AT or the number of remaining stock of AT, the ending transition is performed. The conditions may be met. The "ending" continues until the limiter of the advantageous section is reached.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such specifications, the ball ejection state "normal" and "normal advantage" are normal gaming states (non-notifying states) that are disadvantageous to the player. Further, the ball ejection state "specialized zone", "AT", "special AT", and "ending" are advantageous gaming states (notification states) for the player. In addition, the ball ejection state "AT precursor" and "specialized zone preparation" are states in which the transition to "AT" is confirmed, and are the precursor period and preparation period of the gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the ball-out state "CZ" is a chance zone in which the player has a high expectation of transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the ball-out state "CZ precursor" is a precursor period of the chance zone. In addition, the ball ejection state "AT during CZ" is a chance zone performed during AT. In addition, in the ball ejection state "AT in CZ", the navigation of the push order is not performed.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination and lottery type]
Subsequently, FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the lottery type. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery based on the internal winning combination, but if the lottery result is provided for each combination, the amount of data required for one lottery is enormous. Become. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of roles are first grouped into a ball ejection flag, a lottery type is determined based on the ball ejection flag, and various lottery is performed based on the determined lottery type. For example, "F_Batting order 1 bell A" is grouped into a ball ejection flag "Batting order bell (No. 5)", and based on this batting order flag "Batting order bell", the lottery type is No. The "batting order bell" of 1 is decided. Then, various lottery is performed with reference to this lottery type.

The fixed combination belongs to the lottery type “fake / fixed combination” in the lottery process, and the lottery type “fake / fixed combination” is basically a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the lottery process according to the fixed combination is basically a disadvantageous result, but when the fixed combination is valid, the process that does not depend on the lottery (processing at the time of winning the fixed combination) is performed for the player. Control to be in an advantageous state.

Specifically, the main control circuit 91 grants one AT (specialized zone) stock when the definite combination "F_purple 7 lip", "F_red BAR lip", and "F_W matching lip" is valid. If the definite combination "F_Black BAR Lip" is valid, 3 or 5 AT (specialized zone) stocks are granted. Then, as a result of the stock of the AT (specialized zone) being given, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state to "AT precursor", "specialized zone preparation", and the like.

The fixed roles "F_Purple 7 Lip", "F_Red BAR Lip", and "F_W Matching Lip" have the same number of AT (specialized zone) stocks, but the types of specialized zones are different, and " "F_W Matching Lip" gives the stock of the most advantageous special zone, "F_Red BAR Lip" gives the stock of the next advantageous special zone, and "F_Purple 7 Lip" gives the stock of the next advantageous specialization. Grant zone stock.

Therefore, among the fixed roles, "F_Black BAR Lip" that grants multiple stocks is the role that grants the largest privilege, and "F_W Matching Lip" that grants stock in the advantageous specialized zone is the next largest privilege. "F_Red BAR Lip", which grants the stock of the next advantageous special zone, is the role of granting the next largest privilege, and grants the stock of the next advantageous special zone. "F_Purple 7 Lip" is the role that gives the smallest privilege.

[Navigation type in each state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 182, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the navigation type set by the main control circuit 91 at the time of winning the push order combination will be described. In the figure, the navigation type "1" is a navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 1 (left middle right), and the navigation type "2" is a navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 2 (left and right middle). The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "3" is the navigation type to notify the batting order 3 (middle left and right) to the player, and the navigation type "4" is the batting order 4 (middle right left) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "5" is the navigation type to notify the batting order 5 (right, middle, left) to the player, and the navigation type "6" is the batting order 6 (right, middle, left) to the player. This is the type of navigation to be notified. Further, in the figure, "state 1" means the case where the fixed combination is "valid" and the push order instruction is "present", and "state 2" means the case where the fixed combination is "invalid" and the push order instruction is "present". To say.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the navigation type for "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)" in "state 2" is "5". "Or" 6 "is specified, but it is not limited to this, and in" state 2 (fixed combination "invalid"), it is possible to notify the push order in which the combination of the symbols of "TL lip" is displayed. All you need is.

Here, as described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the push order small combination is a 6-choice combination of 6-choice push order, while the replay combination is a 3-choice combination of 3 choices of push order. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the push order is notified to the replay combination which is the three-choice combination, the push order of six choices (navigation type "5" or "navigation type" 5 "or" 6 ”) is notified. The navigation control of the three-choice combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184.

[Navigation control of 3 choices]
First, a comparative example of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 183. In conventional AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, since the navigation performed under the control of the sub side has a meaning as a production, the navigation content on the sub side may not match the navigation content on the main side. For example, in a specification having a three-choice push order combination that requires only the first stop operation and a six-choice push order combination that requires the first stop operation and the second stop operation, when the three-choice push order combination is won. On the main side, navigation is performed according to the push order of 3 choices, while on the sub side, in order to make it difficult to tell whether it is a push order of 6 choices or a push order of 3 choices, 6 choices are intentionally selected. There were times when navigation was performed according to the order of pressing.
The comparative example shown in FIG. 183 relates to a navigation control in which the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side do not match.

FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (a) are diagrams showing the navigation type on the main side in the comparative example. As shown in the figure, in the comparative example, different navigation types are set for the 3-choice push-order navigation and the 6-choice push-order navigation. Specifically, the navigation type "1" is set for the left 1st, which means that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the navigation type "4" is set for the left middle right push order. Is set.

Subsequently, FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (b) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the 6-choice combination in which the order of pressing the correct answer in the comparative example is right and left. As shown in the figure, in such a case, on the main side, "8", which is the navigation type corresponding to the middle right and left, is displayed on the instruction monitor, and on the sub side, right and left on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). Display the push order of the inside. As described above, in the comparative example, in the navigation at the time of winning the 6-choice combination, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side match.

Subsequently, FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (c) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct pressing order in the comparative example is the right 1st. As shown in the figure, in such a case, on the main side, "3", which is the navigation type corresponding to the right 1st, is displayed on the instruction monitor. At this time, if only the navigation of the three choices is navigated on the sub side, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side match, but if the navigation of the six choices is to be navigated in a dramatic manner, On the sub side, on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100), the right, middle, and left push orders, which are the six-choice push orders that satisfy the right 1st, are displayed. As a result, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side do not match.

Subsequently, FIG. 184 (B) is a diagram showing the navigation control at the time of winning the three-choice combination in this control. In this control, the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side are controlled to match when the three-choice combination is won. In this control, the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side are matched by navigating the originally unnecessary information on the main side as well, and the control example shown below is only an example. That is, in the example shown below, the content to be navigated is related to the push order, but the content to be navigated is not limited to the push order, and may be to navigate the so-called push timing (design to be aimed at). As an example, navigation is performed in a combination in which a predetermined symbol is aimed at the left reel and an arbitrary symbol may be used for other reels, and a combination in which a predetermined symbol is aimed at the left reel and the middle reel. You may match the contents. Further, regarding the push order, the push order required for the three-choice combination may be a second stop operation or a third stop operation instead of the first stop operation. As an example, a three-choice combination that requires that the second stop operation is for a predetermined reel, and a six-choice combination that requires that all the orders from the first stop operation to the third stop operation are appropriate. In, the contents to be navigated may be matched.

FIGS. 184 (B) and 184 (a) are diagrams showing the navigation type on the main side in this control. As shown in the figure, in this control, the navigation type related to the three-choice push order is not provided, but only the navigation type related to the six-choice push order is provided.

Subsequently, FIGS. 184 (B) and 184 (b) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct pressing order in this control is the right 1st. When navigating at the time of winning the three-choice combination in this control, the main control circuit 91 acquires a navigation type that matches the three-choice push order from the navigation types provided for the six-choice push order. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 selects the navigation type "1" corresponding to the left middle right or the navigation type "2" corresponding to the left middle right at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the left 1st order. At the time of winning the 3 choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the middle 1st order, the navigation type "3" corresponding to the middle left and right or the navigation type "4" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired, and the correct answer is pushed in the right order. At the time of winning the 1st 3 choice combination, the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left or the navigation type "6" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs a navigation type change lottery at the time of winning the three-choice combination, and when the lottery is won, one of the navigation types matching the three-choice push order. The (even) navigation type is acquired, and if it is not won, the other (odd) navigation type of the navigation types matching the three-choice pressing order is acquired.

As a result, when the navigation type "5" is acquired at the time of winning the 3 choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the right 1st order, the main side displays the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left on the instruction monitor. On the sub side, the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) displays the pressing order in the middle right and left. Similarly, if the navigation type "6" is acquired at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the right 1st order, the main side displays the navigation type "6" corresponding to the right, middle, and left on the instruction monitor. On the sub side, the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) displays the pressing order of right, middle, and left. As a result, in this control, it is possible to match the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side while performing the navigation of 6 choices in a dramatic manner when the 3 choice combination is won.

Subsequently, a specification example using this control will be described. Depending on the pachi-slot machine, the RT state may be changed to a low RT at the time of incorrect answer as the control of the push order role (selection role), or it may be advantageous / disadvantageous for the player in the production such as the battle production. As an example, even if the answer is incorrect for the 3 choices, the falling roll that shifts the RT state to low RT is not displayed, but for the 6 choices, the answer is incorrect in the push order. In some cases, a fall-out eye may be displayed. In addition, for example, in a pachislot machine in which the 3-choice role is a replay and the 6-choice role is a push order bell, in a predetermined production such as a battle production, if the replay is won, the result (defense) is disadvantageous for the player, and the bell is used. Winning may result in a favorable result (attack) for the player.

In such a specification, the sub side should perform 6-choice navigation in a dramatic manner when the 3-choice role is won so that the player does not know whether the winning role is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role. However, in the control as in the comparative example, the expert can grasp whether the winning combination is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role from the navigation contents on the main side. On the other hand, according to this control, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side match, so even an expert can determine whether the winning combination is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role. I can't figure it out. As a result, for example, in the case of the fall control specification in the RT state, since the possibility of falling is not known from the navigation type, the player will play the game with a sense of tension so as not to make a navigation mistake. In the case of the advantageous / disadvantageous specifications of the production, since the advantage (attack) / disadvantage (defense) is not known from the navigation type, the game is played while maintaining the expectation until the end, compared to the comparative example. The fun of the game is improved.

[Flow of games in advantageous section]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 185, the flow of the game in the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 (A) is a diagram for explaining the control of the special mode of the advantageous section, and FIG. 185 (B) is a diagram for explaining the normally advantageous end control.

(Special mode control)
First, the control of the special mode will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (A). The special mode is a mode in which various lottery and the like are disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, when the special mode is ON, AT (specialized zone stock) lottery, CZ lottery, and various mode transitions are made. There is a low probability (or no win) of winning a result that is advantageous to the player in a lottery, etc., and a low probability (or no navigation) of navigating the push order when the push order combination is won.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (A) and 185 (a), the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to an advantageous section in the ball ejection state “normal” (that is, a normal section), and it is advantageous to win in this transition lottery. The game state is transferred to the section. The main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON when the gaming state is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then, when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD lip" is displayed in the advantageous section, the special mode is displayed. Switch the mode to OFF. That is, the condition for turning on the special mode is that the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the condition for turning off the special mode is that the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD lip" is displayed. ..

Subsequently, a control example of the special mode will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). As shown in the figure, the special mode is not used in the "normal" state, and the special mode is set to ON when shifting from the "normal (normal section)" to the advantageous section. When a combination other than the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the combination of symbols related to the replay is not displayed, so that the special mode is kept ON. After that, when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section and the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF, and then it is maintained as OFF.

Subsequently, FIG. 185 (c) is an additional explanatory diagram of a control example of the special mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, "XD rip" is not displayed at the time of winning the replay combination, and a combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is always displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination is won after shifting to the advantageous section, the special mode is updated to OFF. In this regard, as described above, "XD rip" may be displayed at the time of winning the replay role, and "XD rip" may be displayed in a specific RT state, or may be specified. In the BET number of, "XD lip" may be displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 185 (c) is a control example of a special mode in a specification in which "XD rip" can be displayed at the time of winning a replay combination.

As shown in the figure, the special mode is not used in the "normal" state, and the special mode is set to ON when shifting from the "normal (normal section)" to the advantageous section. When a combination other than the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the combination of the symbols related to the replay is not displayed, so that the special mode is kept ON. Further, even when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the special mode is kept ON when the combination of the symbols related to "XD rip" is displayed. After that, when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section and the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF, and then it is maintained as OFF.

Here, in the present embodiment, the notification state (specialized zone or AT) is started after the replay combination is won. More specifically, in the special zone preparation, the special zone is started when the special zone start lottery is won, but this special zone start lottery is performed at the time of winning the replay role (normal rip or special rip). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special mode is always updated to OFF at the timing when the notification state is started, and as a result, the navigation probability becomes high (details are not controlled so that the navigation probability becomes low). In this regard, in the specification that "XD rip" can be displayed at the time of winning the replay role (normal rip or special rip), the special mode may remain ON even at the timing when the notification state is started. In such a case, the navigation probability remains low even in the notification state. According to such a specification, since the navigation probability immediately after the start of the notification state can be made different, it is possible to give a sharp feeling to the ball.

Of course, by performing the special zone start lottery according to the combination of displayed symbols instead of performing according to the winning combination, it is possible to control so as not to lower the navigation probability during the notification state. .. Specifically, when displaying the combination of symbols related to "XD rip" that keeps the special mode ON, the combination of symbols related to replay other than "XD rip" is displayed without performing the special zone start lottery. Sometimes, by performing a special zone start lottery, it is possible to control so that the navigation probability during the notification state is not lowered.

It should be noted that the control of the special mode may be performed not based on the combination of the displayed symbols but based on other conditions. As an example, the main control circuit 91 may update the special mode to OFF when the number of games played after the special mode is turned ON reaches a predetermined number of times. Further, the main control circuit 91 may control the special mode by combining the number of games and the combination of symbols. For example, the special mode is displayed when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed. May be updated to OFF, and the special mode may be updated to OFF even when a predetermined number of games are played without displaying a combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip". Further, the main control circuit 91 may update the special mode to OFF when a predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination instead of the combination of the displayed symbols. Further, the main control circuit 91 may control the special mode by combining the winning combination, the number of games, and the combination of symbols. In this case, the conditions to be combined may be all conditions or any two conditions. Further, the predetermined combination is not limited to the replay combination, and may include a small combination related to the payout of medals and a bonus combination related to the operation of the bonus. Further, the combination of the displayed symbols is not limited to the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and may be the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small combination or the bonus combination.

(Usually advantageous end control)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 185 (B), the normally advantageous termination control will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the staying period in the “normal” state of paying balls is short, and in the normal game, the staying period is “normally advantageous” for many periods. Here, "normal advantage" is an advantageous section, and since there are restrictions such as the number of games limiter, the game is changed from "normal advantage" to "normal" at regular intervals during normal games, and then immediately changed to "normal advantage". Migrate. This transition from "normal advantage" to "normal" at regular intervals is performed by temporary ceiling control and ceiling control.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (B) and 185 (a), the temporary ceiling control is performed when the "normal advantage" continues for 400 games. In the temporary ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 performs a ceiling benefit lottery when the "normal advantage" continues for 400 games. When the ceiling benefit lottery ends (lottery result "fall"), the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state from "normal advantage" to "normal". In addition, when it is decided to shift the CZ mode to "high accuracy A" in the ceiling benefit lottery (lottery result "CZ mode high accuracy A"), the CZ mode is maintained while the ball ejection state is maintained at "normal advantage". To "High accuracy A". Further, when the AT winning is determined in the ceiling benefit lottery (lottery result "AT winning"), the main control circuit 91 grants one AT (specialized zone) stock and makes the ball ejection state "normally advantageous". To shift from "AT precursor". As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the "normal advantage", an opportunity such as the end of the advantageous section, the chance of CZ, or the AT winning comes every 400 games.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), the ceiling control is performed when the "normal advantage" continues for 500 games, and the main control circuit 91 is in a ball ejection state when the "normal advantage" continues for 500 games. From "normal advantage" to "normal". As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the advantageous section always ends every 500 games during the "normal advantage".

In the present embodiment, the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control are performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", but the opportunity to perform the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control is the number of continuous games of "normal advantage". Instead, it may be the number of continuous games in a state other than the state that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section. That is, the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control may be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", and "CZ". In this case, the transition to the ball ejection state "normal" may be made only from the "normal advantage", and the transition (fall) from the "CZ precursor" or "CZ" to the "normal" may be performed. Further, only one of the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control is performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ precursor" and "CZ", and the other is the continuation of "normal advantage". It may be done based on the number of games. As an example, ceiling control should be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ precursor" and "CZ", and temporary ceiling control should be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage". May be.

[Summary of history lottery]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, an outline of the history lottery in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 186 (A), the types of history combinations that trigger the history lottery will be described. The main control circuit 91 manages the history information of the winning combination related to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games). In other words, the main control circuit 91 stores the history information of the winning combination regarding the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games).

(Type of history role)
As shown in FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (a), in the history lottery in "normal advantage", "replay" and "rare role" are provided as history roles. The history role "replay" in "normal advantage" includes normal rip, special rip, and chance rip. The normal rip is "F_normal rip 1", the special rip is "F_special rip 1" and "F_special rip 2", and the chance rip is "F_chance rip".

In addition, the history role "rare role" in "normal advantage" includes chance lip, fake rip (non-navigation), strong bell, medium chance, weak chance, and 15 bells. The chance lip is "F_chance lip", and the fake lip (non-navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is not performed. , The strong bell is "F_strong bell", the medium chance is "F_XU bell lip", and the weak chance is "F_weak chance". In addition, the 15 bells will be won by the stop operation being performed in the correct push order at the time of winning "F_common bell 1" or "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6 bell B". be.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (b), in the history lottery in "AT", "replay", "rare role", and "missing" are provided as history roles. The history role "replay" in "AT" includes a normal lip, a special lip, a chance lip, a fake lip (navigation), and a fixed role (navigation). The normal rip is "F_normal rip 1", the special rip is "F_special rip 1" and "F_special rip 2", and the chance rip is "F_chance rip". In addition, the fake rip (navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is performed, and the definite role (navigation) is the push order navigation. It is "F_purple 7 rip", "F_red BAR rip", "F_W matching rip", and "F_black BAR rip" when it is performed.

In addition, the history role "rare role" in "AT" includes chance lip, fake lip (non-navigation), strong bell, medium chance, and weak chance. The chance lip is "F_chance lip", and the fake lip (non-navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is not performed. , The strong bell is "F_strong bell", the medium chance is "F_XU bell lip", and the weak chance is "F_weak chance".

In addition, the history combination "off" in "AT" includes off, normal lip 2, common one, and BB. The loss is that the loss is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal lip 2 is "F_normal lip 2", the common one is "F_common one", and the BB is "F_BB1" to "F_BB3". Is.

(Contents of history lottery)
Subsequently, FIG. 186 (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the history lottery. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of times that the history combination is determined as the winning combination between predetermined games (between 5 games). Specifically, in the "normal advantage", the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of consecutive wins of the history combination "replay" between predetermined games, and also determines. A history lottery is performed according to the number of rare roles (number) that the history role "rare role" has won between games. Further, in the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to a replay (ream), a history lottery according to a rare combination (number), and a history combination "missing" between predetermined games. The history lottery is performed according to the number of consecutive wins. In the present embodiment, the history combination "replay" and the history combination "missing" perform a history lottery according to the number of consecutive wins, but the number of consecutive wins is not the number of consecutive wins, but between predetermined games. In, the history lottery may be performed according to the number of times of winning. Further, although the history role "rare role" is supposed to perform the history lottery according to the number of times the game is won, the history lottery may be performed according to the number of times the game is won consecutively.

In the history lottery according to the "normally advantageous" rerepui (ream), the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery (CZ lottery) and wins when the history role "replay" wins three or more times in a row. In that case, the game is won by CZ and the game state is changed from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor" or "CZ". In addition, the history lottery (CZ lottery) according to the rerepui (ream) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "replay" is won three times in a row, and the history role "replay" is continuous. And when you win 4 times or more, "4 or more rips", you must win.

Further, in the history lottery according to the rare combination (number) of "normal advantage", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (AT lottery) when the history combination "rare role" is won three times or more, and wins. If this happens, the game will be won and the game state will be changed from "normal advantage" to "AT precursor" or "specialized zone preparation". In addition, the history lottery (AT lottery) according to the rare role (number) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "rare role" wins 3 pieces during a predetermined game and "3 rare roles", and the history role "rare role" When "rare role" wins 4 or more during a predetermined game, "rare role 4 or more" always wins. In addition, since the "normally advantageous" history role "rare role" includes 15 bells, the history lottery according to the "normally advantageous" rare role (number) is performed at the off-edge of the third stop operation. ..

Further, in the history lottery according to the rerepui (ream) of the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (CZ lottery during AT) when the history role "replay" is won three or more times in a row. If the game is won, the game will be CZ during AT and the game state will be changed from "AT" to "CZ during AT". In addition, the history lottery (CZ lottery during AT) according to the rerepui (ream) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "replay" is won three times in a row, and the history role "replay" is won. Be sure to win when "4 or more rips" are won 4 times or more in a row.

Further, in the history lottery according to the rare role (number) of the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (specialized zone stock lottery) when the history role "rare role" is won twice or more. , If you win, one stock of special zone will be given. The stock of the special zone to be granted is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be granted. The history lottery (specialized zone stock lottery) according to the rare role (number) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "rare role" wins two during a predetermined game and "two rare roles". When "rare role" wins 3 or more during a predetermined game, "rare role 3 or more" always wins.

Further, in the history lottery according to the loss (ream) of "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (AT mode UP lottery) when the history combination "miss" is won four or more times in a row. If you win, you will be promoted by one AT mode. The AT mode is "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C" in order from the lowest mode. The history lottery (AT mode UP lottery) according to the missed role (ream) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "missing" is won four times in a row, and the history role "missing" is won. If you win 5 times in a row, you will win with a higher probability than when you win 5 times in a row.

Here, referring to FIG. 186 (A), the chance lip is included in the history role “replay” and also in the history role “rare role”. In the present embodiment, in the main control circuit 91, when the chance lip is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game, the number of times the combination included in the history combination "replay" is determined as the winning combination and the history combination "rare". Add both the number of times the combination included in "role" is determined as the winning combination.

Therefore, at the time of winning the chance lip, the lottery condition of the replay (ream) and the lottery condition of the rare role (number) may be satisfied at the same time. For example, the winning role before 4 games is a role included in the history role "rare role", the winning role before 3 games is a role included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role 2 games before is history. If the winning role of one game before is a role included in the history role "replay" and the winning role of the game is a chance lip, the winning role of the game is "3 rips" in the game. And "3 rare roles" are established at the same time. In such a case, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs all history lottery satisfying the lottery conditions. That is, the main control circuit 91 performs both a history lottery based on "3 rips" and a history lottery based on "3 rare combinations". As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of history lottery can be performed by taking one opportunity of winning the chance lip. At this time, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege corresponding to the winning history lottery, and when both of the plurality of history lottery are won, the privilege of both is given.

Subsequently, FIG. 187 (C) shows a display example of the winning history. The sub-control circuit 101 displays a history display window for five games on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). In this history display window, the history information of the winning combination for five games is displayed, and the old history information is replaced with the new history information for each game. As shown in the figure, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history combination "replay" with a blue circle, and displays the history combination "rare role" with a jewel (white) or a jewel (red). Further, in the case of the history combination "missing", the sub-control circuit 101 expresses the history combination "missing" by leaving the history display window corresponding to the game blank. The display of chance rips belonging to both the history role "replay" and the history role "rare role" is optional. For example, the blue circle corresponding to the history role "replay" and the history role "rare role" are displayed. The jewels (white) and the jewels (red) may be alternately blink-displayed, only one of them may be displayed, or a unique display may be performed.

In addition, whether to display the jewel (white) or the jewel (red) at the time of the history role "rare role" is determined by lottery. This lottery is performed by the main control circuit 91 with reference to the AT_icon type lottery table of FIG. 209, and the sub control circuit 101 displays a jewel (red) when the lottery is won and the sub-control circuit 101 displays a jewel (red) when the lottery is not won. Display the jewel (white). As shown in FIG. 187, when the jewel (red) is displayed (more specifically, when the lottery performed by the main control circuit 91 is won), the subsequent predetermined games (in other words, the jewel (in other words, the jewel (in other words)) While red) is displayed), the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone is higher than when the gem (white) is displayed (see FIG. 210).

Subsequently, FIG. 187 (E) is a diagram showing a history lottery method. The main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery when the lottery condition of the history lottery is satisfied in the game. As shown in the figure, for example, the winning role 4 games before is included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role 2 games before is included in the history role "rare role". When the winning role of the game is a role included in the history role "rare role", the number of rare roles in the game is "3 rare roles". Therefore, in such a case, the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery based on "three rare combinations".

On the other hand, the winning role 4 games before is included in the history role "rare role", the winning role 3 games before is included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role 1 game before is included. If the role is included in the history role "rare role" and the winning role in this game is other than the role included in the history role "rare role", the number of rare roles in the predetermined game is three. In this game, the condition of "3 rare roles" is not satisfied. Therefore, in such a case, the main control circuit 91 does not perform the history lottery.

[Control using AT point]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188, the control using the AT point in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the AT point is numerical information regarding the number of medals that can be paid out in a specific gaming state (difference number = number of payouts-number of inserts). It should be noted that the specific gaming state is a series of gaming states related to the notification state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and in the present embodiment, the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation" and "special zone preparation" It means "Chemical zone", "AT", "CZ during AT", and "Special AT". The main control circuit 91 acquires game information in each game in these specific game states, and calculates AT points according to the acquired game information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), AT points are calculated by summing the accumulated points and possessed points. The cumulative points are numerical information regarding the total value of the number of medals granted so far in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and each game in the specific gaming state (more specifically, the player in the specific gaming state). This is numerical information obtained by accumulating the number of medals to be paid out in this game in a game in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the possession points are numerical information regarding the total value of the number of medals that can be granted in the future in the above-mentioned specific game state, and in each game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games of AT and AT (specialized zone). ) Is calculated according to the number of remaining stocks.

The main control circuit 91 acquires the winning combination as game information in a game in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Then, the main control circuit 91 adds 24 points to the accumulated points when the winning combination of 15 cards is determined, and when the winning combination of 6 cards is determined, the cumulative points are used. Add 6 points to it. The 15-card combination is a combination in which 15 medals can be paid out at the time of winning. In this embodiment, "F_common bell 1", "F_strong bell", "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6" "Bell B". In addition, the 6-card combination is a combination in which 6 medals can be paid out at the time of winning, and in this implementation system value, "F_common bell 2", "F_batting order 1 special A" to "F_batting order 6 special B" are used. say.

Here, if 15 medals are paid out in the 3BET game, the number of medals increases by 12 in the game, and if 6 medals are paid out in the 3BET game, the medals are increased in the game. Increase by 3 cards. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one medal is converted into two points (1 point = 0.5) to calculate AT points.

Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires the number of remaining games of AT and the number of remaining stocks of AT (specialized zone) in each game in a specific gaming state. Then, the main control circuit 91 adds 600 points for each remaining stock of AT (specialized zone), and 7 points for possession points for each remaining game of AT. to add. In this embodiment, the expected value of medals to be paid out per game during AT is 3.5. Therefore, it can be said that the possession points set for each remaining game of AT are points according to the expected value of the medals to be paid out per game during AT. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games determined from each stock of the specialized zone is about 85 games. Therefore, the possession points set for each stock in the special zone are the number of additional games determined from each stock in the special zone and the expected value of medals to be paid out per game during AT. It can be said that it is a point corresponding to (600 ≈ 85 × 7).

In this way, the accumulated points represent the actual number of medals actually paid out so far, and the possessed points represent the expected value of the number of medals that can be paid out in the future. The AT points are the sum of the accumulated points and the possessed points, and represent the number of medals that can be paid out in a specific gaming state.

The main control circuit 91 updates the AT points by updating the accumulated points and the possessed points in each game in a specific game state. For example, if one game is played during "AT", the number of remaining games of AT is reduced by 1, and as a result, the possessed points are reduced by 7 points, while the accumulated points are updated according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the expected value (possessed points) of the amount of increase in medals per game is replaced with the actual value (cumulative points) of the number of medals actually paid out, and the AT points are updated. Further, for example, in the state of the "specialized zone", when the stock is consumed to determine the number of AT games, the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is reduced by 1, while the remaining AT is for the determined number of games. As the number of games increases, 600 points for one stock will decrease from the accumulated points, while the points possessed for the increased number of games will increase.

It is preferable that the AT points are not reported to the player. On the other hand, the AT points may be reported to the clerk of the amusement store. The method of notifying the AT point to the clerk of the game store is arbitrary, but for example, the inside of the game machine that can be confirmed with the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) of the pachi-slot machine 1 opened. The value of the AT point may be displayed on the display unit of the above, and the value of the AT point can be displayed on the hall computer by transmitting the value of the AT point from the pachislot machine 1 to the hall computer of the amusement store. It may be identifiable. In addition, the information to be reported to the clerk of the amusement store may be AT points, cumulative points, possession points, or all of them. It may be a part of these. By notifying the amusement shop side of the AT point in this way, it can be useful for detecting fraud. For example, if many medals are paid out even though the AT points (cumulative points) are small, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraud.

Subsequently, FIGS. 188 (B) to 188 (E) show control examples using the calculated AT points. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the threshold values of the AT points used in the control using the AT points are all multiples of 256. Further, in the present embodiment, various controls are invalidated when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, but in the control using the AT point, the threshold value is obtained when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value. The control may be more disadvantageous to the player than the case of less than, and is not necessarily invalidated. As an example, when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the probability of performing control advantageous to the player is lower or the probability of performing control disadvantageous to the player is higher than when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value (for example,). The probability that a favorable lottery result will be obtained in a predetermined lottery is low).

(Definite role control)
First, the deterministic combination control using the AT point will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (B). As described above in FIG. 180, the fixed combination is conditionally valid in the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "AT in CZ". The fixed combination control described below relates to control of whether to enable or invalidate the fixed combination in the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "AT in CZ".

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the AT point is set for each type of the fixed combination, and in the game in which the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the target fixed combination is determined as the winning combination. Even in such a case, the fixed combination becomes invalid. Further, in a game in which the AT point is less than the threshold value, when the target fixed combination is determined as the winning combination, an invalid lottery is performed using the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table shown in FIG. When "valid" is determined, the fixed combination becomes valid, and when "invalid" is determined as a lottery result, the fixed combination becomes invalid.

As described above, when the fixed combination is invalid, a general-purpose symbol combination (as a result of navigating the push order of right / left middle or right middle left) without granting the privilege corresponding to the fixed combination ( TL Lip) is displayed. In addition, when the fixed combination is valid, the privilege corresponding to the fixed combination is given, and the push order other than the right 1st is navigated (or no push order is navigated), and as a result, it is unique to the fixed combination. The combination of symbols is displayed.

Here, as shown in the figure, the threshold value of the AT points to be invalidated is gradually increased based on the size of the privilege to be granted. That is, the lowest threshold is set for the definite role "F_black BAR rip" that gives the largest privilege, and it is easy to be invalidated, while the definite role "purple 7 rip" that gives the smallest privilege is set. On the other hand, the highest threshold value is set, and control is difficult to invalidate. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a large number of medals are paid out during AT or the like, or if a large number of medals can be expected to be paid out from the number of remaining games or the number of remaining stocks, it is confirmed. The role tends to be invalid.

(Final addition control)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (C), the final addition control using the AT point will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 (at the end of the AT) when there is no stock of the AT, the final addition lottery is performed, and when the winning is won, the AT (special). Grant 3 or 5 stocks of (Chemical Zone). The final addition control described below relates to control of whether or not the final addition lottery is performed at the end of the AT.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the AT point is set, and if the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value at the end of AT, the final addition is not performed (the final addition lottery itself is performed). Not performed). On the other hand, if the AT point is less than the threshold value at the end of AT, the final addition lottery is performed using the AT_final addition lottery table shown in FIG. The final addition is performed, and if "non-winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, the final addition is not performed.

(Control of various lottery during AT)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (D), control regarding various lottery during AT using AT points will be described. In the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state such as AT, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery. The control of various lottery during AT described below relates to the control of whether or not to perform these various lottery. In the following description, as various lottery to enable / invalidate, the stock lottery of the special zone in AT using the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table shown in FIG. 210 and the AT_ icon type lottery shown in FIG. 209. The target is a lottery for whether or not to display the jewel (red) when the history role "rare role" using the table is won, but other lottery may be valid / invalid.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT point type is associated with each AT point threshold value, and when the AT point is less than 768 points, "type 0" is set as the AT point type. If it is associated with 768 points or more and less than 1280 points, "Type 1" is associated as the AT point type, and if it is 1280 points or more and less than 256 points, "Type 2" is associated as the AT point type. If the number of points is 2560 points or more, "type 3" is associated with the AT point type.

The main control circuit 91 performs an invalid lottery using the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218 in each game in a specific game state such as AT, and as a result of the lottery, " When "valid" is determined, the various lottery described above is valid (lottery is performed), and when "invalid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the various lottery described above is invalidated (lottery is not performed). As shown in the figure and FIG. 218 described later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower the AT point, the easier it is to determine "valid" in the invalid lottery, and the higher the AT point, the more "invalid" is determined in the invalid lottery. Easy to do.

As mentioned above, if it is decided to display the jewel (red) at the time of winning the history role "rare role", the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone during the subsequent predetermined game is the jewel. It will be higher than when (white) is displayed. Therefore, if it is decided to display the jewel (red) at the time of winning the history role "rare role", the invalid lottery based on the AT points may not be performed during the subsequent predetermined game.

(Control of scenario lottery type of CZ during AT)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (E), control regarding the scenario lottery type of CZ during AT using AT points will be described. In the present embodiment, the state of "CZ during AT" is managed according to the scenario, and the degree of advantage differs depending on the scenario. The control of the scenario lottery type of the CZ during AT is a control in which the degree of advantage of the scenario to be drawn differs according to the AT point.

As shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a scenario lottery type is associated with each AT point threshold value, and when the AT point is less than 768 points, "type 0" is set as the scenario lottery type. If it is associated with 768 points or more and less than 1280 points, "Type 1" is associated as the scenario lottery type, and if it is 1280 points or more and less than 2560 points, "Type 2" is associated as the scenario lottery type. If the number of points is 2560 points or more, "type 3" is associated with the scenario lottery type.

At the start of the AT-in-AT CZ, the main control circuit 91 refers to the AT-in-AT CZ_scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 214 (A) to perform a scenario lottery based on the scenario lottery type. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the scenario lottery type "type 0" is most likely to determine a scenario advantageous to the player, and the scenario lottery type "type 1" is next to the scenario advantageous to the player. It is easy to determine, the scenario lottery type "type 2" is easy to determine the scenario advantageous to the player next, and the scenario lottery type "type 3" is the most difficult to determine the scenario advantageous to the player. In other words, in the present embodiment, the lower the AT point, the easier it is to determine an advantageous scenario, and the higher the AT point, the more difficult it is to determine an advantageous scenario.

[AT point management method]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 189, a method of managing AT points in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is provided with a counter for counting AT points. As shown in FIG. 189 (A), the counter for the AT point is a counter composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (1 byte) and a low-order byte (1 byte).

In the upper byte, a value that is an integral multiple of 256 is counted, and in the lower byte, a fractional value (0 to 255) that cannot be counted by the integer multiple of the AT points is counted. As shown in FIG. 189 (B), for example, when the AT point is 256 points, the high-order byte counts “1” and the low-order byte counts “0”, and as a result, the high-order byte “01” in hexadecimal. It can be represented by "100H" of the lower byte "00". Similarly, when the AT point is 257 points, it can be represented by "101H" of the upper byte "01" and the lower byte "01", and when the AT point is 292 points, the upper byte " It can be represented by "124H" of the lower byte "24" of "01", and can be represented by "214H" of the upper byte "02" and the lower byte "14" when the AT point is 532 points.

Subsequently, FIG. 189 (C) is a diagram showing a threshold value used for control using the AT point. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value of the AT point. When a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value in this way, as shown in the figure, the low-order byte is always "00", so it is determined by comparing the values of the high-order bytes whether or not the value is equal to or higher than the threshold value. And the value of the lower byte becomes unnecessary for the threshold value.

For example, when 3072 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value can be represented by "C00H" of the upper byte "0C" and the lower byte "00", and when the upper byte of the AT point counter is "0C" or more, the threshold value can be represented by "0C". , It can be determined that the value is equal to or higher than the threshold value regardless of the value of the lower byte, and if the upper byte of the AT point counter is less than "0C", it is less than the threshold value regardless of the value of the lower byte. It can be determined that there is.

Similarly, when 2048 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value can be represented by "800H" of the upper byte "08" and the lower byte "00", and when 1792 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value is higher. The byte "07" can be represented by "700H" of the lower byte "00", and when 768 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value is represented by "300H" of the upper byte "03" and the lower byte "00". Can be done. Then, by comparing the threshold value (only the upper byte) with the upper byte of the counter for the AT point, it is possible to determine whether or not the threshold value is equal to or higher than the threshold value.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, 2-byte data is used as the counter for the AT point, while only 1-byte data is used as the threshold value, and the upper byte of the counter for the AT point is used. By comparing the value with the value of 1 byte of the threshold value, the threshold value can be controlled with respect to the AT point.

As an example, FIG. 189 (D) shows an example of threshold control when the AT point is 2000 points. When the AT point is 2000 points, the value of the counter for the 2-byte AT point is "7D0H" of the upper byte "07" and the lower byte "D0". For example, when comparing with the threshold value of 3072 points, since the threshold value can be represented by "0CH" of only 1 byte, the threshold value "0CH" is compared with the upper byte "07H" of the counter for AT points, and 2000. The point can be determined to be less than the threshold (3072). Similarly, when compared with the threshold value of 1792 points, the threshold value can be represented by "07H" having only one byte. Therefore, the threshold value "07H" is compared with the upper byte "07H" of the counter for AT points. It can be determined that 2000 points is equal to or higher than the threshold value (1792).

[Various data tables used to control the ball ejection state]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in controlling the ball ejection state will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

[Normal_advantageous section transition lottery table]
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 190. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal" state (normal section). The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery for each lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "normal advantage" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "normal advantage", and at the same time, the normal_initial state shown in FIG. 191. Normal mode Refer to the lottery table to determine the normal mode and set it as the initial value of the normal mode.

Further, when the "AT precursor" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "AT precursor" and at the same time, the AT (specialized zone). Grant one stock. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. At this time, the main control circuit 91 also determines the type of the assigned specialized zone stock by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

In the figure, in the advantageous section transition lottery based on the lottery type "fake / fixed combination", the probability of winning the "normal advantage" and the probability of winning the "AT omen" is extremely low. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process according to the definite combination is basically a disadvantageous result, but when the definite combination is valid, the process is not based on the lottery (at the time of winning the definite combination). This is because the process) is controlled so as to be in an advantageous state for the player.

[Normal_Initial normal mode lottery table]
Subsequently, the normal_initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The normal_initial normal mode lottery table is referred to when the "normal advantage" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and is used for the initial normal mode lottery that determines the initial value of the normal mode according to the internal winning combination (lottery type). Be done. The normal_initial normal mode lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the initial normal mode lottery for each lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the normal mode determined as a lottery result as the initial value of the "normal advantage" normal mode for shifting to the next game.

[Normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 192, the normally advantageous_CZ mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table is a table referred to when performing a CZ mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the migration destination CZ mode for each migration source (current) CZ mode and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the CZ mode determined as a lottery result as the CZ mode of the next game.

[Normal advantage_CZ lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 193, a normally advantageous_CZ lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_CZ lottery table is a table referred to when performing a transfer lottery to CZ based on an internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normally advantageous_CZ lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to CZ for each current CZ mode and lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal advantage" without shifting the ball ejection state, and when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result. Shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor", and determines and sets the number of precursor games of "CZ precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_Normal mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 194, the normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table is a table referred to when performing a normal mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the normal mode of the migration destination for each of the normal mode of the migration source (current) and the lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the normal mode determined as a lottery result as the normal mode of the next game.

[Normal advantage_AT lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 195, a normally advantageous_AT lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_AT lottery table is a table referred to when performing a transition lottery to AT based on an internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normal advantage_AT lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to AT for each of the current normal modes and lottery types. When the "non-winning" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normally advantageous" state without shifting the ball ejection state. On the other hand, if "winning" is determined as a result of lottery, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "normal advantage" to "AT omen", and one AT (specialized zone) stock is given. .. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_History lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 196, the usually advantageous_history lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_history lottery table is a table referred to when performing the above-mentioned history lottery in the "normal advantage" state, and FIG. 196 (A) is referred to when performing a history lottery based on the replay series. It is a normal advantage_history lottery table (replay series), and FIG. 196 (B) is a normal advantage_history lottery table (rare combination number) referred to when performing a history lottery based on the number of rare combinations.

The normal advantage_history lottery table (replay series) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (replay series) in which the replay is continuously determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor", and "1 game to 32 games". Determine and set the number of precursor games for "CZ precursor".

The normal advantage_history lottery table (number of rare combinations) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (the number of rare combinations) the rare combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "AT omen" and stocks the AT (specialized zone). Give one. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_Ceiling benefit lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 197, a normally advantageous_ceiling benefit lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_ceiling benefit lottery table is referred to when the number of elapsed games of "normal advantage" reaches 400 games, and is used for the ceiling benefit lottery as to whether or not to grant the benefit in the temporary ceiling control when 400 games are reached. Be done. The normally advantageous_ceiling benefit lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery results of the ceiling benefit lottery. When the "fall" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "normal". Further, when "CZ mode high accuracy A" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normally advantageous" state without shifting the ball ejection state, and as the CZ mode of the next game. Set "High accuracy A". Further, when the "AT win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "AT omen" and AT (specialized zone). Grant one stock of. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "AT win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. To decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[CZ_CZ type lottery table]
Subsequently, the CZ_CZ type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 198. The CZ_CZ type lottery table is referred to when performing a CZ type lottery for determining the type of CZ to be started from the CZ winning to the start of CZ (in the present embodiment, at the start of CZ). It's a table. The CZ_CZ type lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CZ type lottery. When "normal" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets "normal" as the type of CZ to be started. Further, when "special" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets "special" as the type of CZ to be started.

[CZ_AT lottery table]
Subsequently, the CZ_AT lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 199. The CZ_AT lottery table is a table referred to when performing a transfer lottery to AT based on an internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "CZ" state. The CZ_AT lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transfer lottery to AT for each type of CZ and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of AT (specialized zone) when "non-winning" is determined as a lottery result, and when "winning" is determined, AT (specialization) One (or a plurality) of stocks of the zone) is assigned, and the type of the assigned specialized zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216.

The duration of "CZ" is managed by the number of games, and even if the AT lottery is won during "CZ", the game does not shift to the "CZ" state for 5 games. If the main control circuit 91 has AT stock at the end of "CZ" (5 games have elapsed), the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ" to "specialized zone preparation". , If the player does not have the AT stock, the ball ejection state of the next game is changed from "CZ" to "normal advantage".

[Specialized zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 200, the special zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table will be described. As described above in FIG. 180, in the state of "specialized zone preparation", bell navigation is performed according to the lottery result. Specialized zone preparation_Bell Navi lottery table is referred to at the time of winning a small batting order ("F_Batting order 1 bell A" to "F_Batting order 6 special B") in the state of "specialized zone preparation", and the correct pushing order. It is a table referred to when performing a bell navigation lottery as to whether or not to notify. Specialized zone preparation_Bell Navi lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of whether or not to perform Bell Navi for ON / OFF of the special mode. The main control circuit 91 does not give any notification when "non-winning" is determined in the bell navigation lottery, and performs bell navigation when "winning" is determined. According to the figure, when the special mode is ON, it is difficult to perform bell navigation even if the push order small winning combination is won.

In this embodiment, the special mode is updated to OFF at least at the start of the special zone, so that it is always OFF in the "special zone" or "AT" state, and is never ON. In this regard, if the specification is such that "XD rip" can be displayed when the replay role (normal rip or special rip) is won, as in the above specification example, in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state. However, the special mode may remain ON. In the case of such specifications, the main control circuit 91 may perform the bell navigation lottery based on the ON / OFF of the special mode even in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state. In the Bell Navi lottery in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state, if the special mode is ON, the Bell Navi will be won with a predetermined probability, and if the special mode is OFF, the probability is higher than the predetermined probability. You may win the Bernavi (more preferably 100% probability). Also, in the "specialized zone preparation", "specialized zone", and "AT" states, the bell navigation lottery is performed only when the special mode is ON, and when the special mode is OFF, the bell navigation lottery is always performed without performing the bell navigation lottery. , Bell navigation may be performed.

[Special zone preparation_Special zone start lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201, the special zone preparation_specialized zone start lottery table will be described. Specialized zone preparation_Specialized zone start lottery table is used when performing a specialized zone start lottery to determine whether to start the specialized zone at the time of winning a normal rip or a special rip in the state of "specialized zone preparation". It is a table referenced by. As shown in the figure, "first time", "specialized zone 1", "specialized zone 2", "specialized zone 3" and "specialized zone 4" are provided as the specialized zone types, and the first "specialized zone" is provided. In "Preparation", "First time" is referred to, and in the second and subsequent "Specialized zone preparation", "Specialized zone 1", "Specialized zone 2", "Specialized zone 3" and "Specialized zone 3" are referred to according to the type of specialized zone. Zone 4 ”is referenced. More specifically, in "specialized zone preparation" that has shifted from "normal", "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "CZ", and "AT precursor", "first time" is referred to, and "AT" and "special AT" are used. In the migrated "specialized zone preparation", the table according to the type of specialized zone is referenced.

The special zone preparation_specialized zone start lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the special zone start lottery for each type of the special zone. The main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as "specialized zone preparation" when "preparation continuation" is determined as a lottery result, and when "start" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as "specialized zone preparation". Move the ball output state of the next game from "specialized zone preparation" to "specialized zone".

[Specialized zone_lottery table with the number of games added]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, the special zone_game number addition lottery table will be described. FIG. 202 is a lottery table for adding the number of special zones_games, which is referred to when the type of the special zone is “special zone 1”, and FIG. 203 shows the special zone type of “special zone 2”. It is a special zone_game number addition lottery table referred to when "specialized zone_game number addition", and FIG. 204 shows a specialization zone_game number addition reference when the specialization zone type is "specialization zone 3". It is a lottery table, and FIG. 205 is a lottery table for adding the number of special zones_games, which is referred to when the type of the special zone is “special zone 4”.

The special zone_game number addition lottery table is a table referred to when the number of additional games is drawn based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the state of the "specialization zone". The special zone_game number additional lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the number of additional games for each type of special zone and lottery type. When the number of additional games is determined for each unit game in the special zone, the main control circuit 91 manages the determined number of additional games in total. Then, when the special zone ends, the main control circuit 91 adds the total number of additional games to the number of remaining games of the AT.

[Specialized zone_Specialized zone end lottery table]
Subsequently, the special zone_specialized zone end lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 206. Specialized Zone_Special Zone End Lottery Table is a special zone end lottery that determines whether to end the special zone based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "specialized zone" state. It is a table that is referred to when performing. The special zone_special zone end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the special zone end lottery for each special zone type and lottery type. When "continuation" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as the "specialized zone". Further, when the "end" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from the "specialized zone" to the "AT" and is determined in the specialized zone. The total value of the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games of AT, and the stock of AT (specialized zone) is subtracted by 1. In addition, the special zone is provided with a guarantee period, and the main control circuit 91 does not perform the special zone end lottery during the guarantee period, and the special zone ends in the unit game after the guarantee period ends. Make a lottery. The warranty period may be constant regardless of the type of special zone, or may be different depending on the type of special zone. In this embodiment, the guarantee period of "specialized zone 1" is 5 games, and the guarantee period of other specialized zones is 10 games.

[AT_initial AT mode lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_initial AT mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 207. The AT_initial AT mode lottery table is used when performing an initial AT mode lottery for determining the initial value of the AT mode during the period from the AT winning to the start of AT (in the present embodiment, at the start of AT). It is a table referenced by. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the stock of the AT (specialized zone) remains after the end of the AT, the AT is restarted via the special zone or the like. Here, the main control circuit 91 determines the initial value of the AT mode only at the start of the first AT, and at the start of the AT that consumes the stock and starts again after the end of the AT, the initial AT mode lottery is not performed. The AT mode at the end of AT may be inherited as it is. Of course, the initial AT mode lottery may be performed at the start of the AT that consumes the stock and starts again after the end of the AT.

The AT_initial AT mode lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery results of the initial AT mode lottery. The main control circuit 91 sets "low accuracy" as the AT mode when "low accuracy" is determined as the lottery result, and AT mode when "high accuracy A" is determined as the lottery result. When "High accuracy A" is set as the lottery result and "High accuracy B" is determined as the lottery result, "High accuracy B" is set as the AT mode and "High accuracy C" is determined as the lottery result. In that case, "high accuracy C" is set as the AT mode.

[AT_AT mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_AT mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 208. The AT_AT mode transition lottery table is a table referred to when the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_AT mode transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the AT mode of the migration destination for each AT mode of the migration source (current) and the lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the AT mode determined as a lottery result as the AT mode of the next game.

[AT_icon type lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_icon type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 209. AT_icon type The lottery table is an icon type of whether or not to display the history role "rare role" as a jewel (red) when the history role "rare role" is determined as the internal winning role in the "AT" state. It is a table that is referred to when drawing lots. The AT_icon type lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the icon type lottery for each lottery type. When the "non-winning (white)" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 notifies the sub control circuit 101 to that effect, and the sub control circuit 101 receiving the notification is a liquid crystal display (display unit). A jewel (white) is displayed in the history display window of 100). Similarly, when the "win (red)" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 notifies the sub control circuit 101 to that effect, and the sub control circuit 101 receiving the notification is a liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display (red). A jewel (red) is displayed in the history display window of the display unit 100).

As described above, when "invalid" is determined as the lottery result in the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218, the main control circuit 91 does not perform the icon type lottery. In this case, the sub-control circuit 101 displays a jewel (white) in the history display window of the liquid crystal display (display unit 100).

[AT_specialized zone stock lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 210. The AT_specialized zone stock lottery table is a table referred to when the stock lottery of the special zone is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_specialized zone stock lottery table defines the lottery value information for the stock lottery of the special zone for each AT mode and the lottery type. In addition, in the state of "special AT", the "special AT" column is referred to, and after the "win (red)" is determined by the above-mentioned icon type lottery, during the predetermined number of games (between 5 games), "red jewel" is used. ”Column is referenced, otherwise the column corresponding to the current AT mode is referenced.

The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the special zone when the "non-win" is determined as the lottery result, and when the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the AT special zone. One (or a plurality) of the stocks of the above is given, and the type of the given special zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Further, when the "special win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants a plurality of stocks of the AT special zone and refers to the common_special zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. The type of special zone stock granted is also determined.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "red jewel" column is referred to, the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone is the highest. Therefore, while the jewel (red) is displayed in the history display window along with the history role "rare role", it can be said that it is easy to win the stock lottery in the special zone.

Here, as described above, when "invalid" is determined as a lottery result in the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218, the main control circuit 91 does not perform stock lottery in the special zone. In addition, it may be possible to perform only the stock lottery of the special zone referring to the "red jewel" column.

[CZ lottery table during AT_AT]
Subsequently, the CZ lottery table in AT_AT will be described with reference to FIG. 211. The AT_AT middle CZ lottery table is a table referred to when performing a transition lottery to the AT middle CZ based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_AT middle CZ lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to the AT middle CZ for each lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "AT" state without shifting the ball ejection state, and when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "AT". , The state of the next game is changed from "AT" to "AT in CZ".

[AT_History lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_history lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 212. The AT_history lottery table is a table referred to when performing the above-mentioned history lottery in the "AT" state, and FIG. 212 (A) shows the AT_history lottery referenced when performing the history lottery based on the replay series. It is a table (replay series), FIG. 212 (B) is an AT_history lottery table (number of rare combinations) referred to when performing a history lottery based on the number of rare combinations, and FIG. 212 (C) is an outlier series. It is an AT_history lottery table (outliers) referred to when performing a history lottery based on.

The AT_history lottery table (replay series) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (replay series) in which the replay is continuously determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "AT" to "AT in CZ".

The AT_history lottery table (number of rare combinations) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (number of rare combinations) the rare combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants one (or a plurality) of AT (specialized zone) stocks, and at the same time, the common_specialized zone type lottery shown in FIG. 216. Refer to the table and determine the type of special zone stock assigned.

The AT_history lottery table (lost ream) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (lost ream) in which the loss is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. The main control circuit 91 promotes the AT mode by one when "winning" is determined as a lottery result.

[AT_final extra lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 213, the AT_final addition lottery table will be described. The AT_final addition lottery table is a table used for the final addition lottery performed when the number of remaining games of AT becomes 0 in a state where there is no stock of AT. The AT_final addition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the final addition lottery for each invalidity of the fixed combination. If the fixed combination is not invalidated by the end of AT, the "no invalid" column is referred to, and if the fixed combination is invalid, the "invalid" column is referred to. When the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants 3 or 5 AT (specialized zone) stocks and the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Also determine the type of special zone stock granted by referring to.

In addition, the main control circuit 91 performs the final addition lottery only when the fixed combination is invalid (in other words, only when it is decided not to grant the privilege according to the fixed combination), and is not invalidated. In that case, the final addition lottery may not be performed. Further, as shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the fixed combination is invalid, the final addition lottery is always won, but when the fixed combination is invalid, the final addition lottery is always won. It suffices if the probability of winning the final additional lottery is different (higher or lower) than when it is not invalidated.

[CZ_scenario lottery table during AT]
Subsequently, the CZ_scenario lottery table during AT will be described with reference to FIG. 214. The AT-in-AT CZ_scenario lottery table is used to determine the AT-in-AT CZ scenario to be started from the winning of the AT-in-CZ to the start of the AT-in-CZ (in the present embodiment, at the start of the AT-in-CZ). This is a table that is referred to when performing a scenario lottery. The CZ_scenario lottery table during AT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the scenario lottery for each scenario lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets a scenario determined as a lottery result, and controls the game of CZ during AT.

The scenario lottery type is information determined according to the AT point (FIG. 188 (E)), and the main control circuit 91 performs the scenario lottery type according to the AT point at the time when the scenario lottery is performed. To decide. In addition, the larger the scenario number, the more advantageous the scenario for the player. In the scenario lottery types "Type 0" to "Type 3", the scenario in which "Type 0" is advantageous is the scenario lottery type that is most likely to win. Yes, "Type 1" is the scenario lottery type that is easy to win the advantageous scenario next, "Type 2" is the scenario lottery type that is easy to win the advantageous scenario next, and "Type 3" is the advantageous scenario. Is the most difficult scenario lottery type. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the smaller the AT points, the easier it is to determine a scenario that is advantageous to the player.

Subsequently, FIG. 214B is a diagram showing the contents of the scenario. The scenario is information that defines the CZ type for every five games. For example, scenario 1 is a scenario of CZ during AT that ends in 5 games, and is a scenario in which the CZ type of 1 to 5 games is 1 (blue). In addition, scenario 10 is a scenario of CZ during AT that ends in 15 games, and the CZ type of 1 to 5 games is 1 (blue), the CZ type of 6 to 10 games is 2 (green), and 11 to 15 games. This is a scenario in which the CZ type is 3 (red). In the state of "AT in CZ", the effect is performed using the unique effect stage, and the color information (blue, green, red) at the end of the CZ type represents the color of the effect stage. Therefore, the player can grasp the CZ type from the color of the production stage.

[CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT]
Subsequently, the CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT will be described with reference to FIG. 215. The AT-in-AT CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table is a table referred to when performing a special zone stock lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the state of "AT-in-CZ". The CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the stock lottery for each CZ type and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the special zone when the "non-win" is determined as the lottery result, and when the "win" is determined, the stock of the special zone is set to 1. In addition to assigning one (or a plurality), the type of the assigned specialized zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216.

The duration of the AT CZ is managed by the number of games for each scenario, and even if the AT lottery is won in the AT CZ, the ball-out state "AT in CZ" remains as long as the number of games corresponding to the scenario. Do not migrate. When the CZ during AT ends, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ during AT" to "AT".

[Common_Specialized zone type lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_specialized zone type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 216. The common_specialized zone type lottery table is a table that is referred to when the type of specialized zone is drawn when the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given. The common_specialized zone type lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the special zone type for each stock opportunity. Here, when the stock of the special zone is given according to the fixed role "F_purple 7 lip", the stock opportunity "purple 7" is referred to, and the special zone according to the fixed role "F_red BAR lip". When the stock of is given, the stock opportunity "Red BAR" is referred to, and when the stock of the special zone is given according to the definite role "F_W matching lip", the stock trigger "W matching" is referred to. , When the stock of the special zone is given according to the fixed role "F_black BAR lip", the stock opportunity "black BAR" is referred to, and the special zone in the normal mode "special" in the "normal advantage" state. When the stock of the special zone is given, the stock trigger "normal mode special" is referred to, and when the stock of the special zone is given by other than these, the stock trigger "normal (other than right)" is referred to. ..

When the "specialized zone 1" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 sets the type of the specialized zone of the stock to the "specialized zone 1" and sets the "specialized zone 2" as the lottery result. If it is decided, the type of the special zone of the stock is set to "special zone 2", and if "special zone 3" is decided as a lottery result, the type of the special zone of the stock is set. If "specialized zone 3" is used and "specialized zone 4" is determined as a result of lottery, the type of specialized zone of the stock is set to "specialized zone 4". In the specialized zone, the degree of expectation for adding the number of games differs depending on the type, and the degree of expectation for adding the number of games is highest in "specialized zone 4", next in "specialized zone 3", and " "Specialized zone 2" is the next highest, and "Specialized zone 1" is the lowest.

In addition, "specialized zone 1" is a specialized zone where the number of games is added although the number of games is small regardless of the winning combination, and "specialized zone 2" is an additional number of games according to the winning combination. Although it may not be performed, it is a specialized zone in which at least 50 games are added at the time of winning a normal rip (“F_normal rip 1”). In addition, when the normal rip is won in the "specialized zone 2", the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of right / left middle or right middle left and displays the combination of the symbols related to "purple 7 rip". prompt. Further, the "specialized zone 3" is a specialized zone in which at least 100 games are added at the time of winning a normal lip, although the number of games may not be added depending on the winning combination. When the normal rip is won in the "specialized zone 3", the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of the middle left / right or the middle right / left and prompts the display of the combination of the symbols related to the "red BAR rip". ..

In addition, "specialized zone 4" has the characteristics of "specialized zone 1" to "specialized zone 3", and the number of games played is added regardless of the winning combination, and at the time of winning a normal rip. At least 50 games (with a high probability of 100 games) will be added, and at least 200 games will be added at the time of winning the special rip ("F_special rip 1" "F_special rip 2"). be. When the normal lip wins in the "specialized zone 4" and 50 games are determined as the number of additional games, the main control circuit 91 notifies the right-left middle or right-middle-left push order and "purple". When the display of the combination of symbols related to "7 rips" is urged, and when the normal rip is won and 100 games are determined as the number of additional games, the main control circuit 91 sets the push order of middle left / right or middle right / left. Notify and prompt to display the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip". Further, when the "F_special rip 1" is won in the "specialized zone 4", the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of the right-left middle or the right-middle left, and the symbol related to the "W-aligned rip" is displayed. The display of the combination is urged, and when "F_special rip 2" is won, the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of the middle left / right or middle right / left and displays the combination of the symbols related to the "W-aligned rip". prompt.

[Common_fixed role invalid lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The common_fixed combination invalid lottery table is in the state where the fixed combination is conditionally valid ("specialized zone preparation", "AT", "AT in CZ"), and when the fixed combination is won, it is not invalid based on the AT points. , It is a table referred to when performing an invalid lottery as to whether or not to invalidate the fixed combination. That is, when the fixed combination "F_black BAR lip" is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 performs an invalid lottery using the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table when the AT points are less than 768 points. If the AT points are 768 points or more, the lottery is not performed and the lottery is invalidated.

The common_fixed combination invalid lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the fixed combination invalid lottery. When "valid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 considers the winning fixed combination to be valid and grants a privilege according to the fixed combination. Further, when "invalid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 invalidates the winning fixed combination and does not give the privilege according to the fixed combination.

[Common_lottery invalid lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_lottery invalid lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The common_lottery invalid lottery table is a table referred to when performing an invalid lottery as to whether or not to invalidate various lottery in a specific game state such as during AT. The common_lottery invalid lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the invalid lottery for each AT point type. The main control circuit 91 performs various lottery in the game when "valid" is determined as the lottery result, and various lottery in the game when "invalid" is determined as the lottery result. Not performed.

The AT point type is information determined according to the AT point (FIG. 188 (D)), and the main control circuit 91 is the AT point type according to the AT point at the time when the invalid lottery is performed. To decide.

[Common_Lock occurrence lottery table at stock]
Subsequently, the common_stock lock generation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 219. The common_stock lock generation lottery table is a table that is referred to when drawing whether or not to generate a lock state when AT (specialized zone) stock is given. Common_The lock generation lottery table at the time of stock defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of whether or not to generate the lock state for each state at the time of stock winning and the lottery type at the time of stock winning. Here, when the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given in the ball ejection state "normal" or "normal advantage", the "normal / normal advantage" column is referred to, and in the ball ejection state "AT", AT ( If the stock of the special zone) is given, the "AT" column is referred to.

The main control circuit 91 does not generate a lock state when "non-winning" is determined as a lottery result, and stops the progress of the game when "winning" is determined as a lottery result. Generate a state. In addition, when the lock state is generated, the main control circuit 91 may give a further privilege. For example, when the lock state is generated, the main control circuit 91 may further add one or more stocks in addition to the AT (specialized zone) stock for the amount that triggered the lottery. good.

As shown in the figure, during the ball ejection state "AT", a locked state occurs with a relatively high probability when the stock of the special zone is given. Here, when the jewel (red) is displayed based on the history role “rare role” as described above, the stock of the special zone is likely to be given during the predetermined number of games thereafter (see FIG. 210). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jewel (red) is displayed based on the history combination “rare combination”, the locked state is likely to occur during the subsequent predetermined number of games.

[Summary of playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has been described above, but the playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

[Control using AT points (change in additional probability)]
As described above in FIG. 188, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (in the present embodiment, the ball ejection state “specialized zone preparation”, “specialized zone”, and “AT”. Numerical information regarding the number of medals that can be paid out (difference number = number of payouts-number of inserts) in "AT during CZ" and "special AT") is managed by AT points. The main control circuit 91 acquires game information in each game in a specific game state, and calculates AT points according to the acquired game information.

Specifically, the main control circuit 91 is actually paid out when it acquires game information for specifying the number of medals actually paid out in this game, such as a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination or a winning combination. Calculate the added value of points according to the number of medals to be awarded, and update the accumulated points. Further, when the main control circuit 91 acquires game information such as the number of games remaining in the AT and the number of stocks remaining in the AT, the number of medals that can be awarded in the future, which is expected from the number of games remaining in the AT and the number of stocks remaining in the AT. Calculate possession points according to the expected value. Then, the main control circuit 91 calculates the total of the accumulated points and the possessed points as AT points.

Then, when the calculated AT point exceeds the threshold value (more specifically, when it exceeds the threshold value), the main control circuit 91 determines the probability of granting the privilege (for example, extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period in a specific gaming state). Change. As an example, when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 has a higher expectation of giving a privilege such as an extension of the gaming period of a specific gaming state such as a deterministic combination. Even if the role is determined as an internal winning combination, it is controlled so that the fixed combination is invalidated and the privilege is not given.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period in the specific gaming state changes according to the AT points regarding the number of medals that can be awarded in the specific gaming state. The games in the state will be diversified, and the fun of the games will be improved. In addition, if the player has already obtained a lot of profits in a specific gaming state or can obtain a lot of profits in the future, the profits that the player can obtain becomes excessive by performing control such as invalidating the fixed combination. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive entanglement.

It should be noted that the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in a specific gaming state is optional, and in order to change the extension information, in addition to invalidating (not extending) as in the present embodiment, there is a probability. It also includes lowering the probability and increasing the probability. That is, this gameplay includes, in addition to invalidating the deterministic combination, changing the probability of invalidating the deterministic combination when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, and is limited to the control of the deterministic combination. However, when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, the additional lottery of the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is invalidated, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games is not added during AT, but when the AT points exceed the threshold value, the lottery for adding the number of games is invalidated, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is changed. This includes changing (increasing or decreasing) the number of games to be added when the additional lottery is won.

[Control using AT points (diversification of outcomes)]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the fixed combination is invalid, the push order of right / left middle or right middle left is notified, and when the fixed combination is valid, the push order is not notified. As a result, when the fixed combination is invalid, the combination of symbols (TL rip) that can be displayed in other replay combinations is displayed, and when the fixed combination is valid, the unique symbol in each fixed combination is displayed. The combination is displayed. In this embodiment, when the fixed combination is valid, no pressing order is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing order in which the combination of symbols unique to the fixed combination is displayed is notified. May be.

As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols (rolls) displayed at the time of winning the fixed combination differs depending on the AT point, and the rolls (result display) that the player pays attention to. Will be diversified and the fun of the game will be improved. At this time, the outcome when the fixed combination is valid is unique to the fixed combination, while the outcome when the fixed combination is invalid is determined as the winning combination other than the fixed combination. It is a roll that can be displayed even if it is. Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the fixed combination is won and invalidated or another role is won from the displayed general-purpose roll, and the player does not notice the roll. It is possible to control the state in which the variation is different. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), since the types of fixed combinations to be invalidated increase stepwise according to the AT point, the variation of the outcome can be changed stepwise.

It should be noted that the playability is such that the variation of the outcome is different depending on the AT point, and the target to be different is not limited to whether it is a unique outcome or a general-purpose outcome. For example, in the main control circuit 91, when the AT point is in a specific range (less than the first threshold value), a specific result (combination of symbols) is displayed at the time of winning a specific combination, so that the push order is displayed. If the AT point is in a predetermined range different from the specific range (1st threshold or more and less than the 2nd threshold), a predetermined result (combination of symbols) is displayed when a specific combination is won. It may be the one that navigates the push order so that it is done.

[Definite combination control using AT points and final addition control]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the definite combination is valid, the main control circuit 91 grants a privilege triggered by the winning of the definite combination, but when the definite combination is invalid. Can grant benefits based on the final additional lottery performed at the end of AT, which is a game after the game won in the final winning combination. As a result, when the fixed combination is invalidated, other benefits can be given instead, so that it is possible to reduce the unilateral disadvantage of the player. In this case, if the fixed combination is invalidated, a general-purpose result will be displayed. Therefore, the player does not notice that the fixed combination has been invalidated, and the final addition lottery is performed. You can get the benefits based on. When the fixed role is invalidated in this way, by granting a substitute benefit, the actual disadvantage can be compensated for, and the benefits associated with the winning of the fixed role can be diversified. can. In this embodiment, the privilege based on the final addition lottery and the privilege based on the fixed role "F_black BAR lip" are the same privilege, but the privilege is not limited to this. That is, the privilege based on the definite combination to be invalidated and the privilege to supplement the invalidated privilege are not limited to the same one, and may be different privilege.

Further, when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value (1024) at the time of the lottery of the final addition lottery (that is, at the end of AT after the game in which the determinant wins the winning game), the main control circuit 91 is the final addition lottery. Do not do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the final additional lottery is invalidated based on the AT points, but the final additional lottery may not be invalidated regardless of the AT points. Further, the probability of winning the final additional lottery may be different depending on the AT point. In addition, when the fixed combination is invalidated, the final additional lottery is not invalidated regardless of the AT point, and when the fixed combination is invalidated, the final additional lottery is invalidated based on the AT point. May be good.

[History type control using AT points]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the history combination "rare combination" is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 displays a jewel (red) or a jewel (white) in the history display window. Decide if you want to. If it is decided to display the jewel (red), the probability of winning the stock lottery of the special zone during AT increases during the predetermined number of games thereafter. The main control circuit 91 also determines whether or not to display this jewel (red) with reference to the AT point. Specifically, a lottery invalid lottery is performed based on the AT points, and when "invalid" is determined in this lottery, the jewel (red) is displayed because the lottery for whether or not to display the jewel (red) is not performed. The decision to do so will be based on the AT points. As a result, not only the probability of displaying the jewel (red) but also the probability of granting the privilege (specialized zone stock) thereafter changes according to the AT points, so that various playability can be realized.

If the stock lottery of the special zone during AT is won, a locked state may occur in which the progress of the game is stopped (see FIG. 219). As described above, since the probability of stocking the special zone changes according to the AT point, the frequency of occurrence of the locked state can be different according to the AT point, so that various playability can be realized. can.

[Examples of other specifications for playability using AT points]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 220, other specification examples applicable to the playability using AT points will be described. First, FIGS. 220 (A) and 220 (a) show a basic pattern of this game playability. As shown in the figure, in this game playability, the probability of addition (giving a privilege) and the content of the outcome are changed based on the AT points. Specifically, when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 makes the addition probability different and the content of the outcome different. In addition, to make the additional probability different means to enable / invalidate the fixed combination and to make the winning probability of the additional lottery based on other roles (replay, small role, rare role) different. In addition to this, it includes increasing / decreasing the winning combination of the additional lottery. Further, to make the contents of the outcomes different is to control the push order to be navigated at the time of winning the winning combination in which different combinations of symbols are displayed according to the push order, as described above.

Further, regarding the addition probability, when there is an addition control A and an addition control B, both may be changed, or both may be changed individually. Specifically, when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 may change the winning probabilities of the additional control A and the additional control B, and the main control circuit 91 has the AT point as the first threshold value. When the above is achieved, the winning probability of the addition control A may be changed, and when the AT point becomes the second threshold value or more, the winning probability of the addition control B may be changed.

Further, FIGS. (B) and (c) show application patterns of the present game to other specification examples. As shown in FIG. 3B, the main control circuit 91 controls the addition probability to be different when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, while the content of the outcome is controlled to be constant regardless of the AT point. You may. In such a specification example, although the contents of the outcomes are the same, the probability of addition changes. From the player's point of view, the visible outcomes are the same, so for example, it is possible to have a sense of expectation from the outcomes such as rare roles, but it is not added internally.

On the contrary, as shown in the figure (c), the main control circuit 91 controls the addition probability to be constant regardless of the AT point, while the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value for the content of the outcome. It may be controlled to change when it becomes. In such a specification example, the addition probability is the same, but the content of the outcome changes. Since the contents of the outcomes are different, it is possible to provide a state in which the outcomes are easy to appear or difficult to appear, such as a rare role, without changing the expectation of the addition. From the player's point of view, there are situations in which rare roles and other rolls are frequently appearing, but no additional rolls are made, and conversely, rare roles and other rolls are not added at all. Since the situation such as being performed occurs, the interest of the game is improved.

Subsequently, FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the threshold value for changing the addition probability and the threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As shown in the figure, the main control circuit 91 may share a threshold value for changing the addition probability and a threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As an example, in the main control circuit 91, when the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, the addition probability is the probability A, the content of the result is the result A, and the AT point is the threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2. The addition probability is the probability B, the content of the roll is the roll B, and when the AT point is the threshold value 2 or more and less than the threshold value 3, the addition probability is the probability C, the content of the roll is the roll C, and AT. When the points are the threshold value 3 or more and less than the threshold value 4, the addition probability may be the probability D and the content of the outcome may be the outcome D.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may have a different threshold value for changing the addition probability and a threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As an example, in the main control circuit 91, regarding the addition probability, the probability A when the AT point is less than the threshold value 2, the probability B when the AT point is the threshold value 2 or more and less than the threshold value 3, and the AT point the threshold value 3 or more threshold value. If it is less than 4, the probability C is set. On the other hand, regarding the content of the outcome, the outcome A is when the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, and the outcome B is when the AT point is the threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 3. , When the AT point is the threshold value 3 or more and less than the threshold value 4, the result C may be set. Further, when the AT point is less than the threshold value 3, the main control circuit 91 may change the addition probability while setting the content of the roll to the roll A. As an example, if the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, the addition probability is the probability A, if the AT point is the threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2, the addition probability is the probability B, and the AT point is the threshold value 2 or more and less than the threshold value 3. In some cases, the additional probability may be the probability C.

Subsequently, FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a point type used for changing the addition probability and the content of the outcome. As shown in pattern 1 of the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability and the content of the outcome based on the AT point, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the AT point is composed of a cumulative point and a possession point, and the main control circuit 91 can change the addition probability and the content of the outcome by using any of the AT point, the cumulative point, and the possession point.

The point types used may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 2 in the figure shows a case where different point types are used in the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, in the main control circuit 91, the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the cumulative point.

Further, the point type to be used may be different according to the range of AT points. It should be noted that the point types to be used may be different based on the range of accumulated points or possessed points instead of the range of AT points. Pattern 3 in the figure shows a case where the point type to be used is different depending on the range of AT points. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (less than the threshold value 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability and the content of the outcome based on the cumulative points, and the AT point is in the second range (less than the threshold value 1). When the threshold value is 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2), the addition probability and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the AT point.

In this case, the range of AT points may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 4 in the figure shows a case where the range of AT points is different in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (threshold value less than 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability based on the cumulative points, and the AT point is in the second range (threshold value 1 or more and threshold value 2). If it is less than), the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, while the content of the outcome may be changed based on the AT point as long as the AT point is less than the threshold value 2.

Further, the point types to be used may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 5 in the figure shows a case where different point types are used in the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (less than the threshold value 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability based on the cumulative points and changes the content of the outcome based on the AT points. When the AT point is in the second range (threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2), the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the possession point.

[AT point management method]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 updates the AT points every game by updating the accumulated points and the possessed points every game in a specific game state such as during AT. For example, if one game is played during "AT", the number of remaining games of AT is reduced by 1, and as a result, the possessed points are reduced by 7 points, while the accumulated points are updated according to the winning combination in the game. Further, for example, in the state of the "specialized zone", when the stock is consumed to determine the number of AT games, the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is reduced by 1, while the remaining AT is for the determined number of games. As the number of games increases, 600 points for one stock will decrease from the accumulated points, while the points possessed for the increased number of games will increase.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each game in a specific game state, the AT points are updated according to the game information (winning combination, etc.) of the game, so that the medal that can be given in the specific game state can be given. It is possible to properly manage AT points regarding the quantity of. That is, as the game progresses, the expected value (possessed points) of the amount of medal increase per game is replaced with the real number (cumulative points) of the number of medals actually paid out, so the AT is closer to the real number. Points can be calculated.

[Comparison method with threshold value]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT points are counted using a counter consisting of 2 bytes of upper byte (1 byte) and lower byte (1 byte), and a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value. Then, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value by comparing the value of the counter of the upper byte with the value of the multiple portion of the threshold value. As a result, the value of the lower byte is not required for the threshold value, so that the data capacity can be reduced and the processing load required for the comparison control can be reduced.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has an "AT" state in which AT points are counted and various controls based on the AT points are performed, and a "normal" state in which the AT points are not used, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a state such as "AT". 1 has a plurality of gaming states including a predetermined gaming state (normal or the like) and a specific gaming state (AT or the like). Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the stop operation is performed in the push order of the left 1st, a combination of symbols unique to the fixed combination is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the push order such as the right 1st. It has a plurality of definite combinations in which a combination of general-purpose symbols displayed in other replay combinations is displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires game information such as an internal winning combination and the number of remaining games of the AT in each game in a specific game state such as AT, and also acquires a specific game state according to the acquired game information. In order to calculate the AT point which is the numerical information regarding the number of medals that can be given in the above, the main control circuit 91 functions as a numerical calculation means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires information on the number of medals to be given in the current game (for example, the internal winning combination or the number actually paid out in the current game) in each game in a specific game state. Cumulative points are calculated according to the acquired information. Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires the number of remaining stocks of the AT (specialized zone) and the number of remaining games of the AT in each game in a specific gaming state, and according to the acquired number of remaining stocks and the number of remaining games. , Calculate possession points. Then, the main control circuit 91 calculates the AT point from the accumulated points and the possessed points. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a first numerical value calculating means, a second numerical value calculating means, and a third numerical value calculating means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can consume the stock number of the AT (specialized zone) and add the remaining number of games of the AT, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game period determining means.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 changes the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of a specific gaming state such as AT when the AT point becomes the threshold value or more, the main control circuit 91 functions as the extension information changing means. As the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in a specific gaming state, for example, the stocking of the special zone accompanying the fixed role or the special zone stock lottery performed during AT can be used, and the fixed role is effective. / Extension information can be changed by disabling it or changing the probability of winning the special zone stock lottery. Further, the main control circuit 91 performs various controls by comparing the AT points with the threshold values, and these various controls have points (cumulative points) and threshold values according to the number of medals actually paid out so far. It may be done by comparing with, or it may be done by comparing the points (possession points) according to the number of medals that can be awarded in the future with the threshold value, and the cumulative points and possession points. It may be performed by comparing the total AT points with the threshold value.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines the type of the definite combination that notifies the right 1st push order when the winning combination is determined according to the AT point, and the determined type of definite combination is determined as the winning combination. Then, in order to notify the push order of right / left middle or right middle left, the main control circuit 91 functions as a target combination determining means and a notifying means. At this time, the main control circuit 91 gradually increases the types of the definite combination that notifies the right 1st push order in order from the definite combination with the largest privilege to be given (see FIG. 188 (B)).

Further, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege according to the fixed combination when the fixed combination is valid at the time of winning the fixed combination, and when the fixed combination is invalidated, at the end of AT. Since the privilege can be granted by the final addition lottery to be performed, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege granting means, a first privilege granting determining means, and a second privilege granting determining means. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to invalidate the fixed combination according to the AT point in the game in which the fixed combination is won, and also performs the final addition lottery according to the AT point at the end of AT. Decide whether or not.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can determine whether to display the jewel (red) or the jewel (white) in the history display window when the history combination "rare combination" is determined as the winning combination. The main control circuit 91 functions as a history type determining means. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history information of the winning combination during the predetermined number of games in the history display window of the liquid crystal display, and displays the jewel (red) based on the history combination "rare role". When it is determined that the jewel (red) is displayed on the history display window, the sub-control circuit 101 and the history display window of the liquid crystal display function as the history display means.
The main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to display the jewel (red) based on the history combination “rare combination” based on the AT point. Specifically, the lottery invalid lottery is performed based on the AT point, and when it is decided to invalidate the lottery, the lottery itself for whether or not to display the jewel (red) is not performed, so that the main control circuit The 91 functions as an invalidation control means.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 decides to display the jewel (red) based on the history role "rare role", the stock grant lottery of the special zone is won with high probability during the predetermined number of games thereafter. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege granting means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can generate a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped when the stock is given by winning the stock grant lottery in the special zone, the main control circuit 91 is the lock control means. Functions as.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 counts AT points with a counter for AT points composed of 2 bytes of upper byte and lower byte, the main control circuit 91 functions as a 2-byte counter.

[Special mode control during advantageous section]
The main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed in the state where the special mode is ON, the special mode is set to ON. Update to OFF. When the special mode is ON, the lottery result such as AT (specialized zone stock) lottery is disadvantageous for the player, and the probability of navigating the push order at the time of winning the push order small winning combination is low. The playability described below relates to the control of the navigation of the push order by the special mode.

If you win the AT in the "normal" state, and then move to the "special zone preparation" state with the special mode ON, the push order navigation will be in the special mode in the "special zone preparation" state. Since it is performed with a corresponding probability (see FIG. 200), in the "specialized zone preparation" state, the ball ejection feeling differs depending on the special mode, and the ball ejection feeling becomes sharp.

In addition, the transition from the "specialized zone preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state, which functions as a notification state in which push order navigation is performed, is a special zone start lottery performed at the time of winning a normal rip or a special rip. The start is determined at (see FIG. 201). At this time, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the normal rip or the special rip is won, basically, a combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "XD rip" is displayed, so that the "specialization" functioning as a notification state is displayed. When the state shifts to the "zone" state, the special mode is updated to OFF. In this way, in the "specialized zone" state, the special mode is turned off, so the probability of navigating the pushing order when the push order small winning combination is won increases, and the special mode is ON in the "specialized zone preparation" state. Compared to the above, the ball ejection feeling is different, and the ball ejection feeling is sharp between the state of "specialized zone preparation" and the state of "specialized zone".

When the RT state is different, the main control circuit 91 can also perform stop control so as to display a combination of "XD rip" symbols at the time of winning a normal rip or a special rip. That is, in the flag-to-flag RT (3BET game inside the 2BET exclusive bonus), the main control circuit 91 can display a combination of symbols (TL rip, etc.) related to the replay other than the "XD rip" at the time of winning the normal rip. Stop control is performed, and in the RT state other than the RT between flags, the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" is displayed at the time of winning the normal rip, and the combination of the symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" cannot be displayed. do.

When such control is performed, in the inter-flag RT, a special mode is set according to the display of the combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "XD rip" at the time of winning the normal rip that triggers the start of the "specialized zone" state. While it is updated to OFF, in the RT state other than the RT between flags, the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" is displayed at the time of winning the normal rip, so when the state of "specialized zone" is started. Even if there is, the special mode is kept ON. That is, the main control circuit 91 normally shifts from the "specialized zone preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state only when the lip is determined as the winning combination, but switches the special mode. Is not performed only when the normal rip is determined as the winning combination, but is performed when a combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed.

Then, the main control circuit 91 navigates the push order with a predetermined probability in the "specialized zone" state in which the special mode is ON, and is predetermined in the "specialized zone" state in which the special mode is OFF. By navigating the push order with a higher probability (more preferably 100% probability) than the probability of, it is possible to give a sharp feeling to the ball coming out immediately after the start of the "specialized zone".

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a normal gaming state (predetermined gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player such as a "normal" or "normally advantageous" state, and a "special" that is more advantageous to the player than these normal gaming states. Multiple gaming states including the state of "specialized zone" (specific game state) and the state of "specialized zone preparation" (standby game state), which is the waiting period until the state of "specialized zone" starts. Have. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a flag-to-flag RT in which the 2BET-dedicated bonus is carried over as a winning combination, and a non-flag-to-flag RT in which the bonus is not carried over as a winning combination. It should be noted that the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination differs between the flag-to-flag RT and the non-flag-to-flag RT, and therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a different probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination. It has a plurality of RT states including inter-flag RT and non-flag-interval RT.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a push order small combination (“F_batting order 1 bell A” to “F_batting order 6 special B”) that can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode when the winning combination is determined. In the inter-flag RT, it is possible to display the combination of symbols (TL rip) related to the replay other than "XD rip", and in the non-flag RT, only the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" can be displayed, and "XD". Since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a role such as a normal rip that cannot display a combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "rip", the pachi-slot machine 1 has a notification target role and a specific role as a plurality of roles.

In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a special mode, and in order to make the probability of navigating the correct push order different when the push order small winning combination is won by turning the special mode ON / OFF, it is different from the first notification mode (special mode ON). It has a second notification mode (special mode OFF), which has a higher probability of navigating the correct pressing order than the first notification mode.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the AT lottery in the "normal" state, the gaming state can be shifted to the "specialized zone preparation" state, such as via the "AT precursor" state, and the game state can be changed. , If the start is decided by the special zone start lottery performed at the time of winning the normal rip or special rip in the state of "specialized zone preparation", the game state can be transferred to the state of "specialized zone", so the main The control circuit 91 functions as a game state control means.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 shifts from the "normal" state, which is a normal section, to the "specialized zone preparation" state, which is an advantageous section, the special mode can be set to ON, and the "specialized zone" can be set to ON. When shifting from the "preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state (more specifically, a combination of symbols related to replays other than "XD rip" due to the winning of the normal rip that triggered the lottery of the special zone start lottery. Is displayed), the special mode can be set to OFF, so that the main control circuit 91 functions as a notification mode setting means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 navigates the correct push order with a predetermined probability when the special mode is ON and wins the push order small combination, and when the special mode is OFF, the push order small combination is used. If this is the case, the main control circuit 91 functions as a notification means in order to navigate the correct push order with a higher probability than a predetermined probability.

[Navigation control of 3 choices]
The playability described below relates to the control that the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side match when the three-choice combination is won. When navigating at the time of winning the three-choice combination, the main control circuit 91 acquires a navigation type that matches the three-choice push order from the navigation types provided for the six-choice push order. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 selects the navigation type "1" corresponding to the left middle right or the navigation type "2" corresponding to the left middle right at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the left 1st order. At the time of winning the 3 choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the middle 1st order, the navigation type "3" corresponding to the middle left and right or the navigation type "4" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired, and the correct answer is pushed in the right order. At the time of winning the 1st 3 choice combination, the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left or the navigation type "6" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired. Then, the main control circuit 91 navigates the push order on the instruction monitor based on the acquired navigation type.

Then, the sub-control circuit 101 performs navigation according to the navigation type on the main side on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). Specifically, when the navigation type on the main side is "1", the sub-control circuit 101 displays the push order on the left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display, and the navigation type on the main side is "2". In that case, the left / right middle push order is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and if the main navigation type is "3", the middle / left / left push order is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and the main navigation type is "3". If it is "4", the middle right and left push order is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and if the navigation type on the main side is "5", the right and left middle push order is displayed on the liquid crystal display and the main side. When the navigation type is "6", the right, middle, and left pressing order is displayed on the liquid crystal display. As a result, in this control, it is possible to match the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side while performing the navigation of 6 choices in a dramatic manner when the 3 choice combination is won.

When navigating when the 6-choice combination is won, the main control circuit 91 acquires the navigation type according to the correct push order (6 choices) and navigates in the push order, and the sub-control circuit 101 performs navigation in the push order. , Navigation according to the navigation type on the main side is performed on the liquid crystal display.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means. Further, since the sub control circuit 101 controls the effect related to the game, the sub control circuit 101 functions as an effect control means.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a 3-choice combination and a 6-choice combination, and when the right 1st batting order is in the 3-choice combination, a predetermined combination of symbols (TL lip) is displayed and left. In the case of the 1st batting order, "F_purple 7 rip" in which a combination of other symbols (purple 7 rip) is displayed is included, and in the case of the 6-choice combination, the batting order is right or left. When a specific symbol combination (upper bell) is displayed in, and the specific symbol combination is not displayed when the push order is other than right, middle, and left, "F_Batting order 5 bell A" or when the push order is right, middle, and left. Since the pachislot machine 1 includes "F_Batting order 6 bell A" in which a specific symbol combination (upper bell) is displayed and a specific symbol combination is not displayed when the push order is other than right, middle, and left. As a plurality of combinations, it has a first-choice combination and a second-choice combination, and further, a specific first-choice combination as the first-choice combination and a specific second-choice combination as the second-choice combination. It has a second-choice combination.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can notify the push order via the instruction monitor and the sub control circuit 101 can notify the push order via the liquid crystal display (display unit 100), the main control circuit 91 can be notified. And the instruction monitor functions as the main side notification means, and the sub control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display function as the sub side notification means.

[Navigation control in CZ during AT]
Subsequently, the playability related to the navigation control in the CZ during AT will be described. When the transition condition is satisfied in the "AT" state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state to the "AT in CZ" state. Since the main control circuit 91 does not navigate the correct push order when the push order small winning combination is won, the state of "AT in CZ" is more disadvantageous than the state of "AT" in terms of increasing medals. , The state of "AT in CZ" is more likely to be stocked in the special zone than the state of "AT". As a result, the profit (medals and specialized zone stock) given to the player in "AT in CZ" is kept within an appropriate range without impairing the playability of "AT in CZ", which is the extension of the period of "AT". be able to. In addition, by lowering the ball output rate in the state of "CZ during AT", the ratio can be transferred to other parts, for example, the frequency of transition to the state of "CZ during AT" and "during AT". It is also possible to increase the expectation of stock grant in the state of "CZ". In this embodiment, the push order is not navigated in the "AT in CZ" state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of navigating the push order is lower than in the "AT" state. Just do it.

Further, in the state of "AT", the main control circuit 91 does not give stock of the special zone when the push order small winning combination to be notified is won (see FIG. 210), but "CZ during AT". In the state of "", the stock of the special zone may be given at the time of winning the push order small winning combination (see FIG. 215). In this way, when the push order small winning combination is won in the state of "AT middle CZ" where the probability of navigating the push order is low, it is possible to give stock of the special zone instead of the disadvantage of not navigating. Then, since the player does not feel dissatisfied with the winning of the push order small role in the state of "AT middle CZ", the interest of the game is improved.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a normal gaming state (predetermined gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player such as a "normal" or "normally advantageous" state, and a "normal gaming state" that is more advantageous to the player than these normal gaming states. It has a state of "AT" and "CZ during AT" (specific gaming state), and also has a state of "AT" (normal section) as a specific gaming state and a stock of a special zone rather than the state of "AT". Has a state of "CZ during AT" (additional section) in which is easily assigned. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the number of medals (15) paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct batting order is the number of medals paid out when the stop operation is performed in the incorrect batting order. It has "F_Batting Order Bell 1A" to "F_Batting Order Bell 6B" which are more notification target roles than (0 or 1).

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can notify the correct push order when the combination to be notified is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 functions as the notification means. At this time, in the state of "AT", the main control circuit 91 always (or with high probability) navigates the correct push order when the winning combination of the notification target wins, but in the state of "AT in CZ". , Navigating (or not navigating) the correct push order with a lower probability than during "AT".

Further, the main control circuit 91 can shift the gaming state to the "AT in CZ" state when the transition condition to the "AT in CZ" state is satisfied in the "AT" state, and the "AT in CZ" state. When the end condition is satisfied in the state of, the main control circuit 91 functions as an additional section control means because it is possible to terminate "AT in CZ" and shift to "AT". Further, in the state of "AT" or "AT in CZ", the main control circuit 91 can add stock of the special zone according to the internal winning combination (lottery type), and in particular, the "AT in CZ". In the state, since the stock of the special zone can be given even at the time of winning the role of the notification target, the main control circuit 91 functions as an additional control means.

[History lottery method]
Subsequently, the playability of the history lottery method in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. The main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of times that the history combination is determined as the winning combination between predetermined games (between 5 games). The pachi-slot machine 1 has a history role "replay" and a history role "rare role" as such history roles, but the chance lip ("F_chance lip") has a history role "replay" and a history role "rare role". It belongs to both. Therefore, when the chance rip is decided as the winning role, both the number of the history role "replay" and the number of the history role "rare role" are added, and as a result, when the chance rip is won, the replay (ream) lottery is done. The condition and the lottery condition for the rare role (number) may be satisfied at the same time. When the two lottery conditions are satisfied in this way, the main control circuit 91 can grant a privilege according to all the history combinations that satisfy the lottery conditions.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a chance lip (“F_chance lip”) that belongs to both the history role “replay” and the history role “rare role”. Further, since the main control circuit 91 stores the history information of the winning combination related to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games), the main control circuit 91 functions as a history management means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege when the lottery condition of the replay (ream) is satisfied and the history lottery is won, and the privilege is given when the lottery condition of the rare role (number) is satisfied and the history lottery is won. Since it can be given, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege giving means. It should be noted that the main control circuit 91 can grant the benefits of both when the chance rip is won and the replay (ream) lottery condition and the rare combination (number) lottery condition are satisfied at the same time.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history information of the winning combination during the predetermined number of games in the history display window of the liquid crystal display, the sub-control circuit 101 and the history display window of the liquid crystal display function as history display means. ..

[Fifth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 243. The same configuration and control as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment and various modifications will be omitted in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples can be similarly applied. The feature 1 can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below.

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below, like the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, is playing 3BET during the flag-to-flag state in which the bonus (BB1) dedicated to 2BET is carried over. It is an AT machine that realizes the AT function by switching between the notified state and the non-notified state.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
First, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225.

[Design layout table]
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 221 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol position "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

[Design code table]
Further, as shown in FIG. 221, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 221 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "replay A", "replay B", "bell", "watermelon A", and "watermelon B". , "Cherry" and "Blank", and 1 byte of data is assigned to each.

[Internal lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 222, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. When the 3BET bonus is not operating, the "3BET time, general" column is referred to, while the 3BET bonus is inside, the "3BET time, inside" column is referred to, and when the 3BET bonus is operating, "3BET time, BB". The column is referred to, the "2BET at the time, general" column is referred to while the 2BET bonus is not operating, and the "2BET at the time, inside" column is referred to during the 2BET bonus internal. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game progresses by playing the game of 3BET during the inside of the bonus dedicated to 2BET (state between flags), so basically, the internal lottery corresponding to the inside of 3BET. The table is referenced and no other internal lottery table is used.

In FIG. 222, when the combination indicated by "No. 1 (F_normal lip)" to "No. 45 (F_BB2)" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is described in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the same figure. Derivation of combinations of various symbols is allowed (winning is allowed). The contents of the symbol combinations described in the "corresponding symbol combinations" column are shown in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 223 and 224. Further, in FIG. 225, when each combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols actually winning among the combinations of symbols permitted to win a prize (correspondence between the internal winning combination and the display combination). ) Is shown.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The symbol combination table prescribes a combination of a plurality of symbols. In addition, in FIG. 223 and FIG. 224, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective line is the center line.

In FIGS. 223 and 224, the combination of the symbols corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" is the combination of the symbols related to the operation of the bonus, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to "RP01" to "RP18" is the operation of the replay. It is a combination of symbols related to. Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to "NM01" to "NM43" is a combination of symbols related to the payout of medals.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination (combination of symbols actually won), and the like in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 225 shows the correspondence in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the correspondence in other states is omitted.

In the figure, "normal rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_CL rip (RP01)", and is a general term for the symbols "replay (designs" replay A "and" replay B "" along the center line (CL). ) ”Is displayed side by side. The "reach eye lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_reach eye lip A1 (RP05)" to "S_reach eye lip B3 (RP15)". Further, the "cherry arrival reach eye" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_reach eye lip C1 (RP16)" to "S_reach eye lip C3 (RP18)".

Further, in the figure, "CL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_CL bell (NM09)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the center line (CL). Yes, "TL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_TL bell (NM10)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the top line (TL). "BL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" and "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)", and the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL). It is a combination of. Further, "XU" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_XU bell 1 (NM06)" and "C_XU bell 2 (NM07)", and the symbols "bells" are lined up along the cross-up line (XU). It is a combination of symbols to be displayed, and "XD" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_XD bell (NM08)", and the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the crossdown line (XD). "Small V" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_Small V Bell (NM11)", and the upper (left reel) middle (middle reel) upper (right reel) is small. It is a combination of symbols in which symbols "bells" are displayed side by side in a V-shape (small V).

Further, in the figure, "XU (BAR)" refers to "XU (BAR)" when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of the symbols of "XU" is displayed. Further, "BL (blue 7)" is "BL" when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of symbols of is displayed.
Therefore, in the game in which "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are determined as the winning combination, the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, the symbol "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL), and the symbol position "13" is displayed in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7", the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU).

Further, in the figure, "BL (BAR)" refers to "BL (BAR)" when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of the symbols of "BL" is displayed. Further, "XU (blue 7)" is "XU" when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of symbols of is displayed.
Therefore, in the game in which "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2" are determined as winning roles, the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, the symbol "bells" are displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU), and the symbol position "13" is displayed in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" of, the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL).

Further, in the figure, the "middle stage check" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_middle stage check (NM12)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "cherry" is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel. Further, "Kakuche" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_Kakuche 1 (NM16)" and "S_Kakuche 2 (NM17)", and the symbol "cherry" is displayed on the upper or lower row of the left reel. It is a combination of symbols to be made. Further, "off" is a combination of symbols in which none of the combinations specified in FIGS. 223 and 224 is displayed.

Further, in the figure, "watermelon" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_CL watermelon (NM01)" to "S_XD watermelon (NM03)", and can be any of a center line, a cross-up line, and a cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "watermelon (collective term for the symbols" watermelon A "and" watermelon B ")" are displayed side by side. Further, in the figure, "watermelon spill" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_watermelon F1" to "S_watermelon F3", and is a combination of symbols displayed when the watermelon is dropped. Further, "1 sheet (1/2)" or "1 sheet (1/4)" is inappropriate because the combination of "1 sheet" symbols is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. In some cases, it means "off".

[Game flow of the pachi-slot machine of the fifth embodiment]
Subsequently, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. 226 and 227 are transition flows of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an outline of the ball ejection state and the gaming state in a list. The ball ejection state and the score rank shown in FIGS. 226 to 228 are controlled by the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91).

As shown in FIG. 226, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control circuit 91, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control circuit 91. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the on state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is suppressed from notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 controls the ball ejection state by performing various processes, and the various processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a lottery process (lottery process) and a lottery process. It is divided into processing that does not depend on (other processing).

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. "Normal" is the initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and after the end of the advantageous section, all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared, and the state shifts to this "normal" state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and when the rare role is determined as the winning combination, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed. In this embodiment, the rare role means "F_cherry 1 (No. 16)" to "F_watermelon 2 (No. 19)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is a definite role in addition to the rare role, but in the present embodiment, the definite role is "F_reach eye lip A1 (No. 2)" to "F_ definite chelip 2 (No. 10)". ) ”“ F_middle cherry (No.15) ”.

If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery performed in the "normal" state, you will win the advantageous section. There are "Gase precursor win" and "Bonus win" in the advantageous section win, and in the case of "Bonus win", the next game transition lottery is executed at the time of bonus. There are "via precursor" and "direct bonus" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, and it becomes "bonus win" in the advantageous section transition lottery, and "via precursor" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus It becomes a precursory lottery. In addition, if the "bonus win" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and the "direct bonus" is won in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, the "direct hit win" is obtained. Further, when the fixed winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" state, the fixed winning combination is determined as the winning combination by the processing at the time of winning the fixed combination (without performing the advantageous section transition lottery).

In the case of "Gase precursor", the next game shifts to "precursor (precursor)", and in the case of "main precursor", the next game shifts to "precursor (precursor)". do. On the other hand, in the case of "direct hit winning", the game shifts to the "first bonus" as a ball-out state from the next game. In addition, in the case of "this sign win" and "direct hit win", a lottery for the normal bonus type is further performed, and the type of the "first bonus" is determined.

In this embodiment, there are a "first time bonus" and a "ream bonus" as the payout state, but these are games without the operation of the accessory (without changing the lottery coefficient for the internal winning combination). It is a so-called pseudo-bonus in which the player is in an advantageous state by being notified of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, if you win a rare role in the "normal" state, you have a chance of a "first bonus" that is a pseudo bonus, and if you win a fixed role in the "normal" state, you get a "first bonus" that is a pseudo bonus. Determine. At the time of winning the role of rare, there is a possibility of winning the "first bonus", but there is also the possibility of not winning, so via the "precursor" state, the "first bonus" in this "precursor" state We will produce a production to inform you of the success or failure of. On the other hand, when the winning combination is won, the winning of the "first bonus" is fixed, so the state immediately shifts to the "first bonus" state without going through the "precursor" state.

Subsequently, in the advantageous section, "Gase precursor", "Main precursor", "First time bonus", "CZ", "CZ middle precursor", and "Continuous bonus" can be executed as the main ball ejection state. In the advantageous section, a navigation (bell navigation) that can display the combination of symbols of the maximum number of payouts is generated at the time of winning the push order small combination (in this embodiment, "F_batting order 1 bell A1" to "F_batting order 6 bell B2"). It is possible, and the main control circuit 91 does not perform bell navigation in the "gase precursor", "main precursor", "CZ", and "CZ middle precursor" in the advantageous section, and performs bell navigation in the "first bonus" and "ream bonus". .. The main control circuit 91 may also perform bell navigation in "CZ" and "CZ middle precursor". The above-mentioned limiter is provided in the advantageous section, and when the limiter reaches, for example, 1500G after the advantageous section is started, the limit processing by the game number limiter is executed, and the difference number after the advantageous section is started is, for example, 2400. When it reaches, the limit processing by the number limiter is executed. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted to.

There is a possibility that the "precursor" and "precursor" will shift when the rare role is determined as the winning role in "normal". "Gase precursor" and "main precursor" are the production sections of one game, and the production that informs whether or not the "first bonus" is won is executed according to the winning of the rare role. The "Gase Omen" is a production section (precursor) when the "first bonus" is not won, and a production (defeat, etc.) is executed to inform that the "first bonus" is not won. On the contrary, the "main sign" is a production section (precursor) when the "first bonus" is won, and a production (winning, etc.) that informs that the "first bonus" is won is executed. .. When one game is played in the "precursor", the main control circuit 91 ends the advantageous section and shifts to the "normal" state. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section. Further, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the state of the "first bonus" when the game is played once in the "main sign".

In the present embodiment, the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are in the state of one game, but the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are not limited to one game, and the predetermined number of games. It may be between. In this case, the main control circuit 91 shifts from the "gase precursor" or the "main precursor" to another ball ejection state when the game is played a predetermined number of times, and the sub control circuit 101 shifts to another ball ejection state, and the sub control circuit 101 plays the game a predetermined number of times. , Perform a production to inform you that you have won the "first bonus".

Subsequently, the "first-time bonus" shifts to the case where the "precursor" is completed, or when the "normal" is "direct hit win". There are two types of "first-time bonus": REG (first-time REG) and BIG (first-time BIG). It will be sorted according to the result. The expected value of the medal obtained by the player in the "first bonus" differs between REG and BIG, and the expected value of the medal obtained by the player is higher in BIG than in REG. Further, in the case of BIG, it always shifts to the "CZ" state after that, whereas in the case of REG, it basically returns to the "normal" state without shifting to the "CZ". It ends up.

At the start of the "first bonus", the reel effect is performed by the main control circuit 91, and a predetermined combination of symbols is automatically displayed regardless of the player's stop operation. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of the "first REG", and after that, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "BAR" are lined up in a straight line (BAR-). BAR-BAR) is displayed, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped. Further, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of the "first BIG", and then the symbol "blue 7" is arranged in a straight line (blue 7-blue). The reels 3L, 3C, 3R are automatically stopped so that 7-blue 7) is displayed.

The "first REG" is a pseudo-bonus that continues for 12 games, and a promotion lottery is executed. When 12 games have passed without winning the promotion lottery, the "first REG" ends and the state shifts to the "normal" state. At this time, the advantageous section also ends with the end of the "first REG", and the locked state occurs at the end of the advantageous section as described above. In addition, if the promotion lottery is won, the "ream bonus" will start immediately after 12 games have passed from the start and the "first REG" has ended (0 game ream).

The "first BIG" is a pseudo-bonus that includes a "small role game" and a "JAC game" and ends when a total of 25 "small role games" are executed. The "small role game" is the initial state when the "first BIG" is started, and continues for 25 games. In the "small role game", JAC-IN processing is performed when the replay role is won, and the game shifts from the "small role game" to the "JAC game". The replay combination that triggers the JAC-IN process is "F_normal lip (No. 1)" to "F_confirmed chelip 2 (No. 10)". That is, all of the replay roles of the present embodiment are replay roles that trigger the JAC-IN process. The "JAC game" shifts when the JAC-IN process is performed in the "small role game" and continues for four games.

When four games are played in the "JAC game", the game shifts to the "small role game" again, and each time the replay role is won in the "small role game", the game shifts to the "JAC game" by JAC-IN processing. The "first BIG" ends when the total number of games played in the "small role game" reaches 25, and the game shifts to the "CZ" or "ream bonus" state. The end condition of the "first BIG" is the number of games played in the "small role game" and does not include the number of games played in the "JAC game". In addition, since the number of games played in the "JAC game" is not included in the number of games played in the "small role game", if a large number of games can be transferred to the "JAC game", the number of games in the "first BIG" will be increased by that amount. Therefore, many medals can be expected to be paid out.

The "first BIG" has a game property of earning points and aiming for a high rank, and points are added and lottery is performed in each game of the "small role game" and the "JAC game". In the "small role game" and the "JAC game", the "JAC game" is set so that more points can be obtained. Therefore, if a large number of "JAC games" can be transferred, it will be advantageous not only for paying out medals but also for earning points.

At the end of the "first BIG" in which the total number of games played in the "small role game" has reached 25, the score rank distribution process is executed. In this score rank distribution process, the result of the "first BIG" is ranked based on the points earned during the "first BIG" (the sum of the points earned in the "small role game" and the points earned in the "JAC game"). Attach. The score rank is information that defines the winning expectation of the "ream bonus" in the "CZ" after the end of the "first BIG", and is "rank E", "rank D", "rank C", and "rank B" in order from the lowest rank. "Rank A" and "Rank S" are provided.

If the score rank is "Rank S", the "ream bonus" starts immediately after the "first BIG" ends without going through the "CZ" (0 game ream). In this case, the main control circuit 91 executes the bonus type lottery at the time of S rank, and determines the type of the "ream bonus" in which 0 games are continuous.

Subsequently, "CZ" shifts when the "first BIG" or "ream bonus" ends. "CZ" and "normal" are the same in that the game is played aiming at a pseudo bonus, but "CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) in which it is easier to win a pseudo bonus than "normal", 32. Continue between games. In addition, "normal" plays a game aiming at a "first bonus" consisting of REG or BIG, and "CZ" plays a game aiming at a "ream bonus" consisting only of BIG.

In "CZ", a bonus lottery during CZ is executed. This CZ medium bonus lottery corresponds to the advantageous section transition lottery in "normal", but the advantageous section transition lottery in "normal" is not executed only at the time of winning the rare role, but the CZ medium bonus lottery in "CZ" is It is also executed when a role other than a rare role (all roles) is won. The winning of the bonus lottery during CZ includes "Gase precursor winning" and "Bonus winning", and in the case of "Bonus winning", the next game transition lottery is further executed at the time of bonus. There are "via precursor" and "direct bonus" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, and it becomes "bonus win" in the bonus lottery during CZ, and when winning "via precursor" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, "book" It becomes a precursory lottery. In addition, if the bonus lottery during CZ is a "bonus win" and the next game transition lottery at the time of the bonus is a "direct bonus", the "direct hit win" is obtained.

In the case of "Gase precursor", the game shifts to "CZ medium precursor (Gase precursor)" from the next game, and in the case of "Main precursor", "CZ medium precursor (this precursor)" is released from the next game. ) ”. On the other hand, in the case of "direct hit winning", the game shifts to "ream bonus" as a ball ejection state from the next game. Further, in the case of "this sign win" and "direct hit win", a lottery for the bonus type at the time of CZ is further performed, and the type of "ream bonus" is determined.

"CZ Nakamoto precursor" shifts to the case of "Gase precursor win", and "CZ Nakamoto precursor" shifts to the case of "this precursor win". "CZ Nakagase Omen" and "CZ Nakamoto Omen" are production sections of one game, and an effect of notifying whether or not a "ream bonus" is won is executed according to the winning combination. The "CZ Nakagase Omen" is a production section (precursor) when the "ream bonus" is not won, and the production (defeat, etc.) to inform that the "ream bonus" is not won is executed. On the contrary, "CZ Nakamoto Omen" is a production section (precursor) when the "ream bonus" is won, and the production (winning etc.) that informs that the "ream bonus" is won is executed. Will be done.

When one game is played in "CZ Nakamoto Omen", the ball ejection state shifts to the "CZ" state, and when one game is played in "CZ Nakamoto Omen", the "ream bonus" The ball ejection state is transferred to the state. The "CZ" ends when a total of 32 games are played, but the number of games in the "CZ middle precursor" is not included in the number of games in the "CZ". In the "CZ", 32 games are played, and if the bonus lottery during the CZ is not won in the game, the "CZ" ends and the payout state is shifted to the "normal" state. Since the advantageous section also ends with the end of the "CZ", the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the "CZ (advantageous section)".

Subsequently, the "ream bonus" shifts to the case where the "CZ Nakamoto precursor" is completed. There are SBIG (single BIG) and WBIG (double BIG) in the "ream bonus", and they are sorted according to the lottery result of the CZ time bonus type lottery performed at the time of winning the "ream bonus". The expected value of the points to be acquired in the "ream bonus" is different between SBIG and WBIG, and the expected value of the points to be acquired by WBIG is higher than that of SBIG. The other playability of SBIG and WBIG is the same.

At the start of the "ream bonus", the reel effect is performed by the main control circuit 91, and a predetermined combination of symbols is automatically displayed regardless of the player's stop operation. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of SBIG, and after that, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "red 7" are single-aligned (for example, only the center line). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped so that red 7-red 7-red 7) is displayed along the line. Further, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of WBIG, and after that, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "red 7" are double-aligned (for example, a center line and a cross-up line). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped so that red 7-red 7-red 7) is displayed along the line.

The "ream bonus" and the "first BIG" have the same playability, and the "ream bonus" includes the "small role game" and the "JAC game", and a total of 25 "small role games" are executed. It is a pseudo bonus that ends with. The "small role game" and the "JAC game" are as described in the above-mentioned "first bonus", and points are added and lottery is performed in each game of the "small role game" and the "JAC game".

The "ream bonus" ends when the total number of games played in the "small role game" reaches 25, and at the end of the "ream bonus", the score rank distribution process is executed and the "ream bonus" is performed. Rank the results of the "ream bonus" based on the points earned. When the scoring rank is "Rank S", the "ream bonus" starts immediately after the "ream bonus" ends without going through the "CZ" (0 game ream). In this case, the main control circuit 91 executes the bonus type lottery at the time of S rank, and determines the type of the "ream bonus" in which 0 games are continuous.

If the score rank is other than "Rank S", the ball ejection state is shifted to the "CZ" state at the end of the "ream bonus", and then, in "CZ", the expected value according to the privilege rank is " A game aiming at "ream bonus" is performed. As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game property in which the CZ and the pseudo-bonus (first-time bonus and continuous bonus) loop, and in particular, the Pachi-slot machine 1 is in the CZ according to the result (score rank) during the pseudo-bonus. It has a playability that changes the bonus expectation.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such specifications, the deterministic combination is effective in the ball ejection state "normal", "gase precursor", "CZ", and "CZ middle Gase precursor". Be controlled. Specifically, when the definite combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" and "CZ" states, the main control circuit 91 becomes a "direct hit winning combination" and appears in the "first time bonus" and "continuous bonus" states. Transition the ball state. In addition, when the definite combination is determined as the winning combination in the state of "precursor" and "precursor in CZ", the main control circuit 91 rewrites the type of the precursor to this precursor, and then the "first bonus" and "ream". The payout state is transferred to the "bonus" state.

On the other hand, in the ball ejection state "main sign", "first BIG", "CZ Nakamoto sign", and "ream bonus", the fixed combination is controlled to be invalid. When the fixed combination is controlled to be invalid, the main control circuit 91 sets the push order in which the combination of symbols (reach eye lip, reach eye with cherry, middle stage check) corresponding to the fixed combination is not displayed. Notify. In addition, in the payout state "first REG", only the first fixed combination in the same "first REG" is controlled to be valid, and the second and subsequent fixed combinations in the same "first REG" are invalidated. Is controlled by.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination and lottery type]
Subsequently, FIG. 229 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the lottery type. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery based on the internal winning combination, but if the lottery result is provided for each combination, the amount of data required for one lottery is enormous. Become. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of roles are first grouped into a ball ejection flag, a lottery type is determined based on the ball ejection flag, and various lottery is performed based on the determined lottery type. For example, "F_Batting order 6 bell B2" is grouped into the ball ejection flag "Batting order bell B (No. 19)", and based on this batting order flag "Batting order bell B", the lottery type A is No. 4 "Batting order bell B" was decided, and No. 1 was selected as the lottery type B. The "batting order bell" of 3 is decided. Then, these lottery types A and B are referred to, and various lottery is performed.

[Navigation type in each state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 230, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the navigation type set by the main control circuit 91 at the time of winning the push order combination will be described. In the figure, the navigation type "1" is a navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 1 (left middle right), and the navigation type "2" is a navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 2 (left and right middle). The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "3" is the navigation type to notify the batting order 3 (middle left and right) to the player, and the navigation type "4" is the batting order 4 (middle right left) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "5" is the navigation type to notify the batting order 5 (right, middle, left) to the player, and the navigation type "6" is the batting order 6 (right, middle, left) to the player. This is the type of navigation to be notified. Further, the navigation type "lottery" means that the navigation types "1" to "6" are selected by lottery. Further, in the figure, "state 1" means the case where the fixed combination is "valid" and the push order instruction is "present", and "state 2" means the case where the fixed combination is "invalid" and the push order instruction is "present". To say.

[Various data tables used to control the ball ejection state]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in controlling the ball ejection state will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

[Normal_advantageous section transition lottery table]
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 231. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table referred to when the advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each unit game in the "normal" state (normal section). The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery for each lottery type A. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section only when a rare role (“F_cherry 1”, “F_cherry 2”, “F_watermelon 1”, “F_watermelon 2”) is won. And do not perform the lottery when winning other roles.

When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "Gase precursor" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "gase precursor". Further, when the "bonus" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 subsequently refers to the normal_bonus next game transition lottery table shown in FIG. 232 to determine the payout state of the transition destination. At the same time, the type of the "first bonus" is determined with reference to the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table shown in FIG. 233.

[Normal_bonus next game transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 232, the next game transition lottery table at the time of normal_bonus will be described. At the time of normal_bonus, the next game transition lottery table will be a fixed role ("F_reach eye lip A1 (No. 2)" to "F_confirmed chelip" when the "bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery or in the "normal" state. 2 (No. 10) ”and“ F_middle-stage cherry (No. 15) ”) are referred to when winning, and are used when determining the payout state of the transfer destination according to the internal winning combination (lottery type B). .. Normal_at the time of bonus The next game transition lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the payout state of the next game for each lottery type B.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 draws a lottery regarding the payout state of the next game only when the rare combination or the fixed combination is won, and does not perform the lottery when the other combination is won. When the lottery result is determined to be "via precursor", the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal" to "main precursor", and the lottery result is determined to be "direct bonus". If so, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "normal" to "first bonus".

[Normal_normal time bonus type lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 233, the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table will be described. The normal_normal time bonus type lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery or when the fixed winning combination is won in the "normal" state, and according to the internal winning combination (lottery type A). Used when determining the type of "first bonus". The normal_normal time bonus type lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "first bonus" for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 determines the type of "first bonus" as "REG" when "REG" is determined as the lottery result, and "BIG" as the lottery result, "first time". The type of "bonus" is determined as "BIG".

[CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table]
Subsequently, the bonus lottery table in CZ_CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 234. The CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to the "ream bonus" based on the internal winning combination (lottery type A) for each unit game in the "CZ" state. The CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to the "ream bonus" for each score rank and lottery type A in the "first bonus" (or the immediately preceding "ream bonus"). ..

When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "CZ" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "Gase precursor" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ" to "CZ middle Gase precursor". Further, when the "bonus" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 subsequently determines the payout state of the transfer destination by referring to the CZ_bonus next game transition lottery table shown in FIG. 235. At the same time, the type of the "ream bonus" is determined with reference to the CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table shown in FIG. 236.

[CZ_bonus time next game transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 235, the next game transition lottery table at the time of CZ_bonus will be described. At the time of CZ_bonus The next game transition lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the transition lottery to the "ream bonus", and the payout state of the transition destination is determined according to the internal winning combination (lottery type B). Used when. At the time of CZ_bonus, the next game transition lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the payout state of the next game for each lottery type B. When the lottery result is determined to be "via precursor", the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ" to "CZ Nakamoto precursor", and the lottery result is "direct bonus". If it is decided, the payout state of the next game is changed from "CZ" to "ream bonus".

[CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table]
Subsequently, the CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 236. The CZ_CZ bonus type lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the transition lottery to the "ream bonus", and when determining the type of the "ream bonus" according to the internal winning combination (lottery type A). Used. The CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "ream bonus" for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 determines the type of the "ream bonus" as "SBIG" when "SBIG" is determined as the lottery result, and when "WBIG" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 determines "ream". The type of "bonus" is determined as "WBIG".

As shown in FIGS. 231 to 236, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various lottery processes in the "normal" state and various lottery processes in the "CZ" state correspond to each other. That is, the normal_bonus next game transition lottery table in FIG. 231 corresponds to the CZ_CZ middle bonus lottery table in FIG. 234, and the normal_bonus next game transition lottery table in FIG. It corresponds to the next game transition lottery table, and the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table in FIG. 233 corresponds to the CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table in FIG. 236. However, as can be seen by comparing FIG. 231 and FIG. 234, in the "CZ" state, the winning expectation of the pseudo bonus (first-time bonus or consecutive bonus) is higher than in the "normal" state, and in particular, the "normal" state. In the state of "", the pseudo bonus can be won only in the rare role or higher, while in the state of "CZ", there is a possibility that the pseudo bonus can be won even in the replay or the bell.

[Flow of games in BIG and CZ]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in BIG and CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 237. First, the flow of the game during BIG will be described with reference to FIG. 237 (A). As described above, in the present embodiment, the BIG (pseudo-bonus) includes the first BIG of the first bonus and the SBIG and WBIG of the consecutive bonuses, but the playability is the same in any of the BIGs.

As shown in FIG. 237 (A), the BIG is composed of a small role game and a JAC game, and when the JAC-IN process is performed in the small role game, the game shifts to the JAC game, and four games elapse in the JAC game. , Move to a small role game. In both the small role game and the JAC game, points are earned for each unit game based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B). However, the JAC game has a higher expectation of earning points than the small role game, and if more JAC games can be played, the earned points in the BIG will increase.

At the end of the BIG, the score rank is set according to the total points earned during the BIG. FIG. 237 (B) is a table showing the correspondence between the total value of the acquired points and the score rank. The main control circuit 91 sets the score rank "Rank E" when the total value of the points acquired during the BIG is "0 to 49 points", and sets the score rank "Rank E" when the total value is "50 to 99 points". Set the score rank "Rank D", set the score rank "Rank C" if it is "100 to 199 points", and set the score rank "Rank B" if it is "200 to 299 points". If it is "300 to 499 points", the score rank "Rank A" is set, and if it is "500 points or more", the score rank "Rank S" is set.

The score rank is information that defines the winning expectation of the consecutive bonus in the CZ after the end of BIG, and as shown in FIG. 237 (C), the winning expectation of the consecutive bonus is the lowest in "Rank E", followed by Then, the score increases in the order of "Rank D", "Rank C", "Rank B", and "Rank A". Further, when the score rank is "Rank S", the consecutive bonus is started immediately after the end of BIG without going through the CZ (0 game consecutive).

Subsequently, FIG. 237 (D) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the CZ. When points are earned in the initial bonus or consecutive bonus, the score rank is set based on the points earned. During the CZ, a lottery to shift to the consecutive bonus is performed according to the score rank, and if the lottery is won, the lottery is transferred to the consecutive bonus, and the CZ and the consecutive bonus loop. On the other hand, if the CZ ends without winning the lottery for transition to the consecutive bonus, the loop between the CZ and the consecutive bonus ends, and the process shifts to normal.

[BIG_point addition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 238, the BIG_point addition lottery table will be described. The BIG_point addition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a point addition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B) for each unit game in the state of "first BIG" or "ream bonus". In the "small role game" of the "first BIG", the "small role game, first time" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of the "first BIG", the "JAC game, first time" column is referred to. Further, in the "small role game" of the "ream bonus (SBIG)", the "small role game, SBIG" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of the "ream bonus (SBIG)", the "JAC game, SBIG" column. Is referred to, in the "small role game" of "ream bonus (WBIG)", the "small role game, WBIG" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of "ream bonus (WBIG)", "JAC game, WBIG". Refer to the column.

The BIG_point addition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result regarding the point addition lottery for each type of BIG, the state in BIG, and the lottery type B. The main control circuit 91 counts the total value of the acquired points in the BIG by adding the points corresponding to the lottery result to a predetermined counter that counts the acquired points in the BIG.

As shown in the figure, in the "small role game" and the "JAC game", the "JAC game" has a larger number of points to be added, and the WBIG has a larger number of points to be added than the SBIG. In this embodiment, the number of points to be added is different between SBIG and WBIG only during the "small role game", and the number of points to be added is the same during the "JAC game", but the number is limited to this. Instead, the number of points added by WBIG may be larger than that of SBIG even during the "JAC game".

[Bonus type lottery table when reaching BIG_S rank]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 239, the BIG_S rank arrival bonus type lottery table will be described. The BIG_S rank arrival bonus type lottery table is referred to when the "S rank" is set according to the points acquired during the BIG, and is used when determining the type of the "ream bonus" for 0 games in a row. The BIG_S rank arrival bonus type lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "ream bonus". The main control circuit 91 determines the type of the "ream bonus" as "SBIG" when "SBIG" is determined as the lottery result, and when "WBIG" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 determines "ream". The type of "bonus" is determined as "WBIG".

[REG_promotion lottery table]
Subsequently, the REG_promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 240. The REG_promotion lottery table is a table referred to when a promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type A) for each unit game in the "first REG" state. The REG_promotion lottery table defines the lottery value information for the promotion lottery for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 does not perform any processing when "non-winning" is determined as a lottery result, and when "winning" is determined as a lottery result, the "first REG" is performed. After the end, the "ream bonus" is started (0 game ream). The main control circuit 91 does not perform the promotion lottery during the "first REG" after winning the promotion lottery once, and at the end of the "first REG" winning the promotion lottery, BIG_S shown in FIG. 239. Bonus type when reaching rank Refer to the lottery table to determine the type of "ream bonus" for 0 games.

[Summary of playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has been described above, but the playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

[Points earned during BIG and consecutive villas]
As described above in FIG. 237, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during BIG (pseudo-bonus (AT)), points are acquired for each unit game based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B), and the BIG At the end, the score rank is distributed according to the total value obtained by totaling the points acquired during BIG. Then, in the CZ after the end of BIG, a lottery for shifting to BIG (ream bonus) is performed according to this score rank, and if the lottery is won, the lottery is shifted to BIG and points are acquired again. In this way, the degree of expectation of returning to BIG changes according to the number of points in BIG, so for the player, it is not only possible to switch from CZ to BIG, but many points can be earned. Since the game will be concentrated on the game during BIG, the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the BIG is composed of a small role game and a JAC game, and in the JAC game, more points can be obtained than in the small role game. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether the game is a small role game or a JAC game, the playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved. The JAC game shifts to the small role game by winning the replay role (JAC-IN processing), and shifts to the small role game when four games are played in the JAC game. Further, the BIG ends when a total of 25 games are played in the small role game, but the number of games played in the JAC game is not included in the number of games played in the small role game. Therefore, if you can move to the JAC game, BIG will not end during the JAC game, and you can get a lot of points during the JAC game, so the more times you move to the JAC game, the more points you can get. The score rank will also be higher, and as a result, you can expect a BIG (renal bonus) consecutive villa.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has SBIG and WBIG as the types of continuous bonuses, and WBIG can acquire more points than SBIG. From the player's point of view, the expected value of points to be earned differs depending on the type of consecutive bonus, and as a result, the expected degree of BIG (renal bonus) consecutive villas differs, so the playability becomes more diversified and the hobby of the game is enjoyed. Is improved. It should be noted that the distribution between SBIG and WBIG is performed when the consecutive bonus is won in CZ.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a CZ state (predetermined game state) after the end of BIG and a BIG (specific game state) for notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player, and the BIG is small. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a combination game (first section) and a JAC game (second section), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a predetermined gaming state and a specific gaming state having the first section and the second section. Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has SBIG and WBIG as BIG (ream bonus), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can shift to the JAC game when the replay role is won in the small role game, and can shift to the small role game when four games are played in the JAC game. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 can be transferred to the small role game. The circuit 91 functions as a transition control means during a specific game. Further, since the main control circuit 91 ends the BIG when the number of games played in the small winning combination game reaches 25, the main control circuit 91 functions as the end control means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 gives points based on the internal winning combination for each unit game during BIG, and at the end of BIG, the score rank is determined according to the total value of the points given during BIG. Since it is possible, the main control circuit 91 functions as a numerical value assigning means, a counting means, and a mode determining means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to shift to the BIG (ream bonus) according to the score rank during the CZ, and if it is determined to shift, the BIG can be started. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 is specified. It functions as a game start determination means and a start control means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can determine the type of the continuous bonus at the start of the continuous bonus, the main control circuit 91 functions as a type determining means.

[Production control at the end of the advantageous section]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 241, the effect control using the locked state accompanying the end of the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section. Here, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), in the present embodiment, in the "normal" state (normal section), if a rare role is won, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed, and it is advantageous to win this transition lottery. It shifts to the state of "precursor (main precursor or gasse precursor)" which is a section. As shown in the figure, when the type of precursor is "Gase precursor", the advantageous section ends with the end of the precursor and returns to the normal section. On the other hand, when the type of precursor is "main precursor", when the precursor ends, it shifts to the pseudo bonus (AT), and then when the pseudo bonus and the consecutive villa with CZ ends, the advantageous section also ends, and it is normal. Return to the section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end of the advantageous section is performed when the advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous state for the player (pseudo-bonus) and when the advantageous state for the player ends. Will be.

Subsequently, FIGS. (B) and (a) show an example of the production in the “precursor”. In the present embodiment, the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are the production sections of one game, and the production that informs whether or not the "first bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery performed in the "normal" state. Is executed. As such an effect, for example, the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect in which the main character and the enemy confront each other on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). If the "first bonus" is not won (precursor), the sub-control circuit 101 performs an effect that the main character is defeated in this confrontation production, and if the "first bonus" is won (precursor), the sub-control The circuit 101 performs an effect in which the main character wins in this confrontation effect.

In the case of "Gase precursor", the advantageous section also ends, so a locked state occurs at the end of "Gase precursor". Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 executes the confrontation effect by using the game during the “precursor” and the subsequent locked state. As a result, even if the effect ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game is 3 OFF (when the third stop operation is off-edge), the effect is canceled by providing a period during which the game is not allowed to be played due to the locked state. Can be prevented, and the player can be controlled so as not to overlook the result of the production.

Further, FIGS. (B) and (b) show an example of the effect of the pseudo bonus and the CZ at the end of the consecutive villa. In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section also ends with the end of the consecutive villas, a locked state occurs at the end of the consecutive villas. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 uses the locked state at the end of the consecutive villa to execute an effect regarding the result of the game by the consecutive villa with the pseudo bonus and the CZ. For example, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the number of consecutive villas of BIG and the number of acquired villas on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100), thereby executing the effect of the pseudo bonus and the game result regarding the consecutive villas with the CZ. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the locked state at the end of the advantageous section, the effect of notifying the success or failure of the transition to the "first bonus" and the game result regarding the pseudo-bonus and the consecutive villa with the CZ are reported. It is possible to properly perform the effect of making it.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section corresponding to the "normal" state and an advantageous section corresponding to the "precursor" or "first-time bonus" state, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a predetermined gaming state and a predetermined gaming state. It has a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state. Since the "gase precursor" of the advantageous section is composed of only the production section in which the game is performed a predetermined number of times, the "gase precursor" of the advantageous section corresponds to the first specific gaming state. In addition, in the case of "main sign", special sections such as "first bonus", "CZ", and "ream bonus" follow after the sign, so "main sign" and subsequent "first bonus" are the second. Corresponds to a specific gaming state.

Further, in the main control circuit 91, when the rare combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" state, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed to determine the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 can determine the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. Functions as a type determination means. Further, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the "gase precursor" when the "gase precursor" is determined as the transition destination, and ends the advantageous section and shifts to the "normal" when the "gase precursor" ends. The circuit 91 functions as a first game state control means. Further, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the "first bonus" or the like via the "main precursor" when the "main precursor" is determined as the migration destination, and ends the advantageous section when the "CZ" ends due to the CZ failure. Then, in order to shift to "normal", the main control circuit 91 functions as a second gaming state control means.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 uses the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) during the "precursor" to indicate whether or not the "first bonus" has been won, the sub-control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display are used. It functions as a production execution means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 generates a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 91 functions as a lock control means. The main control circuit 91 may generate a locked state only at the end of the advantageous section accompanying the end of the "precursor", or generate a locked state only at the end of the advantageous section accompanying the end of the "CZ". It may be possible to generate a locked state at the end of the advantageous section at all times. It should be noted that the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect of notifying whether or not the "first bonus" has been won by using the game and the locked state during the "gase precursor" when the lock state occurs due to the end of the "gase precursor". At the end of the villa, a pseudo-bonus and a production that reports the game result of the villa with the CZ will be executed.

[Reel control when winning a bell]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243, the reel control at the time of winning the bell in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the center line is used as the effective line. Further, in the following, the area in which one symbol of each reel is displayed in the display window 4 is referred to as a unit symbol display area. That is, the display window 4 has an upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display area for displaying the three symbols on the left reel 3L, an upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display area for displaying the three symbols on the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It has an upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display area for displaying the three symbols of the above, and nine unit symbol display areas of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" and the symbol "watermelon B" are provided as the symbols corresponding to the watermelon, but these symbols are substantially the same symbol from the player's point of view, and both mean watermelon. It is a design to do. Therefore, in the playability described below, the symbol "watermelon A" and the symbol "watermelon B" can be treated as the same symbol. Of course, even with a pachi-slot machine having only one symbol "watermelon" as a symbol corresponding to watermelon, the playability described below can be realized. This point is the same for the symbols corresponding to the replay (symbol "replay A", symbol "replay B"). Further, in the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus that does not involve the operation of the accessory is used, but the playability described below can also be applied to a pachi-slot machine that uses a real bonus that involves the operation of the accessory. ..

[Stop type when pinching]
First, with reference to FIG. 242 (A), the stop type of the reel at the time of pinching (middle left and right) until the second stop will be described. In FIG. 242 (A), when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper unit symbol display area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4 (aiming at the left BAR). Shows the stop form of.

As shown in the figure, when the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is stopped in the upper unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L, the symbol position "17" is displayed in the middle unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L. The symbol "watermelon A" is stopped, and the symbol "bell" at the symbol position "16" is stopped in the unit symbol display area on the lower stage of the left reel 3L. When the symbol "bell" is displayed in the unit symbol display area at the bottom of the left reel 3L, the symbol "bell" will be on one of the five straight lines from the center line to the cross-down line due to the winning of the bell. In order to be displayed, the symbol "bell" needs to be stopped in the upper unit symbol display area or the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 221 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" is always arranged one above the symbol "bell" on the right reel 3R. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (a), when the symbol "bell" stops in the unit symbol display area at the lower stage of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "bell" is along the bottom line. Along with the tempai, the design "Watermelon A" is also tempted along the center line, and the design "Bell" and the design "Watermelon A" are double tempaied. On the other hand, when the symbol "bell" stops in the unit symbol display area on the upper part of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "bell" is tempted along the cross-up line as shown in the figure (b). (Single tempai).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 is determined to be "off" as an internal winning combination, the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are doubled at the time of pinching to aim at the left BAR. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the tempai is not displayed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "bell (F_batting order 2 bell B1, F_batting order 2 bell B2)", "watermelon (F_watermelon 1, F_watermelon 2)" and "reach eye lip (F_)" as internal winning combinations. Reach eye lip A1, F_reach eye lip A2, F_reach eye lip A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C) The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "Watermelon A" can be displayed, and in the case of "off", the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed. Control the stop of the reel so that it is not displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), when the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are double tempered, and when "bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same figure. As shown in (a), when the design "bell" is displayed side by side along the bottom line, "bell (S_BL bell 1)" wins, and "watermelon" is decided as the internal winning role. , As shown in the figure (b), the design "watermelon A" is displayed side by side along the center line, and the "watermelon (S_CL watermelon)" wins a prize. there is a possibility). In addition, when the "reach-eye lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the so-called small winning combination reach-eye is displayed (the reach-eye lip wins) as shown in the figure (c). ..

Here, if "watermelon" is determined as the internal winning role, a lottery to shift to the advantageous section (first bonus lottery) accompanying the winning of the rare role is performed, and the "reach eye" is performed as the internal winning role. If "Rip" is decided, the first bonus will be fixed with the winning of the fixed role. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is "off", the stop type of the double tempai of the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" is not displayed, so from the player's point of view, the symbol "bell". When the stop form of the double tempai with the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed, you can expect to win the bonus (first bonus or consecutive bonus). In addition, if both the double-tempaid symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" are out of alignment, the reach is displayed and the bonus is confirmed. Therefore, the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" are displayed. It can be said that the stop form of the double tempai is a stop form that gives the player a chance to get a bonus.

On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 can display the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" at the time of pinching aiming at the left BAR when "off" is determined as the internal winning combination. I do. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "off", "bell (F_batting order 2 bell A1, F_batting order 2 bell A2)" and "reach-eye lip (F_reach-eye lip A1, F_reach-eye lip)" as internal winning combinations. When "A2, F_reach eye lip A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C)" is decided, the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" can be displayed at the time of pinching aiming at the left BAR. The reel stop control is performed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), when the symbol "bell" is single tempai, and when "bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, as shown in FIG. , If the design "Bell" is displayed side by side along the cross-up line, "Bell (S_XU Bell 1)" wins, and "Reach Eye Lip" is decided as the internal winning role, the same figure ( As shown in b), if the reach-eye lip (S_reach-eye lip A4) wins a prize and "out of place" is determined as the internal winning combination, as shown in the figure (c), the out of place appears. The eyes are displayed.

In this way, the stop type of the single tempai of the design "Bell" can be displayed even when the internal winning combination is "off", so from the player's point of view, the stop type of the single tempai of the design "Bell" was displayed. You can't expect much from winning the bonus alone. In addition, even if the double-tempai symbol "bell" comes off, the bonus is not fixed, so the single tempai stop form of the symbol "bell" is a normal stop form for the player. It can be said that.

Such reel control is performed when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper unit symbol display area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4 (aiming at the left blue 7). Is the same. That is, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), when the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" is stopped in the upper unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L, the unit symbol display area in the middle of the left reel 3L is displayed. The symbol "replay A" at the symbol position "12" is stopped, and the symbol "bell" at the symbol position "11" is stopped in the unit symbol display area at the lower stage of the left reel 3L. When the symbol "bell" is displayed in the unit symbol display area at the bottom of the left reel 3L, the symbol "bell" will be on one of the five straight lines from the center line to the cross-down line due to the winning of the bell. In order to be displayed, the symbol "bell" needs to be stopped in the upper unit symbol display area or the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 221 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol "Replay A" is always arranged one below the symbol "bell" on the right reel 3R. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 242 (D) (a), when the symbol "bell" stops in the unit symbol display area on the upper stage of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "bell" becomes a cross-up line. Along with tempting along, the symbol "Replay A" is also tempted along the center line, and the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Replay A" are double tempted. On the other hand, when the symbol "bell" stops in the unit symbol display area at the bottom of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "bell" is tempted along the bottom line as shown in the figure (b). (Single tempai).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 is determined to be "off" as an internal winning combination, the symbol "bell" and the symbol "replay A" are used when the left blue 7 is pinched. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai is not displayed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "bell (F_batting order 2 bell B1, F_batting order 2 bell B2)", "replay (F_normal lip)", and "reach eye lip (F_reach eye lip A1)" as internal winning combinations. , F_reach eye lip A2, F_reach eye lip A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C) ", when the left blue 7 is pinched, the symbol" bell "and the symbol" The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai with "Replay A" can be displayed, and in the case of "off", the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "bell" and the symbol "Replay A" is not displayed. The reel stop control is performed.

On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 can display the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" when the left blue 7 is pinched when "off" is determined as the internal winning combination. Take control. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "off", "bell (F_batting order 2 bell A1, F_batting order 2 bell A2)" and "reach-eye lip (F_reach-eye lip A1, F_reach-eye lip)" as internal winning combinations. When "A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C)" is determined, the reel stop control can be displayed so that the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" can be displayed at the time of pinching aiming at the left BAR. conduct.

In this way, even when aiming for the left blue 7, the internal winning role is not "off" at the time of double tempai, so the stop form of the double tempai with the symbol "bell" and the symbol "replay A" is a bonus for the player. It can be said that the stop type of the single tempai of the design "Bell" is a normal stop type for the player.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 243 (E), in the present embodiment, the double tempai stop type is a stop type with a high expectation of a bonus, and the single tempai stop type is a stop type with a low expectation of a bonus. Is. In this way, the stop type of the double tempai is a preferable stop type for the player, but it is always the double tempai at the time of winning the bell that wins with a higher probability than the rare role (watermelon) and the fixed role (reach eye lip). If the stop type is displayed, the bell will be won in many cases, so the expectation of the bonus will be low and the game will be monotonous. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tempai type of the symbol "bell" at the time of winning the bell is distributed between the single tempai and the double tempai. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the stop type of the double tempai is displayed at the time of winning the bell with a high probability of winning, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the bonus at the time of displaying the double tempai.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (F), in the present embodiment, at the time of winning "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2", both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim are the symbols. The reel stop control is performed so that the "bell" is single tempered. On the other hand, at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" or the symbol "Replay A" are used for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim. Controls the reel stop so that it double-tempers.

Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 222, the lottery values of "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are "3056", and "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell". The lottery value of "B2" is "697". Therefore, in many cases when the bell is won, the reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the single tempai is displayed, and as a result, the expectation of the bonus at the time of displaying the double tempai can be maintained.

Next, a specific method of sorting the tempai type at the time of winning the bell will be described. As shown in FIG. 221, in the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" is arranged on the symbol "bell" when aiming at the left BAR, and the symbol "bell" is placed on the symbol "bell" when aiming at the left blue 7. "Replay A" is arranged.

Further, referring to the symbol combination table of FIG. 223, as a combination of symbols in which the symbol "bell" is displayed along the bottom line, "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" and "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" are used in the present embodiment. ". This "S_BL Bell 1 (NM04)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Watermelon A-Red 7 / Replay A-Watermelon A" along the effective line (center line), and is the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "watermelon A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area of. On the other hand, "S_BL Bell 2 (NM05)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Replay A-Red 7 / Replay A-Watermelon A" along the effective line (center line), and corresponds to the left reel 3L. This is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row.

Similarly, referring to the symbol combination table of FIG. 223, as a combination of symbols in which the symbol "bell" is displayed along the cross-up line, in the present embodiment, "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" and "S_XU bell 2 (" NM07) ”. This "S_XU Bell 1 (NM06)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Watermelon A-Bell-Replay A" along the effective line (center line), and the unit symbol display in the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "watermelon A" is displayed in the area. On the other hand, "S_XU Bell 2 (NM07)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Replay A-Bell-Replay A" along the effective line (center line), and is a unit in the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the symbol display area.

When aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row corresponding to the left reel 3L. Therefore, as the BL bell and XU bell when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "Watermelon" is displayed in the middle row on the left. "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" or "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" that requires "A" is used. Similarly, when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row corresponding to the left reel 3L, so the BL bell and XU bell when aiming at the left blue 7 are on the left. "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" or "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)", which requires the symbol "replay A", is used in the middle row.

Here, referring to the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the internal lottery table of FIG. 222, NM05 and NM06 are associated with "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2". On the other hand, NM04 and NM07 are not associated with each other. Considering the left BAR aim, since NM04 is not associated and NM06 is associated, the main control circuit 91 is the left BAR at the time of winning "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2". The aim is that the "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left BAR at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the bottom line, and the design "Bell" along the cross-up line. Tempais and becomes a single tempai stop type.

Similarly, when considering the aim of the left blue 7, since NM07 is not associated and NM05 is associated, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2". When aiming at the left blue 7 at the time of winning, the "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left blue 7 at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the cross-up line, and the design "Bell" along the bottom line. "Tempai, and becomes a stop form of single tempai.

Similarly, referring to the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the internal lottery table of FIG. 222, NM04 and NM07 are associated with "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". On the other hand, NM05 and NM06 are not associated with each other. Considering the left BAR aim, since NM06 is not associated and NM04 is associated, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". The aim is that the "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left BAR at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the cross-up line, and the design "Bell" along the bottom line. Tempais and becomes a double tempai stop type.

Similarly, when considering the aim of the left blue 7, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2" because NM05 is not associated and NM07 is associated. While aiming at the left blue 7 at the time of winning, the "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left blue 7 at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the bottom line, and the design "Bell" along the cross-up line. "Tempai, and becomes a stop form of double tempai.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the single tempai is stopped for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim. At the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the double tempai is stopped for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim, but these combinations can be changed arbitrarily. As an example, FIG. 243 (G) shows another control example.

As shown in the figure, in another control example, when "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the single tempai is stopped when aiming at the left BAR, while the double when aiming at blue 7. It becomes a stop type of tempai, and when "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2" are won, it becomes a double tempai stop type when aiming at the left BAR, while a single tempai stop when aiming at blue 7. Take shape. By doing so, the appearance frequency of the stop type of the double tempai, which is highly expected as a bonus, can be made different according to the target position of the left reel 3L, and the playability is diversified. It should be noted that such control can be appropriately realized by changing the correspondence between NM04 and NM07.

As described above, in this gameplay, the bell, which has a high probability of being determined as a winning role but has a low expectation of a bonus, and the watermelon, which has a low probability of being determined as a winning role but has a high expectation of a bonus, are sandwiched between each other. At the time of the second stop, the double tempai may be performed, but when the "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the watermelon does not tempai and the bell single tempais. From the player's point of view, it is not necessary to worry about the watermelon being missed until the bell, which has a high probability of winning and cannot be expected to have a bonus, so that the troublesomeness of the stop operation can be reduced.

From the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation of the player, it is conceivable to always perform single tempai and stop control so as not to double tempai at the time of winning the bell. However, although such stop control is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation, the winning combination can be grasped from the shape of the tempted stop roll, and the game becomes monotonous. Not preferable from the viewpoint. In other words, when considering playability, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be a watermelon (there may be a bonus expectation) from the shape of the stop roll, even when the bell is won internally. preferable.

In this respect, in this game playability, when "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2" are determined as winning roles, double tempai is performed at the second stop at the time of pinching. The frequency of appearance of stop rolls that both sides are tempted can be increased by the winning probability of "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". In this way, in this game playability, by having a bell for single tempai and a bell for double tempai, the player can have a sense of expectation according to the stop roll while simplifying the stop operation of the player. can.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a stop control means.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the symbol "bell" is formed along a linear line (any of the five lines from the center line to the cross-down line) connecting the unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel. Can be displayed side by side "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" and any of the five lines from the center line to the cross-down line It has "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" in which the symbols "watermelon" can be displayed side by side. Of these multiple roles, "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" correspond to the first specific combination, and "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" are the second specific. Corresponding to the combination, "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" correspond to the predetermined combination. The probability that any of "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1", and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2" will be determined as the winning combination, and "F_Watermelon 1" and "F_" The probability that any of "Watermelon 2" is determined as the winning role is higher in the former.

Further, when "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined as winning combinations in the "normal" state, the main control circuit 91 performs an advantageous section transition lottery, while "F_" in the "normal" state. If the batting order 2 bell A1 "," F_ batting order 2 bell A2 "," F_ batting order 2 bell B1 ", and" F_ batting order 2 bell B2 "are determined as the winning combination, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed. In addition, the main control circuit 91 grants a privilege such as a "first bonus" as if the reach eye lip wins when both the bell and the watermelon come off during the double tempai of the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A". Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege granting means. In addition, this control is advantageous in "F_watermelon 1" "F_watermelon 2" and "F_batting order 2 bell A1" "F_batting order 2 bell A2" "F_batting order 2 bell B1" "F_batting order 2 bell B2". It suffices if the probability of winning the section transition lottery (that is, the probability of granting a privilege) is different, and "F_batting order 2 bell A1" "F_batting order 2 bell A2" "F_batting order 2 bell B1" "F_batting order 2 bell B2" The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery when the winning combination is determined is not limited to 0% (including not performing the advantageous section transition lottery), and "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are The probability may be lower than the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery when the winning combination is determined.

Further, in the main control circuit 91, when "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are determined as the winning combination at the time of the second stop of the pinching striking aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "bell" is used. "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" "F_Watermelon 1" "F_Watermelon 2" is determined as the winning combination while the reel stop control is performed so that "" is single tempai. Controls the stop of the reel so that the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are double tempered.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, another control example peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 different from the pachi-slot machine 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 248.

[Stop control]
First, the stop control in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. Note that the term "stopping" means making it impossible to continue playing a game while maintaining the current playing state. For example, paying out all the credits stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1. At the same time, by controlling not to accept the insertion of new medals, the game cannot be continued. The stopped state can be played by opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) of the pachi-slot machine 1 and performing a predetermined release operation, or by releasing the power supply during the stopped state. become. Since the stop is performed while maintaining the current game state, when the stop is released, the game can be restarted in the state before the stop is performed, for example, during AT. If is performed, AT can be continued after the cancellation.

In order to make the stop control described below feasible, the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot machine 1 has a difference number counter that counts the difference number from the power failure recovery. This difference number counter is a counter dedicated to stopping, which is different from the counter used for limiter control of the advantageous section, and continues counting the difference number regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). do. The difference number counter starts counting the difference number after the power is turned on, and if the difference number is a negative value at the end of the unit game, the difference number is set to 0 at the end of the unit game. clear. That is, the difference number counter counts the difference number starting from the time when the player makes the most loss. In addition, the difference number counter is set to 0 when the stoppage is released, when the stoppage is released, when the power is restored from the power failure (when the power is turned on), and when the difference number is a negative value at the end of the unit game. It will be reset.

In the main stop control, when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500, the main control circuit 91 generates a stop state on the assumption that the stop condition is satisfied. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), the main control circuit 91 updates the value of the difference number counter according to the number of medals used in the game at the start of the game. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 subtracts the value of the difference number counter by the number of BETs of the game. After that, when the game is played and the medal payout process in the game is performed, the main control circuit 91 updates the value of the difference number counter by adding the value of the difference number counter by the amount of the paid out medals. ..

Subsequently, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500, and if it exceeds, a stop state is generated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed 14500, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, the value of the difference number counter is set to 0. Clear to and end the process. Due to such control, the main control circuit 91 cannot continuously play the game when the difference number exceeds 14,500, starting from the time when the player side loses the most after the power is turned on. It is possible to generate a possible stop state.

Subsequently, FIG. 244 (B) is a diagram showing the timing at which the stop state is generated. As shown in the figure (a), any of the accessories (first-class special bonus, first-class special bonus-related bonus continuous operation device, second-class special bonus, second-class special bonus) In the non-bonus state in which the continuous accessory actuating device or the ordinary accessory) is not operating, the main control circuit 91 generates a stop state when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500. For example, during AT, since it is a non-bonus state in which none of the accessories are operating, the main control circuit 91 stops at that point when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500 during AT. Generate a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, in the bonus state in which any of the accessories is operating, the main control circuit 91 immediately receives the difference number counter value exceeding 14500 during the bonus state. The stop state is generated at the timing when the bonus state ends without generating the stop state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 has a difference number counter that counts the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out as a result of the game performed after the power is turned on. The difference number counter clears the difference number to 0 when the difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value, so that the main control circuit 91 and the difference number counter function as counting means. The timing at which the difference number counter starts counting the difference number is not limited to after the power is turned on, and the difference number counter may count the difference number after the setting is changed. Further, the difference number may be counted after the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds the threshold value (14500), and if it is determined that the value exceeds the threshold value, it is impossible to continuously play the game while maintaining the current gaming state. When a possible stop state is generated and the release condition is satisfied in the stop state, the stop state is released and the game according to the maintained game state can be continued. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 is determined by the determination means. , Functions as a stop control means and a stop release means. The main control circuit 91 clears the difference number to 0 when the difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value, but the difference is not limited to this, and the difference number counter is negative. The value may also be counted, and the main control circuit 91 may generate a stop state at the timing when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14,500. That is, the difference number used for the stop control may be a simple difference number calculated by counting negative values, or a difference number that does not count negative values (maximum difference number in one day, so-called MY). ) May be. Further, the main control circuit 91 may clear the value of the difference number counter to 0 when the stop state is released, or may maintain the value in the stop state as it is without clearing to 0. .. Further, in the case of maintaining the value in the stopped state, the main control circuit 91 may have a plurality of threshold values and gradually generate the stopped state each time the threshold value is satisfied. For example, the first stop state is generated when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14,500 sheets, and then the second stop state is generated when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 15,000 sheets after the stop state is released. May be generated.

[Ramp control]
Subsequently, the lamp control in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 245. It should be noted that the present invention relates to the lamp control described below and the control of the lamp that illuminates each reel. First, the configuration of the lamp for reel lighting will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (A).

In the pachislot machine 1, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are equipped with a reel sheet made of a translucent film material along the outer peripheral surface of the reel, and the design is light-transmitting on the surface of the reel sheet. It is printed with colored ink, and the areas other than those patterns are masked with light-shielding ink. As shown in the figure, the pachislot machine 1 has a back lamp inside the reels 3L, 3C, 3R to irradiate the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from the back surface. This back lamp is provided corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display areas of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and illuminates each unit symbol display area from the back surface of the reel toward the player. Since the light emitted from the back lamp passes through the design printing portion of the reel sheet, it brightly illuminates the design of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

Further, as shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an upper lamp at the upper part on the back side (inside the game machine) of the display window 4. This upper lamp irradiates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from a position (front) facing the front surface of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (reel seat). The light emitted from the upper lamp is reflected on the front of the reel seat and illuminates the entire reel seat brightly. In this control, an upper lamp that illuminates the front surface of the reel seat from above is used, but in this control, any lamp that illuminates the reel seat from the front may be used, and the side portion in front of the reel seat (for example). , The lamps provided on both sides on the back side of the display window 4) may be used, or the lamps provided on the lower part in front of the reel seat (for example, the lower part on the back side of the display window 4) may be used.

Subsequently, FIG. 245 (B) is a diagram showing an example of lamp production, and is a diagram schematically showing a visual state of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R accompanying ON / OFF of the upper lamp. FIG. 3A is an example of an effect when the upper lamp is OFF and the back lamp is ON. When only the back lamp is ON, the light from the back lamp is transmitted to the design printing part of the reel sheet, so that the design part of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is brightly illuminated, but other than the design printing part of the reel sheet. The part of is dark because it does not reflect light. Therefore, from the player's point of view, although the design is emphasized, the reel sheet around the design looks dark, which gives a calm impression as a whole.

Further, FIG. 3B is an example of an effect when the upper lamp is ON and the back lamp is ON. When the upper lamp is ON, not only the design printed portion of the reel sheet but also the portion other than the symbol printed portion of the reel sheet is brightly illuminated as a result of the reel sheet being illuminated from the front surface. Further, the pattern printed portion of the reel sheet is illuminated from both the upper lamp and the back lamp. Therefore, from the player's point of view, not only the design but also the entire surrounding reel sheet looks bright, and the entire display window 4 appears to shine.

Subsequently, FIG. 245 (C) is a diagram showing a control example of the upper lamp. The upper lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, or another control circuit.

In this control, the main control circuit 91 switches ON / OFF of the upper lamp according to the gaming state. That is, the main control circuit 91 does not switch ON / OFF of the upper lamp for each unit game, but keeps the upper lamp in the OFF state during a predetermined gaming state to play the game, and is in a specific gaming state. Plays a game by holding the upper lamp in the ON state. In this control, ON / OFF of the upper lamp is switched, but the playability is limited to ON / OFF as long as the lighting degree of the upper lamp can be controlled according to the gaming state. It's not a thing.

As shown in FIG. 245 (C), the main control circuit 91 advances the game by holding the upper lamp in the OFF state during the normal game state in which the bonus is not activated. After that, when the bonus operation starts in the normal game and the bonus state is entered, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp to the ON state, and during the bonus state, the upper lamp is held in the ON state to play the game. proceed. After that, when the bonus state ends and the game shifts to the normal game, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp to the OFF state, and during the normal state, keeps the upper lamp in the OFF state and proceeds with the game. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp from the OFF state to the ON state after the winning process performed after 3OFF of the game transitioning to the bonus state, and is performed after 3OFF at the end of the bonus state. When the locked state is released, the upper lamp is updated from the ON state to the OFF state.

In this way, the main control circuit 91 switches ON / OFF of the upper lamp according to the gaming state, and holds the upper lamp in the ON state or the OFF state during the corresponding gaming state. In this control, the bonus state and the normal state are described as examples of the gaming state for switching ON / OFF of the upper lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, AT (ART) and non-AT (non-AT) are described. It may be possible to switch the ON state / OFF state of the upper lamp between during ART). Further, in this control, the type of the lamp that switches ON / OFF according to the game state is the upper lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the back lamp is switched ON / OFF according to the game state. Alternatively, the ON / OFF of other decorative lamps (for example, the side lamps provided in the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1) may be switched according to the gaming state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control circuit 91 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can start the bonus state when the start condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the normal game, and can end the bonus state and shift the game state to the normal game when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. Yes, and at the end of the bonus state, it is possible to generate a locked state that stops the progress of the game. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game state control means and a lock control means.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with an upper lamp capable of illuminating the outer peripheral surface (surface of the reel sheet) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from the front surface of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the main control circuit 91 is a main control circuit 91 of the upper lamp. In order to control the lighting state, the upper lamp functions as a lighting means, and the main control circuit 91 functions as a lighting control means. The main control circuit 91 holds the upper lamp in the OFF state (off) in the normal state, while holding the upper lamp in the ON state (lights) in the bonus state. Further, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp from the OFF state to the ON state at the start of the bonus state, and updates the upper lamp from the ON state to the OFF state when the lock state is released with the end of the bonus state.

[Detection of illegal setting changes]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 246, a method of detecting an illegal setting change by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. First, an outline of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (A). FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an outline of a basic setting change operation in the pachi-slot machine 1. In the setting change operation in the pachi-slot machine 1, (1) the power supply is updated to OFF, and after the power is turned off, (2) the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON using a predetermined key. After that, (3) the power is returned to ON, (4) a predetermined operation for changing the setting is performed, and finally (5) the setting key type switch 430 is returned to OFF using the predetermined key. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when changing the setting, it is necessary to first turn off the power before operating the setting key type switch 430. The operation of the setting key type switch 430 with the power turned on is an operation for confirming the current setting value, and the setting cannot be changed.

Subsequently, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an outline of a setting change operation performed by a clerk or the like at a game store. To change the setting, (1) it is necessary to turn off the power, but since the power switch is provided inside the gaming machine, when the clerk performs the setting change operation, first (0) to turn off the power. The operation of opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is performed. Subsequent operations are as described above, and the store clerk performs the above-mentioned setting change operations (1) to (5) after opening the front door. After that, the clerk closes (6) the opened front door and completes the setting change operation. When the clerk performs the setting change operation in this way, the operation of opening the front door is performed first, and then the power is turned off.

Subsequently, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing an outline of an illegal setting change operation to be detected in this control. When a so-called Goto teacher or the like makes an illegal setting change, various operations are performed from the outside using an illegal device such as a wire. Therefore, the above-mentioned setting change operations (1) to (5) may be performed with the front door closed. In this control, such a setting change operation with the front door closed is detected as an illegal setting change operation.

When a clerk or the like performs a setting change operation by a formal procedure, it is necessary to first open (0) the front door in order to turn off the power, so the front door is opened at the timing when the power is turned off. On the other hand, since the operation of changing the setting of the detection target is performed with the front door closed, the front door is closed at the timing when the power is turned off. Therefore, in this control, an illegal setting change operation is detected by monitoring the open / closed state of the front door when the power is turned off.

FIG. 246 (B) is a specific processing flow for detecting an illegal setting change operation, and FIG. 246 (a) is a non-operation command reception performed when the sub-control circuit 101 receives a non-operation command. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of time processing, and the figure (b) is the flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change command reception time processing which is performed when a sub-control circuit 101 receives a setting change command. It should be noted that the non-operation command is not related to various operations (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as operations for advancing the game), and is from the main control circuit 91 at a periodic timing. This is a command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101. The setting change command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in accordance with the setting change operation.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires and stores the open / closed state of the front door by a non-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the sub control circuit 101 receives the setting change command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the front door open / closed state acquired from the non-operation command and saved. Is checked, and it is determined whether or not the open / closed state of the front door immediately before the power is turned off is in the closed state. As described above, when a store clerk or the like performs a setting change operation by a formal procedure, the open / closed state of the front door immediately before the power is turned off is in the open state, so this determination is NO and the process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of an illegal setting change operation, the open / closed state of the front door immediately before the power is turned off is in the closed state, so this determination is YES. If this determination is YES, the sub-control circuit 101 subsequently counts the number of illegal settings and ends the process, assuming that there is a possibility of an illegal setting change operation. The sub-control circuit 101 may perform these processes at the timing when the start of the setting change operation is received, or may perform these processes at the timing when the end of the setting change operation is received. Further, these processes may be performed at the timing when the start of the setting confirmation operation is accepted instead of the setting change operation, or may be performed at the timing when the end of the setting confirmation operation is accepted.

Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 detects an illegal setting change operation by the above processing, it not only counts the illegal number of times, but also externally provides predetermined warning information indicating that the illegal setting change operation has been performed. It may be output. The output of the predetermined warning information may be one in which the pachi-slot machine 1 issues a warning, such as one in which a warning sound is emitted from the speakers 9L, 9R, or the like, or a hall computer or the like. It may be to send a notification that there is a possibility of an illegal setting change operation. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 may output predetermined warning information to the outside when the number of frauds reaches a predetermined number.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control circuit 91 has 7R and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a cabinet 61 and front doors (upper door 62a, lower door 62b) arranged in front of the cabinet 61.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 stores the open / closed state of the front door when a non-operation command is received, the open / closed state of the front door at the time of power failure can be held, and the sub-control circuit 101 holds the open / closed state. Functions as a means. Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 accepts the setting change, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires the open / closed state of the front door at the time of power failure due to the setting change, and whether or not the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change. The sub-control circuit 101 functions as an open / close determination means for determining. The sub-control circuit 101 can grasp the power failure immediately before the setting change is accepted as the power failure due to the setting change.

Further, the sub-control circuit 101 can count the number of times it is determined that the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change, and when it is determined that the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change. In addition, since the predetermined warning information can be output to the outside, the sub-control circuit 101 functions as a number counting means and a warning output means.

[MAX bet button function]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 247, a new function of the MAX bet button 11 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. When the MAX bet button 11 is operated, the number of bets is set within the range of the number of stored credits, but in the following, it is assumed that a sufficient number of credits are stored. That is, the setting of the number of bets due to insufficient credit is not related to this control, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In a conventional pachislot machine, when the MAX bet button is operated in a state where 2BET and 3BET games are possible, 3BET is set as the number of bets, and the MAX bet button is operated in a state where 1BET and 2BET games are possible. Then, 2 BET is set as the number of bets. Further, when the MAX bet button is operated in a state where only 2BET can be played, 2BET is set as the number of bets. That is, the conventional MAX bet button is used as a bet button that sets the maximum number of bets among the number of bets that can be played in the state of the game within the range of the number of stored credits.

On the other hand, this control has a function of setting the optimum number of bets among the number of bets that can be played in the state of the game for the MAX bet button 11 within the range of the number of stored credits. Let me. That is, in this control, the MAX bet button 11 is used as a bet button that sets an optimum number of bets instead of the maximum number of bets. As an example, when the MAX bet button 11 is operated in a state where 2BET and 3BET games are possible, 3BET is set as the number of bets in one case, and 2BET is set as the number of bets in another case. There is.

(Overview of game status)
First, FIG. 247 (A) is an example of a gaming state in which this control is preferably used. As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a non-notification state and a notification state, and the non-notification state includes a first lottery state and a second lottery state. The first lottery state is a state in which the probability of winning a lottery regarding the notification state is a normal probability, and the second lottery state is a state in which the lottery regarding the notification state is not performed at all (or the probability is lower than the first lottery state). It is a state of winning), and is a state of passing through when shifting from the first lottery state to the notification state.

For example, a normal game that is disadvantageous to the player corresponds to the first lottery state, and an AT or ART that is notified of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player corresponds to the notification state. Then, the state from the normal game to the transition to AT (ART) corresponds to the second lottery state, for example, the precursor state of AT (ART) or the preparation state until AT (ART) is started. Corresponds to the second lottery state. It should be noted that the precursory state may include not only the precursory sign but also the precursory precursor. What is important as the second lottery state is that the lottery regarding the notification state is not performed (or the lottery is won with a lower probability than the first lottery state).

Further, the second lottery state may be a state from winning the ART to shifting to the high RT. In this case, the transition to high RT is possible only at 2 BET and may not be possible at 3 BET. For example, a role that can display a high RT transition symbol that shifts to high RT by being displayed wins only at 2 BET and does not win at 3 BET, so that transition to high RT is possible only at 2 BET. be able to. As an example, the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to a high RT in an RT state other than the high RT, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the high RT is promoted. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11 in the game of performing the transition lottery to the high RT, while winning the transition lottery to the high RT and high. In the game until the transition to RT, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11. Then, in the game after shifting to the high RT, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11.

Further, as another example, the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to the notification state in the non-notification state, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the high RT is promoted and the game is played during the high RT. Executes a notification state for notifying information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the person. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11 in the game of performing the transition lottery to the notification state, while winning the transition lottery to the notification state and high. In the game until the transition to RT, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11. Then, in the game after shifting to the high RT, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11.

In the above example, the winning combination that can display the high RT transition symbol that shifts to the high RT by being displayed is won only at the time of 2BET and is not won at the time of 3BET, but this is limited to this. It is possible to win at the time of 2BET with a higher probability than at the time of 3BET. Further, the presence or absence of winning may be different according to the number of bets instead of being different according to the number of bets. For example, there is a possibility of winning at both 2BET and 3BET. When a certain combination is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 controls the reel to stop so that the high RT transition symbol can be displayed at the time of 2BET, while the reel cannot display the high RT transition symbol at the time of 3BET. It may be possible to perform stop control of.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a gaming state, in the non-notification state, it is possible to play with any number of bets of 2BET and 3BET, and regarding the notification state, only 3BET is possible and 2BET. It is assumed that the game is impossible. It should be noted that the fact that the 2BET game becomes impossible during the notification state may mean that the 2BET cannot be set in the notification state, and when the 2BET is set during the notification state, the game is played. As a result of not being notified of information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the person, the game may not be in the notified state.

Subsequently, FIG. 247 (B) is a diagram showing the degree of advantage of each state based on the payout rate (= OUT number / IN number × 100). For example, regarding the non-notification state, a low RT with a bet number of 3 BET has a payout rate of 75%, a high RT with a bet number of 3 BET has a payout rate of 90%, and a low RT with a bet number of 2 BET has a payout rate of 90%. It is assumed that the payout rate is 81% and the payout rate is 95% at a high RT with a bet number of 2 BET. In such a case, from the viewpoint of the payout rate, 2BET is more advantageous to the player than 3BET in the non-notifying state.

Further, as shown in the figure, regarding the notification state, it is assumed that the payout rate is 90% at the low RT with the number of bets of 3 BET and the payout rate is 105% at the high RT with the number of bets of 3 BET. When the number of bets is 2 BET, the notification state is impossible. Therefore, in the notification state, 3BET is more advantageous for the player than 2BET.

Subsequently, FIG. 247 (C) is a diagram showing the degree of advantage of each state based on the winning probability of the lottery regarding the notification state. In the first lottery state where the number of bets is 3 BET, the lottery related to the notification state is won with a normal probability, but in the second lottery state where the number of bets is 3 BET, the lottery related to the notification state is not won (or the normal probability). Wins with a lower probability than). The lottery regarding the notification state is, for example, a lottery for granting stock of AT or ART.

On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2 BET, the notification state is impossible, so that the lottery related to the notification state is not won (or) regardless of whether it is the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Win with a lower probability than normal). Therefore, from the viewpoint of lottery regarding the notification state, the first lottery state of 3BET is more advantageous to the player than the other states.

Here, from the viewpoint of the payout rate, 2BET is more advantageous for the player than 3BET in the non-notification state, but in the case of 2BET, it is expected that the notification state will be truly advantageous for the player. Therefore, from the comprehensive viewpoint of the payout rate and the lottery regarding the notification state, the notification state of 3BET is the most advantageous for the player, and the first lottery state of 3BET that can shift to the most advantageous state is. Next, it will be advantageous for the player. On the other hand, regarding the remaining second lottery state, 2BET and 3BET are both disadvantageous and have no difference in the lottery regarding the notification state, so 2BET is more advantageous from the viewpoint of the payout rate.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (D), in this control, when the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, 3BET is set as the number of bets, and the second in the non-notification state. When the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the lottery state, 2 BET is set as the number of bets, and when the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the notification state, 3 BET is set as the number of bets. Thereby, in a state where the game can be played with either the 2BET or 3BET bet number, either the 2BET or 3BET bet number can be set with only one bet button called the MAX bet button 11.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. Since the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with a MAX bet button 11 capable of accepting a bet operation by a player, and the main control circuit 91 determines the number of bets for this game when the bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11. Since it is possible, the MAX bet button 11 functions as a bet operation means, and the main control circuit 91 functions as a bet control means. At this time, when the main control circuit 91 accepts a bet operation via the MAX bet button 11 in a state where the game can be played in both 2BET and 3BET and the number of credits is 3 or more, the number of bets Either 2BET or 3BET can be determined as, and in particular, when a bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, 3BET is determined as the number of bets, and the first is 2 When a bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 in the lottery state, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets. In the pachi-slot machine having a bonus state, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets when a bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 until the bonus combination is won, and the bonus combination is won. In the subsequent game (that is, inside the bonus), 1 BET (or 2 BET) may be determined as the number of bets when the bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can determine whether or not to shift to the notification state in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, and if it is determined to shift, the second lottery state is changed from the first lottery state. Since it is possible to shift to the notification state via the main control circuit 91, the main control circuit 91 functions as a shift determination means and a game state control means.

[Other variants]
Further, the following modifications can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment and other specification examples.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 such as the above embodiment, various lottery and privilege granting are performed based on the internal winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various types are based on the display by the internal winning combination. It may be a lottery or a privilege grant. In addition, various lottery and privilege grants based on the internal winning combination include various lottery and privilege granting based on the display by the internal winning combination, and conversely, the display by the internal winning combination is performed. Various lottery and privilege grants based on the facts include various lottery and privilege grants based on the internal winning combination.

For example, consider the validity / invalidity of privilege grant based on a fixed role. When a fixed combination is determined as an internal winning combination while the fixed combination is valid, a privilege is given based on the winning of the fixed combination in the valid state internally, but from the player's point of view, the fixed combination is accepted. It feels like a privilege has been granted based on the combination of symbols displayed. On the contrary, if the fixed combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the state where the fixed combination is invalid, the privilege is not given because it is the winning combination in the internally invalid state, but from the player's point of view. Since the combination of symbols corresponding to the fixed role is not displayed, I feel that the privilege according to the fixed role is not given. In such a case, the internal opportunity to grant the privilege based on the winning of the fixed role in the valid state should be regarded as the apparent opportunity to grant the privilege based on the display of the combination of symbols according to the fixed role. Also, the internal opportunity to not give a privilege because it is a winning combination of a fixed role in an invalid state is an apparent opportunity to not give a privilege because the combination of symbols corresponding to the fixed role is not displayed. Can be seen as.

(penalty)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a stop operation other than that is performed as a specification having a certain restriction on the mode of the stop operation (for example, a specification recommending that the left reel 3L be the target of the first stop operation). (For example, when the stop operation for the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation), the player draws a lottery for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a lottery for AT or ART, a lottery for mode transition). A penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player may be performed over a period of one game or a plurality of games or more. Such penalty states include, for example, a decrease in the probability of winning a lottery related to a predetermined privilege grant, a forced transition to a relatively disadvantageous lottery state (mode), and a lottery related to a predetermined privilege grant over a predetermined period. It can be used such as not done.

(Judgment of penalty)
It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the stop operation according to the specifications has been performed is performed only during the advantageous section (the player is not notified of the stop operation) and is performed in the non-advantageous section (normal section). It may not be performed, or it may be performed only during the non-advantageous section (normal section) and not performed in the advantageous section, and the stop operation may be performed during the non-advantageous section (normal section) and (stop operation for the player). It may be done in both of the advantageous sections. Further, it is preferable that this determination is performed on the main (main control circuit 91) side, which has high security.

(Occurrence of penalty condition)
Further, the penalty state generated when the stop operation according to the specification is not performed may be generated only in the advantageous section and not in the non-advantageous section (normal section), and may not be generated in the non-advantageous section. It may be generated only in the section (normal section) and not in the advantageous section, or may be generated in both the non-advantageous section (normal section) and the advantageous section.

(Notification of penalty status)
Further, a penalty notification means (notification lamp, segment, etc.) may be provided to notify the player of the penalty state while the penalty state is occurring. It is preferable to control such a penalty notification means on the main (main control circuit 91) side having high security.
Further, in addition to the penalty notification means controlled on the main side, a second penalty notification means (liquid crystal display) controlled on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side is provided, and the player is provided with a liquid crystal display, a projection image, or the like. It may be possible to notify that the penalty state is in a more understandable manner. Further, as one aspect of the second penalty notification means, the penalty notification or the suggestion effect may be performed by voice, a decorative lamp, or the like.

(Release of penalty state)
In addition, the penalty state may be canceled when the setting is changed and may not be canceled only by the power interruption, or when the setting is changed and the power is cut off for a long period of 4 hours or more (for example, the power is cut off due to the suspension of business). However, it may not be canceled by a temporary power failure. Further, the penalty state may be canceled at the time of stopping.
In the specification that the penalty state is not canceled only by the power failure, the penalty notification means controlled on the main side maintains the notification of the penalty state when recovering from the temporary power failure, but the power failure for a long period of 4 hours or more is maintained. When returning from, the penalty state notification may not be maintained and the penalty non-notification mode may be used. Further, after the power is restored, only the notification by the penalty notification means (for example, the notification lamp) controlled by the main side is maintained, and the notification by the second penalty notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display) controlled by the sub side is performed. You may not do it.

(Stop function)
When a specific condition is satisfied, the game may be provided with a stop function that generates a stop state in which the progress of the game cannot be stopped. By having a stop function, for example, the game ends when a predetermined number of game values are acquired, such as when the game ends when 1000 medals are acquired, and the game is used with a relatively high set value. The store rules can be set independently by the game store, and it becomes easy for the game store to prepare an environment in which the player can easily play even in a short time. Hereinafter, a specification example of the stop function will be described.

(Conditions for stopping)
The condition for generating the stop can be when a state advantageous to the player ends, such as the end of the operation of the bonus or the end of the advantageous section. If the bonus is to be stopped at the end of the operation, it may be limited to a specific bonus. For example, a bonus with a small number of acquired cards, such as 100, may not be stopped, but a bonus with a large number of acquired cards, such as 250, may be stopped at the end of the bonus operation.
Further, when the stop is generated at the end of the advantageous section, the stop may be generated only when the number of medals exceeding a predetermined number such as 1000 or more, 2000 or more is obtained from the start of the advantageous section. It is also possible to generate a stop at the end of the advantageous section due to satisfying the conditions for activating the limiter, such as digesting the advantageous section of 1500 games and acquiring 2400 medals. Further, the stop may be generated when the stop condition is satisfied only in the case of a specific set value (setting 6 or the like). Further, for the number of medals to be stopped, one value predetermined in the main ROM may be used, or a plurality of values such as 1000, 2000 and 3000 may be prepared for the game. Any value selected by the store may be used.

(Setting of stop function)
The stop function operates the gaming machine by making it possible to switch between a setting in which the stop function is valid (a setting in which the stop occurs when the stop condition is met) and a setting in which the stop function is invalid (a setting in which the stop does not occur). It is preferable to enable switching according to the policy of the amusement store. For example, a dedicated switch is provided at a position that is difficult for the player to operate, such as on the main board (main control board 71) or the power supply board in the housing of the game machine (on the back side of the game table in the case of a pachinko machine), and the dedicated switch is provided. It may be possible to switch between "with stop" and "without stop" with a switch.
Further, the hall menu may be displayed on a predetermined image display or the like when the power is turned on or the door key is operated, and the presence or absence of stop may be set as an item in the hall menu.

(Settlement function settings)
In addition, a settlement function in which medals stored in credits are automatically settled and paid out to the lower plate when a stop occurs may also be installed. At this time, the presence / absence of the stop function and the presence / absence of the settlement function may be arbitrarily set, and if there is a stop function, there is also a settlement function, and if there is no stop function, there is no settlement function. It may be possible to set all at once.
In the enclosed game machine that manages the game value by information such as electronic data without using physical game media such as medals and game balls, the game value information stored in the credit is used for games such as prepaid cards. It may be automatically moved to the storage medium that holds the value information at the time of payment. At this time, it is preferable to notify the player so that the storage medium (prepaid card) is not forgotten.

(Switching operation of stop function)
Regarding the switching operation of the stop function, the operation may be enabled by using the input means provided in the gaming machine without providing the dedicated switch. For example, it may be possible to switch between the presence / absence of the stop function when the left stop button is operated in the state in which the stop switching can be performed triggered by an operation performed by the clerk, such as during setting change or setting confirmation. Further, in this state, when the middle stop button is operated, it may be possible to switch between production and non-production.
In addition, each setting state may be recognizable by the clerk depending on the display mode of the payout segment, storage segment, bet number lamp, etc. (information display 14) on the front of the gaming machine. By displaying an image such as "with stop" or "with settlement", the setting state may be notified.

(How to cancel the stop function)
If a stop occurs and the game cannot proceed, any operation method that the player cannot perform, such as inserting the door key into the keyhole of the game machine and turning it, or operating the error release switch inside the housing. When the clerk performs the above, the stopped state is released and the game can be played again.

(Display at the time of stop)
When the game cannot proceed due to the stoppage, the control means (sub-control circuit 101) can perform a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). The predetermined display may be, for example, a display dedicated to the stop indicating that the stop is in progress, a display of a demo screen provided for each pachislot machine, or a display for the stop. It may be to display the previous effect screen. In addition, when displaying the effect screen before the stop, for example, the brightness may be changed (darkened) so that the display is different from the normal state.

In addition, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. The duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during ART, and the continuation may be managed by the continuation judgment performed at any timing during ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, and the number of differences.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board) is not limited to this. 72) The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the side.

Further, in the above description, a pachi-slot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Features other than the features peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1, such as the features related to reel control and the features related to setting change and confirmation of the present invention, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. .. For example, checksum generation and determination processing, various processing using the main CPU dedicated instruction code (address specification processing using the Q register, soft timer update processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, communication data generation and storage processing, etc. ), Various processes using the non-standard ROM area and the non-standard RAM area, etc. are also applicable to "pachinko". In addition, the front door (door body) of the pachislot machine corresponds to the part of the "pachinko" where the clerk of the amusement shop opens and checks the inside.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability and the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600sec, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, the wave of balls can be made more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only those that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Other expandability of gaming machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot, or an operation of a credited medal with a MAX bet button or a 1-bet button is operated. If the game is started by the operation of inserting the medal, and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout exit, or the medal is credited. As explained, it is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is played based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal by electromagnetically managing the above. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the gaming medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine, and bidirectionally communicates with an external gaming medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to connect and win a prize (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation) or a role related to a game medium payout operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium). When the winning combination is established), a game medium payout operation (that is, an action of acquiring a game medium necessary for paying out the game medium to the player) or a game medium used for the game is used. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachi-slot machine 1 based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. Has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming medium handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the data may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without a medal, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the above-mentioned selector and hopper device, these are controlled by the main control board 71, and the control result is transmitted. Based on this, it is also possible to adopt a method that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 is described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, the game medium management device is similarly provided and the game is played. It is also possible to manage the game medium of the person.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors, hopper devices, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced to consume the gaming machine. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

[Appendix 1]
The gaming machines in Appendix 1 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating the design related to so-called payout, a gaming machine in which the internal winning combination is duplicated so that the payout rate is less than 1 in some bonus states is known. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202331). In addition, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, there is also a gaming machine elaborated with a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player mainly plays in the bonus carry-over state, and the pleasure of winning the ball with the bonus winning is lost. Further, the gaming machine of Patent Document 2 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional one. The purpose is to provide.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means.
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state display 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, a pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, the "normally advantageous" state) in which the operation mode notification means can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means is higher than that of the advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
As a result, the state control means is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the derived indications.
In the first advantageous state, the notification suppression state (for example, the bell navigation non-occurrence state) in which the notification by the operation mode notification means is not performed in the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the specific combination It has a notification permissible state (for example, a bell navigation generation possible state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination.
The notification is suppressed from the start of the first advantageous state until a specific condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined number of games (100 G)) is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different possibilities of notification are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically terminated as a notification suppression state until a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, by appropriately setting such a specific condition, it is possible to suppress the notification of the operation mode and balance the advantages between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in ball ejection design while making it easier to understand.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention include
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number of times is larger than the average number of unit games until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a high possibility that a predetermined bonus combination will be determined and a determination result of ending the advantageous state will be obtained by the time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus will be obtained. Can be properly planned.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state and can increase the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional method.

[Appendix 2]
The gaming machines in Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the intention is mainly based on a complicated production mode assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. In addition, since the precursory production ends without any profit being obtained, there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means.
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state display 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, a pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, the "normally advantageous" state) in which the operation mode notification means can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can be shifted from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
As a result, the state control means is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the derived indications.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next precursor") and at least
The first mode and the second mode are characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "ART") is different.

According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different possibility of notification are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state is different from the first mode and the first mode. Since the two modes are provided, the player can play the game while expecting to stay in either mode and shift to the second advantageous state, and while making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, while making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state and enhances the interest of the game.

[Appendix 3]
The gaming machines in Appendix 3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the intention is mainly based on a complicated production mode assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is easy for the player to grasp an advantageous state, and while reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, the game state related to the AT lottery is various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means.
A variable control hand (for example, main control board 71) stage that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state display 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, a pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, the "normally advantageous" state) in which the operation mode notification means can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can be shifted from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
As a result, the state control means is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the derived indications.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next precursor") and at least
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode.
The general state is characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "ART") is higher than that of the first mode.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the state shifts to the second advantageous state. A first mode and a second mode are provided, which have different possibilities. Then, since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified. Even in a general state that cannot be achieved, the game can be played while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state and reducing the risk of the player overlooking the so-called AT. It is possible to make various game states related to lottery.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. can.

[Appendix 4]
The gaming machines in Appendix 4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the intention is mainly based on a complicated production mode assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is easy for the player to grasp an advantageous state, and while reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, the game state related to the AT lottery is various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means.
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state display 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, a pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, the "normally advantageous" state) in which the operation mode notification means can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can be shifted from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
As a result, the state control means is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the derived indications.
When the end condition of the second advantageous state (for example, the number of games of "ART" is 0) is satisfied, a determination as to whether to shift to the first advantageous state or the general state (for example, advantageous at the end) is made. It is characterized in that the section end lottery) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Either the notification is sent or the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination is derived, or after satisfying either one, the result of the end determination may shift to the general state, while the notification At the end of the second advantageous state, which is more likely, there is a possibility that the advantageous state will continue without shifting to the general state, so the player can grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to make it easier to make the game easier to play, and to reduce the risk of the player overlooking it, while making it possible to make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. can.

[Appendix 5]
The gaming machines in Appendix 5 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the intention is mainly based on a complicated production mode assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is easy for the player to grasp an advantageous state, and while reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, the game state related to the AT lottery is various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means.
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An RT control means (for example, a main control board 71) that can be controlled by any of a plurality of RTs having different winning probabilities of at least one type of replay combination (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination.
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state display 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, a pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
As a result, the state control means is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the derived indications.
The RT control means can be controlled to a specific RT (for example, RT0) when the setting is changed.
The advantageous state determined to be controlled by the specific RT may be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled by an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by being expensive.

According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which notification can be executed is provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is displayed. After being derived or satisfying either one, there is a possibility that it will be terminated depending on the result of the termination judgment, but if the setting is changed, the gaming state is controlled to a specific RT, which is an advantageous state. Since there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will be higher than that, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, reduce the risk that the player will miss it, and make the so-called AT lottery-related game states various. can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. can.

[Appendix 6]
The gaming machines in Appendix 6 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536 draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) advantageous for the player, and based on the lottery result, this precursor state (advantageous state). There are known gaming machines that can shift to a precursory state (a precursor when it is not determined to shift to an advantageous state) or a gassing precursor state (a precursor when it does not shift to an advantageous state).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect of inciting a transition to an advantageous state during a precursor (main precursor state or a gassing precursor state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the gaming machine is in a gassing precursor state. In the case of the transition, there is no transition to an advantageous state, and as a result, only medals are consumed and there is no benefit, so there is a risk that the motivation for playing will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in playing motivation.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) capable of stop operation, and a variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition. ), An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a plurality of the above. It is advantageous for the player and the stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving the result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the stop operation via the stop operation means. The operation mode notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, and the operation mode notification means are used for notification. A gaming machine including a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls a possible notification state (for example, an advantageous section), and the operation mode notification means as the notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A first notification state (for example, "normally advantageous") that can be notified by the first notification state, and a second notification that can be shifted from the first notification state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first notification state. When the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means as the internal winning combination which has at least a state (for example, "ART") and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived and the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, the result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means is performed. Has a specific combination (for example, push order bell) and a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB) from which the state control means is derived, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, the state control means is released from the non-notification state. It is possible to shift to the first notification state, and the notification is performed by the operation mode notification means in the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the predetermined in the plurality of variable display means. The notification state is terminated after at least one of the result displays corresponding to the bonus combination of is satisfied. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not the game is performed, and a counting means (for example, a main control board) for counting the number of unit games performed during the first notification state. 71), and a privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that grants a privilege (for example, promotion of SCZ mode) according to the number of times the counting means counts.

According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given according to the number of unit games counted during the first notification state. Here, since the first notification state is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the second notification state in which there is a high probability that the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the second notification state, which is more advantageous in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, is available. Benefits can be granted when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period without being able to shift to the notification state. As a result, even if the second notification state cannot be entered and the first notification state is entered in the non-notification state, not only the medals are consumed but also the privilege can be expected to be given. It is possible to suppress a decrease in playing motivation.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the remaining period management means (for example, the main control board 71) for managing the remaining continuation period in which the second notification state can be continued is further provided, and the state control means is the first. When the sum of the number of unit games played during the notification state and the number of unit games performed during the second notification state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1500 times), the remaining period management means manages the game. Regardless of the remaining continuation period, the notification state may be terminated (for example, limit processing may be performed).

According to such a gaming machine, although a privilege can be expected to be given when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period, the number of unit games performed during the first notification state and the second notification state is When the sum reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification state is forcibly terminated. As a result of staying in the first notification state for a long period of time, even if a large privilege is given, the notification state (first notification state or second notification state) does not continue more than necessary, and the gambling spirit is maintained. It is possible to prevent it from being raised unnecessarily.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable display units. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate, and a variable control means (for example, main control) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display units based on the establishment of the start condition. The substrate 71), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining the internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the above. A stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units based on a stop operation via a plurality of stop operation means, and a player. An operation mode notification means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, a display unit 100) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the normal state (for example, a normal section). ), And a state control means for controlling a plurality of gaming states including at least an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state. A first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantage or an effect section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is suppressed, and a second advantageous state (for example, ART or an increase section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed. (For example, a privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time, and a unit game performed during the advantageous state. When the number of times of the game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, when the game number limiter is activated), the end means (for example, the main control board 71) for terminating the advantageous state is further provided.

According to such a gaming machine, since the privilege is given when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined predetermined period, the second advantageous state cannot be shifted to the second advantageous state as in the above-mentioned gaming machine. 1 Even in the case of shifting to an advantageous state, not only the medals are consumed but also the privilege can be expected to be given, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suppressed. On the other hand, the advantageous state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) ends when the number of unit games performed during the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the first advantageous state is long. Even if a big benefit is given as a result of staying for a period of time, the advantageous state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) will not continue more than necessary, and it will prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily enhanced. can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in playing motivation.

[Appendix 7]
The gaming machines in Appendix 7 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

As such a gaming machine, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-086863 identifies a gaming state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed in the advantageous state, and a data counter or the like. A game machine that performs a lively production suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with the external device of the game is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, the production is not performed only by the gaming machine, but is performed in conjunction with other devices, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, with such a gaming machine, there is a problem that some players who feel that the gambling is too high are shunned because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of gambling is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times), A gaming machine that performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. Based on the 3R and the display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display units, and the establishment of the start condition. A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display units, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the variable display of the plurality of variable display units is stopped to display the result. Derivable stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub control board 72, display unit) capable of notifying the mode of stop operation advantageous to the player. 100) and a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state capable of executing notification by the notification means, as the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. , A specific result display (for example, single chili lip, double chili lip, triple chili lip) is derived from the plurality of variable display units when the stop operation is performed for the plurality of stop operation means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, replay) in which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived to the plurality of variable display units when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode (for example). It has "F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", "F_3 consecutive chili lip"), and in response to the fact that the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the privilege regarding the notification state is given. The privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) that can be granted, and the probability of changing the privilege probability, which is the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Further including a changing means (for example, a main control board 71), the probability changing means sets the privilege probability when the numerical value is less than a specific value. The probability is 1, and if the numerical value is equal to or higher than the specific value, the privilege probability is set to the second probability lower than the first probability. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is notified of the specific operation mode, and when the numerical value is equal to or higher than the specific value, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized in that the player is notified of an operation mode different from the specific operation mode.

According to such a gaming machine, normally, it is possible to give a privilege related to the notification state at the time of winning a specific combination, but after the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches a specific value, it is specified. Even if the role is decided, the probability of granting the privilege is reduced. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of gambling can be achieved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when this numerical value reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the gambling property can be balanced from this point as well. In addition, when the privilege is given at the time of winning the specific role, the specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the notification of the notification means is used. Along with this, a predetermined result display is derived. For the player, there is a possibility that he / she may feel dissatisfied if he / she can understand that the privilege is not given even though the specific role is won, but in the game machine according to the present invention, when the privilege is given. Since the result display is different depending on whether it is given or not, it is not possible to know from the result display that it is the winning time of a specific combination. As a result, even if the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the specific combination, the first result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the game is stopped in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. A first specific combination that can derive a second result display different from the first result display when the operation is performed, and a third result display are derived when the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode. The second specific combination is obtained, and a fourth result display different from the third result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the second operation mode. The privilege granting means can grant the privilege of the first size in response to the determination of the first specific combination as the internal winning combination, and the second specific combination is the internal winning combination. It is possible to grant the privilege of the second size larger than the first size according to the determination as, and in the probability changing means, the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. At that time, the first privilege probability, which is the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege, and the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to change a certain second privilege probability, and when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first privilege probability is set as a predetermined probability, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the first specific value. The first privilege probability is a probability lower than the predetermined probability, and when the numerical value is less than the second specific value smaller than the first specific value, the second privilege probability is a specific probability, and the numerical value is When the value is equal to or higher than the second specific value, the second privilege probability is set to be lower than the specific probability, and in the notification means, when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first specific combination is used. When the internal winning combination is determined, the first operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or higher than the first specific value, the first specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the player is notified of an operation mode different from the first operation mode, and when the numerical value is less than the second specific value, the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the second operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or higher than the second specific value, the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The player may be notified of an operation mode different from the operation mode of the above.

According to such a gaming machine, the value of the specific value, which is the threshold value for changing the probability of granting the privilege, is changed according to the size of the privilege associated with each type of the specific combination, and the associated privilege is changed. At the time of winning the second specific combination with a large value, the value of the threshold value is made smaller than that at the time of winning the first specific combination. As a result, it is possible to adjust the period in which the privilege is easily given for each size of the associated privilege, and it is possible to balance the gambling appropriately.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and the gambling is appropriately balanced.

[Appendix 8]
The gaming machines in Appendix 8 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

As such a gaming machine, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-086863 identifies a gaming state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed in the advantageous state, and a data counter or the like. A game machine that performs a lively production suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with the external device of the game is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, the production is not performed only by the gaming machine, but is performed in conjunction with other devices, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, with such a gaming machine, there is a problem that some players who feel that the gambling is too high are shunned because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of gambling is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times), A gaming machine that performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. Based on the 3R and the display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display units, and the establishment of the start condition. A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display units, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the variable display of the plurality of variable display units is stopped to display the result. Derivable stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub control board 72, display unit) capable of notifying the mode of stop operation advantageous to the player. 100) and a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state capable of executing notification by the notification means, as the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. , A specific result display (for example, single chili lip, double chili lip, triple chili lip) is derived from the plurality of variable display units when the stop operation is performed for the plurality of stop operation means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, replay) in which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived to the plurality of variable display units when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode (for example). If it has "F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", "F_3 consecutive chili lip") and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the stock of the additional special zone is a predetermined number or more) during the notification state, a special state (for example, a predetermined number or more) is satisfied. A privilege regarding the notification state is given according to the state control means (for example, the main control board 71) for setting the special section) and the specific combination being determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. A possible privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the privilege granting means when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Further, a probability changing means (for example, the main control board 71) for changing the privilege probability, which is the probability of giving the privilege, is further provided, and the probability changing means sets the privilege probability to the first when it is not in the special state. As a probability, in the case of the special state, the privilege probability is set as a second probability lower than the first probability, and in the notification means, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the privilege granting means is the privilege. When the specific operation mode is notified to the player, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege, the specific operation mode is used. Is characterized in that different operation modes are notified to the player.

According to such a gaming machine, when a specific combination wins during the notification state, the probability of granting the privilege differs depending on whether or not it is in the special state, and the probability of granting the privilege is different during the special state. Go down. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of gambling can be achieved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the gambling can be balanced from this point as well. can. In addition, when the privilege is given at the time of winning the specific role, the specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the notification of the notification means is used. Along with this, a predetermined result display is derived. For the player, there is a possibility that he / she may feel dissatisfied if he / she can understand that the privilege is not given even though the specific role is won, but in the game machine according to the present invention, when the privilege is given. Since the result display is different depending on whether it is given or not, it is not possible to know from the result display that it is the winning time of a specific combination. As a result, even if the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number or more of additional rights for extending the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued are held.

According to such a gaming machine, if the additional right is held in a predetermined number or more, the specific combination is reduced and the probability of granting the privilege is lowered, so that the profit given to the player during the notification state can be obtained. It does not become excessive and can balance the gambling properly.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is a plurality of combinations. Of these, the result display peculiar to the specific combination, and the predetermined result derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. The display may be a result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination among the plurality of combinations.

According to such a gaming machine, when a privilege is given at the time of winning a specific combination, a result display peculiar to the specific combination is derived. Since the playability of aligning and adding the result display (design) is also preferable for the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying the unique result display at the time of granting the privilege. On the other hand, if the privilege is not given at the time of winning a specific role, the result display that can be derived at the time of winning another role will be derived, so that the player can understand that it is the time of winning the specific role. There is no such thing, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and the gambling is appropriately balanced.

[Appendix 9]
The gaming machines in Appendix 9 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine that grants a privilege by referring to the history of past gaming results is also known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2523112, the winning history for five games is displayed according to a predetermined condition. At the same time, a gaming machine that holds the winning history data and performs an ART lottery based on the winning history corresponding to the condition code data is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, control is performed in consideration of not only the current game but also the history of past games, so that various playability can be realized.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to keep the winning history data for 5 games at all times or prepare the judgment data referring to the winning history for 5 games, which increases the data capacity for processing. There was a problem that the development man-hours increased due to the complexity of the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various playability while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and an effect execution means (for example, a sub control board 72) capable of executing an effect related to the game. A display unit (for example, a history display window displayed on the display unit 100) having a predetermined number of display areas provided corresponding to each of the predetermined number of games from the current game to the previous game, and a predetermined combination. Further includes a privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege according to the determination of the winning combination, and the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the effect executing means. Accordingly, the predetermined effect information (for example, history icon) is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination among the predetermined number of display areas of the display unit. When the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the effect associated with the privilege can be executed on at least one of the display unit or the predetermined effect information.

According to such a gaming machine, a privilege can be given when a predetermined winning combination is determined as a winning combination. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, the predetermined effect information is displayed on the display unit, and when the privilege is given, the display unit or the predetermined effect information is displayed. Is used to perform an effect related to the granting of benefits. From the aspect of production, the player has the illusion that the privilege has been given as a result of winning the predetermined role, and it is possible to realize various playability like a conventional gaming machine. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, unlike the conventional gaming machine, it is not necessary to hold the past history data, and it is possible to realize the game playability in which the past history is referred to and controlled from the production side. Therefore, the data capacity can be suppressed, and the development man-hours can be suppressed because the specifications are monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second state (the second state), which has a higher degree of advantage in granting the privilege than the first state, in response to the fact that the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination from the plurality of combinations. For example, it is provided with a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of starting the second state (for example, with high accuracy) and ending the second state when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state. May be good.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, the second state is subsequently set over a predetermined number of games, and when the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination during the second state, the first winning combination is performed. The degree of advantage regarding the granting of benefits is higher than when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during one state. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not need to retain the past history data as in the conventional gaming machine, and simply enters the second state with the first predetermined combination as an opportunity, as if the past history is stored. Since the playability controlled by reference can be realized, the data capacity can be suppressed, and the development man-hours can be suppressed because the specifications are monotonous.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various playability while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Appendix 10]
The gaming machines in Appendix 10 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue the AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest is improved, if a specific role such as watermelon or cherry that is easy for the player to pay attention to is decided as the internal winning role, but the privilege is not given frequently, the player will be disappointed. There was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a request, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of the grant of a privilege at an appropriate frequency when a specific role is won. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, a specific combination (for example, a rare combination), and a bonus combination (for example, MB). A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. The game state to be performed has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (for example, a normal section) and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, "ART"), and the bonus When the result display according to the combination is derived and the bonus is activated, the first additional determination means (for example, the number of additional games) capable of determining the additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued (for example). For example, when the main control board 71) and the specific combination are determined as winning combinations, a second addition determination means (for example, main control) capable of determining an addition amount for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. The board 71) and the addition control means (for example, main control) that extends the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by the amount of the addition determined by the first addition determination means or the second addition determination means. The board 71), the notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of the additional amount, and the first additional determination means triggered by the operation of the bonus are the additional amount. Is further provided with an additional latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that keeps the additional amount unnotified without notifying the additional amount, and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification means. If the second addition determination means does not determine the addition amount despite the above, the unnotified latent means held by the addition latency means within the range of the addition amount that can be determined by the specific combination as a trigger. It is characterized in that at least a part of the additional amount can be notified.

According to such a gaming machine, when the additional amount is determined by the operation of the bonus, the additional amount is kept unnotified without being notified, and the additional amount is not determined when the specific combination is won. In that case, the retained unnotified additional amount is notified instead. As a result, when the specific role is won, not only the additional processing amount triggered by the specific role but also the additional processing amount triggered by the activation of the bonus can be notified (additional effect), which makes it easy for the player to pay attention. At the time of winning a specific role, it is possible to notify the player of the grant of benefits at an appropriate frequency.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means is provided by the addition latent means when the second addition determination means does not determine the addition amount even though the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When notifying at least a part of the unnotified additional amount that is being held, the same additional amount as the additional amount that can be determined by the second additional determination means may be notified.

According to such a gaming machine, when the unnotified additional amount is notified instead, the additional amount that is the same as the additional amount that can be determined at the time of winning the specific combination is notified, so that the player can be added based on the specific combination. It is possible to give the illusion that it has been performed, and it is possible to notify the player of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency at the time of winning a specific role that the player can easily pay attention to.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination is a combination having the same probability that it can be determined as a winning combination in each of a plurality of setting values, and the bonus combination is a combination having a plurality of settings. In at least a part of the values, the probability that the winning combination can be determined is different, and the probability that the first addition determining means and the second addition determining means determine the addition amount is a plurality of set values. It may be the same in each of.

According to such a gaming machine, the addition triggered by a specific combination is commonly performed in a plurality of set values, but the addition triggered by the activation of a bonus is performed with a different probability for each set value. Become. As described above, the addition triggered by the activation of the bonus is kept unnotified and is notified in place of the subsequent winning of the specific combination, so even if the specific combination has no difference in the set value, the addition can be added. The frequency of notification will differ depending on the set value. As a result, for example, even when the setting difference of the lottery table related to the addition process is eliminated, the player can feel the setting difference of the addition, and the playability of guessing the setting from the addition frequency is realized. can do.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the player of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency when the specific role is won.

[Appendix 11]
The gaming machines in Appendix 11 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue the AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production regarding the granting of benefits.

The present invention has been made in view of such a request, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances the interest in notification of privilege grant.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a gaming state for playing a game, a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state (for example, for example). It has a plurality of gaming states including "ART"), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) capable of extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. A determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and an addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by the amount of the addition determined by the addition determination means. The additional latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that can be held without notifying the additional amount without notifying the additional amount and the above-mentioned when certain conditions are met (for example, at the time of winning "F_SP Lip A1" or the like). The notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of at least a part of the unnotified additional amount held by the additional hiding means, and the additional hiding means hold. The notification means further includes an effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of determining one effect stage from a plurality of effect stages according to the unannounced addition amount. It is characterized in that the unnotified additional amount can be notified to the player by the additional notification effect corresponding to the one effect stage determined by the effect stage determining means.

According to such a gaming machine, when the addition is performed internally, it may be held unnotified without notification, and the addition amount held without notification is subsequently determined under specific conditions. You will be notified when the condition is met. As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of additional amount that can be notified at one time, as compared with the case where the additional amount is notified every time a small amount of additional amount is determined, and the interest of the game is improved along with the notification effect of granting the privilege. Can be done. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect stage is determined according to the unnotified additional amount, and the unnotified additional amount is notified by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage. From the player's point of view, it is possible to predict the amount of unannounced addition from the production stage. Can have. In addition, in order to notify the unnotified additional amount by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage, for example, a variety of effects such as performing a more lively effect on the effect stage determined when the unannounced additional amount is large. Control can be realized.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, among the plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and a plurality of roles. A stop control means (for example, mainly) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means according to the winning combination determined from the above and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means. A control board 71) is further provided, and in the plurality of combinations, the first result display (1st result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means). For example, a replay) is derived, and when a stop operation is performed in the second operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, a second result display (for example, a red BAR lip) is derived to the plurality of variable display means. , A specific combination (for example, "W-aligned lip") from which a third result display (for example, a W-aligned lip) is derived to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed for the plurality of stop operation means in the third operation mode. F_SP rip B1 ") is included, and when the unreported additional amount is less than a predetermined value (for example, 100) and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the first operation mode is given to the player. On the other hand, when the unnotified additional amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than a specific value (for example, 150) and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the second operation mode is given to the player. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the additional amount that has not been notified is equal to or greater than the specific value, the third operation mode can be notified to the player. The means is further provided, and when the unnotified addition amount is less than a predetermined value and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the notification means does not perform the addition notification effect, and the unnotified addition is added. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than the specific value, the additional notification effect for notifying the additional amount for the predetermined value is performed, and the unnotified additional amount is the specific value. In the above case, if the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, it may be possible to execute the addition notification effect for notifying the addition amount of the specific value.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to associate the unnotified additional amount to be notified with the operation mode to be notified in order to derive the result display. Specifically, when the additional amount is not notified, the operation mode from which the first result display is derived is notified, and when the additional amount for a predetermined value is notified, the second result display is derived. When notifying the operation mode and notifying the additional amount for a specific value, the operation mode from which the third result display is derived is notified. Since the playability of aligning and adding the result display (design) is also preferable for the player, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the derivation of a specific result display when performing the notification effect. Can be done.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances the interest in the notification of the privilege grant.

[Appendix 12]
The gaming machines in Appendix 12 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue the AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production regarding the granting of benefits.

The present invention has been made in view of such a request, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances the interest in notification of privilege grant.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , A game machine including the main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting the first numerical value (for example, the number of games that have been digested) regarding the specific gaming state, and a second indicating the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. When the numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games) reaches the end threshold value (for example, 0), the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games). When the limiter activation condition) is satisfied, the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the value of the second numerical value does not reach the ending threshold. Remaining period notification means (for example, sub-control board 72) capable of notifying a predetermined second numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games that have been notified) of the second numerical value as a remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. The display unit 100) and a specific second numerical value (for example, the number of unnotified remaining games) other than the predetermined second numerical value among the second numerical values can be held without being notified as the remaining period. Remaining period hiding means (for example, sub-control board 72) and, when a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the unnotified specific second numerical value held by the remaining period hiding means is notified as the remaining period. At the same time, an additional notification means (for example, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) that updates the predetermined second numerical value and the specific second numerical value according to the notified value, and one production stage from a plurality of production stages. A first effect stage and a first effect stage in which the additional notification means performs the notification as the plurality of effect stages, further comprising an effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72). It has a second effect stage whose frequency is higher than that of the first effect stage, and a dedicated effect stage which can be determined only when the first numerical value is later determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition. The effect stage determining means is the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value in the state where the first numerical value is determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition. In the first situation where is within the range of the first threshold value, the dedicated effect stage can be determined as the one effect stage with a predetermined probability, and the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value is said. In the second situation, which is within the range of the second threshold value, which is a value larger than the first threshold value, the dedicated production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When the dedicated production stage is not determined as one production stage, the second production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a probability corresponding to the specific second numerical value.

According to such a gaming machine, a part (predetermined second numerical value) is notified and the remaining part (specific second numerical value) is kept unnotified for the remaining period of the specific gaming state. The remaining unnotified period is notified (that is, added) to the player at a frequency according to the production stage. By controlling the notification (addition) of the remaining period according to the production stage in this way, it is possible to finely control the production mode and improve the interest of the game. That is, the larger the remaining unannounced period, the higher the frequency of notifying the remaining period is determined. Therefore, when the player can shift to the second effect stage, the notification effect is performed. You can have expectations about that.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the period (first numerical value) for digesting a specific gaming state satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming state is terminated regardless of the remaining period (second numerical value). In the future, if it is decided that the predetermined end conditions will be met from the remaining period, the stage may shift to the dedicated production stage. From the player's point of view, when the stage shifts to the dedicated production stage, it is possible to grasp that the specific gaming state continues until the first numerical value satisfies the end condition, so that the subsequent gaming can be performed with peace of mind. At this time, the transition to the dedicated production stage is performed with a higher probability as the sum of the first numerical value (digested period) and the predetermined second numerical value (remaining notified period) is larger, and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Even if it is decided, if the specific second numerical value (remaining unnotified period) is large, it does not shift to the dedicated production stage, but shifts to, for example, the second production stage and notifies. The production is done. For the player, the entertainment is improved when the notification (additional) effect is performed. Therefore, as in the game machine according to the present invention, the entertainment mode of the game is controlled according to the notification status of the remaining period. Can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances the interest in the notification of the privilege grant.

[Appendix 13]
The gaming machines in Appendix 13 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721, an advantageous state (AT) is performed with a predetermined number of games as one set, and an advantageous state is performed after one set of advantageous states is completed. A gaming machine with a production period that encourages the restart of the game is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, regardless of the number of advantageous states possessed, the expectation that the advantageous state of the next set may be started again even if the advantageous state of one set ends is played. It can be given to people and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, even if there is no remaining number of sets, the effect of inciting the advantageous state again after the end of the advantageous state of one set is performed, but the player indicates that there is no remaining number of sets. If it is grasped, this production does not make sense, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game at the end of a specific gaming state.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , A game machine including the main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting the numerical value related to the specific gaming state and the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfy the specific condition (for example, when the number reaches 1500 times), the specificization is performed. The specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued, and the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued reach the end threshold. Then, when the end-time processing determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not to perform the predetermined processing (for example, last freeze) and the ending-time processing determining means determine to perform the predetermined processing, the said The specific state ending means further comprises an end-time processing execution means (for example, a main control board 71) that allows the continuation of the specific gaming state until the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfies the specific condition. When the end-time processing determining means determines that the predetermined processing is not performed, the specific gaming state is terminated.

According to such a gaming machine, when the numerical value counted in relation to a specific gaming state satisfies a specific condition, the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. (Limit processing). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining period of a specific gaming state reaches the end threshold value, it is determined whether or not to perform the predetermined processing, and when it is determined to perform the predetermined processing, the limit is determined. Allows the continuation of a specific gaming state until processing is performed (until the counted value satisfies a specific condition). As a result, when the predetermined processing is performed, the specific game state that is supposed to end is continued until the limit processing is performed, so that the interest of the game is lowered with the end of the specific game state. Not only can it be suppressed, but on the contrary, the player will have a strong interest at the end of a specific gaming state, and the interest will be improved. In addition, when the limit processing is performed, the specific game state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period, so even if the predetermined processing is performed, the gambling spirit will not be unnecessarily increased. , A well-balanced playability can be realized. That is, even if the specific gaming state has already continued for a long period of time at the stage where the predetermined processing is performed, or conversely, the specific gaming state has continued for only a short period of time. Since it continues only until the limit processing is performed as a whole, it does not give an excessive profit to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end-time processing executing means determines that the end-time processing determining means performs the predetermined processing, at least the above-mentioned numerical value is set in the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. The period required to satisfy the specific condition may be added.

According to such a gaming machine, when it is decided to perform a predetermined process at the end of a specific gaming state, the period required for the limit process to be performed is added to the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. As a result, not only can it be suppressed that the interest of the game is lowered with the end of a specific gaming state, but on the contrary, the player becomes strongly interested at the end of a specific gaming state. , The interest is improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game at the end of a specific gaming state.

[Appendix 14]
The gaming machines in Appendix 14 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536 draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) advantageous for the player, and based on the lottery result, the present precursor state (advantageous). There are known gaming machines that can shift to a state that is determined to shift to a state) or a state that is a sign of a ghost (a sign that does not shift to an advantageous state).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect of inciting a transition to an advantageous state during a precursor (main precursor state or a gassing precursor state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the gaming machine is in a gassing precursor state. In the case of the transition, there is no transition to an advantageous state, and as a result, only medals are consumed and there is no benefit, so there is a risk that the motivation for playing will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in playing motivation.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART"), which is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state (for example, a normal section). When the first state control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting the first notification state and the second start condition in the first notification state are satisfied, the second notification state can be started. It is necessary from the time when the second state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first state control means start the first notification state to the time when the second state control means starts the second notification state. A period determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining a period during which the second notification state can be continued is further provided according to the period, and the period determining means starts the first notification state. It is characterized in that the longer the period required from the start of the second notification state to the start of the second notification state, the longer the period can be determined as the period in which the second notification state can be continued.

According to such a gaming machine, the second notification state is started when the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state, but the second notification state to be started at this time is from the first notification state to the second notification state. It is determined according to the period required to transition to the state, and the longer the period, the longer the period is determined. As a result, even if the user cannot shift to the second notification state and stays in the first notification state for a long period of time, not only the medals are consumed but also the subsequent second notification state is maintained for a long period of time. Since it is possible to have expectations for continuation, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. As a result, even if the user stays in the first notification state for a long period of time and a long period is determined as the period of the second notification state, the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unreasonably increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the third state control means (for example, the main control board) capable of ending the first notification state and starting the non-notification state. 71) is further provided, and the average number of unit games until the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state is smaller than the average number of unit games until the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state. It may be that.

According to such a gaming machine, the transition from the non-notification state to the first notification state and the transition from the first notification state to the second notification state are more frequent in the former. As described above, in the first notification state, the longer the stay period, the longer the period of the second notification state. Therefore, the player feels that the first stage chance (first notification state) is near and continues the game. Will be. On the other hand, if the end condition is satisfied before the second start condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the non-notification state, so even if the first stage chance (first notification state) is reached, the state shifts to the non-notification state. Since it does not always shift to the second notification state and may shift to the non-notification state, it is possible to balance the game without increasing the gambling spirit.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in playing motivation.

[Appendix 15]
The gaming machines of Appendix 15 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine having such an AT function, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099 turns on a section indicator (AT winning notification lamp) managed by the main control unit when shifting to an advantageous section such as AT. As a result, a gaming machine that notifies that it is in an advantageous section is disclosed.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since the main control side manages the advantageous section, the game playability becomes clear, but on the other hand, whether or not the section indicator lights up determines whether or not the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is appropriate. Since it can be detected, the player may concentrate only on the section display, and his interest in the production of video and audio may be diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is intended to provide a gaming machine in which the player does not lose interest in the production while surely notifying whether or not the transition to an advantageous state is appropriate. The purpose.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, and after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the player can stop the operation. Based on this, in a game machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and giving a privilege according to the display result, a game control unit (for example, a main control board) that controls the progress of the game. 71), an effect control unit that controls the effect (for example, a sub-control board 72), a stop operation means that allows the player to stop the operation (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R), and a determination to shift the game state. A state in which the gaming state can be controlled into a possible transition determining means (for example, the main control board 71), at least a normal state (for example, a normal section), and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state. A control means (for example, a main control board 71) and an instruction means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, a display unit 100) capable of instructing a stop operation mode advantageous to the player. In preparation, the advantageous state includes a first state (for example, an effect section) in which the ball ejection rate is lower than 1, and a second state (for example, an increase) in which the instruction by the instruction means is more frequently generated than the first state. Section) and at least, and in the normal state, the transition determining means has at least a first pattern of transitioning to the first state (for example, a pattern of transitioning from the normal section to the effect section) and the first state. It is possible to determine the second pattern (for example, the pattern of shifting from the normal section to the increasing section via the effect section) after the transition, and the gaming state is the second state. It is possible to notify, and the notification means (for example, the state display 147b) controlled by the game control unit and the transition determination means notify that the game state is determined to shift to the second state. A notification effect execution means (for example, a display unit 100) that can execute a specific effect and is controlled by the effect control unit is provided, and the notification means notifies that the gaming state is the second state. In the unit game of the first state prior to the above, the specific effect can be executed by the notification effect executing means.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is the second state, the notification means notifies that fact. Here, since the notification means is controlled by the game control unit that controls the progress of the game, the main (game control unit) side reliably notifies whether or not the transition to the second state is advantageous for the player. Can be done. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state, the transition to the first state is performed once regardless of whether the transition is made in the first pattern or the second pattern. However, during this first state, the specific effect is executed by the notification effect execution means controlled by the sub (effect control unit) side. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the unit game before the notification is performed on the main (game control unit) side, the effect is executed on the sub (effect control unit) side. The player has no way of knowing whether or not he has won the transition to the second state, and he does not lose interest in the production.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state control means determines the length of the period for controlling to the first state based on the determination of the first pattern and the determination of the second pattern. Based on this, the length of the period for controlling the first state may be set to the same length.

According to such a gaming machine, the length of the period for controlling to the first state is the same regardless of whether the transition is made in the first pattern or the second pattern. From the length of the period of one state, it is not possible to grasp whether or not to shift to the second state after that. For the player, since it is not possible to predict the subsequent development during the first state, the player will play the game without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lose interest in the production while reliably notifying the success or failure of the transition to an advantageous state.

[Appendix 16]
The gaming machines of Appendix 16 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine that performs limit processing is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when terminating a state that is advantageous to the player (whether it is terminating by limit processing or terminating by exhausting the number of remaining games), all information regarding the terminating state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the range of subsequent playability while resetting related information.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of machines according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine having a stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means of the above, and the result display has a specific state (for example, for example). , A specific result display (for example, a downward-sloping replay) associated with (at the end of ART) is included, and a predetermined reset control (for example, initialization of information about ART) is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived. When performed, the state control means (for example, the main control board) for setting the specific state (for example, at the end of ART) based on the specific result display derived after returning from the reset control. 71) is further provided.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display is associated with a specific state, and after a predetermined reset control is performed (after returning), the specific result display is specified from the specific result display derived at that time. Read that it is in the state of. That is, when the predetermined reset control is performed in the state where the specific result display is derived, the related information is initialized by the reset control, but it is in a specific state from the derived specific result display. Can be set. As a result, even after resetting the related information, it is possible to expand the range of playability by using the specific state recognized after the return.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for terminating a predetermined gaming state (for example, ART) and the ending means according to the derivation of the specific result display. Further includes an initialization means (for example, a main control board 71) that resets information about the predetermined gaming state when the player finishes the predetermined gaming state, and the state control means is the information provided by the initialization means. After the reset of, it may be set at the end of the predetermined gaming state based on the derived specific result display.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific result display is derived, the ending means ends the predetermined gaming state, and the initialization means resets the information regarding the predetermined gaming state. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the reset by the initialization means, it is set at the end of the predetermined gaming state from the derived specific result display. As a result, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, the gaming machine can only grasp that "it is not a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state)" due to a reset by the initialization means, but the present invention. With the gaming machine according to the above, it is possible to grasp that it is a normal gaming state "immediately after the predetermined gaming state is completed". As a result, for example, by making the transition from the normal gaming state to the predetermined gaming state different between immediately after the end of the predetermined gaming state and other than that, after the end of the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is entered. It is possible to give playability such that pulling back is easy to be performed.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of subsequent playability while resetting the related information.

[Appendix 17]
The gaming machines in Appendix 17 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine that performs limit processing is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when terminating a state that is advantageous to the player (whether it is terminating by limit processing or terminating by exhausting the number of remaining games), all information regarding the terminating state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the range of playability after a predetermined gaming state is completed.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, normal section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, usually advantageous) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART"), which is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the second notification state is started. A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the second notification state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an operation reception that can accept a reset operation at the end of the second notification state by the state control means. Further including means (for example, a main control board 71), the state control means starts a non-notification state after the end of the second notification state when the operation reception means receives the reset operation, and the operation accepts the operation. When the receiving means does not accept the reset operation, the first notification state is started after the end of the second notification state.

According to such a gaming machine, a reset operation can be accepted at the end of the second notification state, and when the player performs the reset operation, the state shifts to the non-notification state after the end of the second notification state. If the reset operation is not performed, the state shifts to the first notification state after the end of the second notification state. The first notification state is a notification state in which the mode of the stop operation is notified, and is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the second notification state. Therefore, when the state shifts to the first notification state without performing the reset operation, , You can expect to shift (pull back) to the finished second notification state. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated (limit processing). ). Here, when the reset operation is not performed, since the notification state (first notification state) is still in effect even after the end of the second notification state, the numerical value related to the notification state continues to be counted, and then the limit processing is performed. It will be easier. Therefore, if the reset operation is not performed, the pullback can be expected, but there is a demerit that the limit processing is easily performed. For the player, since the selection of whether or not to perform the reset operation is performed after considering the merits and demerits, it is possible to give strategicity to the selection after the second notification state is completed. , The range of playability can be expanded.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability that the first notification state satisfies the predetermined start condition may be higher than that in the non-notification state.

According to such a gaming machine, it is easier to shift to the second notification state when the state shifts to the first notification state without performing the reset operation, so it is strategic to select after the second notification state ends. It is possible to have a wide range of playability.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of playability after the predetermined gaming state is completed.

[Appendix 18]
The gaming machines of Appendix 18 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 increases the number of AT games when a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role (the number of AT games is increased). The gaming machine (to be added) is disclosed.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine equipped with the AT function, since the gaming state is advantageous for the player during the AT period in which the navigation is performed, the player only plays the game aiming at the AT period, and the gaming property Was monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A first game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game using the above, and a first number counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation. When the numerical value reaches a specific value (for example, 1500 times), a game that performs limit processing for ending the notification state and starting a non-notification state (for example, a normal section) regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued. In the machine, a specific result display (for example, 7-match replay) is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of combinations, and a predetermined operation different from the specific operation mode is derived. It relates to a specific combination (for example, "F_selection number rip") from which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in the embodiment, and the operation of the replay. With the RT state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a high RT state in which the replay combination is included and the specific result display is derived, and the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is high. A state start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the notification state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, and a second numerical value relating to the notification state when the state start means starts the notification state. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific result display (for example, 7-match replay) are derived in the notification state, the notification state is terminated and the non-notification state is started. When the state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific combination (for example, "F_selection number lip") are determined as the winning combination during the notification state, the specific operation mode (for example, 7) is determined. A notification means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) capable of notifying a stop operation necessary for displaying a uniform replay) is further provided, and the notification means is the counting. Until the second numerical value counted by the means reaches a predetermined value, the second numerical value becomes a predetermined value without notifying the specific operation mode even when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. It is characterized by notifying the specific operation mode when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination after reaching the winning combination.

According to such a gaming machine, when a specific result display is derived, the notification state ends and the non-notification state is entered, but a high RT state with a high probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is started. To. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification state ends and the non-notification state is entered, the high RT state starts. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to realize the gameability aiming at the transition from the notified state to the non-notified state (high RT), and the improvement of the interest is improved. You can expect it. Here, the specific result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode when the specific combination is won, but when the specific combination is won during the notification state, this specific operation mode is notified. There are times. Specifically, the specific stop mode is not notified until the second numerical value counted during the notification state reaches a predetermined value, but the specific stop mode is notified after the predetermined value is reached. As a result, if the player stays in the notification state for a certain period of time, it can be expected to shift to a high RT (a specific stop mode is notified). Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period during the notification state. Can be set as the ceiling period to high RT, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the state start means starts the notification state, a predetermined value setting means (for example, main control) that determines one numerical value from a plurality of numerical values and sets it as the predetermined value. The substrate 71) may be further provided.

According to such a gaming machine, since the period until a specific stop mode is notified can be arbitrarily set, the ceiling period to the high RT changes each time, and the interest of the game is improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability.

[Appendix 19]
The gaming machines of Appendix 19 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (notifying), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if the notification period (AT) continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), it is compulsory regardless of the number of remaining games. Discloses a gaming machine that performs limit processing to end the notification period. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, since it is not possible to make different probabilities such as high probability / low probability regarding the transition from the non-notification period to the notification period, the notification period is divided into the first section and the second section. , The second section is set during AT in the conventional gaming machine, and the probability difference to shift to AT (second section) is provided by making a difference in the transition probability to the second section during the first section. It is supposed to be. However, since the first section is included in the notification period, in such control, when the first section continues for a long period of time and then shifts to the second section (AT section), the notification period becomes the upper limit (1500 times). It will be easier to reach, and there is a risk that it will spoil the interest of the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of the player while suppressing the increase in gambling. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART"), which is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and when the first condition is satisfied in the non-notification state (for example, a normal section), When the gaming state shifts to the first notification state and the second condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, the gaming state shifts to the second notification state, and when the third condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the game is played. When the state shifts to the non-notification state and the fourth condition is satisfied in the first notification state, a state control means for shifting the gaming state to the second notification state is further provided, and the second notification is provided in the non-notification state. The probability of satisfying the second condition that triggers the transition to the state is higher than the probability of satisfying the third condition that triggers the transition to the second notification state in the first notification state.

According to such a game machine, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the notification state ( The first notification state and the second notification state) do not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily enhanced. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition to the second notification state, which is more advantageous for the player, may be performed from the first notification state or may be performed from the non-notification state. It is easier to shift to the second notification state from the non-notification state than from the notification state. As a result, the main route to the second notification state is not to shift from the non-notification state to the second notification state via the first notification state, but to shift from the first notification state to the second notification state via the non-notification state. It is possible to realize playability as a transition route. By doing so, when the state shifts to the second notification state, the gaming state immediately before that is often in the non-notification state, and as a result, the numerical value counted for the limit processing also shifts to the second notification state. It is reset once just before the migration of. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, while preventing the gambling from being unnecessarily increased by performing the limit processing, the numerical value used for the limit processing is set before the start of the second notification state. It does not count wastefully and does not spoil the interest of the player.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of the player while suppressing the increase in gambling.

[Appendix 20]
The gaming machines of Appendix 20 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") by a player, a plurality of symbols are each inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the machine is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is combined. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-104425 discloses a gaming machine having a plurality of modes for determining the transition probability to AT.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since there is a difference in the transition probability for each mode, the expectation of transition to AT changes according to the current mode, and although the interest of the game is improved, the transition to AT is improved. In a situation where a mode with a low probability is suggested, there is a risk that the motivation for playing the game will be impaired and the interest in the game will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in playing motivation when staying in a state that is not advantageous to the player. And.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be stopped and operated by a player corresponding to a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information and the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R), a variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and the above. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of a start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of stop operating means. A gaming machine provided with a stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on a stop operation via the machine. , The gaming state in which the game is played has a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. As the internal winning combination, the first winning combination (for example, "F_BB2 + special combination") in which the bonus combination and the specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, and at least the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, the type of the winning combination that is duplicated has a second winning combination (for example, "F_BB2") different from the first winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means is the first winning combination or the first winning combination. One of the second winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of the plurality of set values, and the other is determined as the internal winning combination with a different probability in at least a part of the plurality of set values. When the winning combination is determined as a combination and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, the first privilege (for example, a benefit based on common processing) regardless of the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. (For example, the main control board 71) and the combination of the first winning combination or the second winning combination (for example, “F_BB2 + special combination”) having no setting difference in the normal state. The second privilege is further provided with an individual processing means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of imparting a second privilege (for example, a privilege based on special processing) when determined as the internal winning combination. , It is a feature that it is a big privilege compared with the first privilege.

According to such a gaming machine, the privilege given according to the gaming state when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination differs. Specifically, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the first privilege is given regardless of the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus combination is given during the normal state. Once determined as the internal winning combination, the second benefit is granted only if the determined combination is a combination with no setting difference. At this time, since the second privilege is a larger privilege than the first privilege, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a larger second privilege is received during a relatively disadvantageous normal state. Can be done. As a result, even if you are staying in a normal state that is not advantageous to the player, there is a chance of a big privilege (second privilege) that you can not receive during the advantageous state, so you will be motivated to play during the normal state. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, the second privilege that can be given during the normal state is a high setting even if it is a low setting (easy to stay in the normal state), which is given when a combination with no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. Since the second privilege can be granted without change, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for playing due to the setting situation.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means is used when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the second winning combination. It is characterized in that the same result display is derived at the time of variable stop of the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in the game in which the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. ..

According to such a gaming machine, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the same result display is derived at the time of winning the first winning combination and at the time of winning the second winning combination, for example. , Even if the winning combination with no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the winning combination with the setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether a winning combination with no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, the winning combination with no setting difference has a greater privilege to be given to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination during the normal state than to be determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state. Therefore, by controlling the game machine as in the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of loss and to prevent the player from losing his / her interest.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced when he / she stays in a state that is not advantageous to the player.

[Appendix 21-Appendix 26]
The gaming machines of Appendix 21 to Appendix 26 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine having an AT function, since the gaming during AT (specific gaming state) is a gaming simply waiting for navigation, there is a problem that the gaming during AT becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying games in a specific gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of the appendix 21 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (E.g., AT), and a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined gaming state, and in each game of the specific gaming state, game information (for example, for example). Numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (for example, the winning combination, the number of AT stocks, the number of remaining games of AT, etc.). When the numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of calculating the above and the numerical value information calculated by the numerical value calculation means exceed the threshold value, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state is changed (for example). , 768 pt is further provided with an extended information changing means (eg, main control circuit 91) capable of disabling the black BAR.

According to such a gaming machine, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state changes according to the numerical information regarding the amount of gaming value that can be given in the specific gaming state, and thus the extension information is changed during the specific gaming state. The game will be diversified and the interest of the game will be improved. Since the numerical information is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated every game, and the game playability can be further diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of roles include a specific combination (for example, a fixed combination) in which the expected degree of extension of the gaming period in the specific gaming state is relatively higher than that of other combinations. The extended information changing means is characterized in that when the numerical information exceeds the threshold value, the expected extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state based on the specific combination is lowered (for example, invalidated). ..

According to such a gaming machine, if the numerical information does not exceed the threshold value, the gaming period of the specific gaming state is likely to be extended according to the winning of the specific combination, but if the numerical information exceeds the threshold value, the game period is likely to be extended. , Even if a specific role is won, it is difficult to extend the game period in a specific game state. For the player, since the profits obtained differ depending on the winning timing of the specific role, the playability in the specific game state is diversified. Further, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the numerical information is when the player has already obtained or can obtain a lot of profits in the specific game state. Exceeds the threshold. In such a case, by lowering the extension expectation, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. ..

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 22 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the plurality of combinations have a stop operation in a specific operation mode. When performed, a specific result display is derived, and when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display different from the specific result display is derived. A plurality of specific combinations (for example, fixed combinations) are included, and in each game in the specific gaming state, game information (for example, winning combination, number of AT stocks, number of remaining AT games, etc.) is acquired and acquired. Numerical value calculation means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of calculating numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding a game value amount that can be given in the specific game state according to the game information, and the numerical value calculation means. A target combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific combination that notifies the predetermined operation mode when the winning combination is determined according to the numerical information calculated by When the specific combination of the type determined by the target combination determination means is determined as the winning combination, the specific combination is further provided with a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the predetermined operation mode. Among the corresponding result displays, the specific result display derived when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is a result display unique to each of the plurality of specific combinations (for example, "C_black BAR"). The predetermined result display derived when the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode is a combination other than the specific combination among the plurality of combinations (for example, a combination other than the specific combination). , "F_normal rip 1", etc.) is a general-purpose result display (for example, "C_TL rip") that can be derived even when the winning combination is determined, and the target combination determining means responds to the numerical information. , The specific combination of notifying the predetermined operation mode is increased.

According to such a gaming machine, the types of specific combinations that notify a predetermined operation mode increase according to the numerical information regarding the amount of gaming value that can be given in a specific gaming state. Since the derived result display differs between the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode and the case where the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the specific combination notifies the predetermined operation mode. The result display during a specific game state differs depending on whether the number of roles is small or large, the outcomes (result display) that the player pays attention to are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.
Here, the result display derived when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode is a result display peculiar to each of the plurality of specific combinations, while the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode. The result display derived in the case is a general-purpose result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the specific role is won or another role is won from the derived predetermined result display (general purpose), and the variation of the outcome is not noticed by the player. You can control different states.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of specific combinations are expected to extend the gaming period of the specific gaming state when the winning combination is determined as compared with other combinations. The target combination determining means is characterized in that, among the plurality of specific combinations, the specific combination with the highest expectation is determined in order as the specific combination for notifying the predetermined operation mode.

According to such a gaming machine, notification is performed so that a predetermined result display (general purpose) is derived in order from a specific combination having a high expectation of extending the gaming period in a specific gaming state. From the player's point of view, once a predetermined result display (general purpose) is derived, it is not possible to grasp the winning of a specific role, and therefore it is not possible to have expectations for the extension of the game period, which is not preferable. However, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, it is a specific role when the player has already obtained a lot of profits in a specific game state or can obtain it in the future. It hides the winnings and does not give an unacceptable disadvantage to the player, but on the contrary, it can prevent excessive immersiveness.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 23 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the plurality of combinations have a stop operation in a specific operation mode. When a unique result display (for example, "C_black BAR lip", "C_W aligned lip", etc.) is derived and the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode different from the specific operation mode. A specific role (for example, a definite role) from which a general-purpose result display (for example, "C_TL lip") can be derived even when another role (for example, "F_normal lip 1") is determined as a winning combination is derived. ) Is included, and the privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of granting the privilege related to the specific gaming state, and the game information (for example, the winning combination, the stock of AT) in each game of the specific gaming state. Numerical calculation that can calculate numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (number, number of remaining games of AT, etc.) When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the specific gaming state, the first privilege triggered by the specific combination according to the numerical information in the game. When the first privilege granting determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to grant the first privilege and the first privilege granting determination means decide not to grant the first privilege, the specific combination is determined. In a game after the game determined as the winning combination (for example, at the end of AT), it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the second privilege of the granting opportunity different from the granting opportunity of the first privilege. A second privilege grant determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a notification means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the player of the operation mode when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. If the first privilege granting determination means determines that the first privilege is to be granted, the privilege granting means can grant the first privilege in the wake of the winning of the specific combination. The second privilege granting determination means gives the second privilege. If it is decided to grant the second privilege, the second privilege can be given as a trigger of the determination of the second privilege granting determination means, and the notification means has to give the first privilege by the first privilege granting determining means. Once determined, it is characterized in that the player is notified of the predetermined operation mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the first privilege can be given as a trigger of the winning of a specific role, and if the first privilege is not given, the second privilege can be given in the subsequent game. .. Here, if the first privilege is not given, a general-purpose result display is derived as the result display as a result of being notified of the predetermined operation mode. For the player, although the first privilege is not given and there is actually a disadvantage, the general-purpose result display is derived so that the player does not feel a sense of loss. It doesn't make you feel dissatisfied. On the other hand, if the first privilege is not granted, then the second privilege can be granted, so that the actual disadvantage can be compensated for and the player is given an unnecessary disadvantage. There is no. By making it possible to grant the first privilege or the second privilege according to the winning of the specific role in this way, the privilege associated with the winning of the specific role can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second privilege granting determining means determines that the first privilege granting determining means does not grant the first privilege, the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When the numerical information in the later game exceeds the threshold value (for example, 1024 pt), it is determined not to grant the second privilege.

According to such a gaming machine, when the numerical information exceeds the threshold value, the second privilege is not given. Here, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the numerical value is obtained when the player has already obtained or can obtain a large amount of profit in the specific game state. Information exceeds the threshold. In such a case, by not giving the second privilege, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. Can be done.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of the appendix 24 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. A game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state are included, and each game in the specific game state is given in the current game. Information on the amount of game value to be played (for example, winning combination or number of payouts) is acquired, and first numerical information (for example, first numerical value information on the amount of game value given so far in the specific gaming state) is obtained according to the acquired information. , Cumulative points) and the remaining stock number of the specific gaming state and the rest of the specific gaming state in each game of the specific gaming state and the first numerical value calculating means (for example, the main control circuit 91). It is possible to acquire the game period and calculate the second numerical information (for example, possession points) regarding the amount of game value that can be granted in the specific game state in the future according to the acquired number of remaining stocks and the remaining game period. The second numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the third numerical value information (for example) regarding the game value amount that can be given in the specific gaming state according to the calculated first numerical value information and the second numerical value information. For example, when the third numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of calculating the AT point) and the third numerical value information calculated by the third numerical value calculation means exceed the threshold value, the specific gaming state is set. It is further provided with an extension information changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of changing the extension information regarding the extension of the game period (for example, disabling the black BAR when it exceeds 768 pt).

According to such a gaming machine, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state changes according to the third numerical information regarding the gaming value amount that can be given in the specific gaming state, and thus the specific gaming state. The games inside will be diversified, and the fun of the games will improve. Here, the third numerical information includes the first numerical information regarding the game value amount given so far, and the second numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in the future calculated according to the remaining stock number and the remaining game period. Since it is calculated based on It is possible to diversify the playability while preventing the above. Since the third numerical information (first numerical information) is updated in each game in a specific gaming state, the extension information can be updated for each game, and the game playability can be further diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a gaming period determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of consuming the remaining stock number of the specific gaming state to determine the remaining gaming period of the specific gaming state. The second numerical value calculating means may be given based on the remaining gaming period of the specific gaming state according to the expected value of the gaming value amount given per unit game of the specific gaming state. The fourth numerical information (for example, 7 pt per 1 G) regarding the game value amount is calculated, the expected value of the remaining game period determined by the game period determining means from each remaining stock number, and the specific game state. Fifth numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given based on the number of remaining stocks in the specific game state according to the expected value of the amount of game value given per unit game (for example, 600 pt per stock). The second numerical information is calculated by calculating the fourth numerical information and the fifth numerical information, and the game period determining means consumes the remaining stock number to consume the remaining game. When the period is determined, it is calculated based on the remaining gaming period determined according to the remaining stock number of the consumed amount, instead of the fifth numerical information calculated based on the remaining stock number of the consumed amount. It is characterized in that the second numerical information is calculated by using the fourth numerical information.

According to such a gaming machine, the exact value of the amount of gaming value that can be granted in the future is not known from the number of remaining stocks in a specific gaming state or the remaining gaming period, but from the expected value per unit in the future. It is possible to obtain a value close to the amount of game value that can be given. Then, by using this value to change the extension information regarding the extension of the game period, it is possible to diversify the game playability while preventing excessive immersiveness. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the remaining gaming period can be determined by consuming the remaining stock number, but in this case, instead of the expected value of the remaining gaming period for the remaining stock number consumed. By using the remaining game period specifically determined by consuming the remaining stock number, numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be granted in the future is calculated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately manage the numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 25 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (E.g., AT), and a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined gaming state, and in each game of the specific gaming state, game information (for example, for example). Numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (for example, the winning combination, the number of AT stocks, the number of remaining games of AT, etc.). (For example, a main control circuit 91) and a 2-byte counter (for example, a counter for an AT point, a main control circuit 91) capable of counting the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means. Further, an extension information changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of changing the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state when the numerical information counted by the counter becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value is further provided. The threshold value is a predetermined number of times 256.

According to such a gaming machine, when the numerical information regarding the amount of gaming value that can be given in a specific gaming state exceeds the threshold value, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period in the specific gaming state changes, so that the specific gaming state The games inside will be diversified, and the fun of the games will improve. Since the numerical information is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated every game, and the game playability can be further diversified. Further, since the threshold value is a predetermined several times a value of 256, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the extension information changing means compares the value of the upper byte of the 2-byte counter with the predetermined number, and the value of the upper byte is equal to or more than the predetermined number. In a certain case, it is characterized in that it is determined that the numerical information is equal to or higher than the threshold value.

According to such a gaming machine, it is sufficient to have only data (1 byte data) comparable to the upper byte as a threshold value, so that the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 26 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. Has a plurality of gaming states including a gaming state (for example) and a specific gaming state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, between predetermined games (for example, 5 games). A history display means (for example, display unit 100) capable of displaying winning combination information (for example, history information of winning combination) related to the winning combination, and a specific combination (for example, rare role) in the specific gaming state. When the winning combination is determined, the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means is the first winning combination information (for example, jewel (red)) or the second winning combination information (for example, jewel (white)). When the history type determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to play the game and the history type determining means determine the first winning combination information, the second winning combination information is thereafter between the predetermined games. A privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege with a higher probability than when the above is determined, and game information (for example, winning combination, number of AT stocks, etc.) in each game in the specific gaming state. Numerical calculation means (for example, AT points) capable of acquiring numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (such as the number of remaining games of AT). For example, the main control circuit 91) is further provided, and the history display means displays the first winning combination information when the history type determining means determines the first winning combination information, and also displays the first winning combination information. When the means determines the second winning combination information, the second winning combination information is displayed, and the history type determining means displays the winning combination on the history display means according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical value calculating means. It is characterized in that it is determined whether the combination information is the first winning combination information or the second winning combination information.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first winning combination information is determined in connection with the winning of a specific combination, the probability of granting the privilege increases during the subsequent predetermined games. Here, since the winning combination information is displayed in the history display means, when the first winning combination information is displayed in the history display means, the player expects that the privilege will be given in the subsequent game. Will play a game. As described above, since the subsequent game playability differs depending on the display content of the history display means, it is possible to diversify the game in a specific game state.
At this time, whether to determine the first winning combination information or the second winning combination information at the time of winning the specific winning combination is determined according to the numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific gaming state. The probability of granting benefits changes accordingly, and various playability can be realized.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an invalidation control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to make a lottery invalid state according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical value calculation means. When the invalidity control means determines that the lottery invalid state is set, the history type determining means always determines the second winning combination information as the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means. When the invalidity control means does not determine that the lottery invalid state is set, the first winning combination information is determined as the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means with a predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the lottery is invalid, only the second winning combination information, which has a low probability of granting a privilege even if a specific combination is won, is determined, which is not preferable for the player. However, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the lottery invalid state means that the player has already obtained a lot of profits in the specific game state or will obtain it in the future. This is a case where it does not give an unacceptable disadvantage to the player, but on the contrary, it is possible to prevent excessive devotion.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is further provided with a lock control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state for stopping the progress of the game when the privilege granting means grants the privilege. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, a locked state is generated when the privilege is granted, so that the player can know that the privilege has been granted.

[Appendix 27]
The gaming machines in Appendix 27 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In a conventional gaming machine having an AT function, even if an AT is won, it waits in the winning state, and when the AT start condition is satisfied in the winning state, it is widely practiced to actually start the AT. There is. By the way, in the conventional gaming machine that stands by in such a winning state, information advantageous to the player is notified even while waiting, and in particular, the notification probability between the waiting state and the AT. There was no difference. Therefore, even in the standby state, the same feeling of ball ejection as during AT can be obtained, and the playability is not sharp.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and the game has a sharp playability between the specific gaming state and the standby gaming state, which is the waiting period until the specific gaming state is started. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the plurality of combinations are defined as a winning combination. A notification target combination that can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is included, and the game state in which the game is performed is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (for example, the AT non-winning game state) and the predetermined game state. Specific gaming state (for example, AT or specialized zone) and standby gaming state (for example, waiting state until AT is started (specialized zone preparation)) which is a waiting period until the specific gaming state is started. A first notification mode (for example,) as a notification mode having a plurality of gaming states including) and having a different probability of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. The special mode is ON) and the second notification mode (for example, the special mode is OFF) having a higher probability than the first notification mode, and the first transition condition (for example, winning the AT lottery) is set in the predetermined gaming state. If it is satisfied, the gaming state can be shifted to the standby gaming state, and if the second transition condition (for example, winning the special zone start lottery) is satisfied in the standby gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the specific gaming state. When the game state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that can be transferred and the game state shifts from the predetermined game state to the standby game state, the first notification mode can be set as the notification mode, and the first notification mode can be set. When the gaming state shifts from the standby gaming state to the specific gaming state, the notification mode setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of setting the second notification mode as the notification mode and the first notification mode are described. When the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, the advantageous stop operation mode can be notified with a predetermined probability, and the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination in the second notification mode. It is further provided with a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode with a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the state shifts to the standby gaming state, which is the waiting period until the specific gaming state is started, the first notification mode is set as the notification mode, so that the notification probability is high during the standby gaming state. It is low, and it is difficult to notify the advantageous stop operation mode even if the notification target combination is won. On the other hand, when the standby game state is changed to the specific game state, the second notification mode can be set as the notification mode. Therefore, the notification probability is high during the specific game state, and the stop is advantageous when the notification target combination is won. The mode of operation is notified. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the notification probability is different between the specific gaming state and the standby gaming state, the feeling of the ball coming out in both gaming states becomes sharp and the interest is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are a plurality of RT states including a first RT state and a second RT state as RT states in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different, and the plurality of combinations include the plurality of RT states. The first result display (for example, a replay other than the XD lip) can be derived when the winning combination is determined in the first RT state, and the first result is determined as the winning combination in the second RT state. When a specific combination whose display cannot be derived (for example, an XD lip is displayed) is included and the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the standby game state, the game state control means said the specific game. The gaming state can be shifted to the state, and when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the standby gaming state and the first result display is derived, the notification mode setting means is the first notification mode. 2 The feature is that the notification mode can be set.

According to such a gaming machine, the transition from the standby gaming state to the specific gaming state is performed only when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, but the switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode is performed. , It is not performed only when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, but is performed when the first result display is derived. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification probability may be low even in the specific gaming state. Here, the first result display can be derived when the RT state when the specific combination is won is the first RT state, but is not derived when the RT state is the second RT state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification probability of the specific gaming state to be started after that can be made different according to the RT state during the standby gaming state. It can produce sharpness.

[Appendix 28]
The gaming machines of Appendix 28 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In the past, AT machines and ART machines used to navigate under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profits of the player (so-called ball ejection). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the conventional case, the navigation has a meaning as a production, and the navigation content on the sub side may not match the navigation content on the main side. As an example, in a specification having a three-choice push order combination that requires only the first stop operation and a six-choice push order combination that requires the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the winning of the three-choice push order combination. Occasionally, the main side navigates according to the three-choice push order, while the sub-side dares to make it difficult to tell whether it is a six-choice push order or a three-choice push order. There were times when navigation was performed according to the order in which the was pressed. In such a control, although various navigations can be produced by the navigation on the sub side, it is not preferable because the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side do not match.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is intended to provide a gaming machine capable of various navigations in a dramatic manner while matching the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side. The purpose.

The gaming machine according to the present invention changes the symbols by rotating a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and when a start operation is detected. When the stop operation is detected while displaying, the symbol is stopped and displayed by stopping the rotation of the reel according to the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations, so that the progress of the game using the reel is displayed. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the game and an effect control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) capable of controlling the effect related to the game, and the game machine having a plurality of roles. Can stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols when the mode of the M-stop operation (for example, the first stop operation), which is the stop operation for the reel that stops at the M-th position, is appropriate, and the M-stop can be displayed. A plurality of first-choice combinations (for example, three-choice push order combinations) in which the combination of the predetermined symbols cannot be stopped and displayed when the operation mode is not appropriate, and the mode of the M stop operation are appropriate and , A specific combination of symbols can be stopped and displayed when the mode of the Nth stop operation (for example, the second stop operation) after the M stop operation is appropriate, and the mode of the M stop operation or A plurality of second-choice combinations (for example, a six-choice push order combination) in which the combination of the specific symbols cannot be stopped and displayed when the mode of the N-th stop operation is not appropriate are included, and the plurality of combinations are included. In the first alternative number combination, when the M stop operation is the first stop mode (for example, the right 1st), the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the stop can be stopped. When the mode of operation is different from the first stop mode, the specific first-choice combination that cannot stop and display the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, the right 1st is the correct three-choice push order combination). ) Is included, and the plurality of second alternative combinations include a second stop mode (for example, the M stop operation is the first aspect and the N stop operation is the second aspect). , Right and left middle push order), the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and when the mode of the stop operation is different from the second stop mode, the combination of the specific symbols The specific second-choice combination that cannot be stopped and displayed (for example, the right and left middle is the correct 6-choice push order combination), the M-stop operation is the first mode, and the N-stop operation is In the case of the third stop mode (for example, right middle left), which is the third aspect, the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the mode of the stop operation is different from the third stop mode. In this embodiment, the game control includes a predetermined second-choice number combination (for example, a six-choice push order combination in which the right, middle, and left are correct answers) in which the combination of the specific symbols cannot be stopped and displayed. The main side notifying means (for example,) that is controlled by means and can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation when the first-choice combination or the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state. , Main control circuit 91, instruction monitor) and the effect control means, and when the first-choice combination or the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the player Further, a sub-side notification means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a display unit 100) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation is further provided, and the specific first-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state. The main side notifying means notifies the second stop mode or the third stop mode (for example, "5" or "6" in the instruction monitor), and the sub side notifying means is the main side notifying means. When the second stop mode is notified, the second stop mode (for example, right and left middle) is notified, and when the main side notification means notifies the third stop mode, the third stop mode (for example, right and left middle) is notified. , Right middle left), and when the specific second alternative number combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the main side notification means and the sub side notification means have the second stop mode (for example, the second stop mode (for example). When "5" is notified to the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 is notified (in the middle right and left) and the predetermined second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the main side notification means and the sub-side notification means are activated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the third stop mode (for example, "6" to the instruction monitor, right middle left to the display unit 100) is notified.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination, both the main-side notification means and the sub-side notification means are appropriate stop operation modes for the winning second-choice combination. Is notified. On the other hand, when the first-choice combination is determined as the winning combination, the main-side notification means also notifies the mode of the Nth stop operation that is not required by the first-choice combination, and the sub-side notification. The means notifies the content corresponding to the main side notification means. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform various navigations in a dramatic manner while matching the navigation contents on the main side with the navigation contents on the sub side.

[Appendix 29]
The gaming machines in Appendix 29 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, as a gaming machine having such an AT function, there is also known a gaming machine capable of shifting to an additional section having a high probability of extending the AT period when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the additional section is also in AT, information advantageous to the player was notified even during the additional section. However, in such a gaming machine, in addition to the privilege of increasing the probability of extending the AT period during the additional section, the privilege of notifying the player of information advantageous to the player is given to the player. It was not preferable because the benefits given were too large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of within an appropriate range of benefits given to a player during an additional section without impairing the playability of the additional section. The purpose is.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the specific game state includes a normal section (for example, AT). It has an additional section (for example, CZ during AT) with a higher expectation of extending the gaming period in the specific gaming state than the normal section, and the plurality of combinations are stopped by a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a batting order bell) in which the game value amount given when the game is played is different from the game value amount given when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode is included. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the specific gaming state, the notification means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the specific operation mode and the normal section of the specific gaming state. When the start condition is satisfied, the additional section of the specific gaming state can be started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the additional section can be ended (for example, the additional section control means). , Main control circuit 91), and the notification means has a predetermined probability of the specific operation mode when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the normal section of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the specific operation mode is notified with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. And.

According to such a gaming machine, when the normal section of a specific gaming state is shifted to the additional section, the expectation of extending the gaming period of the specific gaming state is high, while the notification frequency when the specific combination is won is high. Will be low. As a result, it is possible to keep the privilege given to the player during the additional section within an appropriate range without impairing the playability of the additional section, which is the extension of the game period. Further, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, by lowering the notification frequency during the addition section, the ratio can be passed to other parts. For example, a gaming machine having a high notification frequency even during the addition section. Compared with this, it is possible to increase the frequency of transition to the additional section and increase the expectation of additional addition during the additional section.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an additional control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of extending the gaming period in the specific gaming state according to the winning combination determined in the specific gaming state. Further, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the normal section of the specific gaming state, the addition control means does not extend the gaming period of the specific gaming state, while the specific gaming state. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the additional section of the state, the gaming period of the specific gaming state can be extended.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the frequency of notification when a specific combination is won in the additional section is low, so that it is not preferable for the player to win the specific combination in the addition section. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming period is not extended even if the specific combination is won in the normal section of the specific gaming state, but in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the gaming period is extended when the specific combination is won. May be extended. As a result, even if a specific role is won during the additional section, the player does not feel dissatisfied, so that the interest of the game during the additional section is improved.

[Appendix 30]
The gaming machines in Appendix 30 are as follows.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine that grants a privilege by referring to the history of past gaming results is also known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2523112, the winning history for five games is displayed according to a predetermined condition. At the same time, a gaming machine that holds the winning history data and performs an ART lottery based on the winning history corresponding to the condition code data is disclosed.

According to such a gaming machine, not only the current game but also the history of past games is taken into consideration for control, so that various playability can be realized, but depending on the result of this game. Only one condition code data was satisfied, and there was room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of history control which has never existed before.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a gaming control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the plurality of combinations are included in a first group (for example, a replay group). Specifics belonging to both the first group and the second group (for example, "F_normal lip 1"), the role belonging to the second group (for example, the rare role group) (for example, "F_weak chance", etc.) A history management means (for example, a main control circuit) that includes a combination (for example, "F_chance lip") and can manage winning combination information regarding a winning combination determined as a winning combination during a predetermined game (for example, between 5 games). 91) and the first history condition (for example, winning a history lottery performed by three or more rips) that can be satisfied when a combination belonging to the first group is determined as a winning combination during the predetermined game is satisfied. (For example, CZ) can be granted, and the second history condition (for example, three or more rare roles) that can be satisfied when the combination belonging to the second group is determined as the winning combination during the predetermined game. The special combination is further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of granting a second privilege (for example, AT) when the history lottery to be performed is satisfied. When both the first history condition and the second history condition are satisfied when the combination is determined, both the first privilege and the second privilege can be granted. do.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific role that belongs to both the first group that triggers the granting of the first privilege and the second group that triggers the granting of the second privilege. When the history of the winning combination between the predetermined games satisfies both the first privilege granting condition (first history condition) and the second privilege granting condition (second history condition). Both the first benefit and the second benefit are granted. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, since a plurality of benefits can be given as a trigger of winning a specific role, new history control that is not available in the conventional history control becomes possible. Become.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the number of times the combination belonging to the first group is determined as the winning combination during the predetermined game reaches the first number of times. In addition to being possible, the second privilege can be granted when the number of times the combination belonging to the second group is determined as the winning combination during the predetermined game reaches the second number, and the history management means is described as described above. When the specific combination is determined as a winning combination during a predetermined game, both the number of times the combination belonging to the first group is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the combination belonging to the second group is determined as the winning combination. Is characterized by being able to add.

According to such a gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, both the number of winnings of the winning combination belonging to the first group and the winning number of winnings of the winning combination belonging to the second group are added. The possibility that the condition for granting the privilege or the condition for granting the second privilege is satisfied increases, and the player can have expectations for the subsequent game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a history display means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a display unit 100) capable of displaying the winning combination information for the predetermined game space managed by the history management means. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp the winning combination information for the predetermined game interval, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix 31]
The gaming machines in Appendix 31 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, various measures have been taken to control the transition from a normal state to a specific gaming state (AT). For example, a mode for determining the transition probability to a specific gaming state. It is also known to have multiple controls to make the transition expectation different for each current mode. However, such control is adopted in many gaming machines, and simply providing a mode makes the game monotonous, and further improvement is required for the transition to a specific gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of new control with respect to a transition to a specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, CZ) as a game state for playing a game. , A plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a first-time bonus or a continuous bonus), and the specific gaming state includes a first section (for example, a small role game) and a second section (for example, JAC). If the first condition (for example, winning a replay) is satisfied in the first section of the specific gaming state, the gaming state can be transferred to the second section of the specific gaming state. , The specific gaming transition control means capable of transitioning the gaming state to the first section of the specific gaming state when the second condition (for example, after four games have elapsed) is satisfied in the second section of the specific gaming state. (For example, when the main control circuit 91) and the end condition (for example, when 25 small winning games have elapsed) are satisfied in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated and the predetermined gaming state is started. A possible end control means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a numerical value giving means that can give numerical information (for example, acquired points) according to a winning combination determined as a winning combination in the specific gaming state, and the above-mentioned identification. A plurality of counting means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of counting the total of the numerical value information given by the numerical value giving means in the gaming state of the above, and a plurality of different expectations for transition to the specific gaming state. One mode from the plurality of mode information according to the value obtained by summing up the numerical information having mode information (for example, score rank) and being counted by the counting means at the end of the specific gaming state. A mode determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining information and a specific game start for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state according to the one mode information in the predetermined gaming state. When the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the specific game start determination means are determined to shift to the specific game state, the start control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of starting the specific game state is determined. Further, the numerical value giving means can give more numerical information than the first section of the specific gaming state in the second section of the specific gaming state. And.

According to such a gaming machine, numerical information is given in a specific gaming state, and at the end of the specific gaming state, mode information that determines the degree of expectation of transition to the specific gaming state is provided according to the acquired numerical information. It is determined. In the predetermined gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state, and if it is decided to shift, the transition to the terminated specific gaming state is made again. .. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the game property of acquiring numerical information for re-shifting to the specific gaming state during the specific gaming state, and the result of the game during the specific gaming state is obtained. Correspondingly, the degree of expectation of returning to a specific gaming state changes again. For the player, the transition to a specific gaming state does not end, but the game is concentrated on the game during the specific gaming state. It can be realized.
Further, in the present invention, the specific gaming state is composed of the first section and the second section, and the second section is provided with more numerical information than the first section. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether it is the first section or the second section, the playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state has a first specific gaming state (for example, SBIG) and a second specific gaming state (for example, WBIG), and the specific gaming start determination is made. When it is determined that the means shifts to the specific gaming state, a type determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific gaming state to be started is further provided, and the start control means determines the type. When the means determines to start the first specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state is started, and when the type determining means determines to start the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state is started. The numerical value giving means is characterized in that, in the second specific gaming state, more numerical information can be given than in the first specific gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, more numerical information is given in the second specific gaming state than in the first specific gaming state. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether the player is in the first specific game state or the second specific game state, the playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming transition control means satisfies the first condition when a predetermined combination (for example, replay) is determined as a winning combination in the first section of the specific gaming state. Assuming that the condition is satisfied, the gaming state can be transferred to the second section of the specific gaming state, and the number of games played in the second section of the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 games). When it reaches, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the first section of the specific gaming state, assuming that the second condition is satisfied, and the end control means is performed in the second section of the specific gaming state. When the number of games played in the first section excluding the number of games played reaches a specific number of times (for example, when 25 small-role games excluding JAC games have elapsed), the above-mentioned specification is assumed that the end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that it is possible to end the gaming state of the above and start the predetermined gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific gaming state ends when the number of games played in the first section reaches the specific number of games regardless of the number of games played in the second section. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the second section in a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state does not end during the second section, and a lot of numerical information can be acquired in the second section. Therefore, as the number of transitions to the second section increases, it is possible to have the expectation that the game will return to a specific gaming state after the end.

[Appendix 32]
The gaming machines in Appendix 32 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the winning combination is not missed. The gaming machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that is advantageous to the player in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine having an AT function, an effect of notifying the success or failure of the transition to AT (special section) may be performed (for example, if it succeeds, it wins the transition to AT, and if it fails, it does not win). In the game machine of, such a production was sometimes canceled in the middle. If the production was canceled, the production effect of the production would be reduced and the interest would be reduced, so there was room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a decrease in the effect of producing an effect that informs the success or failure of the transition to a special section.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a gaming control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal section) as a gaming state for playing a game. The specific gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section), and the specific gaming state is composed of a production section (for example, a precursor) in which a predetermined number of games are played. It is composed of a specific gaming state (for example, a sign of a ghost), the effect section in which the predetermined number of games is performed, and a special section (for example, a pseudo-bonus and a continuous villa with a CZ) that is advantageous to the player thereafter. When a second specific gaming state (for example, a sign and a pseudo-bonus and a continuous villa with a CZ) is provided and a predetermined combination (for example, a rare role) is determined as a winning combination in the predetermined gaming state. When the type determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific gaming state and the type determining means determine to start the first specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state is started. Then, when the predetermined number of games are performed in the first specific gaming state and the effect section ends, the first gaming state in which the first specific gaming state can be terminated and the transition to the predetermined gaming state is possible. When the control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the type determining means determine to start the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state is started, and the predetermined in the second specific gaming state. When the number of games is played and the effect section is completed, the special section is started, and when the end condition of the special section is satisfied, the second specific gaming state is terminated and the predetermined gaming state is terminated. A second gaming state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that can be transferred to, and an effect execution means (for example, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect regarding success or failure of whether or not the special section is started in the effect section. For example, a sub-control circuit 101, a display unit 100), and a lock control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state for stopping the progress of the game at the end of the first specific game state. When the type determining means determines to start the first specific gaming state, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect using the effect section and the subsequent locked state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, when shifting from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, first, regardless of the type of the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state or second specific gaming state), first It shifts to the production section where a predetermined number of games are played. In this effect section, after that, a predetermined effect regarding success or failure of whether or not the special section is started is performed. Therefore, if the first specific game state is determined as the type of the specific game state, a failure effect is performed. Is performed, and when the second specific gaming state is determined as the type of the specific gaming state, a success effect is performed. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the locked state is generated at the end of the first specific gaming state, but in the first specific gaming state, the end time of the effect section coincides with the end time of the specific gaming state. Therefore, when the game shifts to the first specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed using the effect section and the subsequent locked state, and the predetermined effect is not canceled and the transition to the special section is performed. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect that informs the result.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the lock control means can generate a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the second specific gaming state, and the effect executing means is the type determination means. Is determined to start the second specific gaming state, it is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific effect regarding the gaming result of the special section by using the locked state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second specific gaming state, the end time of the special section coincides with the end time of the specific gaming state. Therefore, by executing the specific effect using the locked state, for example, It is possible to inform the player of the game result during the special section, such as the number of medals won during the special section. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by using the locked state at the end of the specific gaming state, a predetermined effect for notifying the success or failure of the transition to the special section and a specific effect for notifying the game result during the special section are appropriately performed. It can be carried out.

[Appendix 33]
The gaming machines in Appendix 33 are as follows.

Regarding this reel stop control, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497 describes a game in which the maximum number of sliding pieces is within the range of the maximum number of symbol sliding pieces constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. The machine (so-called No. 5 machine) is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, the control that does not stop and control despite the internal winning, which was possible with the conventional gaming machine (so-called No. 4 machine), is abolished, and if the corresponding combination of symbols is aimed at, Since it is possible to always arrange the combination of symbols according to the winning combination, it is possible to realize a fair game.

Further, as a gaming machine that performs such stop control, in recent years, a small role with a high winning probability such as a bell and a rare role having a low winning probability such as a watermelon are tempted at the time of the second stop, and at the time of the third stop. There is also known a gaming machine in which benefits such as bonuses are confirmed as a reach when no prize is won in any of the roles. However, in the conventional control in which the small role and the rare role are tempered, there is a problem that the stop operation of the player becomes complicated and troublesome. That is, when the small role and the rare role are tempted, the player will perform a stop operation so as not to miss the rare role, but the small role such as the bell is compared with the rare role and the bonus role. Since the winning probability is high, if the small role and the rare role are tempted, the bell will basically win, and it is unlikely that the rare role's winning or reach will be displayed. In the conventional control, it is necessary to perform a stop operation that does not miss the rare role even in such a case, and the player feels annoyed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to have a sense of expectation according to a stop result while simplifying a player's stop operation. The purpose is.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes reels of a predetermined number of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. It is a gaming machine that advances a game using the reels by stopping and displaying the symbol by stopping the rotation of the reel, and a unit symbol display that displays one symbol of each reel for the plurality of roles. A specific role (eg, bell) in which the first symbol (eg, bell) can be displayed side by side along a linear line (eg, center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up reel, cross-down line) connecting the regions. , "F_reel 2 bell A1" "F_reel 2 bell A2" "F_reel 2 bell B1" "F_reel 2 bell B2") and the second symbol (for example, watermelon) are displayed side by side along the line. A predetermined combination (for example, "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2") that can be played is included, and the specific combination includes a first specific combination (for example, "F_reel 2 bell A1" and "F_reel 2 bell"). A2 ”) and a second specific combination (for example,“ F_reel 2 bell B1 ”and“ F_reel 2 bell B2 ”) are included, and if the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the first probability is A privilege granting means (for example, a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege (for example, winning the first bonus) and can grant the privilege with a second probability higher than the first probability when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the winning combination. For example, the main control circuit 91) and the stop control means (for example, the main control means) capable of stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation according to the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations when the stop operation is detected. A control circuit 91) is further provided, and when the first specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the stop control means stops a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of reels. When the first symbol is tempted along the line, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the second symbol is not tempted, and the second specific combination is determined as the winning combination, a predetermined number At the time when a specific number of the reels among the reels are stopped, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that both the first symbol and the second symbol are tempered along the line, and the predetermined combination is achieved. When is determined as a winning combination, both the first symbol and the second symbol are tempted along the line when a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of the reels are stopped. So that the rotation of the reel is stopped and the front The probability that the specified combination is determined as the winning combination is higher than the probability that the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific combination has a high probability of being determined as the winning combination, but the expectation of granting the privilege is low, and the predetermined combination has a low probability of being determined as the winning combination, but the benefit is granted. High expectations. Both of these specific roles and predetermined roles may be tempted at the time of the second stop, but if the first specific role among the specific roles is determined as the winning combination, the predetermined role is specified without tempting. Only the role is tempted. From the player's point of view, it is not necessary to worry about missing a predetermined role until the first specific role, which has a high probability of winning and it is difficult to expect a privilege, to reduce the troublesomeness of the stop operation. Can be done.

Here, it is conceivable to consider a stop control in which the predetermined combination is not tempted when the specific combination is won, but the predetermined combination is tempted only when the predetermined combination is won. It can be simplified. However, although such stop control is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation, the winning combination can be grasped from the shape of the tempted stop roll, and the game becomes monotonous. Not preferable from the viewpoint. That is, when considering the playability, it is preferable to have a feeling of expectation that it may be a predetermined role from the shape of the stop roll.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second specific combination among the specific combinations is determined as the winning combination, both the specific combination and the predetermined combination are tempted, so that both are tempted. The appearance frequency of the eyes can be increased by the winning probability of the second specific role. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player has a role in which only the specific role of the first specific role is tempted and a role in which both the specific role and the predetermined role of the second specific role are tempted. While simplifying the stop operation, the player can have a sense of expectation according to the stop result.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for the plurality of roles, when a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of the reels are stopped, the first symbol and the second symbol are along the line. A special role (for example, "F_reach eye lip A1") in which both of the symbols of the above can be tempted and neither the specific role nor the predetermined role is won is further included, and the privilege granting means is the special role. When determined as a winning combination, the privilege is granted with a higher probability than the second probability.

According to such a gaming machine, if neither a specific role nor a predetermined role wins a prize in a game in which both of them are tempted, a privilege based on the special role is given. You can play the game with a sense of expectation.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability that the first specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the probability that the second specific combination is determined as the winning combination are different. ..

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the frequency of appearance of a stop roll in which only a specific role is tempted and a stop roll in which both a specific role and a predetermined role are tempted, according to the winning probability of each. can.

[Appendix 34]
The gaming machines in Appendix 34 are as follows.

As a gaming machine having an AT function, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169968 provides an advantageous section capable of notifying information that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous section (normal section) not notifying the information. Disclosed is a gaming machine that performs limit processing for forcibly ending an advantageous section regardless of the number of remaining games when the advantageous section continues for a long period of time (for example, when 1500 games have elapsed).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the profit obtained by the player during the advantageous section can be kept within a certain range, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased. However, if the advantageous section is executed multiple times in succession, the profit obtained in one advantageous section can be suppressed, but the profit obtained in the total of multiple times may become excessive. In such a case, the gambling of the game is unnecessarily increased.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing gambling.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the game used for the game from the game value amount given as a result of the game. Whether the number of acquired differences (for example, the number of differences) obtained by subtracting the value amount is counted by a counting means (for example, a counter for stopping) and the number of acquired differences counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold value (for example, 14500 sheets). When the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not the game is present and the determination means determine that the acquired difference number exceeds the threshold value, the game is in a stopped state in which it is impossible to continuously play the game. A stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a stop release means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that releases the stop state and enables the game to continue when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. Further prepared.

According to such a gaming machine, when the acquisition difference number of the gaming value after the power is turned on exceeds the threshold value, it becomes impossible to continuously play the gaming machine. As a result, even if the range is appropriate for each game, if an excessive profit (game value) is given in total, it is possible to forcibly put the game into a stop state where the game is impossible. The profit given to the person is not excessive, and the gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means is characterized in that when the acquired difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value, the acquired difference number is cleared to 0.

According to such a gaming machine, when the acquisition difference number is negative, the stop state can be determined based on the negative time point, so that the profit given to the player does not become excessive. , The gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state in which the game is played has a bonus state in which the bonus is activated and a non-bonus state in which the bonus is not activated, and the determination means is in the bonus state. Is characterized in that the determination is made at the end of the bonus state without making the determination at the end of the unit game.

According to such a gaming machine, since the pachinko machine is not stopped during the bonus state, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, AT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a non-bonus state in which the bonus is not activated, and the determination means. Is characterized in that, in the non-bonus state, the determination is made at the end of the unit game regardless of whether it is the normal state or the advantageous state.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to put it in a stopped state during an advantageous state that is not a bonus state. Since the duration of such an advantageous state may not be fixed and it is not known how long it will continue, the profit given to the player becomes excessive by stopping the advantageous state even during the advantageous state. It is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling without the problem.

[Appendix 35]
The gaming machines of Appendix 35 are as follows.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-181226 discloses a gaming machine that irradiates the outer peripheral side of a reel band mounted along the outer peripheral surface of a reel with illumination light from a position (front) facing the front surface of the reel. According to such a gaming machine, the player can visually recognize the symbol facing the display area among the plurality of symbols arranged on the reel band by the illumination light.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the amount of illumination light emitted from the front of the reel is constant regardless of the gaming state, so that the gaming is monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having intonation by using illumination light emitted from the front of a reel.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and rotates the reel according to a winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine that advances a game using the reel by stopping and displaying the symbol by stopping, and as a game state in which the game is performed, a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game) and a specific game. It has a plurality of gaming states including a state (for example, a bonus state), and when the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state, the specific gaming state can be started, and the end condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state. And the gaming state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of ending the specific gaming state and shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state, and the outer peripheral surface of the reel can be irradiated from the front surface of the reel. A lighting means (for example, an upper lamp) and a lighting control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of controlling the lighting state of the lighting means are further provided, and the lighting control means is provided in the predetermined gaming state. The lighting means is kept turned off, while the lighting means is kept turned on in the specific gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, the front surface of the reel is continuously illuminated by the lighting means, whereas in a predetermined gaming state, the front surface of the reel is held without being illuminated by the lighting means. Reel. As a result, the amount of illumination light of the reel changes according to the gaming state, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine with intonation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a lock control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state for stopping the progress of the game at the end of the specific gaming state, and the lighting control means is provided. The lighting means is switched from the off state to the lighting state at the start of the specific gaming state, and the lighting means is switched from the lighting state to the lighting state when the locked state is released with the end of the specific gaming state. And.

According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting state of the lighting means can be appropriately switched at the timing corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with intonation.

[Appendix 36]
The gaming machines of Appendix 36 are as follows.

As a fraudulent act against such a gaming machine, an external member provided outside the gaming machine is forcibly removed, and a fraudulent instrument such as a wire is inserted into the uncased end substrate exposed at that time to turn on the power supply. Goto acts such as illicit operations are known, and gaming machine makers are making various efforts to deal with such illicit acts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-114328 discloses a gaming machine that does not require a design change of the front door and has a simple and inexpensive structure to prevent fraudulent acts by a power supply goto.

By the way, in recent years, not only the power supply is illegally operated, but also the setting value that determines the profit degree of the gaming machine is illegally operated, and countermeasures against such illegal setting change are required. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting an unauthorized setting change.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming machine main body (cabinet 61) and a door body portion (front door) attached to the main body, and the game can be advanced by changing or stopping a plurality of identification displays. An open / closed state holding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that is a game machine and can hold an open / closed state of the door body portion at the time of power failure, and the open / closed state holding means holds when a setting change is accepted. An opening / closing determining means (for example, an auxiliary control circuit 101) for determining whether or not the door body is closed at the time of the power interruption with reference to the opening / closing state of the door body at the time of the power interruption. And, the opening / closing determining means is provided with a number counting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) capable of counting the number of times that the door body portion is determined to be closed at the time of the power failure due to the setting change. And.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of times of setting change in which the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change is totaled. Here, in the pachislot machine, the setting can be changed when the setting key (setting key type switch) is turned on while the power is off, and when the setting key is turned on while the power is on, it is simply the current one. You can only check the setting values, but you cannot change the settings. That is, in a pachi-slot machine, it is necessary to always turn off the power when changing the setting. When a clerk at a game store changes the settings properly, the power is usually turned off with the door body open. Therefore, in the regular setting change operation, the door body opens when the power is cut off due to the setting change. ing. On the other hand, when the Goto teacher or the like illegally changes the setting, the door body cannot be opened, so that the door body is closed when the power is cut off due to the setting change. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to detect an illegal setting change by totaling the number of setting changes in which the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming machine main body (cabinet 61) and a door body portion (front door) attached to the main body, and advances the game by changing or stopping a plurality of identification displays. An open / closed state holding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that is a possible gaming machine and can hold an open / closed state of the door body portion at the time of power failure, and the open / closed state holding means when a setting change is accepted. Refers to the open / closed state of the door body portion held by the door body portion at the time of power failure, and determines whether or not the door body portion is closed at the time of power failure (for example, an auxiliary control circuit). 101) and the warning output means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) capable of outputting predetermined warning information to the outside when the open / close determination means determines that the door body portion is closed at the time of the power failure due to the setting change. ) And.

According to such a gaming machine, when the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change, predetermined warning information is output to the outside, so that an illegal setting change can be detected.

[Appendix 37]
The gaming machines of Appendix 37 are as follows.

In such a gaming machine, a bet button operated by a player such as a MAX bet button or a 1-bet button is provided, and by operating the bet button, the number of medals corresponding to the operated button is this time. It is set as the number of sheets (number of bets) used for the game. Here, in recent years, a gaming machine having other functions in addition to the function for setting the number of bets on the bet button has been known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-170211 discloses a MAX bet button. A gaming machine that enables a button that functions as a bet button to also function as a button for directing is disclosed.

By the way, even in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the function as a bet button is only one, the MAX bet button is used for MAX bet, and the 1-bet button is used only for 1 bet. For the player, it may be preferable to make the number of bets different, so it is not enough to add other functions as in the above-mentioned gaming machine, and there is room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of unprecedented bet control using one bet button.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the first bet number (for example, 2 BET) and the first bet as a game state for playing a game. A bet operation means (for example, MAX) that has a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-notification state) in which a second bet number (for example, 3 BET) larger than the bet number can be played and can accept a bet operation by a player. The bet button 11) and a bet control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the number of bets in the current game when the bet operation means receives the bet operation are further provided, and the bet control means is provided. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the predetermined gaming state in which a game value larger than the second bet number is stored, the first bet number can be determined as the bet number of the current game. It is characterized by being.

According to such a gaming machine, when the bet operating means is operated in a predetermined gaming state in which both the first bet number and the second bet number can be played, the first bet number and the second bet number Either one can be determined as the number of bets for this game. Since it is possible to determine a plurality of bets using one bet operating means in this way, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform unprecedented bet control using one bet operating means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined gaming state is composed of a first section (first lottery state) and a second section (second lottery state), and the bet control means is the second bet. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the first section of the predetermined gaming state in which more game values than the number are stored, the second bet number can be determined as the bet number of the current game. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the second section of the predetermined gaming state in which the game value is stored more than the second bet number, the bet number of the current game is the same. The feature is that the number of first bets can be determined.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a betting control that has never existed in the past by using one betting operating means as in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a gaming state in which a game is played, a specific gaming state (for example, a notification state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is further provided, and the predetermined gaming state In the first section, when the transition determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the transition determining means shift to the specific gaming state. Once determined, a gaming state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state from the first section of the predetermined gaming state via the second section. Further prepared.

According to such a gaming machine, until the transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, the game of the second bet number is played, and after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. In the waiting section (second section) until the transition to the specific gaming state, the game with the first bet number smaller than the second bet number is played, so that one bet operation means is performed as in the above-mentioned gaming machine. Allows unprecedented bet control using.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Display unit, 147b ... Status indicator

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a variable display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays and a game control means for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. And,
As the game state in which the game is performed, there are a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state.
A numerical calculation means capable of acquiring game information in each game of the specific game state and calculating numerical information regarding a game value amount that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the specific gaming state, the notification means capable of executing the notification effect for notifying the predetermined information regarding the stop operation, and the notification means.
When the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means exceeds the first threshold value, the extension information changing means capable of changing the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state is used.
When the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means exceeds the second threshold value, the notification content changing means capable of changing the information of the stop operation to be notified in the notification effect is used.
An extension control means capable of executing a specific process relating to an extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state in the specific gaming state, and an extension control means.
Further prepare
The extension information changing means can execute an invalid lottery for determining whether or not to invalidate the specific process by the extension control means according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images